2106358

GE Medical Systems
gemedical.com
Technical Publication
Direction 2106358-100 Revision 13
HiSpeed Advantage RP - 1.X and 2.X General System Service Manual
Copyright 1996, 1997, 1998, 2000 & 2002 by General Electric Company, Inc. All rights reserved.
Operating Documentation
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS Rev. 8

THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY.
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL Direction 2106358100

ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SLO EXISTE EN INGLS.
WARNING
AVISO
D IF A CUSTOMERS SERVICE PROVIDER REQUIRES A LANGUAGE OTHER THAN ENGLISH, IT IS THE CUSTOMERS RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE TRANSLATION SERVICES. D DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS THIS SERVICE MANUAL HAS BEEN CONSULTED AND IS UNDERSTOOD. D FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO THE SERVICE PROVIDER, OPERATOR OR PATIENT FROM ELECTRIC SHOCK, MECHANICAL OR OTHER HAZARDS. CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE NEST DISPONIBLE QUEN ANGLAIS.
D SI ALGN PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS AJENO A GEMS SOLICITA UN IDIOMA QUE NO SEA EL INGLS, ES RESPONSABILIDAD DEL CLIENTE OFRECER UN SERVICIO DE TRADUCCIN. D NO SE DEBER DAR SERVICIO TCNICO AL EQUIPO, SIN HABER CONSULTADO Y COMPRENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO. D LA NO OBSERVANCIA DEL PRESENTE AVISO PUEDE DAR LUGAR A QUE EL PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS, EL OPERADOR O EL PACIENTE SUFRAN LESIONES PROVOCADAS POR CAUSAS ELCTRICAS, MECNICAS O DE OTRA NATURALEZA.
AVERTISSEMENT
ATENO
ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTNCIA TCNICA S SE ENCONTRA DISPONVEL EM INGLS.
D SI LE TECHNICIEN DU CLIENT A BESOIN DE CE MANUEL DANS UNE AUTRE LANGUE QUE LANGLAIS, CEST AU CLIENT QUIL INCOMBE DE LE FAIRE TRADUIRE. D NE PAS TENTER DINTERVENTION SUR LES QUIPEMENTS TANT QUE LE MANUEL SERVICE NA PAS T CONSULT ET COMPRIS. D LE NON-RESPECT DE CET AVERTISSEMENT PEUT ENTRANER CHEZ LE TECHNICIEN, LOPRATEUR OU LE PATIENT DES BLESSURES DUES DES DANGERS LECTRIQUES, MCANIQUES OU AUTRES. DIESES KUNDENDIENSTHANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN ENGLISCHER SPRACHE.
D SE QUALQUER OUTRO SERVIO DE ASSISTNCIA TCNICA, QUE NO A GEMS, SOLICITAR ESTES MANUAIS NOUTRO IDIOMA, DA RESPONSABILIDADE DO CLIENTE FORNECER OS SERVIOS DE TRADUO. D NO TENTE REPARAR O EQUIPAMENTO SEM TER CONSULTADO E COMPREENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTNCIA TCNICA. D O NO CUMPRIMENTO DESTE AVISO PODE POR EM PERIGO A SEGURANA DO TCNICO, OPERADOR OU PACIENTE DEVIDO A CHOQUES ELTRICOS, MECNICOS OU OUTROS.
WARNUNG
AVVERTENZA
IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE DISPONIBILE SOLTANTO IN INGLESE.
D FALLS EIN FREMDER KUNDENDIENST EINE ANDERE SPRACHE BENTIGT, IST ES AUFGABE DES KUNDEN FR EINE ENTSPRECHENDE BERSETZUNG ZU SORGEN. D VERSUCHEN SIE NICHT, DAS GERT ZU REPARIEREN, BEVOR DIESES KUNDENDIENSTHANDBUCH NICHT ZU RATE GEZOGEN UND VERSTANDEN WURDE. D WIRD DIESE WARNUNG NICHT BEACHTET, SO KANN ES ZU VERLETZUNGEN DES KUNDENDIENSTTECHNIKERS, DES BEDIENERS ODER DES PATIENTEN DURCH ELEKTRISCHE SCHLGE, MECHANISCHE ODER SONSTIGE GEFAHREN KOMMEN.
D SE UN ADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE ESTERNO ALLA GEMS RICHIEDE IL MANUALE IN UNA LINGUA DIVERSA, IL CLIENTE TENUTO A PROVVEDERE DIRETTAMENTE ALLA TRADUZIONE. D SI PROCEDA ALLA MANUTENZIONE DELLAPPARECCHIATURA SOLO DOPO AVER CONSULTATO IL PRESENTE MANUALE ED AVERNE COMPRESO IL CONTENUTO. D NON TENERE CONTO DELLA PRESENTE AVVERTENZA POTREBBE FAR COMPIERE OPERAZIONI DA CUI DERIVINO LESIONI ALLADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE, ALLUTILIZZATORE ED AL PAZIENTE PER FOLGORAZIONE ELETTRICA, PER URTI MECCANICI OD ALTRI RISCHI.
03
GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS Rev. 8
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL Direction 2106358100
IMPORTANT! . . . X-RAY PROTECTION

X-ray equipment if not properly used may cause injury. Accordingly, the instructions herein contained should be thoroughly read and understood by everyone who will use the equipment before you attempt to place this equipment in operation. The General Electric Company, Medical Systems Group, will be glad to assist and cooperate in placing this equipment in use. Although this apparatus incorporates a high degree of protection against x-radiation other than the useful beam, no practical design of equipment can provide complete protection. Nor can any practical design compel the operator to take adequate precautions to prevent the possibility of any persons carelessly exposing themselves or others to radiation. It is important that everyone having anything to do with x-radiation be properly trained and fully acquainted with the recommendations of the National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements as published in NCRP Reports available from NCRP Publications, 7910 Woodmont Avenue, Room 1016, Bethesda, Maryland 20814, and of the International Commission on Radiation Protection, and take adequate steps to protect against injury. The equipment is sold with the understanding that the General Electric Company, Medical Systems Group, its agents, and representatives have no responsibility for injury or damage which may result from improper use of the equipment. Various protective material and devices are available. It is urged that such materials or devices be used.
CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT

All electrical installations that are preliminary to positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the equipment shall be performed by licensed electrical contractors. In addition, electrical feeds into the Power Distribution Unit shall be performed by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of electrical equipment, calibrations, and testing shall be performed by qualified GE Medical personnel. The products involved (and the accompanying electrical installations) are highly sophisticated, and special engineering competence is required. In performing all electrical work on these products, GE will use its own specially trained field engineers. All of GEs electrical work on these products will comply with the requirements of the applicable electrical codes. The purchaser of GE equipment shall only utilize qualified personnel (i.e., GEs field engineers, personnel of third-party service companies with equivalent training, or licensed electricians) to perform electrical servicing on the equipment.
DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION
All packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is apparent, have notation damage in shipment written on all copies of the freight or express bill before delivery is accepted or signed for by a General Electric representative or a hospital receiving agent. Whether noted or concealed, damage MUST be reported to the carrier immediately upon discovery, or in any event, within 14 days after receipt, and the contents and containers held for inspection by the carrier. A transportation company will not pay a claim for damage if an inspection is not requested within this 14 day period. Call Traffic and Transportation, Milwaukee, WI (414) 8273449 / 8*2853449 immediately after damage is found. At this time be ready to supply name of carrier, delivery date, consignee name, freight or express bill number, item damaged and extent of damage. Complete instructions regarding claim procedure are found in Section S of the Policy & Procedure Bulletins.
OMISSIONS & ERRORS

GE personnel, please use the GEMS CQA Process to report all omissions, errors, and defects in this 04 documentation. Customers, please contact your GE Sales or Service represenatives.
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100
IEC 60112 EMI/EMC Statement:
(CT HiSpeed Advantage System B7999EM)

Note: The GE CT HiSpeed Advantage system (Catalog Number B7999EM) has been tested and found to comply with emissions limits for a Class A Medical Device per IEC 60112. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a medical installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to both other medical devices and radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment is found to cause harmful interference (which may be determined by turning the equipment on and off), the user (or qualified Service Personnel) is encouraged to attempt to correct the problem by one or more of the following measure(s): reorient or relocate the affected device increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver power the equipment from a source different from that of the receiver consult the point of purchase of Service Representative for further suggestions
The Manufacturer is not responsible for any interference caused by using other than recommended interconnect cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the users authority to operate the equipment. Note: To comply with regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class A Medical Device, all interconnect cables to peripheral devices must be shielded and properly grounded. Use of cables not properly shielded and grounded may result in violation of Medical Device Directive and FCC regulations.
05
Notes:
06
HSA-RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100
REVISION HISTORY
REV 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 DATE December 15, 1993 September 26, 1994 February 25, 1995 May 1, 1995 June16, 1995 October18, 1995 June 10, 1996 August 15, 1996 February 10, 1997 September 1, 1997 September 15, 1998 August 4, 2000 November 17, 2000 September 19, 2002 Initial release. HSA 1.3 software features and new RP hardware. Hardware upgrades 2.0 IG Upgrade 2.1 HPDAS Upgrade, Document styles made electronic media compatible 2.2 SmartBeam Release 2.3 Release Software Features and Compact PDU (2113764) Hardware 1.5, 2.4 Release Software Features Update CQA 940120, 941190, 951999, 952001, 960126, 960207, 961550, 961882, 963416 & 931691 Load Rotor patch tape CQA 984141 PCN 199808 Added S/A Slipring CQA 1007468 CQA 1026214; SN T-1448 REASON FOR CHANGE
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

Page Number Title/Blank 03 to 06 07 to 0-8 09 to 010 011 to 014 015 016 to 018 019 to 031 0-31A to 031B 0-32 033 to 036 037 to 0-38 11 12 21 22 23 24 25 to 26 31 to 33 34 to 36 37 to 312 313 314 315 316 317 to 321 322 323 324 325 Revision Number Page Number 326 327 328 to 330 41 42 43 44 45 to 47 48 49 410 411 to 412 413 to 415 416 417 to 418 419 420 to 422 423 424 51 to 52 53 to 56 57 58 59 510 to 513 514 515 to 516 517 518 519 520 07 Revision Number 5 4 5 6 4 7 4 5 8 5 4 7 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 7 5 6 5 7 5 4 6 7 5 12 6 Page Number 61 62 63 64 65 to 66 71 to 72 81 to 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 to 810 811 812 to 813 814 815 to 817 818 819 to 821 822 823 to 824 91 to 94 95 to 98 99 910 to 918 919 to 920 921 to 931 932 Revision Number 6 5 6 5 4 5 5 4 5 6 4 6 5 4 6 5 4 5 7 5 4 5 8 5 8 5 4 8 9
13 8 13 8 9 8 9 8 13 8 9 13 5 6 5 7 5 7 5 7 5 8 4 7 4 8 7 5 4 5 4
HSA-RP GENERAL SYSTEM SER VICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358-100
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES -continuedPage Number 10-1 to 10-2 10-3 to 10-4 11-1 to 11-13 11-14 to 11-20 11-21 to 11-25 11-26 11-27 11-28 11-29 to 11-31 11-32 to 11-33 11-34 to 11-35 11-36 to 11-38 11-39 11-40 11-41 to 11-43 11-44 11-45 to 11-46 11-47 to 11-57 11-58 to 11-61 11-62 11-63 to 11-67 11-68 11-69 to 11-70 11-71 to 11-73 11-74 to 11-78 11-79 11-80 to 11-82 11-83 to 11-84 11-85 to 11-96 11-97 11-98 to 11-104 11-105 11-106 to 11-111 11-112 11-113 to 11-122 11-123 11-124 to 11-131 11-132 11-133 to 11-138 12-1 12-2 to 12-5 12-6 12-7 to 12-12 12-13 to 12-15 12-16 12-17 12-18 12-19 to 12-22 12-23 12-24 12-25 12-26 to 12-30 12-31 Revision Number 5 7 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 6 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 8 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 8 5 8 4 8 Page Number 12-32 12-33 to 12-34 12-35 to 12-36 12-37 to 12-41 12-42 to 12-43 12-44 12-45 12-46 12-47 to 12-50 12-51 12-52 12-53 12-54 to 12-57 12-58 to 12-59 12-60 12-61 to 12-62 12-63 to 12-64 12-65 12-66 to 12-67 12-68 12-69 12-70 to 12-71 12-72 to 12-73 12-74 to 12-7 5C 12-76 to 12-7 8 12-79 to 12-81 12-8 2 12-8 3 to 12-83A 12-84 to 12-86 12-8 7 12-88 12-89 to 12-93 12-94 12-95 12-96 to 12-97 12-98 to 12-99 12-100 12-101 12-102 12-103 12-104 to 12-105 12-106 12-107 to 12-109 12-110 to 12-111 12-112 to 12-113 12-114 to 12-115 12-116 12-117 to 12-118 12-118 to 12-119 12-120 to 12-121 12-122 to 12-123 12-124 12-125 to 12-127 Revision Number 5 4 5 4 5 4 8 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 8 4 5 11 11 4 11 11 5 6 4 5 6 4 5 7 6 5 4 5 13 4 8 5 4 5 13 10 4 5 4 5 4 Page Number
12-128 to 12-129 12-130 12-131 to 12-132 12-133 to 12-134 12-135 12-136 12-137 12-138 12-139 to 12-141 12-142 to 12-143 12-144 to 12-159 12-160 to 12-164 12-165 12-166 to 12-175 12-176 to 12-178 12-179 to 12-183 12-184 12-185 to 12-186 12-187 12-188 to 12-189 12-190 12-191 12-192 12-193 to 12-196 12-197 12-198 12-199 12-200 12-201 12-202 12-203 to 12-206 12-207 to 12-210 12-21 1 to 12-213 12-214 A-1 to A-15 A-16 to A-17 A-18 to A-19 A-20 A-21 to A-23 A-24 to A-25 A-26 to A-33 A-34 A-35 A-36 to A-47 A-48 to A-54 A-55 to A-56 A-57 A-58 B-1 to B-6
Revision Number
5 4 5 4 6 4 5 4 5 4 8 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 8 5 8 4 8 4 5 4 4 6 4 6 4 5 4 6 4 6 4 5 6 4 13
0-8
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 Customer Operating and Service Materials
11 12 13 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customer Documentation (Class A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customer Software (Class B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 11 12
CHAPTER 2 CT Diagnostics and Tools Menu Descriptions

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 Menu Function Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top Level Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Utilities Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CT Tools Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shell Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Tools Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 21 22 23 24 25 25
CHAPTER 3 CT Diagnostics And Tools Procedures

31 32 33 34 35 36 37 371 372 38 39 391 392 393 394 3941 3942 3943 3944 3945 3946 System Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Access the Diagnostic Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Run Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exposure Backup Timer Functional Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Xray Interlock Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generate XRay Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Access the Unix Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EZLog Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Access Service Notepad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Access CT Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Tool Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat Soak and Seasoning Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detector Slope Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Access DDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Run SmartScan DDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating XRay On Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stationary XRay On Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reconstruct DDC images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Other SmartScan Notes: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 32 33 33 37 39 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 322 323 324 327 329 329
CHAPTER 4 Table/Gantry Maintenance

41 42 43 44 45 46 Input (PDU) Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gantry Display Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Supply Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Encoder Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Axial Brake Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intercom Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 42 45 47 47 48
09
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 4 continued
47 471 472 473 474 48 49 410 4101 4102 4103 4104 41041 4105 4106 4107 4108 Alignment Light Position Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Axial Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Axial to Internal Axial Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coronal Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alignment Light Visualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency Stop Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Access CT Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mechanical Characterization Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gantry Tilt Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table Elevation Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cradle Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Collimator Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Collimator Exercises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hardware Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Characterization Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 49 49 49 49 410 411 412 414 415 417 418 418 420 421 422 424
CHAPTER 5 HV Subsystem Maintenance

51 52 521 522 523 524 5241 5242 5243 525 526 527 528 529 5210 53 54 Access CT Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generator Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kV Meter Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mA Meter Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Calseed Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrate HV Tank Feedback Resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anode and Cathode Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Total kV Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kV Meter Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Install New Tube Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto mA Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KV Rise and Fall Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verify Internal Scan Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Install HV Divider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remove the external HV Divider: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tube Usage Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change Tube Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 51 54 56 59 59 59 511 511 512 512 513 515 515 516 517 519
010
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 6 PDU Maintenance
61 62 621 63 64 PDU Safety Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDU Major Component Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDU 2133533 Area Designators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ground Bus Continuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line Transformer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 62 63 64 64
CHAPTER 7 DAS Maintenance

71 72 73 XRay Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DDC Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 71 72
CHAPTER 8 System Alignments

81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 891 892 810 811 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plane Of Rotation (POR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Beam On Window (BOW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Image Noise Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radial Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isocenter Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isocenter Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isocenter Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Update Configuration Files With New Isovalues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Update ScanHardware.cfg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Update INFO File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CBF and SAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CBF Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 82 85 89 810 815 815 821 822 822 823 823 823
CHAPTER 9 Software Load From Cold

91 92 93 94 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 95 96 97 971 972 973 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tape Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initial Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save System Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save System State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Suite Internet Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Optical Disk Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Magnetic Reel Tape Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Window Width/Level Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Batch Film Protocols: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shutdown the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PreInstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Boot the Host Load From Cold (HLFC) Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Partition and Label the Disk; Load OS and Applications (OC) . . . HiSpeed Advantage Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On Line Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Config Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 94 94 94 94 95 95 95 96 96 97 97 97 98 99 99 99
011
TABLE OF CONTENTS
98 981 982 983 99 910 9101 9102 9103 911 912 913 9131 9132 9133 914 9141 9142 9143 9144 9145 9146 9147 9148 915 916 917 918 919 9191 920 9201 9202 9203 9204 9205 921 9211 9212 9213 9214 9215 922 9221 9222 9223 9224 9225 9226 Tip Into the SBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Default passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tip command notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Login as genesis on OC: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network boot the SBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load SunOS and Applications on SBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Login as root on SBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load SunOS and CT Applications: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exit tip: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Patch Tape or Perform Workarounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start up the HiSpeed Advantage RP System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restore System Configuration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restore Window Width/Level Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restore Batch Film Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restore System Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load OC NonProprietary Diagnostics (HNS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network Configuration Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types of Network Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adoption of nonGenesis suites and hosts: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Run setAdoption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adopt MR Signa, PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adopt ID/NET II Hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adopt Genesis Hosts in Other Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adoption Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shutdown System Applications and Start Reconfiguration . . . . . Run reconfig on the SBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select Configuration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On Line Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the Suite ID (OC and SBC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the Hospital Name (OC only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reset the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the Patient Exam number (OC only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replace the High Speed Disk on the SBC (OC and SBC) . . . System Formats & Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the Timezone (OC and SBC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the Time Format, Date Format, or Date Separator (OC only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the Doctors Title (OC only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the Units for Patient Weight (OC only) . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the Optical Disk or Reel Tape number (OC only) . . . . Hardware Configuration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the Camera Configuration (OC only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the IP Refresh Rate (OC only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the Video Tape Interface (OC only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add/Remove a Printer (OC only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add New Tube Information (OC and SBC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the EDAS type (OC and SBC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 012 911 911 911 912 912 912 912 912 913 913 913 913 913 913 914 915 915 915 915 915 916 916 917 917 918 921 921 922 922 922 923 923 923 924 924 924 925 925 926 926 926 926 922 927 927 928 928 928 928
TABLE OF CONTENTS
923 9231 9232 9233 9234 9235 9236 924 925 926 Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the Internet Addresses (OC and SBC) . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the Suite Configuration (OC and SBC) . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the ACRNEMA Address (OC only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the Primary Archive Node (PAN) (OC only) . . . . . . . . Add/Remove a Second Ethernet Board on the OC (OC only) Add/Remove a Second Ethernet Board on an IC in the Suite (OC only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the System Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add/Remove Hosts for Image Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load the 8K rpm rotor patch tape. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 929 930 930 930 930 931 931 932 932 932
CHAPTER 10 Image Performance

101 102 103 104 105 106 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alpha Vector Cal Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QCAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Crosstalk Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Phantom Calibration CT# Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 101 102 103 103 104
CHAPTER 11 Switches, LEDs, and Jumper Settings

111 112 113 1131 114 1141 1142 1143 1144 1145 1146 1147 115 1151 1152 1153 116 1161 1162 1163 1164 117 1171 1172 1173 SCU switches, LEDs and jumper settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RP 2.X IG Subsystem Chassis Layout And Component Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCU Disk Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fujitsu Disk Drive SelfDiagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEP Board (G2) 46327036G2 & (G1) 46327036G1 . . . . . . . . . LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Powerup Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applications Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Points, LEDs, Jumpers and Switches 46264370G1 Cradle Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cradle Amplifier Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cradle Amplifier Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cradle Amplifier Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heurikon CPU Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heurikon CPU Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heurikon CPU Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration DIP Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46288170G1 Elevation/Tilt Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elevation/Tilt Amplifier Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elevation/Tilt Amplifier Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elevation/Tilt Amplifier Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 013 111 111 1113 1114 1115 1115 1116 1117 1117 1118 1118 1119 1120 1120 1120 1120 1122 1122 1122 1122 1122 1126 1126 1126 1126
TABLE OF CONTENTS
118 1181 1182 1183 119 1191 1192 1110 11101 11102 11103 1111 11111 11112 1112 11121 11122 11123 1113 11131 11132 11133 11134 1114 11141 11142 11143 1115 11151 11152 11153 1116 11161 11162 11163 1117 11171 11172 11173 1118 11181 11182 11183 11184 1119 11191 11192 11193 11194 46288856G1 Collimator Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Collimator Board Test Points (46288856G1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Collimator Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Collimator Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46321276G1 Collimator Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Collimator Board Test Points (46321276G1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Collimator Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2138293 CTVRC Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CTVRC Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CTVRC Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CTVRC Board Jumper and Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46288886G1 mA Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mA Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mA Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46321064G1 KV Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kV Control Board 46321064G1 Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kV Control Board 46321064G1 Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . kV Control Board 46321064G1 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46321198G1 KV Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kV Control Board 46321198G1 Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kV Control Board 46321198G1 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kV Control Board 46321198G1 Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . kV Control Board 46321198G1 Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46288512G1 Gentry I/O Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gentry I/O Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gentry I/O Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gentry I/O Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46264806G1 Axial Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Axial Control Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Axial Control Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Axial Control Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297475G1 SCOM Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCOM Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCOM Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCOM Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46288854G1 RCOM Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCOM Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCOM Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCOM Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46288778G1 Rot. Terminator Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating Terminator Board 46288778G1 Test Points . . . . . . . Rotating Terminator Board 46288778G1 Connectors . . . . . . . Rotating Terminator Board 46288778G1 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating Terminator Board 46288778G1 Switch Settings . . . 46321054G1 Rot. Terminator Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating Terminator Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating Terminator Board Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating Terminator Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating Terminator Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 014 1128 1128 1128 1128 1130 1130 1130 1132 1132 1132 1132 1134 1134 1135 1136 1136 1139 1139 1140 1140 1141 1141 1141 1142 1142 1143 1143 1144 1144 1145 1145 1147 1147 1147 1147 1152 1152 1152 1152 1157 1157 1157 1157 1157 1158 1158 1158 1158 1158
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1120 11201 11202 11203 11204 1121 11211 11212 11213 11214 1122 11221 11222 11223 11224 1123 11231 11232 11233 11234 1124 11241 11242 11243 11244 1125 11251 11252 11253 11254 1126 11261 11262 11263 1127 11271 11272 11273 1128 11281 11282 11283 46288776G1 Rot. Buffer Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating Buffer Board 46288776G1 Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating Buffer Board Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating Buffer Board 46288776G1 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating Buffer Board 46288776G1 Switch Settings . . . . . . . 46288774G1 Stat. Terminator Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stationary Terminator Board 46288774G1 Test Points . . . . . . Stationary Terminator Board (Old) Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stationary Terminator Board (OLD) LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stationary Terminator Board (OLD) Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . 46321058G1 Rot. Buffer Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating Buffer Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating Buffer Board Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating Buffer Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating Buffer Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46321052G1 Stat. Terminator Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stationary Terminator Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stationary Terminator Board Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stationary Terminator Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stationary Terminator Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46288772G1 Stat. Buffer Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stationary Buffer Board 46288772G1 Test Points . . . . . . . . . . Stationary Buffer Board Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stationary Buffer Board 46288772G1 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stationary Buffer Board 46288772G1 Switch Settings . . . . . . 46321056G1 Stationary Buffer Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stationary Buffer Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stationary Buffer Board Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stationary Buffer Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stationary Buffer Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46264756G1 Console Autovoice Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Console Autovoice Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Console Autovoice Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Console Autovoice Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46264888G1 Relay Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relay Control Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relay Control Board LEDS and Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relay Control Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46264884G1 DCRGS Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCRGS Control Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCRGS Control Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCRGS Control Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1160 1160 1160 1160 1160 1162 1162 1162 1162 1162 1163 1163 1163 1163 1163 1165 1165 1165 1165 1165 1167 1167 1167 1167 1167 1169 1169 1169 1169 1169 1171 1171 1171 1171 1172 1172 1173 1173 1175 1175 1175 1175
015
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1129 11291 11292 11293 1130 11301 11302 11303 1131 1132 1133 1134 1135 11351 11352 11353 1136 11361 11362 11363 1137 11371 11372 11373 1138 11381 11382 11383 1139 1140 11401 11402 11403 11404 1141 11411 11412 11413 11414 SCR Firing Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCR Firing Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCR Firing Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCR Firing Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46264368G1 ETC Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ETC Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ETC Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ETC Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Westamp Servo Amp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Westamp Servo Amp Internal Test Points (NonAccessible) . . . Westamp Servo Amp LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Westamp Servo Amp Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Axial Servo Amp Control Board Allen Bradley Servo Amp . . . . Axial Servo Amp Control Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switches Axial Servo Amp Control BoardAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Axial Interface BoardAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Axial Interface BoardAB Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Axial Interface BoardAB LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Axial Interface BoardAB Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zeus Remote Intercom X Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zeus Remote Intercom X Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zeus Remote Intercom X Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zeus Remote Intercom X Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . Interface Measurement Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface Measurement Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface Measurement Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface Measurement Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/2 Mag Tape Controller Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LM02 Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LMO2 Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LEDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEP Board 46327036G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEP Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEP Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEP Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEP Board Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1177 1177 1177 1177 1179 1179 1180 1180 1181 1181 1181 1181 1183 1183 1186 1186 1187 1187 1187 1187 1189 1189 1189 1189 1190 1190 1190 1190 1192 1193 1193 1193 1193 1193 1195 1195 1195 1196 1196
016
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1142 11421 11422 11423 1143 11431 11432 11433 11434 11435 11436 1144 11441 11442 11443 11444 11445 1145 11451 11452 11453 1146 11461 11462 11463 11464 11465 11466 11467 11468 11469 114610 114611 114612 1147 11471 1148 1149 11491 11492 11493 11494 11495 Ethernet Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ethernet Transceiver Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ethernet Transceiver LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ethernet Transceiver Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AP120 Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AP120 Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AP120 Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AP120 Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AP120 Board Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AP120 Board Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BPP Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BPP Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BPP Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BPP Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BPP Board Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BPP Board Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLA Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLA Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLA Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLA Board Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motorola MVME167 Board (SBC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motorola MVME167 Board (SBC) LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motorola MVME167 Board (SBC) Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . Internal Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motorola MVME167 Board (SBC) Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . EPROM Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing and Changing EPROM Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SBC EPROM Setup Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing and Changing the Self Test Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MVME167 (SBC Board) Masked Self Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing and Changing the Network I/O Teach (NIOT) Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NIOT Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motorola MVME167 Board (SBC) Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . Motorola MVME166 Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motorola MVME166 Board Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scan Chassis Backplane Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RP 1.x Scan Chassis Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backplane Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backplane LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backplane Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backplane Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backplane Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1197 1197 1197 1198 1199 1199 1199 1199 1199 1199 11100 11102 11102 11102 11102 11102 11103 11104 11104 11104 11104 11106 11106 11106 11107 11107 11108 11108 11109 11112 11112 11112 11113 11113 11115 11115 11117 11118 11118 11118 11118 11118 11118
017
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1150 1151 1152 11521 11522 11523 11524 11525 11526 1153 1154 11541 11542 11543 11544 11545 11546 1155 11551 11552 11553 11554 11555 11556 11557 11558 11559 115510 RP & RPS Scan Chassis Power Supply Jumpers and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SBC Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HSDC Controller Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HSDC Controller Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HSDC Controller Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HSDC Controller Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HSDC Controller Board Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HSDC Controller Board Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scan Chassis Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ST3390 LSD Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ST3390 LSD Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ST3390 LSD LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ST3390 LSD Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ST3390 LSD Drive Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ST3390 LSD Drive Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IPI High Speed Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Speed Disk Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Speed Disk LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Speed Disk Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Speed Disk LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Speed Disk Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Speed Disk Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Speed Disk Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I/O Board Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Board Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11121 11123 11124 11124 11124 11124 11124 11124 11124 11128 11129 11129 11129 11129 11129 11129 11129 11131 11131 11131 11132 11132 11132 11132 11132 11132 11133 11133
CHAPTER 12 Replacement Procedures

121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 Computer 46282067P54 1/2 Mag Tape Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46269601P1 Computer Active Scsi Terminator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46282067P37 Computer 16 MB Circuit Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46307090P1 Computer 1600 Watt PS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46282067P38 Computer 32 MB Circuit Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46282067P54 9 Track Mag Tape Controller (Optional) . . . . . . . . 46307090P24 Computer Backplane Circuit Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46307090P29 Computer I/O Cable, SCSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46307090P29 GAI Serial Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 122 122 123 124 125 126 126 126
018
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1210 1211 1212 1213 1214 1215 1216 1217 1218 1219 1220 1221 1222 1223 1224 1225 1226 1227 1228 1229 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 1240 1241 1242 1243 1244 1245 1246 1247 46301975P1 CIPRICO Controller Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46282067P31 CPU Circuit Bd, Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46282067P34 GAI Circuit Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46321280G1 GBM Circuit Bd (New Style) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46282067P35 GFB Circuit Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46282067P36 GIP Circuit Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296604P1 Computer Second Ethernet Circuit Bd . . . . . . . . . . 46306519P1 DAT Tape Drive (5.25 inch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46306519P2 DAT Tape Drive (3.5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46306519P2 DAT Drive (3.5 inch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46307090P12 Computer DC Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46307090P23 Computer Fan in Rack Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46515270 LMO2 (3D Renderer) Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46320144G1 Motorola MVME166GE Board (OC CPU) . . . . . . . 46269587P1 Mounting ST1980N Dual Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46307575P1 Pioneer DDU7001 Rewritable, MOD . . . . . . . . . . 46307575P4 Pioneer DEUH7101 Rewritable, MOD . . . . . . . . . 46282067P34 GAI Circuit Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46307090P17 GBM Circuit Bd (Old Style) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46282067P35 GFB Circuit Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46282067P36 GIP Circuit Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CG29515270 LMO2 Bd (Mother & Daughter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46307090P31 Power Indicator and Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46307636G1 Cable, SCSI Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46328012P1 Cable, SCSI Ribbon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2101566 Cable, SCSI Ribbon (NEW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46307681P1 SCSI Tray Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46269587P1 Seagate ST1980N Magnetic Disk Drive . . . . . . . . 46282067P53 Second Ethernet Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46307090P30 Serial I/0 Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296604P1 VME Ethernet 3207 Hawk Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46301975P1 VME, SCSI Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46301976P1 Wren V Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Console 46287766P1 18 Button Rubber Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46287394P1 8 Button Rubber Keypad, IC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46282921P1 8 Button Rubber Keypad, OC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46287429P1 8 Ohm, 6 Watt Speaker, OC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46282885P1 A/N Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 127 128 129 1210 1211 1211 1212 1214 1216 1218 1218 1219 1220 1221 1221 1223 1226 1227 1228 1229 1229 1230 1230 1230 1230 1231 1232 1233 1233 1234 1235 1235 1237 1237 1238 1238 1239
019
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1248 1249 1250 1251 1252 1253 1254 1255 1256 1257 1258 1259 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 1265 1266 1267 1268 1269 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 1275 1276 1277 1278 1279 1280 1281 1282 1283 1284 1285 1286 1287 1288 46264756G5 Autovoice Bd, OC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46271382P6 Circuit Breaker (1 Pole, 15A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46271382P15 Circuit Breaker (1 Pole, 20A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46271382P3 Circuit Breaker (2 Pole, 20A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46271382P26 Circuit Breaker (4 Pole, 30A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46301520P1 Console PS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46307619P1 Emergency Stop Button, OC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46287759P1 Emergency Stop Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46301046P1 Encoder Assm, Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46282986P1 Encoder Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46264380G7 Console GCP Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46282884P1 Image Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46317878G1 Intercom Pot Assm, OC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46320682G1 Microphone OC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46264508G1 IP Keypad Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46301195G2 Security Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46264510G1 System Keypad Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2119588 Touch Screen Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46282936P1 Trackball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46288872G1 Video Relay Circuit Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46282884P3 Remote Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gantry (w/EDAS) Gantry Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46198495P1 Drive Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296058G1 Drive Belt Idler Pulley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46136334P23 F/C interlock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46220234P3 Fan, OBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46321246G1 RPSCOM Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46220234P3 Fan, STC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46183027P120 Filter Bd, EDAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46183027P128 Filter Bd, Reduced Gain EDAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297335P2 Filter, Pwr L, OBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297335P2 Filter, Pwr L, STC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46241601G2 Flex Circuit Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296868G1 G1 Front Cover Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46327207G1 Front Cover Assm (G3 Gantry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296870G1 Top Lens Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296869G1 Side Lens Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46288938G1 Front Cover Mic Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297488P1 Front Cover Microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46170021P79 Fuse (30A, 700V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45435967 Gate Drive /Filter Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1239 1240 1240 1241 1241 1241 1242 1242 1243 1243 1244 1245 1246 1246 1247 1247 1247 1248 1249 1249 1250 1250 1250 1251 1252 1252 1253 1253 1253 1254 1255 1255 1255 1256 1256 1256 1256 1256 1256 1257 1257
020
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1289 1290 1291 1292 1293 1294 1295 1296 1297 1298 1299 12100 12101 12102 12103 12104 12105 12106 12107 12108 12109 12110 12111 12112 12113 12114 12115 12116 12117 12118 12119 12120 12121 12122 12123 12124 12125 12126 12127 12128 12129 12130 46170021P52 Fuse, Collimator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46170021P52 Fuse (DAS) 3A, 250V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46170021P30 Fuse (DAS) 2A, 350V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46170021P15 Fuse, Filament Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46170021P52 Fuse (3A 120V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46170021P52 & 46170021P74 Fuse, Detector Heater . . . . . . 46170021P30 & 46170021P52 Fuse, (DAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46170021P15 & 46170021P52 Filament Power assm Fuse . . 46170021P74 Fuse, Tube Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296209P1 Counterbalancing Gas Spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46264958G1 Gantry Display Daughterboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46264896G1 Gantry Display Motherboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46278120P1 Gear Reducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297428P1 Grounding Strap, Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296377P1 Heurikon Bd, OBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296377P1 Heurikon Bd, STC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46195120G16 HV Anode Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46195120G16 HV Cathode Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46288512G1 I/O Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296516G1 Indexer Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46288766G1 Intercom Circuit Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54358P25 Inverter Fuse (120VAC), Anode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54358P25 Inverter Fuse (120VAC), Cathode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54367P50 Inverter Fuse (550VDC), Anode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54367P50 Inverter Fuse (550VDC), Cathode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54358P18 Inverter Fuse (600V), Anode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54358P18 Inverter Fuse (600V), Cathode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46321064G1 kV Circuit Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46321198G1 kV Circuit Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46196464P1 Lead Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296938G1 G1 Left Side Cover Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46327202G1 Left Side Cover Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46288886G1 mA Circuit Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296263P1 Micro Stepper Drive (Aperture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296080G1 OBC Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46264660G1 OBC Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297603G1 OBC Thermistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296317P1 OBCSTC PS, OBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296317P1 OBCSTC PS, STC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46264832P1 SCALAN Board, STC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297837G1 Power Brush Block Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46183027P95 Power Filter Assy, EDAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1257 1257 1257 1258 1258 1259 1259 1259 1260 1260 1262 1263 1263 1264 1264 1264 1265 1266 1267 1268 1268 1268 1268 1269 1269 1269 1269 1269 1270 1270 1270 1270 1270 1271 1271 1271 1272 1273 1273 1274 1274 1275
021
TABLE OF CONTENTS
12131 12132 12133 12134 12135 12136 12137 12138 12139 12140 12141 12142 12143 12144 12145 12146 12147 12148 12149 12150 12151 12152 12153 12154 12155 12156 12157 12158 12159 12160 12161 12162 12163 12164 12165 12166 12167 12168 12169 12170 12171 12172 46183027P91 Processor Bd, EDAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46288308G1 Printed wire assembly, Laser Control . . . . . . . . . . 46321058G1 Rotating Buffer Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46288776G1 Rotating Buffer Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46321054G1 Rotating Terminator Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46264702G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46321056G1 Stationary Buffer Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46288762G1 Stationary Buffer Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46321052G1 Stationary Terminator Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46264700G1 RCOM Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296898G1 G1 Rear Cover Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46327212G1 Rear Cover Assm (G3 Gantry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46229342P1 Rear Cover Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46288938G1 Rear Cover Mic Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297488P1 Rear Microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297445P1 Ribbon Cable, OBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296937G1 G1 Right Side Cover Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46327201G1 Right Side Cover Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297291G1 Rotating Harness, Gantry (For 12V Laser) . . . . . . 2100664 Rotating Harness, Gantry (For 5V Laser) . . . . . . . . . . 46327086G1 RPSCOM to Gantry Bulkhead, 75 Ohms . . . . . . . 46296993G1 Scan Switch Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2101967 Scan Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297475G1 SCOM Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297839G1 Signal Brush Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297840G1 Slip Ring Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46313423G1 Solid State (SS) Detector Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46241600G806 SS Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46241600G6 SS Detector Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297092G1 Stationary AC Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296748G1 Stationary Harness, Gantry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296664P1 Stepper Motor Drive (Filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46136343P12 Switch, STC Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46221880P24 Terminal Strip, Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46287264P1 Terminator, STC Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296145P1 Tilt Chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296363P1 Tilt Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46183027P90 Timing Bd, EDAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46220247P2 Top Cover Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297738P1 Top Cover Gas Spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297797G1 Top Cover Thermostat Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296936G1 Top Cover Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1275 1275 1276 1276 1276 1277 1277 1278 1278 1278 1279 1279 1279 1279 1279 1280 1280 1280 1280 1280 1281 1281 1281 1282 1282 1283 1285 1286 1287 1288 1288 1288 1289 1289 1289 1289 1289 1290 1290 1291 1293 1293
022
TABLE OF CONTENTS
12173 12174 12175 12176 12177 12178 12179 12180 12181 12182 12183 12184 12185 12186 12187 12188 12189 12190 12191 12192 12193 12194 12195 12196 12197 12198 12199 12200 12201 12202 12203 12204 12205 12206 12207 12208 12209 12210 12211 12212 12213 12214 46297396P1 Tube Cooling Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46309500G1 XRay Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297460P1 Tube Studs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296701P1 38V Filament Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46183027P111 ADC Bd, EDAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46183027P129 ADC Bd, Reduced Gain EDAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45561210 Anode (Transformer Tank) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45435960 Anode Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297703P1 Anode Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45554264 & 2100553 Anode Xfmr Tank Meas. Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297875P1 Axial Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46264806G1 Axial Control Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296158P1 Axial Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296320G1 Axial Motor Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296854P1 Axial Motor Encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296157P1 Axial Motor Pulley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46186462G1 Azimuth Circuit Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46264802G1 Backplane, STC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46183027P112 BackplaneLeft, EDAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46183027P94 BackplaneRight, EDAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296564G1 Base Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296948G1 Cable, AC/Pwr, EDAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46183027P104 Cable, Analog, EDAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296943G1 Cable, Anode AC Pwr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296947G1 Cable, Axial Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296942G1 Cable, Cathode AC Pwr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296949G1 Cable, DC/Pwr, EDAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46183027P103 Cable, Digital, EDAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46266838G1 Cable, Ribbon, EDAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46183027P89 Cal/Aux Bd, EDAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53214P40 Capacitor, Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45561211 Cathode (Transformer Tank) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45435962 Cathode Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297703P2 Cathode Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45554264 & 2100553 Cathode Xfrmr Tank Meas Bd . . . . . . . . . . 46296300G1 Collimator Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46288856G1 Collimator Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46321276G1 Collimator Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46321276G1 Collimator II Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46251198P37 Collimator PS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296885P1 Communication PS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46288858G1 CTVRC Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1293 1294 12101 12101 12102 12102 12102 12103 12104 12105 12105 12106 12106 12108 12109 12110 12110 12111 12111 12111 12112 12112 12112 12112 12112 12113 12113 12113 12113 12114 12114 12114 12115 12116 12117 12117 12119 12119 12119 12120 12120 12121
023
TABLE OF CONTENTS
12215 12216 12217 12218 12219 12220 12221 12222 12223 12224 12225 12226 12227 12228 12229 12230 12231 12232 12233 12234 12235 12236 12237 12238 12239 12240 12241 12242 12243 12244 12245 12246 12247 12248 12249 12250 12251 12252 12253 12254 12255 45435961 CTVRC Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46136343P12 DAS Pwr Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46251198P30 DC PS (EDAS), 15V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46251198P26 DC PS (EDAS), 5V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297104P1 Detector Heater PS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46188067P1 Detector Heater Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297301G3 Diode Laser, Bottom (12V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46327058G3 Diode Laser, Bottom (5V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297301G2 Diode Laser, LS (12V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46327058G2 Diode Laser, LS (5V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297301G1 Diode Laser, RS (12V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46327058G1 Diode Laser, RS (5V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296341G1 Gantry Display Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Distribution Unit (PDU) 46170026P14 32kVA Xfmr, CR1CR3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46170026P17 32kVA Xfmr, CR4CR6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296221P15 32kVA Xfmr, F10F12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46170021P85 32kVA Xfmr, F13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46313346P1 32kVA Xfmr, F14F16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46170021P44 32kVA Xfmr, F17F19 (Top Board) . . . . . . . . . . . 46170021P96 32kVA Xfmr, F20, F21 (Top Board) . . . . . . . . . . . 46170021P86 32kVA Xfmr, F4F6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46170021P84 32kVA Xfmr, F7F9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45433453 AC Inductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296136P1 Westamp Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297910P1 Allen Bradley Servo Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46288748G1 Axial Drive Filter Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54261P92 Backup Contactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46229598P3 Blue Switch, PDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53214P33 Capacitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296409P1 Capacitor 6100 mF 350V electrolytic . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296206G1 Ckt Bkr Assm (West AMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296206G1 Circuit Breaker Assm (West AMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46327109G1 Ckt Bkr Assm (Allen Bradley) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46170021P29 Ckt Bkr Assm, F1F3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297069P1 Ckt Bkr Assm, F4F6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46221905P2 Ckt Breaker: 15A 1P CB16, 18, 20, 21, 22 . . . . . . 46221905P21 Ckt Breaker: 15 Amp 2P, CB14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46221905P3 Ckt Breaker: 20 Amp 1P CB19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46221905P32 Ckt Breaker: 25 Amp 3P CB1,6,11 . . . . . . . . . . . . 46221905P32 Ckt Breaker: 25 Amp 3P CB1,6,11,23 . . . . . . . . . 46221905P35 Ckt Breaker: 40 Amp 3P CB23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12121 12122 12122 12123 12124 12125 12125 12126 12126 12127 12127 12128 12128 12129 12129 12129 12129 12129 12130 12130 12130 12130 12130 12130 12131 12131 12131 12132 12132 12132 12132 12132 12132 12133 12133 12133 12133 12133 12134 12134 12134
024
TABLE OF CONTENTS
12256 12257 12258 12259 12260 12261 12262 12263 12264 12265 12266 12267 12268 12269 12270 12271 12272 12273 12274 12275 12276 12277 12278 12279 12280 12281 12282 12283 12284 12285 12286 12287 12288 12289 12290 12291 12292 12293 12294 12295 12296 46296138P1 Contactor, PDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297456P1 FRU 1 PDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45433455 DC Inductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45433770 DCRGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45433754 DCRGS Control Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296407G1 Display Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297803P1 Fan Assm, PDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46203134P5 Filter, PDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54367P40 Fuse, DCRGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46229598P1 Green Switch, PDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297479G1 Guard Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297039G1 Harness, Ckt Breaker Assm, External . . . . . . . . . . 46297041G1 Harness, Ckt Breaker Assm, Internal . . . . . . . . . . 46296127P1 Indicator, Elapsed Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46327154P1 Inductor, Servo Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46229342P2 Lamp Assm, 125V, Green, DS1DS6 . . . . . . . . . . 46229342P2 Lamp Panel Assm, DS1DS4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297594G1 Loopback Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46222200P1 O/L Relay Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45433456 Output Current Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46264888G1 PWA Relay Ctrl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46278446P1 Receptacle, 15A, 125VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46186852P2 Relay Contactor, Axial Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46327087P1 Relay, Axial Drive Current Sensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46194361P17 Rem Box Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53396P01 Resistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46221454P77 Resistor, 25 Ohm, 50W, 1%, Wirewound . . . . . . 46296415P2 Resistor, 3 Ohm, 300W, 10%, Ribwound . . . . . . . 45433454 SCR Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297574G1 Servo Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46170021P74 Servo Assm, 10A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46170021P94 Servo Assm, 3A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46170021P14 Filter PWB F1F2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scan Reconstruction Unit (SRU) 46313053G1 24V Resistor Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46241971P72 5V PS (STCTC AP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46241971P26 5V PS (STCT AP), 150A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46241971P68 AP Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296817P1 BNC 50Ohm Terminator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296816P2 BNC TConnector, SRU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297711G1 Cable, 3/60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296451G3 Cable, 3/60 SCSI to Wren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12134 12134 12135 12135 12136 12136 12136 12136 12136 12136 12137 12137 12137 12137 12137 12137 12138 12138 12138 12138 12138 12139 12139 12139 12139 12140 12140 12140 12140 12141 12141 12141 12141 12141 12141 12141 12142 12142 12142 12142 12143
025
TABLE OF CONTENTS
12297 12298 12299 12300 12301 12302 12303 12304 12305 12306 12307 12308 12309 12310 12311 12312 12313 12314 12315 12316 12317 12318 12319 12320 12321 12322 12323 12324 12325 12326 12327 12328 12329 12330 12331 12332 12333 12334 12335 12336 12337 12338 46296454G5 Cable, 60 Coaxial BNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296862G1 Cable, Backplane to PS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46237686G2 Cable, DASIOP to Gantry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297096G1 Cable, PS to 098 Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46313027G1 Fan Assm for Scan Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296532P1 Front Panel Maxi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46313030G1 High Speed Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296528G1 Maxi Bd Assm w/ 3/60 plus LAN Bd. . . . . . . . . . . 46264834P1 MaxiHIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46264890G1 MaxiHIB Adapter Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297673G4 MaxiHIB to HCHIOP Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46278722G1 Power CableSRU Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296841G1 Power Distribution CableScan Chassis . . . . . . . 46296840G1 PS to Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297098G1 Sabre Interconnect to 096 and 097 harnesses . . 46297097G1 Sabre Interconnect to 098 Harness . . . . . . . . . . . 46297043G2 Sabre to Xylogics Cable, 26pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297043G1 Sabre to Xylogics Cable, 60pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46264832P1 SCALAN Bd, SBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296183P1 Scan Chassis +5, 12, +24V PS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296186P1 Scan Chassis 5V PS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296799G1 Scan Chassis Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297244G1 Scan Chassis Assm, complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46264830G1 Scan Chassis Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46229909P1 Scan Chassis Boxer Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46221328P13 Scan Chassis Pwr Switch/Ckt Bkr . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297857G1 ST 1480 Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46237328P67 STCT 4MB Main Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46237328P69 STCT 512kB Public Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46241971P12 STCT BPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46241971P10 STCT Cache . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46241971P21 STCT Chassis with boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46237328P54 STCT Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46241971P14 STCT MMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46237328P53 STCT Slave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46241971P11 STCT SMP MUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46237328P57 STCT/STCTC ACP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46237328P58 STCT/STCTC ACU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46237328P62 STCT/STCTC BP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46278330P11 STCT/STCTC DASIOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46278330P9 STCT/STCTC HCHIOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46237328P55 STCT/STCTC IOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12143 12143 12143 12143 12144 12144 12144 12159 12160 12161 12162 12162 12162 12162 12162 12163 12163 12163 12163 12164 12165 12165 12165 12165 12166 12167 12167 12168 12168 12168 12168 12168 12168 12169 12169 12169 12169 12169 12170 12170 12170 12170
026
TABLE OF CONTENTS
12339 12340 12341 12342 12343 12344 12345 12346 12347 12348 12349 12350 12351 12352 12353 12354 12355 12356 12357 12358 12359 12360 12361 12362 12363 12364 12365 12366 12367 12368 12369 12370 12371 12372 12373 12374 12375 12376 12377 12378 12379 46278330P4 STCTC 4MB Main Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46278330P7 STCTC BPCIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46278330P2 STCTC MSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46278330P6 STCTC Scache . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297123G1 STCT to 3/60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46266700P3 Wren IV Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297694G1 Xylogics Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 46208718P1 1 1/4 dia. Clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46208718P12 1 dia. Clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46208718P5 1/2 dia. Clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46208718P8 11/16 dia. Clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46208718P9 3/4 dia. Clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46208718P2 5/16 dia. Clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46208718P11 7/8 dia. Clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297093P1 AC/DC Power Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296592P1 Actuator Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296561P10 Actuator Limit Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296561P11 Actuator Magnet Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2100671 Actuator Magnet Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296561P1 Actuator, Table Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2103043 Actuator, Table Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46221532P18 Belt, Cradle Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46170047P7 Belt, Elevation Encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297332P1 BNC, TConnector, 50 Ohm, Table . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297350P1 Bumper Disk, Upper Pin Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46221597P2 Bumper, Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297253P1 Cable Support, ETC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297576P1 Cal Pin, Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46208580P18 Cam Follower, Large, Carriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46208580P19 Cam Follower, Small, Carriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296232G1 Carriage Assm, Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297338P1 Clamp, Large ushape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297648P1 Clamp, Small ushape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297722P1 Connector, Tape Switch, Female . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297721P1 Connector, Tape Switch, Male . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297420G1 Cradle Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46264370G1 Cradle Drive Amp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296235G1 Cradle Drive Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296594P1 Cradle Drive Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46288226G1 Cradle Release Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46220277P11 ERing, Lower Pin Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12170 12171 12171 12171 12171 12171 12172 12173 12173 12173 12173 12173 12174 12174 12174 12174 12175 12175 12176 12176 12177 12178 12178 12178 12179 12179 12179 12179 12179 12179 12179 12179 12179 12180 12180 12180 12180 12180 12181 12181 12181
027
TABLE OF CONTENTS
12380 12381 12382 12383 12384 12385 12386 12387 12388 12389 12390 12391 12392 12393 12394 12395 12396 12397 12398 12399 12400 12401 12402 12403 12404 12405 12406 12407 12408 12409 12410 12411 12412 12413 12414 12415 12416 12417 12418 12419 12420 12421 46220277P11 ERing, Table Gas Spring Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297432P1 EStop Button, Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46288410G1 EStop Switch, Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46278446P1 Electrical Outlet, Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296633G1 Elevation Encoder Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46288170G1 Elevation/Tilt Amp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296854P1 Encoder, Table Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46264368G1 ETC Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296788G1 ETC Chassis Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46229455P1 Fan, Table ETC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297664P1 Filler Cover Spring, Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297896G1 Fixed Dzus Fastener Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297895G1 Floating Dzus Fastener Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296129G1 Footswitch Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296821P1 Front End Cover, Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46170021P15 Fuse, Servo Amps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296891P1 Gas Spring, Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297155G2 Ground Strap, Long . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297155G1 Ground Strap, Short . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46218193P1 Guide Wheel, Carriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297448P1 Handle Extension, Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297088G1 Harness, Power Assm, Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296377P1 Heurikon Bd, ETC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297678P1 Hinge, Actuator Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46136334P23 Home Int. Switch, Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296233G1 Home Latch Assm, Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46136334P57 Int. Matrix Switch, Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297687P1 Intercom Speaker, Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297805G1 Jumper Plug, Tape Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297431G1 Jumper, Table Rear Cover Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46221914P3 Lamp Assm, Table PS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46327096G2 Left Base Cover, Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296909G1 Left Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296827P1 Left Filler Cover, Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297698P1 Leg Tape Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46170012P67 Locknut, Upper Pin Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46170012P81 Locknut, Upper Pin Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296234G1 Long Encoder Assm, Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46136334P23 Long. Limit Switch, Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46278310P1 Lower Pin, Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296991G1 Main Harness, Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46278575P1 Motor, Cradle Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12181 12181 12181 12182 12182 12182 12183 12183 12184 12184 12184 12184 12184 12184 12184 12184 12185 12185 12185 12185 12186 12186 12186 12186 12186 12187 12187 12188 12188 12188 12188 12188 12189 12189 12189 12189 12189 12189 12191 12191 12191 12191
028
TABLE OF CONTENTS
12422 12423 12424 12425 12426 12427 12428 12429 12430 12431 12432 12433 12434 12435 12436 12437 12438 12439 12440 12441 12442 12443 12444 12445 12446 12447 12448 12449 12450 12451 12452 12453 12454 12455 12456 12457 12458 12459 12460 12461 12462 46297436P1 Pin, Table Gas Spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297552P1 Pivot Tube, Table Side Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297036G2 Pot Assm, Long. Encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296791G1 Power Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297117G1 Power Harness, Cradle Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296433G1 Power Harness, Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296317P1 Quad Output PS, Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297430G1 Rear Cover Assm, Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46170053P11 Relay, Elevation & Cradle Amps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46170053P13 Relay, Tape Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46327096G1 Right Base Cover, Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296909G2 Right Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296827P2 Right Filler Cover, Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297894G1 Roller Kit, Actuator cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46264832P1 SCALAN Bd, ETC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297059G1 Servo Amp Assm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46170024P4 Shoulder Screw, Encdr. Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296584P1 Side Panel, LF, Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296578P1 Side Panel, LR, Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296583P1 Side Panel, RF, Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296577P1 Side Panel, RR, Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297118G1 Signal Harness, Cradle Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296972G1 Solenoid Assm, Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296946P1 Spacer, Table Encoder Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296771P1 Spacer, Upper Pin Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46170490P20 Spring, Actuator Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46170490P54 Spring, Home Latch Assm, Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46327097G2 Table Cover, Left Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46327097G1 Table Cover, Right Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296316P1 Table Drive PS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297698P2 Tape Switch, Table Side Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296770P1 Upper Pin, Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46183027P92 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scan Control Unit (SCU) 46297907P14 High Speed Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297907P13 HSDC Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46269587P1 Local System Disk (LSD) Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297907P16 RP VME Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297907P12 AP120 Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46327036G1 FEP Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297907P11 BPP Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297907P19 SBC Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12192 12192 12192 12192 12192 12192 12193 12193 12193 12193 12193 12193 12194 12194 12194 12194 12194 12195 12195 12195 12196 12196 12196 12196 12196 12196 12196 12197 12197 12197 12198 12198 12198 12198 12200 12201 12202 12203 12204 12205 12205
029
TABLE OF CONTENTS
12463 12464 12465 12466 12467 12468 12469 12470 12471 12472 12473 12474 12475 12476 12477 12478 12479 12480 12481 12482 12483 12484 12485 12486 12487 12488 12489 12490 12491 12492 12493 12494 12495 12496 12497 12498 12499 12500 12501 12502 46327135P1 CLA Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297907P17 Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297907P29 RP Chassis Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297907P2 Ethernet Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296861G8 Cable, RPJ5 to XCVR#2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296861G9 Cable, RPJ6 to XCVR#1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296454G10 Cable, XCVR#2 to XCVR#3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46327070G1 Cable, Serial RP J3 to OC GAI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297907P27 Cable, Xylogics to HSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46327100G1 Cable, Ethernet Board to Bulkhead . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297748G4 Cable, Gantry Bulkhead to RP Bulkhead . . . . . . . 46296861G11 Cable, OC to XCVR#2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296454G12 Cable, RP to ETC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297907P23 Cable, SCSI cable CPU to LSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297907P26 Cable, HSD Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297907P25 Cable, VME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296817P1 50 Ohm Terminator With Chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46313020P1 50 Ohm Terminator With Ground Lead . . . . . . . . . 46297907P30 Cable, RP Chassis Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46327071G1 Cable, Exposure Interlock RP to PDU . . . . . . . . . . 46297907P24 LSD Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297907P10 Empty Scan Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46297907P18 Scan Chassis Power Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HPDAS & Power Supplies 2119740 & 2107544 HPDAS assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12206 12207 12207 12207 12208 12208 12208 12208 12208 12209 12209 12209 12209 12209 12210 12210 12210 12210 12210 12211 12211 12194 12213 12213
2102234 Converter Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12213 21075442 Digital Controller Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12213 21075443 Analog Controller Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12213 21075444 Left Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12213 21075445 Right Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12213 21075446 Interchassis Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12214 21075447 Filter Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12214 21075448 Dog House Cable #1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12214
21075449 Dog House Cable #2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210754410 Center Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2108473 Left Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2108472 Right Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46251198P41 6v Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46251198P42 5v/15v Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2126738 AC Power Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2119747 DC Power Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12214 12214 12214 12214 12214 12214 12214 12214
030
TABLE OF CONTENTS
APPENDIX: Installation
A11 A111 A12 A121 A122 A123 A124 A13 A131 A132 A133 A134 A135 A136 A137 A138 A139 A1310 A14 A15 A16 A17 A171 A172 A18 A19 A110 A1101 A111 A112 A113 A114 A115 A116 A117 A118 A119 A120 A1201 A121 A122 A123 A124 A125 A1251 A1252 A126 Position Subsystems Position and Mount Subsystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table/Gantry Installation Without Floor Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PreInstallation Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required Common Tools and Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detailed Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Establish the Room Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drill the First Gantry Anchor Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Position the Gantry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Level the Gantry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Position the Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Level the Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tighten the Lock Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drill the Remaining Anchor Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redundant Anchor Hole Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Install the Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assemble and Install Gantry Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Install Gantry Mounted Table Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Install Table Footswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Distribution Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Position the CT Compact HVDC Power Distribution Unit (2133533) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Position the Power Distribution Unit (2113764) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scan Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Install Operator Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Install Phantom Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mount and Level Phantom Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gantry Base Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gantry Strip Down For Restricted Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power, Ground, Interconnect Cable Installation Cable Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Color Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OC Console and Computer Power and Ground Connections . . . OC Computer Power Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OC Console I/O Panel and Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OC Computer Panel and Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCU Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gantry Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verify DCRGS Jumper Location on CTVRC board . . . . . . . . . . Table and A7 Panel Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDU Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Ground Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Cable Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Option Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Install Option Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verify Installed Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Interconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 031 A1 A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 A3 A3 A3 A3 A4 A5 A6 A6 A7 A7 A8 A14 A14 A15 A16 A16 A16 A17 A18 A19 A19 A21 A21 A24 A25 A26 A27 A28 A30 A32 A33 A34 A35 A36 A48 A50 A56 A56 A56 A57
HSA-RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358-100
TABLE OF CONTENTS
APPENDIX B: Torque
Section 1.0 Section 2.0 Section 3.0 Section 4.0 . Recommended Torque Wrench Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Torque Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque Formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque Wrench Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1 B-2 B-4 B-6
0-31A
This Page Intentionally Blank
0-31B
TABLE OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Illustration 21 Illustration 22 Illustration 23 Illustration 24 Illustration 25 Illustration 31 Illustration 32 Illustration 33 Illustration 34 Illustration 35 Illustration 36 Illustration 37 Illustration 38 Illustration 39 Illustration 310 Illustration 311 Illustration 312 Illustration 313 Illustration 314 Illustration 315 Illustration 316 Illustration 317 Illustration 318 Illustration 319 Illustration 320 Illustration 321 Illustration 322 Illustration 323 Illustration 324 Illustration 325 Illustration 326 Illustration 327 Illustration 328 Illustration 329 Illustration 41 Illustration 42 Illustration 43 Illustration 44 Top Level Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Utilities Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool Selections Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Tools Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Utilities Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diags Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backup Timer Diagnostic Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional Test Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional Test Menu (Backup Timer Test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional Test Results Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XRay Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XRay Interlock Functional Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XRay Interlock, XRay Functional Review Test Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generate XRay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generate XRay Functional Test Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XRay Functional Review Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XRay Functional Test Menu #1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XRay Functional Test Menu #2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shell Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unix Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EzLog Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Notepad Softkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service NotePad Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CT Tools Softkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools Selections Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat Soak & Seasoning Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Failure Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Data Collection Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mA Variation vs. Gantry Position for Rotating XRay On (XRay On Position 05) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mA Variation vs. Gantry Angle for Rotating XRay On (XRay On Position 455) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Run a Rotating XRay On Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mA Variations vs. Gantry Angle for Stationary XRay On (1 Sec. Scan Time, 1 Sec. Simulated Gantry Speed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Run a Stationary XRay On Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OBC, STC and Table Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296317P1/P2 OBC, STC & Bottom Table P.S. Top View . . . . . . . . . . . 46296317P3 OBC, STC & Bottom Table P.S. Top View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gantry Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 032 21 22 23 24 25 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 38 39 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 317 318 319 320 321 322 324 325 326 327 328 42 43 43 44
Illustration 45 Illustration 46 Illustration 47 Illustration 48 Illustration 49 Illustration 410 Illustration 411 Illustration 412 Illustration 413 Illustration 414 Illustration 415 Illustration 416 Illustration 417 Illustration 418 Illustration 419 Illustration 420 Illustration 51 Illustration 52 Illustration 53 Illustration 54 Illustration 55 Illustration 56 Illustration 57 Illustration 58 Illustration 59 Illustration 510 Illustration 61 Illustration 62 Illustration 81 Illustration 82 Illustration 83 Illustration 84 Illustration 85 Illustration 86 Illustration 87 Illustration 88 Illustration 89 CT Tools Softkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select Mechanical Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mechanical Characterization Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gantry Tilt Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table Elevation Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elevation Distance Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cradle Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Collimator Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Collimator Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hardware Reset Softkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Characterization Limits Softkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Characterization Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Values Softkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mechanical Characterization Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Log Softkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mechanical Characterization Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CT Tools Softkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select Generator Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generator Characterization Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generator Characterization Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read Meter Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Axial Drive Status and Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anode Tank Measurement Board & OBC Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rise and Fall Time Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HV Divider Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shell Softkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDU Area Designators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDU 2133533 Area Designators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . POR Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Beam On Window Film Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Install Rotational Alignment Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotational Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting/Adjustment Hardware (Detail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select Tube Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select Manual Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select Isocenter Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select Isocenter Align . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 419 419 420 421 422 423 423 424 424 51 52 53 54 55 56 58 514 516 517 62 63 83 86 811 813 814 818 818 819 819
033
Illustration 91 Illustration 92 Illustration 93 Illustration 94 Illustration 95 Illustration 96 Illustration 97 Illustration 98 Illustration 99 Illustration 101 Illustration 111 Illustration 112 Illustration 113 Illustration 114 Illustration 115 Illustration 116 Illustration 117 Illustration 118 Illustration 119 Illustration 1110 Illustration 1111 Illustration 1112 Illustration 1113 Illustration 1114 Illustration 1115 Illustration 1116 Illustration 1117 Illustration 1118 Illustration 1119 Illustration 1120 Illustration 1121 Illustration 1122 Illustration 1123 Illustration 1124 Illustration 1125 Illustration 1126 Illustration 1127 Illustration 1128 Illustration 1129 System Parameters Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Formats and Defaults Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hardware Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Parameters Reconfiguration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Formats And Defaults Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hardware Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network Configuration No Active Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network Configuration With Active Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibration Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IG Subsystem Chassis Front View (cover removed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IG Subsystem Chassis Rear View (cover removed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SBC (MVME1669u 68040 Stealth CPU LEDs and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . SBC Board (MVME1669u 68040 CPU) Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLA (MVME3769U Hawk Ethernet) LEDs and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLA Board (MVME3769U Hawk Ethernet) Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEP 46327036G2 (GEMS Front End Processor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEP Board (GEMS Front End Processor) Jumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IG (GEMS Image Generator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IG (GEMS Image Generator) Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IG Subsystem 5slot VME Backpanel (Front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IG Subsystem 5slot VME Backpanel Layout (Rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RP 2.X IG Subsystem HSSD (High Speed SCSI Disk) Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . RP 2.X IG Subsystem LSD (Local Fujitsu MI603S512 SCSI Disk) Jumpers RP 2.X IG Subsystem LSD (Local SCSI Disk) Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEP (G2) 46327036G2 & (G1) 46327036G1 Board Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46264370G1 Cradle Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296377G1 Heurikon CPU ETC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296377G1 Heurikon CPU STC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46296377G1 Heurikon CPU OBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46288170G1 Elevation/Tilt Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46288856G1 Collimator Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46321276G1 Collimator Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2138293 CTVRC Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46288886G1 mA Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46321064G1 kV Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46321198G1 kV Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46288512G1 Gentry I/O Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46264806G1 Axial Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 910 910 911 923 925 927 929 929 104 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1119 1121 1123 1124 1125 1127 1129 1131 1133 1135 1139 1142 1143 1146
034
Illustration 1130 Illustration 1131 Illustration 1132 Illustration 1133 Illustration 1134 Illustration 1135 Illustration 1136 Illustration 1137 Illustration 1138 Illustration 1139 Illustration 1140 Illustration 1141 Illustration 1142 Illustration 1143 Illustration 1144 Illustration 1145 Illustration 1146 Illustration 1147 Illustration 1148 Illustration 1149 Illustration 1150 Illustration 1151 Illustration 1152 Illustration 1153 Illustration 1154 Illustration 1155 Illustration 1156 Illustration 1157 Illustration 1158 Illustration 1159 Illustration 1160 Illustration 1161 Illustration 1162 Illustration 1163 Illustration 1164 Illustration 1165 Illustration 1166 Illustration 1167 Illustration 1168 Illustration 1169 46297475G1 SCOM Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46288854G1 RCOM Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46288778G1 Rot. Terminator Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46321054G1 Rot. Terminator Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46288776G1 Rot. Buffer Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46288774G1 Stat. Terminator Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46321058G1 Rot. Buffer Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46321052G1 Stationary Terminator Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46288772G1 Stationary Buffer Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46321056G1 Stationary Buffer Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46264756G1 Console Autovoice Bd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46264888G1 Relay Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46264884G1 DCRGS Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCR Firing Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46264368G1 ETC Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Westamp Servo Amp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Axial Interface BoardAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zeus Remote Intercom X Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface Measurement Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/2 Mag Tape Controller Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LM02 Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEP Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ethernet Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AP120 Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BPP Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLA Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motorola MVME167 Board (SBC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motorola MVME166 Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scan Chassis Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backplane, RP Original . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RP Scan Chassis Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RPS Scan Chassis Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/60 SBC Jumper Locations and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HSDC Controller Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Xylogics Disk Controller Switch and Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCSI Disk Drive Assembly in RP-S Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LSD (3390) Drive Switches and Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ST5660N Local SCSI Disk Jumpers and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IPI High Speed Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 035 1151 1156 1157 1159 1161 1162 1164 1166 1168 1170 1171 1174 1176 1178 1180 1182 1188 1189 1191 1192 1194 1196 1198 11101 11103 11105 11114 11116 11117 11119 11120 11121 11122 11123 11126 11127 11128 11130 11131 11134
Illustration 1170 Illustration 1171 Illustration 1172 Illustration 1173 Illustration 1174 Illustration 1175 Illustration 1176 Illustration A1 Illustration A2 Illustration A3 Illustration A4 Illustration A5 Illustration A6 Illustration A7 Illustration A8 Illustration A9 Illustration A10 Illustration A11 Illustration A12 Illustration A13 Illustration A14 Illustration A15 Illustration A16 Illustration A17 Illustration A18 Illustration A19 Illustration A20 Illustration A21 Illustration A22 Illustration A23 Illustration A24 Illustration A25 Illustration A26 Illustration A27 Illustration A28 Illustration A29 IPI High Speed Disk Control Board Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IPI High Speed Disk I/O Board Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IPI2 High Speed Drive Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IPI-2 High Speed Disk I/O Board Jumpers (WYDX-2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IPI-2 High Speed Disk I/O Board Jumpers (WYDX-3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IPI2 Control Board Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IPI-2 High Speed Disk Control Board Jumpers (UYDX-2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Leveling Pad and Anchoring Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Install and Level Table and Gantry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gantry and Table Level Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gantry and Table Anchor Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anchor Bolt, Typical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Leveling Pad Starting Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gantry Mounted Controls Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table Footswitch Assembly and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCU Front and Rear Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Console Support Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Inch Console Risers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Phantom Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gantry Front Cover Hinge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gantry Cover Hinge Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gantry Rear Shroud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shipping Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OC Power & Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Console Power Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Console I/O Panel Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Console I/O Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GENESIS Computer Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GENESIS Computer Board Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCU Chassis Rear InterConnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gantry Cable Connections (Detail A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gantry Cable Connections (Detail B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table Connections A2A7 Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2113764 PDU Area Designators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2113764 PDU A2 Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2113764 PDU A1 Servo Amp Assy Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11135 11136 11136 11137 11137 11138 11138 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A13 A15 A15 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A22 A23 A26 A27 A28 A29 A30 A31 A32 A33 A34 A35 A36 A37 A38
036
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358-100
Illustration A-30 Illustration A-31 Illustration A-32 Illustration A-33 Illustration A-34 Illustration A-35 Illustration A-36 Illustration A-37 Illustration A-38 Illustration A-39 Illustration A-40 Illustration A-41 Illustration A-42 Illustration A-43 Figure B-1 Figure B-2 Figure B-3 2113764 PDU I/O A4 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2113764 PDU Power Input Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CT Compact PDU 2133533 PDU Area Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CT Compact PDU 2133533 HVDC Supply Output Connections . . . . . . . . . . . CT Compact PDU 2133533 Axial Servo Amp Panel Output Connections . . . CT Compact PDU 2133533 A3 Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CT Compact PDU 2133533 Input Power Panel Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CT Compact PDU 2133533 A4 Panel - Connector Bulkhead (Bottom V iew) . CT Compact PDU 2133533 X-Ray Warning Light and Door Interlock Circuit System Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-39 A-40 A-41 A-42 A-43 A-44 A-45 A-46 A-47 A-49
Typical Customer Supplied Scan Room Warning Light and Connection to PM A-52 Typical Customer Supplied Scan Room Door Interlock and Connection to PM A-52 CT1 (Table) Raceway Ground Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HiSpeed Advantage Interconnect Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Formula to adjust for Straight Line Accessory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Formula for 90 Degree Accessory Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Formula when not at 90 Degree to Axis of Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-55 A-57 B-4 B-4 B-5
0-37
LIST OF TABLES
Table 5-1 Table 5-2 Table 5-3 Table 6-1 Table 6-2 Table 7-1 Table 11-1 Table 11-2 Table 11-3 Table 12-1 Table 12-2 Table 12-3 Table A-1 Table B-1 Table B-2 Table B-3 Table B-4 Tube Type Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tube Type Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kV Rise and Fall Time Record Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line Tap Connection Table for PDU 46-327106G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line Tap Connection Table for PDU 2113764 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Values for DAS Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MVME167 (SBC Board) EEPROM Setup Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Masked Self-T est Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NIOT Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Supply Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tube Heat Soak and Seasoning Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HSA Collimator History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Color Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Default Torque Values as Specified by GEMS CT for LS Plus and Forward . . Default Torque Values as Specified by GEMS CT for LS QXI and Previous . . Torque Conversion Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque Method Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 5-12 5-13 6-5 6-6 7-2 11-109 11-112 11-113 12-3 12-99 12-117 A-25 B-2 B-2 B-3 B-6
0-38
CHAPTER 1 CUSTOMER OPERATING AND SERVICE MATERIALS
11
Introduction This section lists the Customer Operating and Service Material which is shipped with the various CT HiSpeed Advantage catalogs.
12
Customer Documentation (Class A) Class A documentation part list: Note: 2129692 Operators Manual (HiSpeed Advantage) 2126732 Preinstallation Manual (preinstallation kit, only) 46018302 Safety Guidelines Manual (HiSpeed Advantage) 46018303 Dwgs. & Schem. Manual (HiSpeed Advantage) 2106358 System Manual (HiSpeed Advantage) 46018308 Safety Video Tape (HiSpeed Advantage) 2106797 Applications Tips 46018326 27 Upgrade Manual (kit) 2106798 Service Alerts Manual (HiSpeed Advantage) 46018316 FRU Manual (HiSpeed Advantage) 46002021 Image Monitor Service Manual 46002016 Sun Field Service Manual 46015323 Genesis Console/Computer Schematics 46021650 Network Service Documentation
The documents ship with the catalog items listed in parentheses.
11
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 6 13 Customer Software (Class B)
Class B operating and basic service software required for the operation, calibration, service and maintenance of the CT HiSpeed Advantage system: RP1.X Release: HLFC software tape: 2144738 Blank DAT Tape: 46317751P1 HNS is now part of HLFC
RP2.X Release: HLFC software tape: 2157940 Blank DAT Tape: 46317751P1 HNS is now part of HLFC
12
CHAPTER 2 CT DIAGNOSTICS AND TOOLS MENU DESCRIPTIONS
21
Menu Function Descriptions
This chapter briefly describes the basic service diagnostics and tools menus. Chapter 3 describes the diagnostics and tools procedures.
22
Top Level Menu Load CT HiSpeed Advantage diagnostics and tools from tape to the system disk. You may access and operate these diagnostics and tools from the Plasma Touch screen, or you may open a shell and type/enter a Unix command line. Run the diagnostics and tools from the top level of the Utilities Main menu. The system displays the |Utilities| softkey along the top of the plasma screen, as shown in Illustration 21.
ILLUSTRATION 21 TOP LEVEL MENU
Operator Console
Scan
Image Space
Archive
Recon
date time Messages
Utilities
Network
Diag Status
Filming
21
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 7 23 Utilities Main Menu
The Utilities Main Menu (Illustration 22) accesses the following diagnostics and tools categories:
Installation and Calibration (use to set up and align the system) System Performance (provides system troubleshooting and performance measurement software) Scanning (provides a set of scan options for the user) List/Select (lists various files and supports all the tools) Utilities (provides Unix access)
Touch |Cancel| to exit Utilities.

ILLUSTRATION 22 UTILITIES MAIN MENU
Messages
UTILITIES
NETWORK
DIAGS STATUS
FILMING
UTILITIES MAIN Diags and Tools System Access Diags CT Tools
Shell
System Tools
Service Notepad
Shutdown
Cancel
22
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 24 Diagnostics Menu
Touch the Utilities Main Menu |Diags| prompt (See Illustration 22) to display the Diagnostics Menu. Illustration 23 depicts the Advantage RP system Diagnostic menu. Use this menu to access the following diagnostics: Backup Timer activates the exposure backup timer XRay Interlock tests the exposure interlocks Generate XRay tests the scanning hardware KV Fiber Optics tests the fiber optics on the kV bd Cancel Diags terminates the diagnostic session Reset Select executes selected powerup diagnostics
ILLUSTRATION 23 DIAGNOSTICS MENU ADVANTAGE RP SYSTEMS
DIAGNOSTICS
Backup Timer
XRay Interlock
Generate XRay
KV Fiber Optics
Cancel Diags
Reset Select
Init Diags
23
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 7 25 CT Tools Menu
Touch the Utilities Main Menu |CT Tools| softkey to display the Tool Selections Menu. Illustration 24 shows the Tool Selections Menu for Advantage RP Systems. Use this menu to access the following diagnostics: Mechanical Characterization builds characterization files which define the basic system datum for the system setup. Generator Characterization calibrates the xray generator for accurate kV and mA. Tube Align used to position tube, collimator, and detector to xray alignment specs. Heat Soak & Season Prepares new or existing xray tube for extended field life. System Perform Used to identify system level failures. List Select used to examine scan and diagnostic data Scanning Diagnostics used to identify failures in Data Collection, analyze scan data, review DD files, and plot cals Utilities manage DD and scan files
ILLUSTRATION 24 TOOL SELECTIONS MENU ADVANTAGE RP SYSTEMS
TOOL SELECTIONS Install Calibrate Mechncal Charact Genrator Charact Tube Align Heat Soak & Season
System Perform
Detector Slope
List Select
Images
Patient Scans
Diag Scans
DD Files
CALS
Scanning Diagnostics
DAS Tools
DDC
Scan Analysis
DD File Analysis
Cal Plot
Utility Functions
File Manager
Scan File Manager
Cancel
Utility
24
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 26 Shell Function
Use the shell to execute unix commands in a tty window. 27 System Tools Menu Touch the Utilities Main Menu |System Tools| softkey to display the System Tools Menu (Illustration 25). Use this menu to access the following tools:
Shell opens a tty window on the plasma to execute UNIX commands. Calculator opens a tty window to operate a basic calculator for math operations. File Editor opens a tty window to edit ASCII files.
Touch the |Cancel| softkey to exit Utilities. Touch |Utility| to return to the Utility Main Menu. (Illustration 22)
ILLUSTRATION 25 SYSTEM TOOLS MENU
SYSTEM TOOLS
UNIX Tools
Shell
Calculator
File Editor
Touch Log Utilities
Storage On
Storage Off
Insite Disp Off
Cancel
Utility
25
Notes:
26
CHAPTER 3 CT DIAGNOSTICS AND TOOLS PROCEDURES
31
System Shutdown The Utilities Main Menu (Illustration 31) accesses diagnostics, tools, a shell in the unix operating system, and system tools. Touch |Shutdown| to perform an orderly and systematic shutdown of all Genesis application processes. The software shutdown stops all processes running on the OC and SBC. When complete, the boot prompt > appears on the boot terminal. To completely shut down the system, turn off the power switches in this order: SCU power switch. OC power switch. Console power switch. Touch |Cancel| to exit Utilities.
ILLUSTRATION 31 UTILITIES MAIN MENU MESSAGES UTILITIES NETWORK DIAGS STATUS FILMING
Shell
System Tools
Service Notepad
Shutdown
Cancel
31
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 7 32 Access the Diagnostic Programs
Touch the Utilities Main Menu |Diags| softkey, shown in Illustration 32, to display the Diagnostics menu. Proceed to page 33.
ILLUSTRATION 32 DIAGS BUTTON MESSAGES UTILITIES NETWORK DIAGS STATUS FILMING
Shell
System Tools
Service Notepad
Shutdown
Cancel
32
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 7 33 Run Diagnostics
Touch |Diags| (See page 32) to display the Diagnostics Menu. The following subsections describe individual diagnostic selection and execution. Touch |Reset Select| to reset the subsystem. See Illustration 33. 34 Exposure Backup Timer Functional Test Download the diagnostic firmware and touch the Diagnostics Menu (Illustration 33) |Backup Timer|to access the Exposure Backup Timer Functional Test. Use this test to verify the backup timer operation (i.e., timer activates, timer counts down to zero and backup contactor deenergizes). The Gentry I/O Board contains the backup timer. The software loads the scan time + 5% into the backup counter before the start of exposure, to allow the backup contactor to energize. The backup timer begins counting down when the system detects the HVON or Exposure Command. If either of these conditions persist after the timer counts down to zero, it sends a level 1 interrupt to the CPU and disables backup contactor. The read and write verification requires the operation of the clock and clock select circuits. This diagnostic tests both the 488.28 Hz and 1953 Hz clocks. The diagnostic simulates an exposure, and verifies that the circuit generates a backup timer interrupt.
ILLUSTRATION 33 BACKUP TIMER DIAGNOSTIC SCREEN DIAGNOSTICS
Backup Timer
XRay Interlock
Generate XRay
KV Fiber Optics
Cancel Diags
Reset Select
Init Diags
33
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 Illustration 34 shows the Backup Timer functional test screen. The Backup Timer Timeout parameter defaults to three seconds. The default value provides sufficient time to verify operation of the backup timer. Touch |Accept|, and proceed to the next page.
ILLUSTRATION 34 FUNCTIONAL TEST MENU HIGH VOLTAGE CONTROL FUNCTIONAL TEST
Functional Test Selection: Backup Timer Test XRAY Interlock
Backup Timer Timeout (sec): 3
Home
Results Screen
Accept
34
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 Touch |Accept| on the Functional Test Menu (Illustration 34) to display the Functional Test Review Screen. Illustration 35 shows the default parameter values. The default values provide sufficient time to verify operation of the backup timer. Touch |Backup| to return the previous screen. Touch |Run| to start the Backup Timer test. Go to the next page.
ILLUSTRATION 35 FUNCTIONAL TEST MENU (BACKUP TIMER TEST) FUNCTIONAL TEST REVIEW SCREEN Test: Backup Timer Test Maximum Errors:
15
Touch the desired value for each parameter. Gantry Enable: [Disable] Enabled Gantry Speed 1 sec. 2 sec. 4 sec. 20 sec.
Max Error Processing: [Log] Do Not Log Stop Test
Output Device: [Console and File] Console Only
Tube Position [0 deg. 90 deg. 180 deg. 270 deg
Minimum Results Update Update Rate: 3
OBC Service Input: [Disabled] Enabled
Backup
Run
35
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 Refer to Illustration 36. The test screen indicates the progress of the test and not the state of the hardware. The screen information updates one line at a time as each step completes. IF a failure occurs, the system posts an inverted video error message indicating the test has aborted after the step which has failed. In addition the number of errors detected, if any, is posted at the bottom of the screen. Detailed information of errors detected are recorded in the error log.
ILLUSTRATION 36 FUNCTIONAL TEST RESULTS SCREEN
36
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 35 XRay Interlock Test
Touch the Diagnostics Menu |XRay Interlock| softkey (Illustration 37) to access the XRay Functional Test. Note: Touch |Init Diags| to download the diagnostic firmware before attempting to run the XRay Test. (See Illustration 37). The system disables the softkey after you download the diagnostic firmware. (Softkey turns into dashed box)
ILLUSTRATION 37 XRAY INTERLOCK
DIAGNOSTICS
Backup Timer
XRay Interlock
Generate XRay
KV Fiber Optics
Cancel Diags
Reset Select
Init Diags
Touch |XRay Interlock| (Illustration ). Touch |Accept| to view the XRay Interlock Test Screen (Illustration 38). Touch |Run| to initiate the test (Illustration 39).
37

ILLUSTRATION 38 XRAY INTERLOCK FUNCTIONAL TEST
HIGH VOLTAGE CONTROL FUNCTIONAL TEST
Functional Test Selection: Backup Timer Test XRAY Interlock
Iterations: 1
Home
Results Screen
Accept
ILLUSTRATION 39 XRAY INTERLOCK, XRAY FUNCTIONAL REVIEW TEST MENU FUNCTIONAL TEST REVIEW SCREEN Test: XRay Interlock Maximum Errors:
15
Tube Position [0 deg. 90 deg. 180 deg. 270 deg other
Backup
Run
38
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 36 Generate XRay Test
Touch the |Generate XRay| softkey (Illustration 310).

ILLUSTRATION 310 GENERATE XRAY
DIAGNOSTICS
Backup Timer
XRay Interlock
Generate XRay
KV Fiber Optics
Cancel Diags
Reset Select
Init Diags
39
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 Illustration 311 shows the XRay Functional Test screen. Input ranges consist of the following: KV: mA: Duration: Iterations: ISD: 60 to 140KV in 1KV steps 40 to 400mA in 1mA steps 0.1 to 10 Seconds in 0.1 second steps 1 to 100 1 to 60 Seconds in 1 second steps
Touch |Accept| (Illustration 311) and wait for the Scan Start button on the console keypad to illuminate. Press the Scan Start button, when lit, to initiate the scan. Go to the next page.
ILLUSTRATION 311 GENERATE XRAY FUNCTIONAL TEST MENU XRay Test Type: Kv Selection: Manual Auto 80 mA Selection: 40
Minimum ISD (sec): 1 Rotor Speed: High Medium Low
Number of Exposures: 1
Exposure Duration (sec): 1 mA Loop: Closed Open
Filter Type: Closed Air Body Enhanced
Focal Spot: Large Small
Aperture: Closed 1mm 3mm 5mm 7mm 10mm
Home
Results Screen
Accept
310

ILLUSTRATION 312 XRAY FUNCTIONAL REVIEW SCREEN FUNCTIONAL TEST REVIEW SCREEN Test: Generate XRay Maximum Errors:
15
Tube Position [0 deg. 90 deg. 180 deg. 270 deg other
Backup
Run
Touch |Run| and wait for the Start Scan button on the Console Keypad to Illuminate. Press Start Scan Button to initiate the scan.
311
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 The XRay Functional Test Results screen output (Illustration 313) is a collection of HV statistics. This data was taken 77 ms into the exposure and was posted to the screen immediately after the (__ indicates an unknown value)
Average is the average value taken over the duration of the exposure. Expected is the value prescribed by the user. Present is the last value read before the screen was updated. The present exposure duration indicates the time the data was collected. The time is in milliseconds since the exposure began.
Data displayed in the present column shows the last sample of HV statistics taken on or before 77mSeconds after the start of the exposure.
ILLUSTRATION 313 XRAY FUNCTIONAL TEST MENU #1
DATA IN PRESENT COLUMN SHOWS LAST SAMPLE OF HV STATISTICS READ ON OR BEFORE 77 MS AFTER START OF EXPOSURE BEFORE SCREEN WAS DISPLAYED.
312
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 The screen of Illustration 314 was taken at the end of the exposure (as compared to the screen of Illustration 313 which was taken at the beginning of the exposure). This is indicated in Illustration 314 by the Present exposure duration being greater than or equal to the Expected exposure duration value. For this situation, values displayed in the present column should be ignored.
Note:
The backup timer determines the exposure duration. This timer stops counting after the Exposure Command and HV ON status are removed; therefore, the last exposure could have occurred later than indicated.
ILLUSTRATION 314 XRAY FUNCTIONAL TEST MENU #2
COMPARE
313
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 7 37 Access the Unix Shell
Refer to Illustration 315. Touch the Utilities Main Menu |Shell| softkey to open a Unix shell.
ILLUSTRATION 315 SHELL BUTTON MESSAGES UTILITIES NETWORK DIAGS STATUS FILMING
Shell
System Tools
Service Notepad
Shutdown
Cancel
314
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 371 Shell
The shell (Illustration 316) is a program that reads and interprets what is typed in or read at the command line; and provides the interface between the user and the unix operating system. The shell accepts your command lines, checks the syntax, calls the appropriate unix commands, and takes control when other commands finish. It is interactive because it responds to your instruction and reports errors, status and results. The shell also provides an interpreted command language for creating complex scripts that carry out system maintenance actions. A script is a file containing a sequence of commands. By using the source filename command,i.e., type in the filename as if it were a command, you can tell the shell to read and perform commands in the file.
Note:
A description of the unix commands that you need to maintain the system resides in Direction 46015523, SunOST / Genesis Quick Reference Guide. This direction is inside of the Network Service Documentation Set (46021650) that is shipped with every CT HiSpeed Advantage and Upgrade Kit.
ILLUSTRATION 316 UNIX SHELL
Shell
(to exit, control D)
genesis @ <suite ID>_OC0 1:
315
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 372 EzLog Tool
Open a shell (Illustration 317), or a tty screen, to access the menudriven EzLog Tool. This tool improves error message viewing, and saves time, because you no longer have to log into the sbc to display the system error log files. You may run EzLog with applications up or down. The EzLog Tool provides a convenient alternative to plasma tools during system applications failures, and/or remote logins. 1. Open a shell or tty window. 2. Login as genesis. 3. Type ezlog [Return] to display the following menu: HiSpeed Advantage 1.X & 2.X Systems 1. OC Messages /usr/adm/messages 2. OC Syslog /usr/spool/log/syslog 3. OC System Error Log /usr/g/service/log/gesyslog (viewLog) 4. SBC Messages /usr/adm/messages 5. SBC Syslog /usr/spool/log/syslog 6. Run Time Stats 7. Tube Usage 8. Tube Display 9. Look for Core files on system q Quit and return to UNIX Enter a number to view the error log: 4. Type a number, and press [Return] to display the corresponding log file. Press q to return to the HiSpeed Advantage 1.X & 2.X Systems menu. Press <Cntrl> c to abort the corresponding EzLog function.
5. If you press the wrong key, the software responds with Gimme a break. . . 6. If the SBC is not running, the software displays the following report: HSA1_SBC0 HSA1_SBC0 is down HAS1_SBC0: COnnection timed out /usr/adm/messages not found in HSA1_SBC0.
ILLUSTRATION 317 EZLOG TOOL
Shell ezlog
(to exit, control D)
316
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 7 38 Access Service Notepad
1. Display the Utilities Main Menu (Illustration 318). 2. Touch |Service Notepad| to open a Service Notepad shell, similar to the one in Illustration 319.
ILLUSTRATION 318 SERVICE NOTEPAD SOFTKEY MESSAGES UTILITIES NETWORK DIAGS STATUS FILMING
Shell
System Tools
Service Notepad
Shutdown
Cancel
3. Use the Service Notepad to enter text information directly into the System Message Log. Remember to let multiple lines of text automatically wrap around to the next available line. If you press [Return] at the end of a line, the software posts the current (incomplete) message, and exits the shell.
4. Press [Return] to send the text currently displayed in the shell to the System Message Log.
ILLUSTRATION 319 SERVICE NOTEPAD SHELL
SERVICE NOTEPAD Please enter messages to Log: (to update/exit type <CR>)
317
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 7 39 Access CT Tools
Display the Utilities Main Menu (Illustration 320), touch |CT Tools|, and proceed to the next page.
ILLUSTRATION 320 CT TOOLS SOFTKEY MESSAGES UTILITIES NETWORK DIAGS STATUS FILMING
Shell
System Tools
Service Notepad
Shutdown
Cancel
318
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 7 391 Main Tool Selections
Display the Tool Selections Menu (Illustration 321), to access the tools you need during installation and, calibration:
Mechanical Characterization for procedure refer to chapter 4 (Table/Gantry Maintenance). Generator Characterization for procedure, refer to chapter 5 (HV Subsystem Maintenance). Tube Alignment for procedure, refer to chapter 8 (System Alignment). Heat Soak & Season for procedure, refer to the Tube Change section in chapter 12 (Replacement Procedures). Detector Slope for procedure, refer to page 321, in this chapter. Analysis for procedure, refer to chapter 8 (System Alignment). DDC for procedure, refer to chapter 8 (System Alignment). For SmartScan DDC information, see section 3941.
ILLUSTRATION 321 TOOLS SELECTIONS MENU ADVANTAGE RP SYSTEMS TOOL SELECTIONS Install Calibrate Mechncal Charact Genrator Charact Tube Align Heat Soak & Season
System Perform
Detector Slope
List Select
Images
Patient Scans
Diag Scans
DD Files
CALS
DAS Tools
DDC
Scan Analysis
DD File Analysis
Cal Plot
Utility Functions
File Manager
ScanFile Manager
Cancel
Utility
319
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 7 392 Heat Soak and Seasoning Tool
After you replace an xray tube, select the |Heat Soak & Season| tool to ensure extended tube life. Use the |Season| tool when you encounter tube spits, image streaks, or other tube related scan aborts on a currently installed tube. You may also use the |Season| tool during planned maintenance. Note: Refer to Section of the Tube Replacement procedure for additional |Heat Soak & Season| information.
ILLUSTRATION 322 HEAT SOAK & SEASONING MENU Tube Heat Soak and Seasoning Heat Soak /Season Season
Cancel
Utility
Tools
320
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 7 393 Detector Slope Test
Use this System Performance tool to test the detector for signs of gain response degradation. A typical healthy detector should have a status number lower than 19. As the detector degrades, this number is likely to increase. Eventually a detector failure will be recorded if it exceeds 19. The software automatically runs the Detector Slope Test on a monthly basis, immediately after a FastCal. The test adds about 4 minutes to the FastCal program. The system displays a PASS/FAIL message after it runs the test. Refer to Illustration 323 for an example of the failure message. Note: If the Detector Slope Test fails, the failure message screen instructs the customer to contact GE for service. A GE service representative will preform recommended field procedures (FMI, etc) for system troubleshooting and/or detector replacement. The UTILITIES menu also displays a |Detector Slope| softkey, which provides manual access to the tool.
CAUTION
This test fails when the software detects incorrect Collimator Characterization values or insufficient DD File space. When a failure occurs, review the Error Message Log for additional information. For optimal clinical image performance, periodically check all system alignments, and make sure they fall within spec. To manually access the Detector Slope Test: 1. Display the UTILITIES menu. Refer to the Illustration on page 318. Refer to the Illustration on page 319. 2. Select |CT Tools|. 3. Select |Detector Slope|. 4. Remove any obstructions from the Gantry opening. 5. When prompted, press (Start Scan) to execute the test. 6. Select |Confirm| to exit the Detector Slope Test. The software displays a message, similar to the following, when the detector gain response falls outside the specified range of values.
ILLUSTRATION 323 FAILURE MESSAGE Detector Slope Test
The Detector Slope Test has detected a condition that may result in an image with unacceptable image quality. Please call GE Service and request a more thorough evaluation of your detectors condition.
Confirm
321
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 394 Access DDC
At the Tools Selection Menu (Illustration 321), touch |DDC| to display the Diagnostic Data Collection Menu (Illustration 324).
ILLUSTRATION 324 DIAGNOSTIC DATA COLLECTION MENU DIAGNOSTIC DATA COLLECTION Data Mode RealTime Stat Raw/View Compressed
Scan Type
Static Xray Off Rotating Xray Off
Static Xray On Rotating Xray On
Static TXXT Rotating TXXT
Offset Collect DAS Elec Cal
Misc
Position Tube
Delete Protocol
Load Protocol
Cancel
Utility
Tools
3941
Run SmartScan DDC SmartScan is a feature that varies the mA during tube rotation, depending on the patient attenuation profiles. For detailed information, see the operators manuals. As part of SmartScan, RP 1.3 introduced enhanced Diagnostic Data Collection (DDC), to allow the field engineer to enter variable mAspecific fields when prescribing a viewcompressed Rotating XRay On or Stationary XRay On scan. The field engineer can also reconstruct Rotating XRay On scans.
322
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 Scan and image headers include fields for SmartScan parameters. These fields appear on the plasma display when you use the List/Select header option. The new scan image header information introduced by SmartScan is: SmartScan: on or off Smart mA: computed effective mA (equivalent to technic mA) mA phase: min @ 0 degrees or max @ 0 degrees mA modulation: % of max reduction (See Definitions 4311) mA clip: the minimum mA value for the image
Tools Scanning supports two modes with SmartScan, stationary and rotating. For Stationary XRay On scanning, you must manually select the modulation percentage, phase, simulated start angle, and simulated gantry rotation speed. For Rotating XRay On scanning, you must select only the modulation percentage and phase. You can use Recon Rx to list/select and reconstruct certain rotating viewcompressed XRay On DDC scans. As part of SmartScan, DDC has been enhanced to let you enter variable mAspecific fields when you prescribe viewcompressed Rotating XRay On and Stationary XRay On scans. In addition, you can reconstruct Rotating XRay On scans that have the appropriate number of views. Scan data will now contain additional parameters that define the modifications for SmartScan. You can view these fields in the Scan Data header from the List/Select header option. 3942 Definitions % modulation The percentage of reduction in maximum mA. Phase of waveform The phase or waveform orientation represents the mA waveforms relationship to the gantry position. (See Illustration 325.) This value indicates whether the mA is at minimum (1) or maximum (0) when the gantry is at 0 degrees for a scan. For example, if the phase is 1, the prescribed mA is 300, and the modulation is 50%, then the mA at 0 degrees on the gantry will be 150. Clipping level The maximum modulation allowed for the RP hardware is 50%, and the minimum patient scanning current allowed is 40 mA, even though 100% mA modulation is possible otherwise. An mA modulation of more than 50% is acceptable, but will be clipped at the clipping level imposed by the hardware.
323
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 3943 Rotating XRay On Scan
At the DDC screen, touch |Rotating XRay On| to display the Rotating XRay On Screen. Touch |SmartScan| to enable the function. When you select SmartScan, the software displays a phase softkey and a modulation data field. These fields are otherwise invisible. Choose a % modulation. If its higher than 50%, the mA modulation will be clipped at 50%. Choose the phase between the maximum mA or minimum mA at 0 degrees on the gantry.
ILLUSTRATION 325 MA VARIATION VS. GANTRY POSITION FOR ROTATING XRAY ON (XRAY ON POSITION 0)
Phase: max @ 0
Technic mA
Lowest computed mA
Phase: min @ 0
Gantry angle: 05
1805
3605
Top of gantry
Bottom of gantry
Full rotation
324
ILLUSTRATION 326 MA VARIATION VS: GANTRY ANGLE FOR ROTATING XRAY ON (XRAY ON POSITION 45)
Phase: max @ 0
Technic mA
Lowest computed mA
Phase: min @ 0
Gantry angle:
455
2255
4055
Enter the run description and compression factor. Enter the scan time, scan speed, the number of scans, the ISD, the XRay On position (see Illustrations 327 and 329, plots of channel data from scan analysis), the mA, and the kV. Note that you should not use the default value, 40 mA, for SmartScan, because no modulation is available at that current. (40 mA is the lowest threshold value for SmartScan). Enter the % of modulation and the phase that you want. Choose the cal vector, FOV, filter, spot size, and aperture. Enter the protocol name. Then accept the Rx. When its done, examine the database headers and verify that the SmartScan parameters are properly set.
325

ILLUSTRATION 327 RUN A ROTATING XRAY ON SCAN
ROTATING, XRAY ON, VIEW COMPRESSED
Run Description: Compression Factor
Smart Scan 2:1 3:1 4:1
Auto Scan
Reserve Scan
1:1
Scan Time [0.360.0]: Scan Speed [1/2/3/4]: Number of Scans: Inter Scan Delay: XRay On Position: mA [10400]: kV [80/100/120/140]: Cal Vector Filter Air Small
2.0 sec. 2 sec. per revolution 1 2.0 sec. 0 degrees 40 80 Medium Large
Modulation: Phase Min @ 0
50%
FOV
Small
Large
Air
Bowtie
Large Bowtie
Spot Size
Small
Large
Aperture
10 Save Protocol
Protocol Name: Cancel Utility Tools Data Collect Alpha Correct Offset Correct Accept Rx
326
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 3944 Stationary XRay On Scan
When you select SmartScan, fields for the modulation, simulated gantry speed, and phase appear. These fields are otherwise invisible. For a Stationary XRay On scan, the phase refers to the starting angle in the mA waveform, independent of the tube position in the gantry. Enter the description, compress factor, scan time, number of scans, ISD, and mA. Note that you should not use the default value, 40 mA, for SmartScan, because no modulation is available at that current. (40 mA is the lowest threshold value for SmartScan.) Enter the kV, modulation, simulated gantry speed, and phase. Choose a phase between 0 and 180 degrees. See Illustration 328 to select the frequency at which you want to display the waveform at. Enter the cal filter, FOV, filter, spot size, aperture, and protocol name. Then accept the Rx.
ILLUSTRATION 328 MA VARIATIONS VS. GANTRY ANGLE FOR STATIONARY XRAY ON (1 SEC. SCAN TIME, 1 SEC. SIMULATED GANTRY SPEED) Technic mA
Lowest computed mA
Gantry angle:
05 Top of gantry
1805
Bottom of gantry
3605 Full rotation
When its done, examine the database headers and verify that the SmartScan parameters are properly set.
327

ILLUSTRATION 329 RUN A STATIONARY XRAY ON SCAN
STATIONARY, XRAY ON, VIEW COMPRESSED
Run Description: Compression Factor
Smart Scan 2:1 3:1 4:1
Auto Scan
Reserve Scan
1:1
Scan Time [0.360.0]: Number of Scans: Inter Scan Delay: XRay On Position: mA [10400]: kV [80/100/120/140]:
1.0 sec. 1 100 sec. 0 degrees 40 80
Modulation: Sim Gan Speed: Phase
100% 1 sec 0 deg
Cal Vector Filter
Air
Small
Medium
Large
FOV
Small
Large
Air
Bowtie
Large Bowtie
Spot Size
Small
Large
Aperture
10 Save Protocol
Protocol Name: Cancel Utility Tools Data Collect Alpha Correct Offset Correct Accept Rx
328
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 3945 Reconstruct DDC images
Use ReconRx screens to list/select the DDCacquired SmartScan data. Use ReconRx to prescribe the reconstruction of the DDCacquired data into images. DDC scans are available in Recon Rx List/Select only if they are: 3946 Rotating XRay On scans. Full rotation scans having 984 views. Scans that have a cal file.
Other SmartScan Notes: SmartScan may be forced on round phantoms, however noise will be increased because insufficient mA is applied to the tube in one of the orthogonal directions (vertical or horizontal). CTDI measurements are the same for SmartScan on or off, since the phantoms used are circular and SmartScan leaves the mA unmodulated. For nonround objects (e.g. flat phantoms placed on the table), you can verify that with SmartScan on, mA is modulated. Use applications scanning: with SmartScan defaulted on, after complete orthogonal Scouts are taken, the system chooses the appropriate modulation, which can be found in the header information for the image produced after scanning. Noise measurements may be performed both on images acquired in DDC (Rotating XRay On) or in SmartScan patient scanning, after the images are reconstructed.
329
Notes:
330
CHAPTER 4 TABLE/GANTRY MAINTENANCE

THERE ARE ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL HAZARDS IN SERVICING THE TABLE AND GANTRY. THEREFORE, BE SURE THAT YOU HAVE READ DIRECTION 46018302, CT HISPEED ADVANTAGE SAFETY GUIDELINES MANUAL OR HAVE VIEWED 4608308 CT HISPEED ADVANTAGE SAFETY VIDEO PRIOR TO SERVICING THESE SUBSYSTEMS. TO PREVENT THE HOIST FROM ROLLING OFF THE BACK END OF THE HOIST BOOM WHEN INSTALLING THE DAS, TUBE, OR DETECTOR, PLACE THE HAND KNOB, USED TO HOLD THE FRONT GANTRY SHROUD, INTO THE HOLE ON TOP OF THE GANTRY HOIST BOOM WHERE IT ATTACHES TO THE GANTRY.
WARNING
WARNING
41
Input (PDU) Power
CAUTION
Verify all personnel have cleared the system before you turn on the wall power. The CT Compact PDU, part number 2133533, generates unregulated high voltage direct current that ranges between 450 and 750VDC. This document refers to this PDU voltage as HVDC. Perform the following functions: Turn OFF all three switches on the gantry status display box. Turn OFF all three power switches in the table. DISABLE the PDU HVDC (550) enable key. Turn ON main wall power.
41
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 42 Gantry Display Test
Perform the following functions: Turn ON the gantry 120 VAC enable switch on the gantry status display box. Verify that the gantry display goes through powerup selftest. Display will continue to cycle through its selftest until a hardware reset and download has been completed. TURN ON XRAY DRIVES power by pressing the RESET button on the gantry mounted table control.
ILLUSTRATION 41 OBC, STC AND TABLE POWER SUPPLIES
NonAdjustable Supplies STC, OBC +24 Table (Display, Emerg Stop) +24 Detector Heater +26 Filament Supply +30 Tilt/Elevation +170
Adjustable Supplies ETC, STC, OBC, +5, +/15 Table (Cradle Drive, Relays) +24 Data Communication +12 Das +5, +/15 Collimator +38.5 Table/Gantry Power Supplies PS1 Top Table Power Supply
Adjustable 24 volt supply for cradle drive and elevation/tilt drive
Adjustable +5, +/15 volt supplies for ETC bd Nonadjustable 24 volt supply for gantry display and table emergency stop relay coil and tape switches.
PS2 Bottom Table Power Supply Table Power Supplies Left View
+24 volt output +24 volt reference 15 volt output +/15 volt reference +15 volt output (not used) (not used) +5 volt adjust +5 volt reference +5 volt output
+/15 volt adjust
120VAC INPUT
OBC, STC and Bottom Table Power Supplies Top View
42
ILLUSTRATION 42 46296317P1/P2 OBC, STC AND BOTTOM TABLE POWER SUPPLIES TOP VIEW
+5 volt adjust +24 volt output +24 volt reference 15 volt output +15 volt reference +15 volt output
+15 volt adjust 15 volt adjust 24 volt adjust Power Fail
+5 volt reference +5 volt output
120VAC INPUT
ILLUSTRATION 43 46296317P3 OBC, STC AND BOTTOM TABLE POWER SUPPLIES TOP VIEW
15 volt adjust +24 volt output +24 volt reference 15 volt output +15 volt reference +15 volt output +15 volt adjust 24 volt adjust
Power Fail
+5 volt reference +5 volt output
+5 volt adjust
120VAC INPUT
43

ILLUSTRATION 44 GANTRY POWER SUPPLIES
STC POWER SUPPLIES RIGHT ANALOG
Nonemc only: DATA COMMUNICATION POWER SUPPLY (On back of gantry)
LEFT ANALOG
STC
EDAS KEY BOARD
STATIONARY CONTROLLER
CATHODE HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY
COLLIMATOR POWER SUPPLY
ANODE HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY
( Behind detector heater power supply)

DAS POWER SUPPLIES OBC ON BOARD CONTROLLER
FILAMENT POWER SUPPLY CT VARIABLE ROTOR CONTROLLER
CTVRC
DETECTOR HEATER POWER SUPPLY (In front of collimator power supply)
+/15 Volt Analog +5 Volt Analog

+5 Volt Digital TUBE 5 Volt Analog Regulator Bd. UNIT
HPDAS POWER SUPPLIES
OBC POWER SUPPLIES
15 Volt Das Supply
+15 Volt Das Supply + 5 Volt Das Supply
EDAS POWER SWITCH
EDAS POWER SUPPLIES
44
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 43 Power Supply Checks D
ETC Power Supplies
Use DVM to verify the table power supply voltages at the following test points on the ETC bd: ETC Board Test Points 21 WRT 18 11 WRT 18 25 WRT 24 1 WRT 2 D Note: D Specifications +15vdc ( 0.25V) 15vdc ( 0.25V) +24vdc ( 0.2V) +5vdc ( 0.25V)
Tilt/Elevation Power Supplies +170vdc (No adjustment required)

WRT means With Respect To
STC Power Supplies

a. Verify axial drive enable and 550 enable switches on gantry status display box are OFF. b. Turn ON gantry 120vac enable switch on the status display box. c. Turn ON STC power switch on the STC.
d. Use a DVM to verify the STC power supply voltages at the following test points on the axial bd: Axial Board Test Points 36 WRT 40 38 WRT 40 37 WRT 42 39 WRT 41 D Specifications +15vdc ( 0.25V) 15vdc ( 0.25V) +24vdc ( 0.2V) +5vdc ( 0.25V)
OBC Power Supplies

a. Turn ON OBC power switch on the OBC. b. Use a DVM to verify the OBC power supply voltages at the following test points on the I/O bd: Axial Board Test Points 6 WRT 5 7 WRT 5 11 WRT 17 3 WRT 4 Specifications +15vdc ( 0.25V) 15vdc ( 0.25V) +24vdc ( 0.2V) +5vdc ( 0.25V)
45
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 D
EDAS Power Supplies
Turn on DAS power switch on DAS power supply assembly. Use a DVM to verify the DAS power supply voltages at the following test points on the DAS CAL/AUX bd: Test Points +15 WRT GND 15 WRT GND +5 WRT GND D Specifications +15vdc ( 0.25V) 15vdc ( 0.25V) +5vdc ( 0.25V)
HPDAS Power Supplies

Test Points 15 WRT GND +5 WRT GND +5 WRT GND 5 WRT GND Specifications 15vdc ( 0.25V) analog +5vdc ( 0.25V) analog +5vdc ( 0.25V) digital 5vdc ( 0.25V) analog
Data Communication Power Supply
Push back rear gantry shroud. Use a DVM to verify the data communications power supply voltage at the following location: Test Points Communications power supply CN2 connector Red wire WRT to black wire Note: Specifications +11.75vdc to +12.25vdc
Before checking the following three power supplies: Turn off gantry 120vac enable switch. Remove rotor controller cover.
CAUTION
120vac is exposed on the rotor controller and the following power supplies. Turn on gantry 120vac enable switch.
Detector Heater Power Supply
Use a DVM to verify the detector heater power supply voltage at the following location: Test Points Across cap on detector heater Specifications +25vdc to +30vdc power supply
46
Filament Power Supply
Using a DVM, verify the filament power supply voltage at the following location: Test Points Across cap on filament power supply D Specifications +28vdc to +37vdc
Collimator Power Supply
Using a DVM, verify the collimator power supply voltage at the following location: Test Points Collimator power supply +out WRT out Note: Specifications +38.0vdc to 39.0vdc
Turn off gantry 120vac enable switch. Install rotor controller cover. Turn on gantry 120vac enable switch.
44
Encoder Check Turn the Gantry by hand and go through the home flag. Verify that: DS270(CHA) and DS271(CHB) AX bd LEDs toggle. DS320(CHC) toggles on and off once while DS321(home flag) is high.
45
Axial Brake Check Toggle the axial drive enable switch on the status display box. The brake should be heard as it energizes and deenergizes. Note: The brake may not be toggled if a hardware reset has been done since the last time gantry AC power was turned on. If the brake isnt toggling, turn gantry 120vac power off, then on, using the 120vac enable switch on the gantry status display box. Then toggle the axial drive enable switch on the status display box. The brake should be heard as it energizes and deenergizes. Verify the following: When the axial drive enable switch is off, the switch pilot light is off and the brake is released. (Gantry can be easily rotated by hand.) When the axial drive enable switch is on, the switch pilot light is on and the brake is energized.
Turn on all three switches on the gantry status display box.
47
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 46 Intercom Check
Verify the intercoms talk and listen functions work. If you hear feedback, or if the intercom works but does not seem loud enough, even with the console intercom controls set to maximum, make the following adjustments: 1. Close the clamshells. 2. Set the console intercom controls to maximum. 3. Make the following adjustments on the Remote Intercom X board (46288766G1C) and Console Autovoice board (46264756G1) Note: When you work alone, move JP5 to the MANUAL position before you adjust R178 and R147. Two or more people present: One person adjusts the pot while the other person stands in the room with the gantry and talks, or makes some kind of noise. a. If working alone, move jumper JP5 to the MANUAL position on the intercom board. b. Turn autovoice board pot R178 clockwise(CW) until you hear feedback at the console speaker. c. Turn R178 counterclockwise (CCW) until the feedback stops.
d. Hold down the talk button and turn the autovoice board pot R147 CW until you hear feedback at the table speaker. e. Turn R147 CCW until the feedback stops. f. Return the TP5 jumper to the AUTO position.
4. Verify that the talk and listen functions of the intercom work. 47 Alignment Light Position Check
CAUTION
Verify all personnel are clear. Gantry will rotate to 180 degrees. Follow these steps: a. Press the alignment light button on the gantrymounted table controls to position the gantry. b. Press the alignment light button on the gantrymounted table controls again to turn the lights off. c. Verify that the axial drive enable and 550 enable switches on the gantry status display box are in the OFF position.
d. Manually turn on the alignment lights using the switch on the gantry control assembly. Note: The gantry control assembly is located near the collimator. You can reach the switch through the opening in the center of the gantry between the front and back shrouds. WHEN OPERATING ALIGNMENT LIGHTS, DO NOT AT ANY TIME STARE DIRECTLY INTO THE LASER BEAMS. STARING INTO THE BEAMS CAN CAUSE PERMANENT EYE DAMAGE.
48
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 471 Internal Axial Lights
Place a sheet of plain white paper over the output port of each light and verify that the two lines line up on each other. Note: The internal axial lasers on the high speed advantage system are not designed to shine down on the collimator. Therefore, do not adjust them to do so. The tomographic plane tests using the QA phantom in Section 11 will verify that the internal axial lasers are correctly aligned with the collimator.
472
External Axial to Internal Axial Distance Raise the table to its highest elevation. Extend the cradle enough so that both the internal and external laser lights are visible on the cradle. Place a metric rule on the right edge of the cradle and measure the distance from the internal axial laser line to the external axial line generated by each laser. Verify this distance is 310.0 mm 1.0mm. Place the rule on the left edge of the cradle and measure again. Leaving cradle extended enough so that both internal and external laser lines are visible on it, lower table to the lowest elevation possible. Verify the 310.0 mm 1.0mm distance between the internal and external lights on both edges of the cradle, as above.
473
Coronal Lights Place a sheet of plain white paper at the left side of the patient opening in front of the coronal laser light. Verify that the two coronal lines coincide with each other. Check the right side in the same way. Place the paper in the center of the Gantry opening and verify that the coronal lines are horizontal, using a level.
474
Alignment Light Visualization HHS requirements state that if a light is used to define the tomographic plane, it must be visible under ambient light conditions up to 500 lux. Proceed as follows: a. Turn on the scan room lights to their brightest normal level. Do not add localized spot lights to increase the brightness level. b. Raise the table to its highest position, advance the cradle into the gantry, and turn on the alignment lights. c. Use the back of your hand centered over the cradle and held normal to the alignment light as a viewing surface to visualize the external axial alignment lights. It is only necessary to see the axial lights, not the sagittal or coronal lights.
d. Repeat using the back of your hand to visualize the internal axial lights. If the external or internal axial lights cannot be visualized under the above conditions, obtain a DIGAPHOT model #3300 or 3303 light meter and measure the ambient light intensity at the cradle surface for the external and internal alignment light locations. Note: Footcandles x 10.76=lux.
49
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 If the light reading(s) are greater than 500 lux reduce the room lighting to that level and repeat steps 3 and 4. If the light meter readings are 500 lux or less, replace the laser light(s) and/or their power supplies.
48
Emergency Stop Check
Using the gantrymounted (or tablemounted) control pushbuttons, advance the cradle about 2 feet from the home position. Proceed as follows: a. Press one of the emergency stop switches on the Gantry. Verify there is no Gantry/Table movement, while Reset Light on Gantry mounted controls flashes slowly. b. Depress one of the tilt buttons. Verify that tilt is disabled. c. Depress one of the table elevation buttons. Verify that table elevation is disabled.
d. Depress one of the cradle drive buttons. Verify that cradle drive is disabled. e. Verify that the cradle clutch is released by manually moving the cradle to the home position. f. Verify that cradle is latched securely in the home position.
g. Turn on XRAY DRIVES POWER by pressing the reset switch on the gantrymounted table controls. Verify that tilt, elevation, and cradle drive now work. h. Repeat all of the above with the other Gantry emergency stop switch. i. j. Repeat all of the above with the four table tape switches. Repeat all of the above with the console emergency stop switch.
410
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 7 49 Access CT Tools
Touch the |CT Tools| on the Utilities Main Menu (Illustration 45) and go to the next page.
ILLUSTRATION 45 CT TOOLS SOFTKEY Messages UTILITIES NETWORK DIAGS STATUS FILMING
UTILITIES MAIN Diags and Tools Diags CT Tools
System Access
Shell
System Tools
Service Notepad
Shutdown
Cancel
411
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 7 410 Mechanical Characterization Procedure
Illustration 46 shows the Tool Selection Menu where we can access the Mechanical Characterization Program. This section describes the user interface to the characterization tool. This tool is needed to set up the characterization tables for the system firmware. The system firmware tracks various mechanical characteristics of the machine by reading feedback devices. The system firmware must be told how the values of these feedback devices relate to the actual machine characteristics. The Characterization tool allows a service person to define a reference value to each of these feedback devices. The characterization data is stored in a series of characterization and configuration files. The characterization tool leads the user through the process of building the characterization files in a step by step fashion. The tool directs the operator to what needs to be set up. When the user responds, the tool reads the appropriate feedback device and stores the value in the appropriate characterization file. The tool also provides a mechanism to download the files to the firmware and to view the files.
ILLUSTRATION 46 SELECT MECHANICAL CHARACTERIZATION TOOL SELECTIONS Install Calibrate Mechncal Charact Genrator Charact Tube Align Heat Soak & Season
System Perform
Detector Slope
List Select
Images
Patient Scans
Diag Scans
DD Files
CALS
DAS Tools
DDC
Scan Analysis
DD File Analysis
Cal Plot
Utility Functions
File Manager
Scan File Manager
Cancel
Utility
412
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 Touch the |Mechncal Charact| softkey (Illustration 46) to display the screen shown in Illustration 47. Use this tool to characterize the following: Gantry Tilt Position Table Elevation Table Cradle Collimator
ILLUSTRATION 47 MECHANICAL CHARACTERIZATION MENU MECHANICAL CHARACTERIZATION Types Of: Tilt Table Elev Cradle All
Actions:
Characterize
Hardware Reset
Data View
Collima tor Data
Charact Limits
View Values
View Log
Cancel
Utility
Tools
413
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 4101 Gantry Tilt Position
Touch |Tilt| and |Characterize| in sequence, then follow the Tilt Characterization instructions displayed on the plasma screen. (See Illustration 48.)
ILLUSTRATION 48 GANTRY TILT CHARACTERIZATION MECHANICAL CHARACTERIZATION Types Of: Tilt Table Elev Cradle All
Actions:
Characterize
Hardware Reset
Data View
Collima tor Data
Charact Limits
View Values
View Log
Cancel
Utility
Tools
414
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 4102 Table Elevation Characterization
To accurately position the elevation, the user needs to measure the distance from the top of the weldment plate to the rear leg upper pivot pin on the table. Note: Do not use elevation heights or measurement positions depicted on the plasma display. Instead, use elevation heights and measurement positions described below. Procedure: 1. Remove upper right and lower right table covers. 2. Move measurement plate at right rear of table to out position. Move measurement plate on right side of table to out position. Tighten mounting screws for both plates. 3. Touch |Table Elevation| and |Characterize| in sequence, then follow the Characterization instructions displayed on the plasma screen. (See Illustration 49)
ILLUSTRATION 49 TABLE ELEVATION CHARACTERIZATION MECHANICAL CHARACTERIZATION Types Of: Tilt Table Elev Cradle All
Actions:
Characterize
Hardware Reset
Data View
Collima tor Data
Charact Limits
View Values
View Log
Cancel
Utility
Tools
415
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 Note:
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 When measuring elevation distance, measure as vertically as possible. Measure between the bottom surface of the appropriate measurement block (same plane as the top of the weldment plate) and the center of the rear leg upper pivot pin, per Illustration 410. This measurement is critical. Elevation characterization will fail if this measurement is incorrect.
ILLUSTRATION 410 ELEVATION DISTANCE MEASUREMENT

Rear leg upper pivot pin
Gantry
Measure This Distance
Measurement from bottom of plate for lower position measurement

Rear leg upper pivot pin
Measure This Distance
Measurement from bottom of plate for upper position measurement

etc board
Weldment Plate
Top of Weldment Plate
LOWER POSITION DISTANCE = 14.7 INCHES(373.4MM) CT38885A
Gantry

etc board
Weldment Plate
Top of Weldment Plate
UPPER POSITION DISTANCE = 36.44 INCHES(925.6MM) CT38886A
416
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 4103 Cradle Characterization
Touch |Cradle| and |Characterize| in sequence, then follow the Characterization instructions displayed on the plasma screen. (See Illustration 411.)
ILLUSTRATION 411 CRADLE CHARACTERIZATION MECHANICAL CHARACTERIZATION Types Of: Tilt Table Elev Cradle All
Actions:
Characterize
Hardware Reset
Data View
Collima tor Data
Charact Limits
View Values
View Log
Cancel
Utility
Tools
417
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 4104 Collimator Characterization
The characterization tool provides a means for the user to view and update the current collimator characterization data. Proceed as follows: 1. Touch the |Collimator Data| softkey shown in Illustration 412. 2. Enter the characterization values that are listed on the collimator characterization label. 3. Touch |Update Table| to display a message on the plasma which says that the CRC value is incorrect. To get the correct CRC value, hold down L1 and B keys simultaneously. Note the CRC value displayed on the screen. (The decimal value, not the hexadecimal value.) Hold down L1 and B keys simultaneously again to get back to the characterization menu. Enter the CRC value on the characterization screen. Press return key on keyboard. 4. Touch |Update Table| to display a message that characterization completed successfully. 41041 Collimator Exercises 1. Touch |Utility|. 2. Touch |Diags| softkey. 3. Touch |Scanning Hardware| softkey. 4. Touch |Download Diags|. Note: The system requires approximately 2 minutes to download diagnostics. 5. Touch |Gantry| softkey. 6. Touch |Collimator| softkey. 7. Touch |1mm| softkey. 8. Touch |Air| softkey. 9. Touch |Accept| softkey. 10. Touch |180 Degree| to set Tube Position. 11. Touch |Run|. Verify plasma messages: Current mode = at position All power supplies are OK Visually verify that 1mm aperture is visible and centered by looking into the collimator. 12. Touch |Backup| softkey. 13. Touch |1mm| to deselect the 1mm aperture setting. 14. Touch the |3mm| softkey. 15. Touch the |Accept| softkey. 16. Touch |Run| Verify plasma messages: Current mode = at position All power supplies are OK Visually verify that 3mm aperture is visible and centered by looking into the collimator. 17. Repeat above procedure for 5,7, 10mm and closed positions.
418

ILLUSTRATION 412 COLLIMATOR CHARACTERIZATION MECHANICAL CHARACTERIZATION Types Of: Tilt Table Elev Cradle
All
Actions:
Characterize
Hardware Reset Charact Limits View Values View Log
Data View
Collimator Data
Cancel
Utility
Tools
ILLUSTRATION 413 COLLIMATOR DATA Collimator CHARACTERIZATION
Closed: 1mm: 3mm: 5mm: 7mm: 10mm: CRC: 49017:
0 286
Update Table
Cancel
Utility
Tools
Backup
419
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 4105 Hardware Reset
Touch the |Hardware Reset| softkey (Illustration 414) to reset the firmware, including a download of the firmware to the controllers and a download of the characterization/configuration files.
ILLUSTRATION 414 HARDWARE RESET SOFTKEY MECHANICAL CHARACTERIZATION Types Of: Tilt Table Elev Cradle All
Actions:
Characterize
Hardware Reset
Data View
Collima tor Data
Charact Limits
View Values
View Log
Cancel
Utility
Tools
420
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 4106 Characterization Limits
Touch the |Charact Limits| softkey (Illustration 415) to display the limit values for for each of the characterized functions in storage in a disk resident configuration file. The limit values: GANTRY TILT: Minimum = 30_ / Maximum= 30_ TABLE CRADLE: Minimum = 0 inches / Maximum= 67.3 inches (171 cm.) TABLE ELEVATION: Minimum = 1.0 inch (2.54 cm.) / Maximum = 22.7 inches (57.66 cm.)
Note:
Measure table elevation limit distances from iso center.
ILLUSTRATION 415 CHARACTERIZATION LIMITS SOFTKEY MECHANICAL CHARACTERIZATION Types Of: Tilt Table Elev Cradle All
Actions:
Characterize
Hardware Reset
Data View
Collima tor Data
Charact Limits
View Values
View Log
Cancel
Utility
Tools
421

ILLUSTRATION 416 CHARACTERIZATION LIMITS MECHANICAL CHARACTERIZATION LIMITS
MIN Tilt: Cradle: Elevation: 30.0 0.0 22.7
MAX 30.0 Degrees 67.3 in 1.0 in (Distance from ISOCenter)
Cancel
Utility
Tools
Mach Charact
4107
View Values
The system stores all characterization values in disk files. Touch the |View Values| softkey, shown in Illustration 417, to display the current disk resident table containing the characterization values for each of the functions (e.g., table elevation, gantry tilt, etc.). In addition to the characterization values for gantry tilt, table elevation and table cradle position, the table displays the max/min limits for encoder counts (elevation and cradle) and the limits for the cradle and tilt pot outputs (in counts). The data shows the last change for the respective function.
422

ILLUSTRATION 417 VIEW VALUES SOFTKEY MECHANICAL CHARACTERIZATION Types Of: Tilt Table Elev Cradle
All
Actions:
Characterize
Hardware Reset
Data View
Collima tor Data
Charact Limits
View Values
View Log
Cancel
Utility
Tools
ILLUSTRATION 418 MECHANICAL CHARACTERIZATION VALUES MECHANICAL CHARACTERIZATION VALUES TILT POSITION TABLE ELEVATION POS MIN MAX Distance from ISO center: CRADLE POS MIN MAX Alignment Lights Cancel Backup Actual Distance Cradle Pot Actual Limits Cradle Encoder Actual Limits Low High Actual Limits
Elevation Encoder Values Actual Limits Low High
First
Prior
Next
Last
Dump To IP
423
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 4108 View Log
Touch the |View Log| softkey (Illustration 419) to display the characterization log. The characterization tool builds a log as it executes to provide a characterization program history. The following events result in a log entry: Characterization program entry and exit Characterization file modified Characterization file downloaded
The View Log feature displays the event messages and the time associated with the respective event.
ILLUSTRATION 419 VIEW LOG SOFTKEY MECHANICAL CHARACTERIZATION Types Of: Tilt Table Elev Hardware Reset Charact Limits View Values View Log Cradle All
Actions:
Characterize
Data View
Collima tor Data
Cancel
Utility
Tools
ILLUSTRATION 420 MECHANICAL CHARACTERIZATION LOG MECHANICAL CHARACTERIZATION LOG >>> 1 >>> 09/29/94 12:30 PM >>> MECH CHAR Begin Mechanical Characterization >>> 2 >>> 09/29/94 12:36 PM >>> MECH CHAR Hardware reset has failed >>> 3 >>> 09/29/94 12:39 PM >>> MECH CHAR End Mechanical Characterization >>> 4>>> 09/29/94 02:25 PM >>> MECH CHAR Begin Mechanical Characterization >>> 5 >>> 09/29/94 02:26 PM >>> MECH CHAR End Mechanical Characterization >>>6 >>> 09/29/94 02:27 PM >>> MECH CHAR Begin Mechanical Characterization Cancel Backup First Prior Next Last Dump To IP
424
CHAPTER 5 HV SUBSYSTEM MAINTENANCE
51
Access CT Tools Touch the |CT Tools| softkey at the Utilities Main Men, Illustration 51, and go to the next page.
ILLUSTRATION 51 CT TOOLS SOFTKEY
MESSAGES
UTILITIES
NETWORK
DIAGS STATUS
FILMING
UTILITIES MAIN Diags and Tools Diags CT Tools
System Access
Shell
System Tools
Service Notepad
Shutdown
Cancel
52
Generator Characterization Illustration 52 shows the Tool Selections Menu containing the Generator Characterization Program used to set up and calibrate the generator hardware to accurately generate xrays at the given kV/mA. Use the Generator Characterization Program to update the small spot and large spot characterization files to provide a starting point for the closed loop mode of the generator. This is an iterative process which takes several scans at a different KV/MA/spot size, calculates corrections, repeats the scan until the results are within tolerance and then updates the characterization file.
51

ILLUSTRATION 52 SELECT GENERATOR CHARACTERIZATION
TOOL SELECTIONS Install Calibrate Mechncal Charact Genrator Charact Tube Align Heat Soak & Season
System Perform
Detector Slope
List Select
Images
Patient Scans
Diag Scans
DD Files
CALS
DAS Tools
DDC
Scan Analysis
DD File Analysis
Cal Plot
Utility Functions
File Manager
Scan File Manager
Cancel
Utility
Touch the |Genrator Charact| softkey, shown in Illustration 52, to display the Generator Characterization Menu (Illustration 53). The dashed boxes indicate the |Manual HVPS| and |Auto HVPS Cal| softkeys are inactive.
52

ILLUSTRATION 53 GENERATOR CHARACTERIZATION MENU
GENERATOR CHARACTERIZATION
Calibration
Install New Tube Read Metering
Manual HVPS Cal
Manual mA Cal
Auto HVPS Cal
Auto mA Cal
Data Viewing
View Cal Data
View Cal Log
INACTIVE
Cancel
Utility
Tools
Monitor Enable
53
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 521 kV Meter Verification
Touch the |Read Metering| softkey (Illustration 54). This section describes the calibration check of the systems internal kV metering circuits.
ILLUSTRATION 54 GENERATOR CHARACTERIZATION MENU
GENERATOR CHARACTERIZATION
Calibration
Install New Tube Read Metering
Manual HVPS Cal
Manual mA Cal
Auto HVPS Cal
Auto mA Cal
Data Viewing
View Cal Data
View Cal Log
Cancel
Utility
Tools
Monitor Enable
Touch the |Run| softkey (Illustration 55) to start the test. During the test, the firmware reads the metering circuits in the OFF state, then reads the metering circuits in the ON state and finally reports the readings to the plasma display. Illustration 55 shows the displayed Anode kV, Cathode kV and Total kV values for Circuit OFF and Circuit ON. Compare the data in the Delta column on the Read Meter screen (Illustration 55) to the data in the Limit column. Note: Delta = DVM A/D.
54
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 Generator Characterization test specifications: Circuit OFF Anode kV = 0 0.5 Cathode kV = 0 0.5 Total kV = 0 0.5 Circuit ON Anode kV = 50 7.5 Cathode kV = 50 7.5 Total kV = 100 15.0
ILLUSTRATION 55 READ METER SCREEN
READ METERING
DVM Anode KV: _____ Cathode KV: _____ Total KV: _____ Anode MA: _____ Cathode MA: _____
A/D xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x
OFF Delta xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x
Limit xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x
DVM _____ _____ _____ _____ _____
ON A/D xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x
Delta xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x
Limi xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x
Current Readings Anode KV Off: xxx.x On: xxx.x
Cathode KV xxx.x xxx.x
Total KV xxx.x xxx.x
Anode mA Cathode mA xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x xxx.x
Run Enter Time Delay in Seconds: 5
Cancel
Utility
Tools
Gen Cal
55
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 522 mA Meter Verification
This section describes the calibration check of the systems internal mA metering circuits.
DANGER
NEVER PUT ANY BODY PART INTO THE GANTRY WITHOUT DISABLING THE AXIAL DRIVE AND VERIFYING THAT IT IS DISABLED. BOTH OF THE AXIAL DRIVE STATUS LEDS (ILL. 56) MUST BE OUT. DO NOT SERVICE THE GANTRY IF EITHER LED IS ON. FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL HARM, HARM TO OTHERS OR DEATH. BE SURE THAT YOU HAVE READ DIRECTION 46018302, CT HISPEED ADVANTAGE SAFETY GUIDELINE MANUAL OR HAVE VIEWED 46018308 SAFETY VIDEO TAPE PRIOR TO SERVICING THE GANTRY
ILLUSTRATION 56 AXIAL DRIVE STATUS AND CONTROL
AXIAL DRIVE STATUS LEDS AXIAL LOOP CONTACTOR CLOSED 550 BACKUP CONTACTOR CLOSED GANTRY 120VAC CONTACTOR CLOSED GANTRY STATUS DISPLAY PANEL
AXIAL DRIVE ENABLE SWITCH
AXIAL DRIVE ENABLE ON
550VDC ENABLE ON
GANTRY 120VAC ENABLE ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
CAUTION: DISABLES TUBE COOLING
CT3529A
56
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 6 Inside the Gantry:
Switch OFF the 550v (HVDC) enable (Illustration 56) Switch OFF the axial drive. Rotate the Anode tank to the 2 oclock position. Pin the Gantry.
Touch the |Read Metering| softkey on the Generator Characterization Menu. (Illustration 53) Note: On the plasma enter a time delay in seconds, this delay is the time required for you to walk from the console to the DVM and record the reading. The test will not begin until this time delay has expired. Once the test begins the meter circuit will be enabled for only 4 seconds. Use a DVM as an mA meter; connect it to the hardware on the anode side: Connect its black lead to TP8 (ACAL1) on the mA board. Connect its red lead to TP11 (ACAL2) on the mA board.
Locate the Anode HV Tank Measurement board (Illustration 57 ). If a wire from the harness is present on TP5, the following test lead is not required. If no wire is present, install a test lead as follows: Use a jumper with a 68 ohm 5 watt resistor in series. Connect one end to TP11 (ACAL 2) on the mA board. Connect the other end to TP5 on the Anode Tank Measurement board (Illustration 57).
On the Plasma, touch the |Run| softkey. Record the displayed and measured Anode mA values in for Circuit OFF and Circuit ON. Note: If your system has the test wire to TP5 included in the harness, the Cathode side should read approximately 19mA during Circuit On. Note: Disconnect the test equipment from the Anode side if used.
When you exit Utilities, this test generates Kv board tube spit counter = x error messages.
57

ILLUSTRATION 57 ANODE TANK MEASUREMENT BOARD & OBC CARD CAGE
Measurement Board J5 J1
OBC Board Slot Assignments
Collimator CTVRC J 6 MA Control KV Control Gentry I/O RCOM Heurikon (CPU)
J 2 TP5
C14
Repeat for the Cathode side. Use a DVM as an mA meter: Connect its black lead to TP9 (CCAL1) on the mA board. Connect its red lead to TP14 (CCAL2) on the mA board.
Locate the Cathode HV Tank Measurement board (Illustration 57). If a wire from the harness is present on TP5, the following test lead is not required. If no wire is present, install a test lead as follows: Use a jumper with a 68 ohm 5 watt resistor in series. Connect one end to TP14 (CCAL 2) on the mA board. Connect the other end to TP5 on the Cathode Tank Measurement board (Illustration 57).
On the Plasma, touch the |Run| softkey. Record the displayed and measured Anode mA values for Circuit OFF and Circuit ON. Note: If your system has the test wire to TP5 included in the harness, the Anode side should read approximately 20mA during Circuit On. Note: Disconnect the test equipment from the Cathode side if used.
When you exit Utilities, this test generates Kv board tube spit counter = x error messages.
58
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 7 523 Set CalSeed Values
Use the following sequence to run a partial Install New Tube. Use this procedure to set the calseed values on a new system. At the Generator Characterization Menu, touch the |Install New Tube| softkey. The system prompts you to verify the tube type. Verify the number corresponds to your tube type, answer y (yes) or n (no):
TABLE 51 TUBE TYPE TABLE
SOFTWARE TOKEN 1RSN_2001 2RSN_2000 5MX_135CT 6MX_165CT 7MX_165CT_I
HOUSING # ST2000 ST2000 46274800G1 46309500G2 46309500G2
INSERT # RS2001 RS2000 46274600G1 46309300G1 46309300G2
Press Start Scan when it illuminates. The system automatically runs the program and updates the display: seed filament current shift scans Note: Note: ABORT the program after the seed filament current shift scans and before the ductility warmup. The system automatically resets the CalSeed values during the Tube Warmup program.
524
Calibrate HV Tank Feedback Resistors Install HV Divider (reference Section 529).
5241
Anode and Cathode Calibration Note: Verify which type of kV board is installed in the OBC. Names of components on the 46321064G1 kV board are shown without brackets. Names of components on the 46321198G1 kV board are shown in [brackets]. Perform the following, steps using an oscilloscope with 10X probes. (If possible, plug the scope into the 120 VAC outlet on the PDU. Use an extension cord if necessary. Plugging the scope into this outlet reduces noise seen on the waveforms.) Connect channel one to the anode output of the divider. Scope ground to bleeder ground. Connect channel two to the cathode output of the divider. Scope ground to bleeder ground. Trigger channel one, positive, DC couple, trigger mode normal. Channel one and two, 10v/div, time base 200ms. Invert Channel two.
Display the Generator Characterization menu (Illustration 53) and toggle the MONITOR ENABLE softkey to ON to display the kV and mA readings in the message log.
59
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 F Cathode Calibration
In DDC take a 1 second, static, 0mm, exposure at 100kV/50mA. Use the large focal spot. Note: The computer displayed reading spec for the Cathode kV and Anode kV is 50 0.5 kV. Compare the scope reading for the average Cathode kV and the displayed Cathode kV in the message log. Note: Use the scope cursors to window the trace. Position the Left Vertical Cursor to the Right of the Rising Edge of the waveform and position the Right Vertical Cursor to the Left of the Falling Edge of the Waveform. Adjust the Cathode pot on the kV Board until the scope reading for the Cathode kV and the displayed reading for the Cathode kV in the message log are within 0.5kV of each other. Note: The pot labeled CA [CAKV, R316] on the kV board adjusts the scope reading: CCW decreases the scope kV. CW increases the scope kV. 1/2 turn equals approximately 0.5 kV. Record the scope reading for the Cathode kV and the displayed reading for the Cathode kV (message log). F Anode Calibration In DDC take a 1 second, static, 0mm, exposure at 100kV/50mA. Use the large focal spot. Compare the scope reading for the average Anode kV and the displayed Anode kV in the message log. Note: Use the scope cursors to window the trace. Position the Left Vertical Cursor to the Right of the Rising Edge of the waveform and position the Right Vertical Cursor to the Left of the Falling Edge of the Waveform. Adjust the Anode pot on the kV board until the scope reading for the Anode kV and the displayed reading for the Anode kV in the message log are within 0.5kV of each other. Note: The pot labeled AN [ANKV, R318] on the kV board adjusts the scope reading: CCW decreases the scope kV. CW increases the scope kV. 1/2 turn equals approximately 0.5 kV. Record the scope reading for the Anode kV and the displayed reading for the Anode kV (message log).
510
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 5242 Total kV Measurement
To measure the total kV, first change the oscilloscope to add ch.1 and ch.2 (to read total kV from the HV divider) and set channel one and two for 20v/div, time base 200ms, trigger ch. one, positive Then proceed as follows: In DDC take a 1 second, static, 0mm, exposure at 100kV/50mA using large focal spot. Record the scope reading and Avg. kV as displayed in the message log. Display the Generator Characterization menu and toggle the Monitor Enable softkey OFF, to no longer display the kV and mA readings in the message log. Failure to turn the Monitor Enable OFF results in the system message log filling with exposure information.
5243
kV Meter Verification Display the Generator Characterization menu (illustration 54) and touch |Read Metering|, then touch |Run| (illustration 55) Record the displayed Anode kV, Cathode kV, and Total kV values.
Remove the external HV Divider (Section 5210).
511
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 525 Install New Tube Program
Use this program to complete Auto mA Cal on a new tube. Run this program only on a new tube. Display the Generator Characterization Menu and touch the |Install New Tube| softkey. Note: The system automatically warms up the tube. The system prompts you with the tube type. Verify the number corresponds to your tube type, answer y or n.
TABLE 52 TUBE TYPE TABLE
SOFTWARE TOKEN 1RSN_2001 2RSN_2000 5MX_135CT 6MX_165CT 7MX_165CT_I
HOUSING # ST2000 ST2000 46274800G1 46309500G2 46309500G2
INSERT # RS2001 RS2000 46274600G1 46309300G1 46309300G2
Press Start Scan when it illuminates. The system automatically runs the program and updates the display: seed filament current shift scans Ductility warmup Auto mA Cal The system will record the final filament currents on the plasma. 526 Auto mA Calibration Run this program for replacement tubes or if there is need to recalibrate. At the Generator Characterization Menu, touch the |Auto mA Cal| softkey. Note: A tube warmup is performed automatically. Press Start Scan when illuminated, the program will now run automatically; Ductility warmup Auto mA Cal The system will record the final filament currents on the plasma.
512
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 527 kV Rise and Fall Times Note:
Names of components on the 46321198G1 kV board are shown on this page in [brackets]. In the OBC connect a scope to the KV board as follows: Channel 1, Exposure Command (EXCM, TP22). Scope ground to (LGND, TP6) [TP3]. 2v/div Channel 2, Total kV (KVTB, TP30) [TP11]. Scope ground to (AGND, TP39) [SIG, TP12]. 1v/div Set the Scope Time base to 200usec. Positive or Negative trigger as required.
Use DDC to acquire a Stationary, 1.0 sec scan, 0mm aperture, Large Focal Spot scan at the techniques listed in Table 53.
Record the delay between rise / fall of the EXCM signal and the 75% threshold crossing of the selected kV. Do not include overshoot of the waveform. Note: The 75% point for:
80kV is 60kV 100kV is 75kV 120kV is 90kV 140kV is 105kV

TABLE 53 KV RISE AND FALL TIME RECORD TABLE
Technic kV 80 100 120 140 mA 40 400 40 400 40 400 40 340 Note:
Rise Record Delay ms Limit 0 +1.9ms 0 +1.9ms 0 +1.9ms 0 +1.9ms 0 +1.9ms 0 +1.9ms 0 +1.9ms 0 +1.9ms
Fall Record Delay ms Limit 0 +2ms 0 +0.5ms 0 +2ms 0 +0.5ms 0 +2ms 0 +0.5ms 0 +2ms 0 +0.5ms
See Illustration 58 for clarification of measurement.
513

ILLUSTRATION 58 RISE AND FALL TIME MEASUREMENT
RISE TIME EXAMPLE 80kV/40mA Ch.1 TP 22 EXCM [TP5]
Names of components on the 46321198G1 kV board are shown on this page in [brackets].
RISE TIME 75% OF SELECTED TECHNIC
Ch.2 TP 30 KVTB [TP11]
0% XRAY
FALL TIME EXAMPLE 80kV/40mA Ch.1 TP 22 EXCM [TP5]
Names of components on the 46321198G1 kV board are shown on this page in [brackets]. FALL TIME
100% XRAY
75% OF SELECTED TECHNIC
Ch.2 TP 30 KVTB [TP11]
514
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 6 528 Verify Internal Scan Timer
Display the Generator Characterization menu (illustration 53). Toggle the softkey |Monitor Enable| to ON, to display the scan time in the message log. In the OBC connect a scope to the KV board as follows: Channel 1, Exposure Command (EXCM, TP22). Scope ground to (LGND, TP6) [TP3]. 2v/div Channel 2, Total kV (KVTB, TP30) [TP11]. Scope ground to (AGND, TP39) [SIG, TP12]. 1v/div Set the Scope Time base to 200msec, positive trigger.
Use DDC to take a stationary, 1.0 sec, 0mm, 100kV, 40mA, Large Focal Spot scan. Record the measured scan time from the oscilloscope and the displayed scan time from the message log. Spec limits are as follows:
Note: Note:
Scope Exposure Duration = 0.96 to 1.04 s. Displayed Exposure Duration = 0.99 to 1.02 s. Display the Generator Characterization menu (illustration 53) and toggle the Monitor Enable softkey OFF, to no longer display the kV and mA readings in the message log. Failure to turn the Monitor Enable OFF results in the system message log filling with exposure information. Disconnect the scope from the kV board and replace the OBC cover.
529
Install HV Divider Inside the Gantry: Switch OFF the 550v (HVDC) enable. Switch OFF the axial drive enable. Rotate the Tube to the 3 oclock position Pin the Gantry. Switch off the 120 vac Gantry power. Install HV Divider between Tube and Tanks (Illustration 59). Add ground wire (minimum size of AWG 12) from Tube ground to Bleeder ground (Illustration 59).
WARNING:
CLEAN UP ANY SPILLED INSULATING OIL FROM THE FLOOR OR EQUIPMENT!
515
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 A table or a tube hoist for the HV Divider will be necessary to make the cables reach. Switch on the 120vac Gantry power. Switch on the 550v (HVDC) enable.
ILLUSTRATION 59 HV DIVIDER INSTALLATION
GROUND WIRE
GRN
CATHODE CABLE TO GANTRY
CATHODE C 10 H.V. CABLES ANODE C1515A DIVIDER ANODE CABLE TO GANTRY A

C G A
C A Oscilloscope Connection
TUBE
WARNING: 5210
Clean up any spilled insulating oil from the floor or equipment! Remove the external HV Divider: Switch off XRay and Drives power by pressing the Emergency OFF button on the Gantry Mounted Table controls or by pressing the XRay and Drives OFF on the REM box.
Inside the gantry (refer to illustration 56): Switch OFF the 550v (HVDC) enable. Switch OFF the 120vac gantry power. Remove the HV Divider between the Tube and Tanks (Illustration 59). Reconnect the HV cables for normal operation. Reapply paper toweling around tube locking ring to absorb excess oil. Unpin the gantry. Switch on the 120vac gantry power.
516
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 Switch ON the the 550v (HVDC) enable. Switch ON the Axial Drive enable. Switch on XRay and Drives power by pressing the Reset button on the Gantry Mounted Table controls or by pressing the XRay and Drives ON on the REM box. Reset the hardware from the plasma.
53 Tube Usage Statistics
The display tool, tubeUsage, displays a list of currently viewable tube usage files. The system stores these files when you save the mechanical characterization. Open a shell to use this tool. Touch the |Shell| softkey at the Utilities Main Menu (Illustration 510) to open and display a unix shell. Type tubeUsage in the shell.
ILLUSTRATION 510 SHELL SOFTKEY
MESSAGES
UTILITIES
NETWORK
DIAGS STATUS
FILMING
Shell
System Tools
Service Notepad
Shutdown
Cancel
The shell window displays a tube list, with the corresponding installation dates.
517
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 root @ RPXX2_OC0 2: tubeUsage Tube Date Installed Tube Date Installed 1 Wed Oct 5 20:06:11 1994 2 Fri Jul 29 22:00:55 1994 3 Tue Jun 28 20:42:02 1994 c Cumulative Statistics q Quit Choose the tube to display the following: tube to view:1 Hospital: Name Address Suite: RPXX2 Installed: Wed Oct 5 20:06:11 CDT 1994 Removed: Last Scan: Thu Jan 5 08:29:17 CST 1995 Housing Model #: 46309500G2 Housing Serial #: 89851EC0 Insert Model #: 46309300G2 Insert Serial #: 316778TU0 Failure Code: Mode: Patient Scans Number Slices: 52805 (total gantry rotations with Xray on) Number KW Slices: 89761 (count 1 slice for <=24kW, 2 slices for >24kW scans) KW Hours: 495.66 (total Kilowatt usage for an hour) Scan Seconds: 69785.19 (total number of seconds of scanning) (1) Mode: NonPatient Scans Number Slices: 8074 (total gantry rotations with Xray on) Number KW Slices: 8501 (count 1 slice for <=24kW, 2 slices for >24kW scans) KW Hours: 45.23 (total Kilowatt usage for an hour) Scan Seconds: 11302.74 (total number of seconds of scanning) After the first tube change with an RP1.4 software (or later release), the tube usage screen displays the following information: Mode: Patient Scans Number Slices: 52805 (total gantry rotations with Xray on) Number KW Slices: 89761 (count 1 slice for <=24kW, 2 slices for >24kW scans) KW Hours: 495.66 (total Kilowatt usage for an hour) Scan Seconds: 69785.19 (total number of seconds of scanning) (1) Mode: NonPatient Scans Number Slices: 8074 (total gantry rotations with Xray on) Number KW Slices: 8501 (count 1 slice for <=24kW, 2 slices for >24kW scans) KW Hours: 45.23 (total Kilowatt usage for an hour) Scan Seconds: 11302.74 (total number of seconds of scanning)
518
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 Mode: Patient Scans Smart mA Number Slices: 52805 (total gantry rotations with X-ray on) Number KW Slices: 89761 (count 1 slice for <=24kW, 2 slices for >24kW scans) KW Hours: 400.54 (total Kilowatt usage for an hour) Scan Seconds: 69785.19 (total number of seconds of scanning) (1) Mode: Non-Patient Scans Smart mA Number Slices: 8074 (total gantry rotations with X-ray on) Number KW Slices: 8501 (count 1 slice for <=24kW, 2 slices for >24kW scans) KW Hours: 45.23 (total Kilowatt usage for an hour) Scan Seconds: 11302.74 (total number of seconds of scanning) The Smart mA information duplicates the non Smart mA information, except the kW Hours indicates any reduction in power due to SmartScan use.
5-4
Change Tube Program Run this program when you change the tube. Note: Words in bold type followed by <ENTER> means to type that word and then press the ENTER key, e.g. su <ENTER>, means to type the word su and then press the ENTER key. <angles> This type indicates that a value is DIFFERENT THAN INDICATED IN THIS DOCUMENT, BUT WITHIN THE CONTEXT OF THE PROMPT. Also represents a function key e.g. <ENTER> means you must press the ENTER key. Open a shell and enter the following unix commands: genesis @ <suiteID>_OC0: sd -i <ENTER> (Shuts down to unix level). genesis @ <suiteID>_OC0: su <ENTER> password: #bigguy <ENTER> root @ <suiteID>_OC0: changeTube <ENTER> Proceed as follows: Enter failure code for removed tube. From the menu on the screen enter the number which corresponds to your tube type. Enter tube casing serial number. Enter tube insert serial number.
From OC0 root prompt, Control D, to exit back to genesis. Bring up applications as follows: root @ <suiteID>_OC0: st <ENTER>
519
Notes:
520
CHAPTER 6 PDU MAINTENANCE
61
PDU Safety Warning
DANGER
EXERCISE EXTREME CARE WHEN SERVICING THE PDU. 480 VAC AND OTHER LETHAL VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT AT VARIOUS POINTS WITHIN THE PDU AT ALL TIMES. THEREFORE, CONSIDER ALL POINTS WITHIN THE PDU TO BE ELECTRICALLY HAZARDOUS. DO NOT PERFORM ANY WORK IN THE PDU UNLESS IT IS DEENERGIZED. FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH.
DANGER
IN ADDITION, DO NOT WORK ON THE PDU UNTIL YOU HAVE EITHER READ DIRECTION 46018302, CT HISPEED ADVANTAGE SAFETY GUIDELINES MANUAL OR HAVE VIEWED THE CT HISPEED ADVANTAGE SAFETY VIDEO. FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH. (FOR 1.X SYSTEMS ONLY.) Verify all personnel have cleared the system before you turn on the wall power. The CT Compact PDU, part number 2133533, generates unregulated high voltage direct current that ranges between 450 and 750VDC. This document refers to this PDU voltage as HVDC.
CAUTION
61
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 62 PDU Major Component Locations
Illustration 61 shows the PDU component area designators. This manual uses the component designators as abbreviations for the various components. For example, we refer to the Circuit Breaker Panel as the A3 panel.
ILLUSTRATION 61 PDU AREA DESIGNATORS
PDU
DCRGS Detail A A2 Panel A6 Panel Servo Amplifier Assy. Detail B A1 Panel Fuses A5 Panel
Control Bd
Power Distribution
Power Input Detail D A3 Panel
A4 Panel Detail C I/O

DCRGS= Direct Current ReGulated Supply.
62
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 6 621 PDU 2133533 Area Designators
ILLUSTRATION 62 PDU 2133533 AREA DESIGNATORS
SERVO AMPLIFIER ASSEMBLY A1 PANEL
PDU CONTROL BOARD A6 PANEL
TRANSFORMER ASSEMBLY (in back) A5 PANEL

AC POWER DISTRIBUTION A3 PANEL HVDC SUPPLY A2 PANEL
INPUT POWER A3 PANEL OUTPUT CONNECTORS BULKHEAD A4 PANEL
63
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 63 Ground Bus Continuity
If problems arise which point to a possible system grounding problem, perform a ground continuity check as follows: a. Remove front cover from PDU A3 (circuit breaker) panel (Ill. 61) b. Remove ribbon cable connector from DCRGS. c. Verify less than 1 ohm of resistance between the following ground connections: D D D D D Wall ground connection and PDU cabinet PDU A2 chassis to the PDU cabinet PDU A3TS5 busbar to the PDU cabinet PDU A4TS3 busbar to the PDU cabinet PDU A5TS1 busbar to the PDU cabinet
d. Reconnect DCRGS ribbon cable connector e. Leave PDU A3 cover (circuit breaker) panel off for now.
64
Line Transformer Settings Use this section to verify or to change transformer settings.
WARNING
TURN OFF, TAG AND LOCK MAIN WALL POWER BEFORE CHANGING TAPS. FAILURE TO DISCONNECT POWER AT MAIN INPUT MAY RESULT IN ELECTROCUTION.
CAUTION
Do not touch meter or leads when wall power is on.
Measure linetoline voltages at A5PT4, PT5, and PT6, using a 0750 AC voltmeter of #@4% accuracy. Verify that the highest linetoline voltage does not exceed 1.02 times the lowest voltage. For example, if the lowest voltage is 474, the highest voltage allowed would be 474 x 1.02 = 483.5 volts. Refer to Table 61. Determine the nearest nominal line and verify the correct tap connections. Verify that the No Load Line to Line Voltage never exceeds the corresponding maximum or minimum values listed in the Table. Note: If input power is not 480v 38 volts, install a B7997T System Isolation Transformer in line with the 480 volt input power to the DCRGS. Direction 46018307 describes the installation and setup of the isolation transformer.
64

TABLE 61 LINE TAP CONNECTION TABLE FOR PDU 46327106G1
NO LOAD LINE TO LINE VOLTAGES PREFERRED RANGE (+/ 5%) MAXIMUM RANGE (+/ 8%)
TAP CONNECTIONS (All 3 phases must be same configuration) PHASE A CONNECTION 16 15 26 25 36 35 46 45 PHASE B CONNECTION 16 15 26 25 36 35 46 45 PHASE C CONNECTION 16 15 26 25 36 35 46 45
NOMINAL
500V 480V 460V 440V 420V 400V 380V 360V
475 to 525 456 to 504 437 to 483 418 to 462 399 to 441 380 to 420 361 to 399 342 to 378
460 to 540 442 to 518 424 to 496 405 to 475 387 to 453 368 to 432 350 to 410 332 to 388
65

TABLE 62 LINE TAP CONNECTION TABLE FOR PDU 2113764
NO LOAD LINE TO LINE VOLTAGES NOMINAL 480V 460V 440V 420V 400V 380V 360V MAXIMUM RANGE (+/ 8%) 442 to 518 423 to 497 405 to 475 386 to 454 368 to 432 350 to 410 331 to 389
TAP CONNECTIONS PHASE A CONNECTION 46 35 36 26 37 27 28
66
HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358100
CHAPTER 7 DAS MAINTENANCE
71
XRay Verification This section tests for opens, lows and shorts using XRay. System configuration should be: D D D Flex cables ON All covers ON Nothing in detector FOV
72
DDC Scanning Display the Utilities Main Menu and touch |CT Tools| to display the Tools Selection Menu: a. Touch the |DDC| softkey (Diagnostic Data Collection) on the plasma display. b. Touch the |Real Time Stats| softkey. c. Touch the |Static XRay On| softkey.
d. Press the [RETURN] key on the keyboard until you highlight the Scan Time field. Type/enter 4 second scan time. e. Use default technique values of 40 mA and 80 kV. f. Touch the |Air| Filter softkey.
g. Touch the |5|(mm) Aperture softkey. h. Touch the |Small| Spot Size softkey. i. j. k. l. Type/enter a Run Description name (arbitrary). Touch the |Accept Rx| softkey and wait for the Start Scan LED on the keyboard to illuminate. Press the the Start Scan key to initiate the scan. After the scan, the plasma displays the DD filename. Record the filename. Touch the |Backup| softkey.
m. Touch the |Tools| softkey to return to the Tools Selection Menu.
71
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 73 Data Plot
Display the Utilities Main Menu and touch |CT Tools| to display the Tools Selection Menu: a. Touch the |DD File Analysis| softkey. b. Touch the |DD| softkey to select the most recent scan. c. The |Type/Print or Plot| softkey is already highlighted.
d. Touch the |Continue| softkey. e. Touch the |Plot| softkey for the output device. Note: Verify that the first channel is 1 and the total channels equal 764. f. Touch the |Means| softkey.
g. Touch the |Continue| softkey. h. Touch the |Line| softkey. i.

TABLE 71 VALUES FOR DAS CHANNELS
Touch the |Plot| softkey.
EDAS Channels 664 Channels 689747 Channels 65688 66,00081,000 66,00081,000 35,00044,000
HP DAS 25,000112,500 25,000112,500 10,00065,000
72
CHAPTER 8 SYSTEM ALIGNMENTS
81
Overview This section describes the procedures for attaining the xray alignment specifications. The critical components for alignment are the tube unit, collimator, and the detector. Follow these procedures to align the XRay system. Plane of Rotation Adjust tube into or out of the gantry (Zaxis). Adjust collimator rotation. Beam on Window Adjust detector into or out of the gantry (Zaxis). Tube Output and Detector Channel Check A limit check, no adjustments. Radial Alignment Adjust detector CW or CCW. Isocenter Alignment Adjust tube up/down (Yaxis). Center Body Filter and System Sag Adjust collimator and filter up/down (Yaxis). Calculate Sag parameters. (no adjustments).
Note:
Use the Large focal spot for all alignments, except ISO, which uses both Large and Small spots.
81
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 82 Plane Of Rotation (POR)
This procedure checks and adjusts the plane of rotation of the xray fan beam to make it perpendicular to the axis of gantry rotation within 0.010 (0.25mm) across the largest reconstruction circle (48cm). This procedure offsets the fan beam to account for the slight shift that occurs with heating of the xray tube.
CAUTION
Verify that the tube unit is cold. If you have executed any low technique scans prior to beginning plane of rotation (POR), you must wait at least 5 minutes before attempting this alignment procedure. If you have previously executed image scanning and would like to recheck POR, you must wait at least 90 minutes to allow the tube unit to cool, e.g., if the tube unit has had greater than 25 Kilojoules exposure KV x mA x Sec /1000 within the last 30 min. Failure to heed this caution may result in inaccurate POR alignment POR Procedure: 1. Place the phantom holder and 48cm phantom on the cradle. 2. Tape a type 52 film at the 3 oclock position on the outside edge of the 48cm phantom, so that the film projects into the gantry as shown in Illustration 81. Position the side of the film marked This side toward lens toward isocenter. When exposed and developed, the film shows the alignment of the two beams, with the table at the left, as viewed with the XRay tube at the 3 oclock position. 3. Turn on the alignment lights, advance the cradle and position the film for an exposure near the image center mark on the film pack. 4. Display the Utilities Main Menu and touch |CT Tools| to display the Tools Selection Menu. Prepare to scan with DDC: Touch the |DDC| softkey. Touch the |View Compressed| softkey. Touch the |Axial XRay On| softkey. Type/enter POR in the Run Description field. Type/enter 4 (seconds) for Scan Time. Type/enter 0 (degrees) for XRay ON Position. Type/enter 40 in the mA data field. Type/enter 80 in the kV data field. Touch the |10|(mm) Aperture softkey. Touch the |Bowtie| Filter softkey. Touch |Large| Spot Size softkey. Touch |Accept Rx| softkey. Press the (Start Scan) key on the console, when it illuminates, to initiate the scan. Touch the |Tools| softkey to exit DDC.
5. Remove and develop the film. Mark a T on the film to identify the table side as in Illustration 81. Verify that the narrow exposure lies within the wider xray exposure.
82
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 Examine the edges of the two exposures in the Z direction. Both edges of each beam should be equally well defined with the edges of the narrow beam much sharper than the wide beam. If there is a difference in edge definition, check for gross Z misalignment where the slit in the tube collimator adapter is defining the fuzzy edge. Both edges of the beam should be defined only by the exit slit of the collimator. 6. Measure the 10 mm exposure to determine the plane of rotation. Use a Pocket Comparator with reticle or vernier caliper to measure the two widths of the wide beam not covered by the narrow beam. As shown in Illustration 81, these dimensions are designated as XF(front) and XR(rear). Therefore, the difference in center lines of the two beams is [XFXR]/2. 7. To meet the cold tube conditions and maintain the perpendicularity specification of the fan beam, [XFXR]/2 must fall in the range of 0.0 to 0.010 (0.0 to 0.25mm). XF must be slightly less than XR. If the 10mm beam XF and XR measurements do not meet the specification in step 6, shift the Z position of the xray tube toward the wider of the two beams. By gantry geometry, the tube shift should be 0.26 times the difference between XF and (XR 0.02). In other words, the xray tube needs to be shifted by the formula: Tube Shift = 0.26 [XFXR + 0.02] = 0.26 [XFXR + 0.5mm]
ILLUSTRATION 81 POR SETUP

XF 0.23 XR 0.07 XR 0.14 XF 0.15
48Ccm PE PHANTOM GANTRY TAPE FILM HERE
T
NARROW BEAM TUBE AT 270_ THEA TABLE DIRECTION WIDE BEAM TUBE AT 90_THEA
GANTRY DIRECTION
CT2721A
TABLE
83
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 A positive tube shift moves the tube toward the table, a negative shift towards the gantry. In the example of Illustration 81, the xray tube should be moved toward the table to shift the wide beam to be better centered over the narrow beam. The xray tube should be shifted 0.26(0.230.07 + 0.02)= 0.047 inches. Wait 5 minutes and perform the following for the 1.0mm aperture: 1. Repeat the previous steps for the 1.0mm aperture. 2. Remove and develop the film pack. 3. Since it is difficult to measure beam centering on the 1.0mm aperture plane of rotation, only perform a visual inspection and note the observed findings. Examine the 1.0 mm exposure and check that the edges of the wide beam can be seen on either side of the narrow beam. 4. Attach the exposed film to your site log. When the Plane of Rotation is within specification, tighten the four tube mounting bolts to a torque of 30 3.0 ftlbs. (360 36 inchlbs.).
Note:
Hand tighten the circular knurled nut to prevent the Z adjust lever from rattling loose.
84
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 6 83 Beam On Window (BOW)
This procedure checks and adjusts the position of the detector window so that it intercepts the entire width of the xray fan beam under worst case conditions. This procedure offsets the beam to account for the fan beam shift toward the table that occurs with heating of the xray tube.
WARNING
THERE ARE ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL HAZARDS IN ACCESSING THE GANTRY. BE SURE THAT BOTH THE LOOP CONTACTOR AND GANTRY 550 ENABLE SWITCH ARE OFF PRIOR TO ACCESSING THE GANTRY. ALSO, BE SURE THAT YOU HAVE READ DIRECTION 46018302, CT HISPEED ADVANTAGE SAFETY GUIDELINES MANUAL OR HAVE VIEWED 46018308 CT HISPEED ADVANTAGE SAFETY VIDEO PRIOR TO SERVICING THESE SUBSYSTEMS.
CAUTION
Verify that the tube unit is cold. If you have executed any low technique scans prior to beginning beam on window (BOW), you must wait at least 5 minutes before attempting this alignment procedure. If you have previously executed image scanning and would like to recheck BOW, you must wait at least 30 minutes to allow the tube unit to cool, e.g., if the tube unit has had greater than 25 Kilojoules exposure KV x mA x Sec /1000 within the last 30 min. Failure to heed this caution may result in inaccurate BOW alignment.
BOW Procedure: 1. Display the Tools Selection Menu and use the DDC function to move the tube to 0azimuth position: Touch the |DDC| softkey on the plasma. Touch the |POSITION TUBE| softkey. Enter 0 in the tube position entry field and press carriage return. Message appears saying Is gantry clear?. If gantry is clear, select yes.
2. Turn OFF the gantry loop contactor switch and the Gantry 550v (HVDC) enable switch. The XRay tube should remain in the gantry 12 oclock position, (0tube position). 3. With the detector at the six oclock position, place three pieces of Polaroid film on the detector as shown in Illustration 82. Orient the film with the side marked This side toward lens toward the detector.
85

ILLUSTRATION 82 BEAM ON WINDOW FILM POSITIONING
86
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 4. Butt the metal strip on the film tightly against the rotating base of the gantry. 5. Make a small pencil mark on both sides of the film at the edge of the detector window closest to the table. 6. Note the position of each film and remove all three pieces of film. Press heavily on the film and draw a line on the film between the marks you made previously. This line must show on the film after it is developed. 7. Place the films back in their positions on the detector. Verify that the pencil marks of step 6 align with the detector window. Secure with masking tape. 8. With the film properly positioned on the detector, place both the loop contactor switch and the Gantry 550v (HVDC) enable switch in the gantry to the ON position. 9. Display the Utilities Main Menu and touch |CT Tools| to display the Tools Selection Menu. Prepare for a stationary scan with DDC: Touch the |DDC| softkey. Touch the |Position Tube| softkey. Type/enter 0 (degrees) in the XRay On Position data field. Message appears: Is gantry clear?. If gantry is clear, select yes. Touch the |Data Collection| softkey. Touch the |Real Time Stat| softkey. Touch the |Static XRay On| softkey. Type/enter BOW in the Run Description data field. Type/enter 2 in Scan Time data field. Type/enter the 40 in mA data field. Type/enter 80 in kV data field. Touch the |1| (mm) Aperture softkey. Touch the |Air| Filter softkey. Touch the |Accept Rx| softkey. Touch the |Start Scan| softkey when prompted. Touch the |Tools| softkey to exit DDC.
10. Refer to Illustration 82. Make two lines on the exposed films: One line exactly 1/16 inch (1.6mm) from the first line toward the gantry, another line exactly 1.24 (31.5mm) from the second line. 11. The center of the XRay beam must be toward the gantry on the detector window. The xray beam center (CL EXPOSURE) must be within 0.00472 inches to 0.03465 inches (0.12 to 0.88 mm) of the detector window center but displaced toward the Gantry, as shown in Illustration 82. 12. After the scan completes, remove and develop the films. Be sure to mark them to remember their relative positions. Use a vernier caliper or pocket comparator with mm or inch scale reticle to measure the difference between these center lines. Measure the two edges between the exposure and the window. If these dimensions are XF(front) and XR(rear) the center line difference equals: XF XR 2
87
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 To meet specification, use the following formula: XF XR = 0.04 0.015 inches or XF XR = 1.0 0.4 mm If adjustment is required, proceed as follows: a. Loosen all three of the detector mounting nuts, even if only one or two need adjustment. b. Loosen only the adjustment locking nuts on the mounts which require adjustment. c. Turn the mounting studs the specified number of flats to bring the detector into alignment. Use the locking nut as a reference for the number of flats.
Note:
Adjust the detector hardware CW to move the detector toward the gantry. d. Hold the adjustment stud with a wrench while you tighten the adjustment locking nut. e. Tighten the detector mounting nuts.
88
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 84 Image Noise Check
This check is used to verify the integrity of the tube output as well as normal channel output. The procedure involves scanning the water section of the Quality Assurance and Performance (QA) Phantom (46241709G1) and measuring the image noise (i.e., standard deviation of the ROI). This check applies to EDAS and HPDAS. Image Noise Check procedure: a. Perform 4 axial scan slices of the 20 cm section (water) of the QA phantom against the small cal at a technique of: 20 cm/S/120 kV/170 mA/10 mm/2 s b. Place a 51 x 51 pixel ROI box at coordinates 255, 255 for each of the 4 slices. c. Record the mean CT number and the standard deviation for each slice.
d. Calculate the 4 slice average of the mean CT number and the standard deviation. Specifications: a. Four slice average for the mean CT number should be 0.0 3.0. b. If tube has less than 5000 scans, 4 slice average for the standard deviation range should be 3.00 to 3.60. c. If tube has more than 5000 scans, 4 slice average for the standard deviation range should be 3.00 to 3.80.
Replace the tube if the test results exceeds the specifications depicted above.
89
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 85 Radial Alignment
Radial alignment is performed only if you have installed a new detector. Otherwise, skip this section and go directly to Isocenter Alignment (section 6). Radial alignment need only be done for detector installations or if the detector has been removed from the gantry for any reason.
WARNING
THERE ARE ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL HAZARDS IN ACCESSING THE GANTRY. BE SURE THAT BOTH THE LOOP CONTACTOR AND GANTRY 550 ENABLE SWITCH ARE OFF PRIOR TO ACCESSING THE GANTRY. ALSO, BE SURE THAT YOU HAVE READ DIRECTION 46018302, CT HISPEED ADVANTAGE SAFETY GUIDELINES MANUAL OR HAVE VIEWED 46018308 CT HISPEED ADVANTAGE SAFETY VIDEO PRIOR TO SERVICING THESE SUBSYSTEMS.
CAUTION
Verify that the tube unit is cold. If you have executed any low technique scans prior to beginning radial alignment, you must wait at least 5 minutes before attempting this alignment procedure. If you have previously executed image scanning and would like to recheck radial alignment, you must wait at least 90 minutes to allow the tube unit to cool, e.g., if the tube unit has had greater than 25 Kilojoules exposure KV x mA x Sec /1000 within the last 30 min. Failure to heed this caution may result in inaccurate radial alignment.
Note:
A rough ISO center adjustment must be made prior to radial alignment. Use the Isocenter Alignment procedure (section 86) and move the tube so that it is within .005( 0.10 channels) of the correct position. Dont bother trying to tweak it in perfectly at this point. When ISO is roughly set, start with step 1 below. Requirement:The initial starting position of the cam must be in the center of its range of motion.
810
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 6 Radial Alignment procedure:
1. Touch |CT Tools| to display the Tools Selection screen. Use the DDC function to move the tube to the 0azimuth position: Touch the |DDC| softkey on the plasma. Touch the |Position Tube| softkey. Type/enter |180| (degrees) in the tube position entry field. Touch the |Accept Rx| softkey. Tube moves to the bottom of the gantry.
2. Turn OFF the gantry loop contactor switch and the Gantry 550v (HVDC) enable switch. The gantry is now oriented with the xray tube unit positioned to the 6 oclock position, (180tube position). 3. With the detector at the 12 oclock position, install the rotational alignment tools on the detector. The pin must project into the XRay beam (Illustration 83). First, place the tool which contains the pin on the detector but do not tighten the holding screw. Then locate the other tool over the pin and in the locating holes, on the detector, and finger tighten the holding screws. Removal is the reverse of installation. Do not move the detector from the 12 oclock position while installing alignment tools on the detector or making the radial adjustment. If you rotate the gantry more then 5 during these procedures, this will cause a software error. To restore system function, the field engineer will then have to cycle power to the gantry and reboot the software. 4. Turn ON both the loop contactor switch and 550v (HVDC) enable switch in the gantry.
ILLUSTRATION 83 INSTALL ROTATIONAL ALIGNMENT TOOL
NOTE: Some detectors may be slightly warped as evidenced by space between the adjoining legs of the rotational alignment tool. If this occurs, switch the legs of the tool.
811
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 5. Display the Utilities Main Menu and touch |CT Tools| to display the Tools Selection Menu. Prepare for a stationary scan with DDC: Touch the |DDC| softkey. Touch the |View Compressed| softkey. Touch |Stat XRay On| softkey. Type/enter RAD ALIGN in Run Description field. Type/enter 2 (seconds) in the Scan Time data field. Type/enter 0 (degrees) in the XRay ON Position data field. Type/enter 40 in the mA data field. Type/enter 80 in the kV data field. Touch the |10| (mm) Aperture softkey. Touch the |Air| Filter softkey. Touch the |Large| Spot Size softkey. Touch the |Accept Rx| softkey. Press the (Start Scan) key on the keyboard, when it illuminates, to initiate the scan. Touch |Tools| to exit DDC. Touch the |Analysis| softkey. Touch the |Scan| softkey. Touch the |Centroid| softkey and type/enter the suite ID, exam, series, and scan information recorded in step 5. Touch the |Continue| softkey.
6. Touch |Tools| (or |CT Tools|) to display the Tools Selection Menu.
7. Now, edit the Centroid menu to reflect the following: a. Calfile name is the same as the Isocal file used above. b. Static. c. Pin for the body file.
d. Pin for first channel to search for. e. Number of channels on either side to include 10. f. Touch |Continue| when all information is entered correctly.
g. When all information is correct on the Plot Parameters screen, touch |Plot|. h. Touch |Info| to see the centroid information. The radial adjustment limits equals 376.4 +2 channels. If your system is within the limit, no adjustment is necessary. Continue with isocenter center alignment (section 6). If outside of the limits, the detector will have to be rotated. At this point, calculate the motion required to reach the channel you are aiming for. Note: Rotate the detector CW to move the pin to a lower channel number. Rotate the detector CCW to move the pin to a higher channel.
812
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 Example: Assume that the average centroid of the pin scan equals 374.700. To determine the amount of detector rotation to properly position the detector: Motion = |376.4 374.700| X .0226 = .038 To move the pin projection to a higher channel, move the detector adjustment cam so the detector moves 0.038 CCW. (End of example.) Install a dial indicator on the side of the detector with the rotational adjustment hardware. Set it to .000. See Illustration 84: 1. Do not move the detector from the 12 oclock position while installing alignment tools on the detector or making the radial adjustment. If you rotate the gantry more then 5 degrees during these procedures, you will cause a software error. To restore system function, you have to cycle power to the gantry and reboot the software. 2. Loosen all three sets of the large detector mounting nuts slightly, so that they are finger tight. See Illustration 85. 3. Loosen the allen head rotational adjustment locking screws. See Illustration 84. 4. Move the detector by the calculated amount. 5. Tighten the allen head rotational adjustment locking screws. 6. Torque the inside detector mounting nuts to 25 ftlbs. While holding the inside nut to keep it from turning, torque the outside nuts to 25 ftlbs. If you dont have a torque wrench, tighten the nuts until finger tight, then tighten @ flat with a wrench. 7. Repeat the Radial Alignment procedure to verify the adjustment.
ILLUSTRATION 84 ROTATIONAL HARDWARE

ROTATIONAL ADJUSTMENT LOCKING SCREW
DETECTOR MOUNTING NUT
ROTATIONAL ADJUSTMENT HEX
DIAL INDICATOR
ROTATIONAL ADJUSTMENT LOCKING SCREW
ct 2830
813

ILLUSTRATION 85 MOUNTING/ADJUSTMENT HARDWARE (DETAIL)
BOW ADJUSTMENT LOCK NUT
BOW ADJUSTMENT
DETECTOR MOUNTING NUTS
ROTATIONAL ADJUSTMENT CAM ALLEN HEAD ROTATIONAL ADJUSTMENT SCREW
ALLEN HEAD ROTATIONAL LOCKING SCREW
ROTATIONAL ADJUSTMENT CAM
ALLEN HEAD ROTATIONAL ADJUSTMENT SCREW
DETECTOR MOUNTING NUTS

ct2775
814
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 86 Isocenter Alignment
This procedure aligns the tube focal spot with the detector center.
CAUTION
Verify that the tube unit is cold. If you have executed any low technique scans prior to beginning isocenter alignment (ISO), you must wait at least 5 minutes before attempting this alignment procedure. If you have previously executed image scanning and would like to recheck ISO, you must wait at least 90 minutes to allow the tube unit to cool, e.g., if the tube unit has had greater than 25 Kilojoules exposure KV x mA x Sec /1000 within the last 30 min. Failure to heed this caution may result in inaccurate ISO alignment
87
Isocenter Calculation 1. With nothing in the gantry scan plane, acquire an air scan using the Large focal spot: Touch |CT Tools| to display the Tools Selection Menu. Touch the |DDC| softkey. Touch the |Real Time Stat| softkey. Touch the |Axial XRay On| softkey. Type/enter AIR LARGE in the Run Description data field. Scan Time = 4 s Scan Speed = 4 s Number of Scans = 1 Interscan Delay = 2 s Xray On Position = 0 mA= 40 kV = 80 Touch the |Air| Filter softkey. Touch the |5| (mm) Aperture softkey. Touch the |Large| Spot Size softkey. Touch |Normal| (Normalize) softkey for data mode. Touch the |Accept Rx| softkey. Press the (Start Scan) key on the keyboard, when it lights, to initiate the scan. Record the DD file name. Touch the |Tools| softkey to exit DDC
815
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 2. Next, acquire an air scan using the Small focal spot: Touch |CT Tools| to display the Tools Selection Menu. Touch the |DDC| softkey. Touch the |Real Time Stat| softkey. Touch the |Axial XRay On| softkey. Type/enter AIR SMALL in the Run Description data field. Scan Time = 4 s Scan Speed = 4 s Number of Scans = 1 Interscan Delay = 2 s Xray On Position = 0 mA= 40 kV = 80 Touch the |Air| Filter softkey. Touch the |5| (mm) Aperture softkey. Touch the |Small| Spot Size softkey. Touch |Normal| (Normalize) softkey for data mode. Touch the |Accept Rx| softkey. Press the (Start Scan) key on the keyboard, when it lights, to initiate the scan. Record the DD file name. Touch the |Tools| softkey to exit DDC
After you acquire the two air files (one Large focal spot and one Small focal spot), attach a small metal pin (i.e., Craftsman #0 Phillips screwdriver) to the end of the table nearest the gantry or phantom holder. Secure the screwdriver with masking tape so that it remains perpendicular to the scan plane. Position the gantry to 0 degrees tilt. Move the table forward to position the metal pin 1.4 up and 1.4 right of isocenter, as determined by the laser alignment lights. Note: Always use a 1/8 (0.125 inch) diameter metal shaft. The detector alignment program is sensitive to a larger shade caused by a larger diameter screwdriver. Never position the metal pin at isocenter. The metal pin should remain level with the untilted gantry (0 degrees tilt). 3. Position the pin in the scan plane, and acquire a pin scan with the Large focal spot: Touch |CT Tools| to display the Tools Selection Menu. Touch the |DDC| softkey. Touch the |View Compressed| softkey. Touch the |Axial XRay On| softkey. Touch the |Reserve Scan| softkey. Type/enter PIN LARGE in the Run Description data field. Scan Time = 4 s Scan Speed = 4 s Number of Scans = 1
816
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 Interscan Delay = 2 s Xray On Position = 0 mA= 40 kV = 80 Touch the |Large| FOV softkey. Touch the |4:1| softkey (Compression Factor) Cal Vector = None (No selections) Touch the |Air| Filter softkey. Touch the |5| (mm) Aperture softkey. Touch the |Large| Spot Size softkey. Touch the |Accept Rx| softkey. Press the (Start Scan) key on the keyboard, when it lights, to initiate the scan. Record the exam/series/scan# file name. Touch the |Tools| softkey to exit DDC Touch |CT Tools| to display the Tools Selection Menu. Touch the |DDC| softkey. Touch the |View Compressed| softkey. Touch the |Axial XRay On| softkey. Touch the |Reserve Scan| softkey. Type/enter PIN SMALL in the Run Description data field. Scan Time = 4 s Scan Speed = 4 s Number of Scans = 1 Interscan Delay = 2 s Xray On Position = 0 mA= 40 kV = 80 Touch the |Small| FOV softkey. Touch the |4:1| softkey (Compression Factor) Cal Vector = None (No selections) Touch the |Air| Filter softkey. Touch the |5| (mm) Aperture softkey. Touch the |Large| Spot Size softkey. Touch the |Accept Rx| softkey. Press the (Start Scan) key on the keyboard, when it lights, to initiate the scan. Record the exam/series/scan# file name. Touch the |Tools| softkey to exit DDC
4. Acquire a pin scan with the small focal spot:
817
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 5. Touch the |Tube Align| softkey shown in Illustration 86.
ILLUSTRATION 86 SELECT TUBE ALIGNMENT TOOL SELECTIONS Install Calibrate System Perform List Select Images Patient Scans Mechncal Charact Genrator Charact Tube Align Detector Slope Diag Scans DD Files CALS Heat Soak & Season
DAS Tools
DDC
Scan Analysis
DD File Analysis
Cal Plot
Utility Functions
File Manager
Scan File Manager
Cancel
Utility
6. Touch the |Manual Calc| softkey shown in Illustration 87.

ILLUSTRATION 87 SELECT MANUAL CALCULATIONS
TUBE ALIGNMENT
Manual Calc
Cancel
Utility
Tools
818
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 7. Touch the |Iso Align| softkey shown in Illustration 88.
ILLUSTRATION 88 SELECT ISOCENTER PROGRAM MANUAL CALCULATIONS
Iso Align
CBF and SAG
Cancel
Utility
Tools
Tube Align
ILLUSTRATION 89 SELECT ISOCENTER ALIGN
MANUAL CALCULATIONS SELECT ONE: Iso Align List/Sel DD files CBF and SAG
Air Scanfile:
List/Sel DiagScan
Exam: Series:
Suite ID: Scan
Store DD file in database
NO
YES
Cancel
Utility
Tools
Tube Align
Accept
819
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 8. Illustration 89 shows the Manual Calculations screen. Proceed as follows: 9. Enter the DD file (air scan)created in step 1 (large iso air scan). 10. Enter exam #, series # and scan # for the scan file created in step 3 (large iso pin scan). Enter suite ID. 11. Touch the |Accept| softkey. Large spot isocenter will be calculated and recommendation for tube movement displayed if isocenter is outside its limits. Record the displayed data, then touch the |Tools| softkey to exit the alignment program. 12. Touch the |Tube Align| softkey (see Illustration 89) to return to the Manual Calculations screen shown in Illustration 88. Touch the |Iso Align| softkey. 13. Enter the DD file created in step 2 (the small iso air scan). 14. Enter exam #, series # and scan # for the scan file created in step 4 (the small iso pin scan). 15. Touch the |Accept| softkey. Small spot isocenter will be calculated and recommendation for tube movement displayed if isocenter is outside its limits. Record the displayed data, then touch the |Tools| softkey to exit the alignment program. 16. First, calculate the average isocenter value by averaging the isovalue for the small spot with the isovalue for the large spot: Mean = (isoSmall + isoLarge) / 2.
Note:
The specification for proper isocenter alignment equals 373.75 0.02 channels (i.e., the average of the 2 iso values in step 16). If the isovalue is in spec, then do not shift the tube. If the isovalue is out of spec, calculate the required tube shift during the next step. 17. Calculate distance to move tube in millimeters or inches: Tube shift_in_mm = (mean 373.75) * 1.36468 OR Tube shift_in_inches = (mean 373.75) * 0.053728.
Note:
If the resulting tube shift value is a negative number, move the tube down. If the value is positive, then the tube should be moved up. Adjust the tube, as described in section 88, and repeat steps 1 through 16 to verify whether isocenter is in spec. Continue iteration until the system meets spec.
820
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 88 Isocenter Adjustment
If the calculated ISOCENTER value falls outside the specification, adjust the tube unit by the amount as displayed on the CRT with the following procedure: Select the Starrett #25141 gauge (0.001 inch to 0.250 inch) attached to the nonmagnetic holding fixture and bolt the gauge and its holding fixture to the special tube mounting bracket. Zero out gauge before you loosen the mounting bolts. Loosen the four mounting bolts (9/16) holding the tube unit to the gantry mounting plate and the top 0.750 inch nut on the vertical adjustment screw. Move the tube in the direction and prescribed amount called out on the previous CRT display as measured on the ISOCENTER gauge. Note: A clockwise turn on the vertical adjustment screw will move the tube up. A counter clockwise adjustment will move the tube down. Bolt down the tube mounting bolts to a torque of 30 +3.0 ft. lbs.. Repeat ISO Scans until the ISOCENTER specification is satisfied (i.e., 373.75 0.02 channels). Note: If the ISO projects outside 373.75 0.1 channels, you do not have to wait between tube adjustment and the test scan. If the ISO projects between 0.02 and 0.1 Channels, then wait 5 minutes after tube adjustment before scanning. If the ISO projects to be within 373.75 0.02 channels, wait 5 minutes then repeat scan to verify that the results remain within spec.
CAUTION
Recheck POR at 10mm aperture to verify that plane on rotation has not changed. Remember to wait 5 minutes after last ISO Scan before executing the plane of rotation recheck scan. If the plane of rotation appears to have changed, DO NOT make any adjustments in tube positioning, wait 30 minutes and repeat the plane of rotation check again. If after the second check the plane of rotation appears to have changed, make the necessary tube positioning adjustments in order to be in specification and redo XRay beam to Detector Window and ISO Center Alignments to ensure that they have not changed.
DO NOT RECHECK RADIAL ALIGNMENT. If a rough ISO was done per procedure before the radial alignment, the final ISO shouldnt affect the radial adversely. ISO must be the last tube adjustment.
821
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 89
Update Configuration Files With New Isovalues Once the tube isocenter alignment is in spec, edit the ScanHardware.cfg file and the INFO file as described below. The text and symbols used to denote unix commands, function keys, etc. are defined as follows: bold print Words in bold type followed by <ENTER> means to type that word and then press the ENTER key, e.g. root <ENTER>, means to type the word root and then press the ENTER key. <angles> This type indicates that a value is DIFFERENT THAN INDICATED IN THIS DOCUMENT, BUT WITHIN THE CONTEXT OF THE PROMPT. It also represents a function key e.g. <suiteID> means to type in the actual suite ID.
CAUTION
This section presumes that the user knows how to use the vi text editor. Misuse of vi can seriously corrupt configuration files which causes severe system problems. Commands for using vi are found in direction 46015523, SunOS / Genesis Quick Reference Guide.
891
Update ScanHardware.cfg The ScanHardware.cfg file on both the OC and SBC must be updated with the new iso values using the vi text editor. Proceed as follows: genesis @ <suiteID>_OC0 : cd /w/config <ENTER> genesis @ <suiteID>_OC0 : vi ScanHardware.cfg <ENTER> You are now in the ScanHardware.cfg text file on the OC. Use the / command to search and find the variable with the iso value that must be changed . For example,: Type the character /. It is echoed at the bottom line on the screen. Type isoSmallSpot behind the / character followed by a carriage return. vi places the cursor at the text string isoSmallSpot. Edit the small spot isocenter with the new value displayed by the system back in step 15 of section 61. The large spot variable, called isoLargeSpot is just below the isoSmallSpot variable. Edit the large spot isocenter with the new value displayed by the system back in step 11 of section 61.
Next, edit the same 2 variables in the ScanHardware.cfg file on the SBC. Proceed as follows: genesis @ <suiteID>_OC0 : rlogin <suiteID>_SBC0 <ENTER> genesis @ <suiteID>_SBC0 : cd /w/config <ENTER> genesis @ <suiteID>_SBC0 : vi ScanHardware.cfg <ENTER> Edit the values for the variables isoSmallSpot and isoLargeSpot as you did for the OC
822
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 892 Update INFO File
The INFO file on the OC must be updated with the new iso value. Proceed as follows: genesis @ <suiteID>_OC0 : cd /usr/local/bin <ENTER> genesis @ <suiteID>_OC0 : vi INFO <ENTER> Search on the same two variable names as described in the previous section (891). Edit the small and large spot isovalues. 810 CBF and SAG This procedure aligns the center of the body filter coincidence with isocenter alignment and measures the change in alignment during a rotating scan. It reports the peak amplitude difference in channel numbers as well as the hysteresis or difference in channel numbers between first and last views of a scan.
CAUTION
Verify that the tube unit is cold. If you have executed any low technique scans prior to beginning CBF alignment, you must wait at least 5 minutes before attempting this alignment procedure. If you have previously executed image scanning and would like to recheck CBF and SAG, you must wait at least 90 minutes to allow the tube unit to cool, e.g., if the tube unit has had greater than 25 Kilojoules exposure KV x mA x Sec /1000 within the last 30 min. Failure to heed this caution may result in inaccurate CBF and SAG alignment
811
CBF Calculation 1. Acquire a CBF scan: Touch |CT Tools| to display the Tools Selection Menu. Touch the |DDC| softkey. Touch the |View Compressed| softkey. Touch the |Rotating XRay On| softkey. Type/enter CBF in the Run Description data field. Touch the |4:1| softkey (Compression Factor) Scan Time = 4 s mA= 40 kV = 80 Touch the |5| (mm) Aperture softkey. Touch the |Bowtie| Filter softkey. Touch the |Large| Spot Size softkey. Touch the |Accept Rx| softkey. Press the (Start Scan) key on the keyboard, when it lights, to initiate the scan. Record the exam/series/scan# file name displayed on the plasma. Touch the |Tools| softkey to exit DDC and return to the Tool Selection (CT Tools) screen.
823
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 2. In CT Tools, touch the |Tube Alignment| softkey. 3. Touch the |Manual Calc| softkey. 4. Touch the CBF and SAG softkey. 5. Enter the DD file (air scan) from section 61, Step 1.(large spot iso air scan). 6. Enter the exam#, series# and scan# for the CBF scan file created in step 1. Enter the suite ID. 7. Enter the isocenter value for the large spot recorded back in section 87 step 11. 8. Enter exam #, series # and scan # for the scan file created in step 3. of section 87 (large iso pin scan). Enter suite ID. 9. Touch the |Accept| softkey. The program will calculate CBF and display it along with recommendations for moving the collimator if CBF is outside specifications. The program calculates and displays the maximum channel difference, the azimuthal location of the channel difference, and the difference between first and last views in channels. Record the information and then touch |Tools| to exit the Tube Alignment program. If the calculated CBF value is not in specification (373.75 +.2), the collimator will have to be adjusted by the amount displayed on the CRT via the following steps: a. Wait 5 minutes between exposures. b. Mount the gauge and its nonmagnetic holding fixture to the special mounting bracket of the collimator. c. Zero out the gauge and loosen the four mounting bolts of the collimator which are located at the four slotted holes of the collimator.
d. Adjust the 3/4 inch bolt (located at the end of the collimator) to move the collimator right or left the required amount. Plasma displays CBF adjustments in up and down direction. UP=Collimator movement to the right, and DOWN=collimator movement to the left. e. Bolt down the collimator. The torque requirement on the four lock bolts is 10 +1.0 ft. lbs. (120 +12 in. lbs.). f. Repeat CBF scans and this adjustment until the CBF specification is satisfied.
g. Remove gauge and holding fixture from Gantry. h. Record the CBF and SAG values.
824
CHAPTER 9 SOFTWARE LOAD FROM COLD
91
Introduction Use this document to load the Unix operating system and new application software on the HiSpeed Advantage System. Supplement this procedure with the more detailed Installation Users Manual Genesis Release 4.1 document. Follow this document sequence to install the operating system. You will cause problems if you skip steps or perform them out of sequence. The following procedure describes the CT OC and SBC software installation procedure. This procedure uses the YP Master as its example, because the YP Master is always the first machine installed in a Suite. Note: A Load From Cold is not necessary if the system is shipped with software loaded. See the OC/SBC System Reconfiguration document for configuration instructions. Text to be typed by the installer is shown in bold. Text output by the system is shown in system font. Note: MVME 166 Autoflash Routines of the SBC Boot Firmware: 1. The flashing code in Genesis/Stealth based systems check for a version equal to or greater than the required version of firmware. 2. If all boards continue to ship from DBR/Motorola with 1.5 version firmware, then each systems flashing algorithm should continue to ensure that the proper version exists (MR looks for 1.5, CT RP looks for 2.2 and CT/i looks for 3.x) 3. To determine the type of firmware on your system, display the Healthpage and check the OC FW REV and SBC FW REV.
911
OC/SBC System Reconfiguration Introduction Reconfigure systems with existing software: Sections 917 through 923 describe the procedure to reconfigure the existing software of a HiSpeed Advantage system. You can change most of the parameters you entered during a software Load From Cold, without returning to the LFC procedure. The OC/SBC System Reconfiguration procedure begins on page 921. The OC/SBC System Reconfiguration contains the procedures which require the reconfig program. Section 924 and 925 contain standalone scripts, used to Change system time and Image Transfer hosts.
91
OC/SBC System Reconfiguration Introduction continued Use rconfig software to change the following parameters: SuiteID: Section 9201, on page 923 Hospital Name: Section 9202 on page 923 Reset the Database: Section 9203, on page 924 Patient Exam number: Section 9204, on page 924 Replace HSD on SBC: Section 9205, on page 924 Time Zone: Section 9211, on page 925 Time Format, Date Format and Date Separator: Section 9212, on page 926 Doctors Title: Section 9213, on page 926 Patient Weight unit: Section 9214, on page 926 Optical Disk or Reel Tape number: Section 9215, on page 926 Camera Configuration: Section 9221, on page 927 IP Refresh Rate: Section 9222, on page 927 Video Tape Interface: Section 9223, on page 928 Add/Remove Printer: Section 9224, on page 928 Tube information: Section 9225, on page 928 EDAS Type: Section 9226, on page 928 Internet Address: Section 9231, on page 930 Suite Configuration: Section 9232, on page 930 ACRNEMA Address: Section 9233, on page 930 Primary Archive Node (PAN): Section 9234, on page 930 Add/Remove 2nd Ethernet board on OC: Section 9235, on page 931 Add/Remove 2nd Ethernet board on IC: Section 9236, on page 931
Additional standalone procedures: Change the System Time: Section 924, on page 932 Add or Remove Image Transfer Hosts: Section 925, on page 932
92
OC/SBC System Reconfiguration Introduction continued Run reconfig on OC only, to: Change the Hospital Name Change the Time Format, Date Format, or Date Separator Change the Doctors Title Change the Units for Patient Weight Change the Patient Exam number Change the Optical Disk or Reel Tape number Change the Camera Configuration Change the IP Refresh Rate Change the Video Tape Interface Add/Remove a Printer Change the ACRNEMA Address Change the Primary Archive Node (PAN) Add/Remove a Second Ethernet Board on the OC Add/Remove a Second Ethernet Board on an IC in the Suite
Run reconfig on OC and SBC, to: Change the Suite ID Change the Timezone Change the Daylight Savings Time value Add New Tube Information Change the EDAS type Change the Internet Addresses Change the Suite Configuration
93
Software Load From Cold

92 Tape Set Use the following tapes are needed to install the system. They contain the OS and applications: a. HLFC (SunOS, CSE Applications, CT OC, & SBC Applications, HNS) 93 Initial Installations If this is the first time software has been installed on the system, you need the following information: a. Internet (IP) addresses If the system is to be connected to a network contact your system administrator to obtain the IP addresses for all the computers in the suite. If the system is standalone (not connected to any network) the default internet numbers may be used. An IP address is also needed for each gateway (second) ethernet board in any OC or IC. b. Ethernet number of SBC get the number from the inside of the SCU door. If the SBC was replaced, get the number by entering ypcat ethers grep <suiteID>. Then proceed to step 95. 94 Save System Parameters Save existing system information before you reload or upgrade the application software. If you forget to save the information, you will have to Characterize and Calibrate the system. 941 Save System State From the Utilities menu on a CT OC plasma, select |CT Tools|. Next, select |File Manager| followed by |Save / Restore|. At this time, select |All|. This will save system cals, characterization, scan protocols, and INFO file. After the appropriate selections have been made, place the tape in the drive, select |Save| and wait until the save to tape is done (about 520 minutes depending on the number of cals and scan protocols). When the save to tape is complete, a message that files have successfully been saved to tape appears at the bottom of the screen and the |Quit| softkey on the screen disappears. Remove the tape. It will be used during the installation and later to restore this data after installation is complete.
94
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 942 Save Suite Internet Numbers
To find the internet numbers of the OC and SBC, display the Utilities Main Menu and touch |Shell| to open a shell tool on the plasma Then type the following command at the prompt. Find the <suiteID> by inspecting the system prompt. genesis @ <suiteID>_OC0: ypcat hosts | grep <suiteID> Write down the appropriate IP (Internet) addresses,
<suiteID>_OC0 ______.______.______.______ <suiteID>_SBC0 _________.________.________._________

943 Save Optical Disk Number Place the current optical disk platter into the drive. Touch the |Archive|softkey to display the Archive Main Menu. Touch the |Optical Disk| softkey. Touch the |Media Contents| softkey. The system attaches the disk and displays the screen called List/Select Exams by Patient Media Content. Record the Disk # displayed in the upper left quadrant of the screen:______. During the load from cold, increment the current disk number by one and enter that value in the Optical Disk # field. 944 Save Magnetic Reel Tape Number (If the system has a magnetic tape drive Insert the current reel tape into the mag tape drive and place the drive on line. Touch the |Archive| softkey to display the Archive Main Menu. Touch the |Reel Tape| softkey. Touch the |Media Contents| softkey. The system attaches the tape and displays the screen called List/Select Exams by Patient Media Content. Record the Tape # displayed in the upper left quadrant of the screen:______. During the load from cold, increment the current tape number by one and enter the corresponding value in the Reel Tape # field.
95
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 945 Save Window Width/Level Data
Touch the |Display Modes| softkey. Touch the |Prog W/L Keys| softkey. Record the window width/level information for reentry into the system upon completion of the software load:
Head
Medias
Spine
Abdomen
Lung
Vertebra
Window
Level
Network Configuration Check network configuration to see what systems are supposed to be there; Network, Manual Transmit. Write down the list to verify after completing the load from cold. 946 Save Batch Film Protocols: When upgrading from HSA 1.2 to HSA 1.3, this step must be performed if the site wants to keep its existing Batch Film Protocols. For reloads of software, this step may be skipped ONLY if the system state (at least the INFO file) has been saved to tape via |File Manager| under |Utilities| while running software. Put a scratch tape into the drive. Open a unix shell and type the following: genesis @ <suiteID>_OC0:cd /usr/g/film/protocols <enter> genesis @ <suiteID>_OC0:tar cvf /dev/nrst8 Prot* Lots of output will occur on the screen as the protocols are dumped to tape. Remove the tape and label it Batch Film Protocols with the date of the load. Note: When you complete the Load from Cold, display the Utilities Main Menu and touch |File Manager|. Use the File Management software to store the system state to tape. The system state INFO file contains the filming protocols, so you do not have to save the Batch Film Protocols tape.
96
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 947 Shutdown the system
Display the Utilities Main Menu and touch the |Shutdown| softkey or, type sd from the boot terminal to shutdown the system. Check the network config to see which systems should be there: Network Manual transmit
Make a list of these systems for verification after the Load From Cold. 95 PreInstallation Before starting, make sure the following setup is done on the Plasma: 1) Press L1C to get the plasma configuration screen. 2) Make sure the NEW LINE softkey is OFF. 3) Make sure the WRAP AROUND softkey is ON. 4) Touch the |backup| softkey to return to boot terminal Clean the tape drive heads with a DAT tape cleaning cartridge. 96 Boot the Host Load From Cold (HLFC) Tape Once you have the monitor prompt > insert the HLFC I tape into the local cartridge/DAT tape drive and load the bootstrap: > b st( ) <enter> Boot: st(0,0,0) Boot: Much output . . . .
97
Partition and Label the Disk; Load OS and Applications (OC) The program to format, label, or partition the disk starts automatically: Beginning System Installation probing system for disks ... Choose your option for Auto Partition and label 1 Label sd0 Then continue loading the system 2 Do not relabel the disk, just continue loading the system 3 Exit to single user shell Enter choice: 1 (label sd0) Labeling sd0 with partition table CT/OC sd0 single 9418115 If you have dual disks installed the following menu displays: Choose your option for Auto partition and label 1 label sd0 and sd2 Then continue loading the system. 2 label sd0 only Then continue loading the system. 3 Do not relabel the disk, just continue loading the system 4 Exit to single user shell Enter choice: 1 (label sd0 and sd2) The system automatically labels and partitions the hard disk. When the disk is ready the program starts loading software. much output . . . . . Configure an OC as a YP Master [ . . . boot messages>. . . ] Do you want to restore the INFO file from the previous installation (yY|nN) ? Answer y if this is a reinstallation. Remove the HLFC tape and insert the system state tape saved prior to the reinstallation. If this is a new installation, answer n to the above question.
98
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 971 HiSpeed Advantage Configuration
The HiSpeed Advantage configuration program automatically starts on the plasma. To configure the HiSpeed Advantage system, enter the required parameters on each screen. When you complete a screen, touch the |Continue| softkey to proceed to the next screen. After you type/enter all the parameters, touch the |Accept| softkey on the Network screen to initiate the configuration. 972 On Line Help Touch the parameter title to display the corresponding help window. Touch the help window to close it. 973 The Config Screens Illustrations 91 through 94 contain examples of each type of Configuration screen. Your screens will appear similar but not necessarily identical to the examples.
ILLUSTRATION 91 SYSTEM PARAMETERS SCREEN System Parameters Suite ID Hospital name Host Type OC IC USN Host name OC0 Service ID YP type Master Slave Is this installation for a Dept. of Defense site? Yes No
Stands for Unique System Number Reset Database Continue
99

ILLUSTRATION 92 SYSTEM FORMATS AND DEFAULTS SCREEN
System Formats & Defaults Time Format

MIL_HH_MM_SS MIL_HH_MM HH_MM_SS_XM HH_MM_XM
Date Separator
.
DD_MM_YY
Starting Patient Exam # Starting Diagnostic Exam # 50001 1
Date Format Timezone
MM_DD_YY
YY_MM_DD
Starting Optical Disk #
US/Central US/Mountain US/Pacific US/Pacific - New US/Alaska US/East Indiana Backup
Central time zone USA Mountain time zone USA Pacific time zone USA Pacific time zone USA Alaska time zone USA Eastern time zone USA
Doctor's Title
Radiologist lb kg
Units for Patient Weight
Smart Scan
Off
On
Continue
ILLUSTRATION 93 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION SCREEN Hardware Configuration IP refresh rate 60 Hz 50 Hz Camera Configuration 3M camera MI10 camera
Video Tape
rs170
ccir
Printer in Suite
Yes
No
CT Tube Type
Housing # 46-309500G2 Insert # 46-309300G2
DAS Type
2119740 HP-DAS
46-266845 G4 E-DAS Reduced Gain G4 Collimator
Tube Housing Serial # Tube Insert Serial # Tube Failure Code Backup Collimator Type
G1, G2, or G3 Collimator
Continue
910

ILLUSTRATION 94 NETWORK CONFIGURATION
Network Configuration Hosts in Suite OC0 SBC0 IC0 IC1 IC2
Active Gateway:
Yes
No OC0 Internet address: SBC0 Internet address:
ACRNEMA address: Suite ID of PAN host: Hostname of PAN: Subnet network Backup OC0
SBC0 Ethernet number:
Accept
Finish the configuration parameters selection, then touch |Accept| on the Network Configuration screen to automatically start the configuration of the OC. Configuration takes about 10 minutes. When the system displays the <suiteID> console login, proceed to the next step, Tip into the SBC. 98 Tip Into the SBC (command review only) Default passwords The system currently contains the with default password. Use the following passwords to access the system and finish the software load: root #bigguy genesis 4$apps 982 Tip command notes Use the tip command to communicate with the SBC over a serial line. Start tip, then use the following keystrokes: <enter>~. to exit tip <enter>~# to send a break When you send a break to the SBC, the system responds with the same > prompt it displays when you press [L1] [A] on the OC keyboard. Note: If you type too fast while in tip, you may garble the output. If this happens, delete the bad characters and start over. insite 2getin service 4rhelp
981
911
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 983 Login as genesis on OC:
<suiteID>_OC0 @ login: genesis password: <default root password> genesis @ <suiteID>_OC0 3: tip sbc <enter> connected <enter>
Note:
If you dont receive a response during the TIP to SBC within a reasonable period of time, you may need to perform the RP Boot Link Troubleshooting procedure.
99
Network boot the SBC At the 167 bug prompt: 167>bug> rb <enter> You need to be at the MC68040> prompt to boot the SBC. If software is already loaded on the SBC disk, the system may try to boot off the local disk. Enter ~# to try to get to the MC68040> prompt. At the mc68040 prompt: mc68040>b ei() <enter>
910 9101
Load SunOS and Applications on SBC Login as root on SBC <suiteID>_SBC0 @ login: root
9102
Load SunOS and CT Applications: Place the HLFC tape into the disk drive on the OC. # rploadSBC <enter> (30 minutes including configuration) Choose your option for Auto partition and label: 1. Label sd0 Then continue loading the system. 2. Do not relabel the disk, just continue loading the system. 3. Exit to single user shell Enter choice: 1 (label sd0) If the system contains a SCSI HSD, it displays the following menu. Choose your option for Auto partition and label: 1. Label sd0 and sd2 Then continue loading the system. 2. Label sd0 only Then continue loading the system. 3. Do not relabel the disk, just continue loading the system. 4. Exit to single user shell Enter choice: 1 (label sd0 and sd2) Note: If the system asks you to insert the HLFC tape and the HLFC tape is in the tape drive, return to the OC, halt the system, cycle power and return to step 9, Tip into the SBC. [ . . . lots of output . . . ]
912
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 9103 Exit tip:
After it completes loading, the SBC automatically reboots and begins configuration. When it completes the configuration, the SBC reboots once more. You have finished installation of application software. Now use <enter>~ to exit tip. 911 Load Patch Tape or Perform Workarounds If the software includes a patch tape, consult the HLFC addendum and instructions provided with this HLFC documentation to determine when to load the patch tape or workarounds. 912 Start up the HiSpeed Advantage RP System Log in as genesis: <suiteID> @ login: genesis <enter> password: <default genesis password> Start Genesis Processes: genesis @ <suiteID> : st <enter> To toggle the plasma between the boot terminal and the application screens, press [L1] [B]. After the system comes up, the message, Processes are initializing . . . along the bottom of the Application Screen disappears. 913 9131 Restore System Configuration Data Restore Window Width/Level Data Touch the |Display Modes| softkey Touch the |Prog W/L Keys| softkey Enter the window width/level information you recorded during step 945. Recommended: Change the labels on the window softkeys to match the positions of the hardkeys on the console. 9132 Restore Batch Film Protocols Use this step any time you need to restore filming protocols. Immediately after a Load From Cold, use the tape you created during step 946. Any other time, use the System State tape with the INFO file to restore filming protocols.
913
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 Insert the tape with the saved batch film protocols into the OC drive. Open a unix shell and type the following: genesis @ <SuiteID>:cd /usr/g/film/protocols genesis @ <SuiteID>:tar xvf /dev/nrst8 [ . . . several lines of output . . . ] genesis @ <SuiteID>:su Password: <root password> root @ <SuiteID>:convertfilmproto [ . . . several lines of output . . . ]
Remember to remove the tape from the tape drive. Press <control D> twice after you load the tape to exit from this shell tool. 9133 Restore System Data (Characterization Data, Calibration Data, Scan Protocols, etc) Display the |Utilities| Main Menu on a CT OC plasma. Touch |CT Tools|. Next, touch |File Manager| followed by |Save/Restore|. At this time, touch |All| to restore the previously saved system parameters, including the tube usage information. Note: The system requires 5 10 minutes to restore system cals. Time varies with the number of cals and scan protocols. After these selections have been made, place the tape on which you have previously saved System Parameters (see page 94) in the drive, touch |Restore| and wait until the tape load finishes. The system removes the abort tape restore softkey and displays a message along the bottom of the screen that files have successfully been restored from tape. The system displays a message that firmware characterization files have been restored and asks if the hardware should be reset. Touch the |No| softkey. You can remove the tape at this point.
Bring the system down* and restart it.**

...THE SYSTEM IS READY TO USE * If you need to load diagnostics, you may perform step 914 before you shutdown the system. ** If you need to adopt other suites or hosts you may perform step 9144 before bringing the system back up.
914
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 914 9141 Load Diagnostics (Optional)
Load OC NonProprietary Diagnostics (HNS) (non GE Service sites only) To load HLFC diagnostic utilities from the Utilities menu on a CT OC plasma, select |Shell|. Make sure the HLFC tape is inserted in the tape drive. Touch inside the open shell tool which appears on the left side of the plasma. (This allows you to enter input into the shell.) You should see an arrow where you pressed. Follow the commands below: genesis @ <SuiteID>: su <enter> Password: <root password> root @ <SuiteID>: installDiags hns <enter> root @ <SuiteID>: rehash <enter> Enter <control D> twice after the tape is loaded to exit from this shell tool. Be sure to remove the HLFC tape from the tape drive.
9142
Network Configuration Information OPTIONAL If there is a gateway card installed in the OC or IC and there are nongenesis hosts on the backbone network with which the OC should receive and/or transmit images, then run setAdoption. Before discussing the procedure for adoption, it is important to introduce the concept of network transfer types. Depending upon the host, it may be capable of Receiving, Transmitting or both Receiving and Transmitting Genesis Images. At the time a host is adopted this is one of the attributes which must be defined.
9143
Types of Network Transfer There are three types of network transfer: RECEIVE TRANSMIT BOTH Any host which can receive Genesis Images Any host which can send Genesis images Any host which can both receive and transmit Genesis Images.
Adopted DG Signas (which are nonGenesis host/s) TRANSMIT only. When an Advantage Windows workstation is adopted the RECEIVE option is selected even though AW can both send and receive Genesis images. This is because it utilizes a nongenesis database and its lists (exam/series/image) cannot be displayed on the genesis host. Advantage Windows are also adopted as PCs. 9144 Adoption of nonGenesis suites and hosts: If the host on which you are running setAdoption is both the YP Master and the Suite Master, you may adopt nonGenesis suites and hosts. If the host on which you are running setAdoption is the YP Master but not the Suite Master, you may adopt nonGenesis or ID/NET II hosts. If the host on which you are running setAdoption is the Suite Master but not the YP Master, you may adopt nonGenesis suites.
915
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 All applications must be down before running setAdoption. Use sdservice. <SuiteID> @ login: genesis <enter> Password: <default genesis password> genesis @ <SuiteID>: sdservice setAdoption must be run as root. genesis @ <SuiteID>: su <enter> Password: <root password> root @ <SuiteID>: setAdoption
9145
Run setAdoption If this is the first time setAdoption has been run on this host, you will see the following questions, otherwise, if you have already adopted hosts or suites, you will be asked by setAdoption if you first wish to unadopt any previously adopted hosts or suites. Follow the instructions shown at run time and then setAdoption will proceed with the following: Which nonGenesis Host(s)/Suite(s) do you wish to adopt? 1 = MR Signa(s), PC(s) 2 = ID/NET II host(s) 3 = Genesis host(s) in other networks {separated by routers} Enter selection (1, 2, 3), or press <enter> when done adopting: For selection 1, see section 1144. For selection 2, see section 1145. For selection 3, see section 1146.
9146
Adopt MR Signa, PC The following question is asked: Do you want to adopt a nonGenesis host in your suite (yY|nN)[n] ? If answer is y: Enter hostName for nonGenesis host or press <enter> when done. Valid names are SGx, PCx, where x = 09 : Enter Unix hostname ( used by Yellow Pages ) for nonGenesis host : Enter the Internet address ( IP ) of nonGenesis host : Enter type of network transfer for nonGenesis host (b=BOTH, r=RECEIVE, t=TRANSMIT): The following question will be asked if the host is the suiteMaster (gateway): Do you want to adopt a suite (yY|nN)[n]? If answer is y, for each nonGenesis suite, the following set of questions will be asked:
916
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 Enter the suiteID of the adopted suite or press <enter> when done. Valid Genesis suiteID names are 4 chars and/or digits: Enter hostName for host in adopted suite. Valid name are SGx, PCx, where x = 09 : Enter Unix hostname ( used by Yellow Pages ) for nonGenesis host : Enter the Internet address ( IP ) of nonGenesis host : Enter type of network transfer for nonGenesis host (b=BOTH, r=RECEIVE, t=TRANSMIT):
9147
Adopt ID/NET II Hosts The following question will be asked: Do you want to adopt (add) a nonGenesis ID/NET suite (yY|nN)[n]? If answer is y: Enter the suiteID of the ID/NET suite or press <enter> when done. Valid IDnet suiteID names are 4 chars and/or digits: The following set of questions will be asked for each hostName within the suite: Enter hostName for ID/NET host or press <enter> when done. Valid host names are 4 chars and/or digits: Enter ACRNEMA address ( 116 chars/digits ) for ID/NET host. The suggested format is <area>_<subarea>_<local>. <area> is a 6 chars/digits string, abbreviation of your hospital name. <subarea> is a 4 chars/digits string, for example suiteID. <local> is a 4 chars/digits string, for example Host Name. Enter your selection: Enter ID/NET hosts IP (Internet address) address :
9148
Adopt Genesis Hosts in Other Networks The following question will be asked: Do you want to adopt a suite (yY|nN)[n] ? If answer is y: Enter the suiteID of the adopted suite or press <enter> when done. Valid Genesis suiteID names are 4 chars and/or digits: The following set of questions will be asked for each host name: Enter hostName for host in adopted suite. Valid names are ICx or OC0, where x = 02 : Enter the Internet(IP) address of Genesis host:
917
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 And the following message will be posted: Although application config files have been updated for <suiteID>, you MAY have to add routing information to this host before network communications can be established. To do this you will have to know the internet address of the ROUTER that connects <suiteID> to this hosts network. For the purpose of example assume your routers address is 111.111.111.111 and that <suiteID> is on the network cable JUST ON THE OTHER SIDE OF the router ... (that means its 1 HOP away). Then you would probably have to add a route command to the file /etc/rc.local that looks like this: route add <Internet(IP) address> 111.111.111.111 1
Note:
<Internet(IP) address> might need to be replaced with something less specific (like the SUBNET address), in the event this host communicates with multiple hosts. Also, it may require more HOPs. PLEASE consult with the network administrator.
915
Adoption Installation Procedure Type of network transfer Before discussing the procedure for adoption, it is important to introduce the concept of network transfer types. Depending upon the host, it may be capable of Receiving, Transmitting or both Receiving and Transmitting Genesis Images. At the time a host is adopted this is one of the attributes which must be defined. There are 3 options for the type of network transfer: RECEIVE Any host which can receive Genesis Images TRANSMIT Any host which can send Genesis images BOTH Any host which can both receive and transmit Genesis Images.
Adopted DG Signas (which are nonGenesis host/s) TRANSMIT only and there are no known products which have been defined as RECEIVE only (although this may not always be the case).
The adoption of a host can occur only on the ypmaster or the suiteMaster. The adoption if an ID/NET suite is further restricted to adoption from the suiteMaster.
ONLY if the host is a ypmaster, or the suiteMaster: Which nonGenesis Host(s)/Suites do you wish to adopt: 1 = MR signa(s) PC(s) 2 = ID/NET II host(s) Enter selection [12], or press <return> when done:
918
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 Upon Selection 1, the opportunity is given to select/remove nonGenesis hosts/suites from the adoption list. Upon completion, one is returned to the main adoption menu. The operator is first requested to add/delete all nonGenesis hosts from the adoption list. Once this is complete, the operator can continue and add/delete suites from the adoption list. ONLY if adopted nonGenesis host(s) exist: Do you want to remove an adopted nonGenesis host from your suite (yY|nN)[n]? If answer is yes The current list of adopted nonGenesis hosts is : <some name, ...> Enter the nonGenesis hostName of the host to be removed, or press <enter> when done. REGARDLESS of whether adopted nonGenesis host(s) exist: Do you want to adopt a nonGenesis host in your suite (yY|nN)[n]? If answer is yes, for each nonGenesis host, the following set of questions will be asked: Enter hostName for host or press <enter> when done. Valid name are SGx, PCx, where x = 09 : Enter UNIX hostName (used by Yellow Pages) for nonGenesis host : Enter the Internet address (IP) of nonGenesis host : Enter type of transfer (BOTH/RECEIVE/TRANSMIT) for nonGenesis host :
ONLY if the host is the suiteMaster (gateway) and adopted nonGenesis suite(s) exist: Do you want to remove an adopted nonGenesis suite from your suite (yY|nN)[n]? If answer is yes The current list of adopted nonGenesis suites is : <some name,...> Enter the suiteID of the nonGenesis suite or press <enter> when done. ONLY if the host is the suiteMaster (gateway), but REGARDLESS of whether adopted nonGenesis suite(s) exist: Do you want to adopt a nonGenesis suite (yY|nN)[n]? If answer is yes, for each nonGenesis suite, the following set of questions will be asked:
919
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 Enter the suiteID of the adopted suite or press <enter> when done. Valid Genesis suiteID names are 4 chars and/or digits: Enter hostName for host in adopted suite. Valid name are SGx, PCx, where x = 09 : Enter UNIX hostName ( used by Yellow Pages ) for nonGenesis host : Enter the Internet address ( IP ) of nonGenesis host : Enter type of transfer (BOTH/RECEIVE/TRANSMIT) for nonGenesis host :
ONLY if adopted ID/NET suite(s) exist: Do you want to remove an adopted ID/NET suite from your Genesis suite (yY|nN)[n]? If answer is yes The current list of adopted ID/NET Suites is : <some name, ...> Enter the suiteID of ID/NET suite or press <enter> when done. REGARDLESS of whether adopted ID/NET suite(s) exist: Do you want to adopt (add) a nonGenesis ID/NET suite (yY|nN)[n]? If answer is yes Enter the suiteID of the ID/NET suite or press <enter> when done. Valid IDnet suiteID names are 4 chars and/or digits: The following set of questions will be asked for each hostName within the suite: Enter hostName for ID/NET host or press <enter> when done. Valid host names are 4 chars and/or digits: Enter ACRNEMA address ( 116 chars/digits ) for ID/NET host. The suggested format is <area>_<subarea>_<local>. <area> is a 6 chars/digits string, abbreviation of your hospital name. <subarea> is a 4 chars/digits string, for example suiteID. <local> is a 4 chars/digits string, for example Host Name. Enter your selection: Enter ID/NET hosts IP (Internet address) address :
920
OC/SBC System Reconfiguration

916 Introduction Sections 917 through 923 describe the procedure to change the software configuration of a HiSpeed Advantage system. With the HiSpeed Advantage reconfiguration software, you can change most of the parameters you entered during a software Load From Cold, without returning to the LFC procedure. Page 91 contains a list of the procedures that require the reconfig program, and two standalone procedures
Execute a reconfig on the OC, to change configuration screen parameters. Some sections require reconfiguration on both the OC and SBC. The OC and/or SBC requirements appear in parenthesis, next to the title of the corresponding reconfig procedure. Note: Type the text shown in boldface, and press the <enter> key on the keyboard. (Type/enter bold = Type bold <enter>.) System Text output is shown in system font: genesis @ <suiteID>_OC0:
917
Shutdown System Applications and Start Reconfiguration 1. If necessary, press |L1| and |B| to toggle between the boot terminal and the plasma applications screen, and display the genesis prompt: login: genesis <enter> password: xxxxxxx <enter> genesis @ <suite>_OC0: 2. Shutdown all system applications to unix level by typing sdservice at the genesis prompt on the system console: genesis @ <suite>_OC0: sdservice <enter> 3. Change to root user: genesis @ <suite>_OC0: su <enter> password: xxxxxx <enter> 4. Start reconfiguration software. root @ <suite>_OC0: reconfig <enter> 5. The software displays the first configuration screen, Illustration 95 shown on page 923. (Detailed parameter descriptions start on page 924.) Change the parameters on the first screen, and/or touch |Continue| to display subsequent screens. Use |Continue| and |Backup| to move between screens.
6. Display the Network Configuration screen, and touch |Accept| to reconfigure the system with the currently selected parameters. or 7. Touch |Exit without Changes| to exit reconfiguration without implementing changes. Note: Do NOT try to stop the reconfig software after you |Accept| the new parameters. Wait for the reconfiguration to finish, then return to reconfig, correct the parameters, and |Accept| the new parameters.
921
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 918 Run reconfig on the SBC
Page 92 contains a list of parameter changes that require you to reconfigure both the OC and SBC. After you reconfigure the OC, reboot it, and use rsh or tip to login to the SBC. 1. Reboot the OC. 2. Use rsh or tip to login to the SBC. genesis @ <suite>_OC0: rsh <suite>_SBC0 <enter> [ . . . some info . . . ] genesis @ <suite>_SBC0: su <enter> password: xxxxx <enter> root @ <suite>_SBC0: or genesis @ <suite>_OC0: tip sbc <enter> <suite>_SBC0 login: root <enter> [ . . . some info . . . ] root @ <suite>_SBC0: 3. Execute reconfig: root @ <suite>_SBC0: reconfig 4. If the OC or SBC configuration changes the OC internet number, the system prompts you to type/enter the new number(s) Enter internet number for SBC0: <internet number of SBC> Enter internet number for OC0: <internet number of OC0> Note: The SBC reconfiguration software uses information entered during the most recent OC reconfiguration. If you selected |Yes| to Reset the Database during the OC reconfiguration, the system automatically resets the Scan Database when you reconfigure the SBC.
919
Select Configuration Parameters Illustrations 95 through 99 contain examples of each type of Configuration screen. Your screens will appear similar but not necessarily identical to the examples. With the exception of the System Parameters screen, all other configuration screens are identical to the ones encountered during LFC.
9191
On Line Help Touch any of the parameter lines to display the corresponding HELP window. Touch the Help window to close it.
922
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 920 System Parameters
ILLUSTRATION 95 SYSTEM PARAMETERS RECONFIGURATION SCREEN System Parameters Suite ID Hospital name OC Host Type IC Unique System Number (USN) Host name OC0 Master YP type Slave GECARES System ID
Yes Regen Database
No
Exit without Changes
Continue
9201
Change the Suite ID (OC and SBC) 1. Start reconfig on OC. (Procedure described on page 921.) 2. Highlight the suite ID data field, and type/enter new ID 3. Touch |Continue| to proceed to the next screen. 4. Display the Network Configuration screen, and touch |Accept| to reconfigure the system with the currently selected parameters. 5. Run reconfig on the SBC. (Procedure described on page 918.)
9202
Change the Hospital Name (OC only) Change the hospital name which appears on the images. 1. Start reconfig on OC. (Procedure described on page 921.) 2. Change the hospital name field on the System Parameters screen 3. Highlight the hospital name data field, and type/enter a new name 4. Touch |Continue| to proceed to the next screen. 5. Display the Network Configuration screen, and touch |Accept| to reconfigure the system with the currently selected parameters.
923
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 9203 Reset the Database
You can use reconfig to reset the systems image and scan databases. The Regen Database parameter automatically defaults to |No| when the software first displays the System Parameter screen. (Illustration 95, above, shows the default mode.) Note: Touch Regen Database |Yes| to reset the image database.
The Regen Database function destroys all the images residing on the system disk. Make sure you archive all images before you reset the image database. The following procedures require a database reset: Change Patient Exam number, section 9204 Replace High Speed Disk on the SBC, section 9205
9204
Change the Patient Exam number (OC only) Note: This procedure requires a Regen Database function, which destroys all the images residing on the system disk. Make sure you archive all images before you reset the image database. Use this procedure to type/enter the exam number scanRx uses during the next exam prescription. 1. Start reconfig on OC. (Procedure described on page 921.) 2. Select Regen Database |Yes| to reset the Database. 3. Touch |Continue| to proceed to the System Formats & Defaults screen, shown in illustration 96. 4. Type/enter a new number in the Starting Patient Exam # field 5. Touch |Continue| to display the Network Configuration screen, then touch |Accept| to reconfigure the system with the currently selected parameters.
9205
Replace the High Speed Disk on the SBC (OC and SBC) Note: This procedure requires a Regen Database function, which destroys all the images residing on the system disk. Make sure you archive all images before you reset the image database. Use this procedure when you replace the High Speed disk on the SBC. 1. Save system state via Utilities/File Manager (if possible) Save system state description, section 941, begins on page 94. 2. Start reconfig on OC. (Procedure described on page 921.) 3. Select Regen Database |Yes| to reset the Database. 4. Touch |Continue| to proceed to the next screen. 5. Display the Network Configuration screen, and touch |Accept| to reconfigure the system with the currently selected parameters. 6. Run reconfig on the SBC. (Procedure described on page 918.) 7. Bring the system up and restore calibration data via Utilities/File Manager. Description begins on page 913.
924
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 921 System Formats & Defaults
ILLUSTRATION 96 SYSTEM FORMATS AND DEFAULTS SCREEN System Formats & Defaults
MIL_HH_MM_SS MIL_HH_MM HH_MM_SS_XM HH_MM_XM
Time Format
/ Date Separator
.
DD_MM_YY
Starting Patient Exam # Starting Diagnostic Exam # 50001 1
MM_DD_YY
YY_MM_DD
Date Format Timezone US/Central US/Mountain US/Pacific US/Pacific New US/Alaska US/East Indiana Backup Central time zone USA Mountain time zone USA Pacific time zone USA Pacific time zone USA Alaska time zone USA Eastern time zone USA
Starting Optical Disk #
Doctors Title
Radiologist lb kg
Units for Patient Weight
Continue
9211
Change the Timezone (OC and SBC) Use this procedure to change the system timezone. Note: The unix date command does NOT change the timezone. 1. Start reconfig on OC. (Procedure described on page 921.) 2. Touch |Continue| to display the System Formats & Defaults screen. 3. Highlight the new Timezone parameter. 4. Touch |Continue| and/or |Backup| to move between screens. 5. Display the Network Configuration screen, and touch |Accept| to reconfigure the system with the currently selected parameters. 6. Run reconfig on the SBC. (Procedure described on page 918.)
925
Change the Time Format, Date Format, or Date Separator (OC only) These values determine the time and date format on the Messages box. 1. Start reconfig on OC. (Procedure described on page 921.) 2. Touch |Continue| to display the System Formats & Defaults screen. 3. Touch the softkey to select the corresponding Time Format, Date Format, and/or Date Separator. 4. Touch |Continue| and/or |Backup| to move between screens. 5. Display the Network Configuration screen, and touch |Accept| to reconfigure the system with the currently selected parameters. Note: Check the help window for additional values.
9213
Change the Doctors Title (OC only) Change the label of the Doctors Title data field on the Patient Data screen, for use by scanRx and display. 1. Start reconfig on OC. (Procedure described on page 921.) 2. Touch |Continue| to display the System Formats & Defaults screen. 3. Type/enter the string for Doctors Title in the corresponding data field. You may type/enter D for Diagnostician, R for Radiologist, or you may type any other appropriate title, and press <enter>. 4. Touch |Continue| and/or |Backup| to move between screens. 5. Display the Network Configuration screen, and touch |Accept| to reconfigure the system with the currently selected parameters.
9214
Change the Units for Patient Weight (OC only) Change unit value for the patient weight data field on the Patient Data screen, for use by scanRx and display 1. Start reconfig on OC. (Procedure described on page 921.) 2. Touch |Continue| to display the System Formats & Defaults screen. 3. Touch the corresponding softkey to elect to enter patient weight in pounds or kilograms. 4. Touch |Continue| and/or |Backup| to move between screens. 5. Display the Network Configuration screen, and touch |Accept| to reconfigure the system with the currently selected parameters.
9215
Change the Optical Disk or Reel Tape number (OC only) Use this procedure to type/enter the value the system uses to number the next Optical Disk or Reel Tape. The data entry field labels Option availability determines actual data entry field label(s). 1. Start reconfig on OC. (Procedure described on page 921.) 2. Touch |Continue| to display the System Formats & Defaults screen. 3. Highlight and change the Starting Optical Disk # and/or Starting Reel Tape # data field, and press <enter>. 4. Touch |Continue| and/or |Backup| to move between screens. 5. Display the Network Configuration screen, and touch |Accept| to reconfigure the system with the currently selected parameters.
926
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 922 Hardware Configuration Parameters
ILLUSTRATION 97 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION SCREEN Hardware Configuration 60 Hz IP refresh rate 3M camera rs170 Video Tape ccir MI10 camera 50 Hz Camera Configuration
Yes Printer in Suite
No
CT Tube Type
Housing # 46309500G2 Insert # 46309300G2
EDAS Type
46266845 G4 Reduced Gain
46266845 G3 Full Gain
Tube Housing Serial # Tube Failure Code Backup
Tube Insert Serial #
Continue
9221
Change the Camera Configuration (OC only) This procedure allows changes to the parameters available under Camera Configuration. This only requires a reconfig on the OC. 1. Start reconfig on OC. (Procedure described on page 921.) 2. Touch |Continue| to display the Hardware Configuration screen. 3. Touch the corresponding softkey to select the Camera Configuration. 4. Touch |Continue| and/or |Backup| to move between screens. 5. Display the Network Configuration screen, and touch |Accept| to reconfigure the system with the currently selected parameters.
9222
Change the IP Refresh Rate (OC only) 1. Start reconfig on OC. (Procedure described on page 921.) 2. Touch |Continue| to display the Hardware Configuration screen. 3. Touch the corresponding softkey to select the IP refresh rate. 4. Touch |Continue| and/or |Backup| to move between screens. 5. Display the Network Configuration screen, and touch |Accept| to reconfigure the system with the currently selected parameters.
927
Change the Video Tape Interface (OC only) This procedure only requires a reconfig on the OC 1. Start reconfig on OC. (Procedure described on page 921.) 2. Touch |Continue| to display the Hardware Configuration screen. 3. Touch the corresponding softkey to select the Video Tape Interface. 4. Touch |Continue| and/or |Backup| to move between screens. 5. Display the Network Configuration screen, and touch |Accept| to reconfigure the system with the currently selected parameters.
9224
Add/Remove a Printer (OC only) This procedure only requires a reconfig on the OC 1. Start reconfig on OC. (Procedure described on page 921.) 2. Touch |Continue| to display the Hardware Configuration screen. 3. Touch the corresponding softkey add or remove the Printer from the Suite. 4. Touch |Continue| and/or |Backup| to move between screens. 5. Display the Network Configuration screen, and touch |Accept| to reconfigure the system with the currently selected parameters.
9225
Add New Tube Information (OC and SBC) Use this procedure after installing a new XRay tube. 1. Start reconfig on OC. (Procedure described on page 921.) 2. Touch |Continue| to display the Hardware Configuration screen. 3. Type/enter the new Tube Housing Serial #, Tube Insert Serial #, and Tube Failure Code information. 4. Touch |Continue| and/or |Backup| to move between screens. 5. Display the Network Configuration screen, and touch |Accept| to reconfigure the system with the currently selected parameters. 6. Run reconfig on the SBC. (Procedure described on page 918.)
9226
Change the EDAS type (OC and SBC) 1. Start reconfig on OC. (Procedure described on page 921.) 2. Touch |Continue| to display the Hardware Configuration screen. 3. Touch the corresponding softkey to select the correct type of EDAS. 4. Touch |Continue| and/or |Backup| to move between screens. 5. Display the Network Configuration screen, and touch |Accept| to reconfigure the system with the currently selected parameters. 6. Run reconfig on the SBC. (Procedure described on page 918.)
928
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 923 Network Configuration
ILLUSTRATION 98 NETWORK CONFIGURATION NO ACTIVE GATEWAY Network Configuration OC0 Hosts in Suite SBC0 IC0 IC1 IC2
Yes Active Gateway:
No OC0 Internet address: SBC0 Internet address: SBC0 Ethernet number:
ACRNEMA address: Suite ID of PAN host: Hostname of PAN: Subnet network OC0
Backup
Accept
ILLUSTRATION 99 NETWORK CONFIGURATION WITH ACTIVE GATEWAY Network Configuration OC0 Hosts in Suite SBC0 IC0 IC1 IC2
Yes Active Gateway:
No OC0 Internet address:
Gateway IP address ACRNEMA address Suite ID of PAN host Hostname of PAN Subnet network Gateway netmask Backup OC0
SBC0 Internet address: SBC0 Ethernet number:
Accept
929
Change the Internet Addresses (OC and SBC) Use this procedure to change the internet numbers of hosts in the Suite. Run reconfig on the OC and the SBC. Run ctload on any IC in the suite. 1. Start reconfig on OC. (Procedure described on page 921.) 2. Touch |Continue| to display the Network Configuration screen. 3. Change the corresponding internet numbers. 4. Touch |Backup| and/or |Continue| to move between screens, or touch |Accept| to reconfigure the system with the currently selected parameters. 5. Run reconfig on the SBC. (Procedure described on page 918.) Type/enter the new internet numbers for OC and SC when prompted. 6. Run ctload on any IC in the suite.
9232
Change the Suite Configuration (OC and SBC) Use this procedure to add or remove an IC from the suite. Run reconfig on the OC, the SBC, and the IC, if adding an IC to the system. 1. Start reconfig on OC. (Procedure described on page 921.) 2. Touch |Continue| to display the Network Configuration screen. 3. Select/deselect the hosts in the suite. 4. If adding an IC, type/enter its internet number. 5. Touch |Backup| and/or |Continue| to move between screens, or touch |Accept| to reconfigure the system with the currently selected parameters. 6. Run reconfig on the SBC. (Procedure described on page 918.) 7. Run reconfig on any IC in the Suite.
9233
Change the ACRNEMA Address (OC only) 1. Start reconfig on OC. (Procedure described on page 921.) 2. Touch |Continue| to display the Network Configuration screen. 3. Change the ACRNEMA Address in the data field. 4. Touch |Backup| and/or |Continue| to move between screens, or touch |Accept| to reconfigure the system with the currently selected parameters.
9234
Change the Primary Archive Node (PAN) (OC only) 1. Start reconfig on OC. (Procedure described on page 921.) 2. Touch |Continue| to display the Network Configuration screen. 3. Change the Suite ID of PAN Host and Hostname of the PAN Host fields. 4. Touch |Backup| and/or |Continue| to move between screens, or touch |Accept| to reconfigure the system with the currently selected parameters.
930
Add/Remove a Second Ethernet Board on the OC (OC only) Use this procedure when you add or remove the second ethernet board to or from the scanner. 1. Start reconfig on OC. (Procedure described on page 921.) 2. Touch |Continue| to display the Network Configuration screen. To add an ethernet board: a. Refer to Illustration 98: Select |Yes| for the Active Gateway. b. Refer to illustration 99: Type/enter the gateway internet address into the Gateway IP address field. c. Touch |Backup| and/or |Continue| to move between screens, or touch |Accept| to reconfigure the system with the currently selected parameters.
To remove an ethernet board: a. Refer to Illustration 98: Select |No| for the Active Gateway. b. Touch |Backup| and/or |Continue| to move between screens, or touch |Accept| to reconfigure the system with the currently selected parameters. 9236 Add/Remove a Second Ethernet Board on an IC in the Suite (OC only) Use this procedure when you add or remove the second ethernet board to or from an IC in the Suite. Run reconfig on the OC and run ctload on the IC. 1. Start reconfig on OC. (Procedure described on page 921.) 2. Touch |Continue| to display the Network Configuration screen. To add an ethernet board: a. Refer to Illustration 98: Select |Yes| for the Active Gateway. b. Refer to illustration 99: Type/enter the gateway internet address into the Gateway IP address field. c. Touch |Backup| and/or |Continue| to move between screens, or touch |Accept| to reconfigure the system with the currently selected parameters.
To remove an ethernet board: a. Refer to Illustration 98: Select |No| for the Active Gateway. b. Touch |Backup| and/or |Continue| to move between screens, or touch |Accept| to reconfigure the system with the currently selected parameters. 3. Run ctload on the IC.
931
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 9 924 Change the System Time Note:
This procedure does NOT change the timezone of the system.

This procedure changes the actual time reported by the system. 1. Use sdservice to shutdown application on the OC 2. Type su <enter> 3. Type date YYMMDDhhmm <enter> YY = year, MM=month, DD=day hh=hour, mm=minutes example: date 9701061436 sets the date to January 6, 1997 2:36pm
925
Add/Remove Hosts for Image Transfer Use this procedure to inform the OC of hosts available for image transfer over the Network. 1. Use sdservice to shutdown applications on the OC 2. Type su <enter> 3. Type setAdoption <enter> Note: Refer the Product Software Load Procedure for setAdoption instructions.
926
Load the 8K rpm rotor patch tape.
932
CHAPTER 10 IMAGE PERFORMANCE

101 Calibration This section describes the procedure for evaluating image performance on the HiSpeed Advantage System. Please note the following requirements: a. All functional checks and service adjustments must be performed on the system prior to image performance verification. b. the system must be warmed up prior to scanning (minimum 2 hours) c. All phantom CALs, except QCal, used to create a CAL file must be completed within a 75 hour period of time.
d. Make sure the tube is warm by using the Tube Warm Up soft key available from top level plasma. Note: You must execute the GENCAL scans that come after the warm up scans for the tube to be sufficiently warm. DO NOT cancel after warm-up scans. e. Verify that the vertical surface of the phantom is parallel to the gantry plane of rotation within 0.5 degrees in both the x and y axis. Scout scans, both 0 and 90 degrees, must be used to measure phantom position. f. All phantoms must be centered axially to 0.12mm for phantom calibrations.
g. All phantoms must be centered axially to 1.00mm for phantom scans. 102 Alpha Vector Cal Generation A valid QCal and Crosstalk calibration are required. Touch |Utilities| softkey. Touch |1|, |2|, |3|. Touch |Shell| softkey. In the opened shell, enter avcal. Touch |AutoCal| softkey. Enter 4digit detector number. Verify that nothing is in the scan fieldofview. Touch |OK|. Press the (Start Scan) key for each of two scans that will be taken.
Verify that the following messages are displayed at the bottom of the plasma screen: resource manager: calculating cal vectors xx% complete writing vectors to the SBC installing cal vectors on the SBC Touch |View Vector| softkey. Touch |Graph| softkey.
Verify that the graph results do not exceed the upper graph limits.
101
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 103 QCAL
The QCal procedure must be run before phantom calibration and scanning can begin. A correction factor is calculated when the XRay beam moves across the detector in the Zaxis as the tube temperature changes. That is why it is important that the QCal procedure is run with a cold and hot tube to calculate beam movement.
CAUTION
Performing a QCal destroys all old phantom CALS. In addition, the DAS should have power turned ON for at least 2 hours before calibrating. A very cold tube is required. There should be no exposures for at least one and one half hours before QCal is started (this also means no tube warmup). Tests that do not interfere with tube cooling will be completed during this wait. Verify that the mylar window is centered on the patient alignment lights. If the mylar window is not properly centered , one of the metal bands of the mylar window assembly could be shading the detector, causing QCal to fail. To initialize tube cooling, beginning from the top level plasma: Touch the |Cal| softkey. Touch the |QCal| softkey. Touch the |Accept| softkey.
If an abort occurs during the HOT portion of the QCal data collection phase: Exit the program and fix the problem. Wait for at least one and one half hours before attempting a new QCal series.
If an abort occurs during the COLD portion of the QCal data collection phase: Stop. Reenter the program Continue with new series
Upon completion of QCal, ZCHK calculation and comparison to applicable spec limits will occur automatically. To examine the results of ZCHK initiate the following sequence of soft keys from the top level plasma. Touch |Cal Functions|. Touch |Cal Tools|. Touch |QCal Status|. Touch |Sort By kV|.
Verify that all QCal vectors are valid.
102
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 7 104 Crosstalk Calibration
To begin crosstalk calibration execute the following sequence of soft keys beginning from the top level plasma. Touch |Cal|. Touch |Crosstalk|. Touch |Accept|. Push Scan Enable when lit to initiate and complete four air scans When prompted, center the crosstalk phantom using the alignment lights. Then raise the table 180mm from the centered position.
Note:
It is very important that the table is raised the full 180mm from the centered position. Touch |Accept|, to continue (Push Scan Enable when lit)
This will initiate the remaining scans required for crosstalk calibration. When scanning is complete check the results of crosstalk calibration using the following sequence of soft keys from top level plasma. Touch |View XTalk|. Touch |Cal|. Touch |Cal Status|. Touch |Xtalk Status|. Touch |View Xtalk|.
Verify that crosstalk passes all applicable specifications. If not, problems must be addressed and crosstalk rerun. 105 Phantom Calibration CT# Adjustment ALWAYS RUN THIS ADJUST CT# PROCEDURE AFTER YOU CALIBRATE THE SYSTEM, TO REDUCE THE RISK OF MISDIAGNOSIS, DUE TO INACCURATE CT NUMBERS. Initiate the following sequence from the Top Level Plasma: Touch |Cal|. Touch |Phantom Edit|. Edit the updated ROI values, as described in the Phantom Calibration procedure: Small 80kV Small 100kv 120kV and 140kV Medium and large 120kV Medium and large 140kV Touch |Accept|.
WARNING
103
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 7 106 Calibration Procedure
Illustration 101 contains a block diagram that shows the applicable sequence of softkeys and keyboard inputs required during calibrations. Create the cal files that correspond to the scanning techniques that the customer uses. Direction 2102337, CT HiSpeed Advantage Operators Manual, describes the axial and scout scanning procedures.
ILLUSTRATION 101 CALIBRATION PROTOCOL
Start
Cal Function
Calibrate or Calcheck
If desired.
User Select
Edit Scans
Choose Cals
The Cal Scan selection list will be displayed on the right side of display
Next
More than one calibration can be selected. This will create a list of calibrations to be executed.
Accept
Lower right of display
Accept
Phantom Centering Required No Accept
Yes Center Phantom
Exit
When Cal or Cals are complete continue with additional Cals by touching Cal Select. The sequence from this point is a repeat of the process above beginning with touch User Select.
104
CHAPTER 11 SWITCHES, LEDs, AND JUMPER SETTINGS
111
SCU switches, LEDs and jumper settings Jumper and switch configurations for various SCU resident hardware is described in this section.
112
RP 2.X IG Subsystem Chassis Layout And Component Locations Illustration 111 shows the slot assignments for the SCU scan chassis and the location of the disk drives and power supply.
ILLUSTRATION 111 IG SUBSYSTEM CHASSIS FRONT VIEW (COVER REMOVED)
Filler Panel (slot 4) IG (slot 5)

Blank Panel
CLA (slot 2) SBC (slot 1) DC Power Supply
FEP (slot 3)
HSSD
LSD
AC Power Switch
Cooling Fan Module
111

ILLUSTRATION 112 IG SUBSYSTEM CHASSIS REAR VIEW (COVER REMOVED)
+5VDC adjustment behind grating near +5V GND stud on DC Power Supply. Use insulated, potentiometer adjustment tool to set to +4.95.1VDC if necessary (measure voltage at VME +5V backpanel studs).
DC Power Supply VME Backpanel
Disk Drive Tray Fan
VME +5V backpanel studs
+
Bulkhead Connector Plate
J5 J2 J6 J3
P1
Ethernet Connector Ethernet Connector Serial Port Connector
DAS
DATA
System Ground Lug AC Input (120VAC only)
Abort Connector FiberOptic Cable Access Port
112

ILLUSTRATION 113 SBC (MVME1669U 68040 STEALTH CPU LEDs AND CONNECTORS
FAIL STAT RUN SCON LAN RPWR SCSI VME TPWR
SBC (MVME1669U Stealth CPU) LED Descriptions: FAIL STAT RUN SCON LAN RPWR SCSI VME TPWR GREEN LED indicating board RESET in progress (or board failure if it stays on). GREEN LED indicating processor is is in a HALT condition. GREEN LED indicating processor is in a RUN condition (firmware or software). GREEN LED indicating SBC is the VME SYSTEM CONTROLLER. GREEN LED indicating the onboard ETHERNET is active (transferring data). GREEN LED indicating REMOTE POWER (+12VDC) present to the onboard Ethernet 15pin connector (fused thru F1 on the SBC) for external transceivers. GREEN LED indicating the onboard SCSI is active (transferring data). GREEN LED indicating VME data transfers active to/from the SBC. GREEN LED indicating SCSI TERMINATOR power is present to the external SCSI ribbon cable (fused thru F2 on the SBC).
ABORT RESET
SBC (MVME1669U Stealth CPU) Front Panel SWITCH Descriptions: ABORT RESET
C A
Momentary pushbutton which HALTS the SBC and enters the onboard firmware monitor (166Bug>). Momentary pushbutton which RESETS the SBC and causes a powerup reset and boot cycle.
SBC (MVME1669U Stealth CPU) CONNECTOR Descriptions: Serial A 25pin RS232C serial port A (to OC GAI panel, the tip line) Serial B 25pin RS232C serial port B (not used) Serial C 25pin RS232C serial port C (not used) Serial D 25pin RS232C serial port D (not used) Ethernet 15pin IEEE 802.3 Ethernet (to external transceiver to OC network) Keyboard SUN3 compatible keyboard port (not used) Printer Centronics parallel printer port (not used) SCSI 50pin SCSI bus connector (to subsystem LSD and HSD disk drives)
ETH
KYB
PRI SCSI
113

ILLUSTRATION 114 SBC BOARD (MVME1669U 68040 CPU) JUMPERS Foreplane
J6 J15 3 1 J14 J13 J12
Transition Module
Memory Mezzanine Module

F1
J2
F 2 Processor Module (IN) (12 OUT, all others IN) (IN) (35, 46 IN) (Dont Care) J2 = SCSI Termination Power J3 = General Purpose IO J6 = VME System Controller J7 = SRAM Power Control J10 = VSBchip2 Arbitration Select F1 = +12 Volt Power Fuse F2 = SCSI Termination Power F3 = 12 Volt Power Fuse F4 = +5 Volt Power Fuse J6 = Keyboard/Mouse select J12 = Serial J13 = Port J14 = Mode J15= Select
6 4 2 J7
5 3 1
Processor Module
16
15
Transition Module (IN) (23 IN) (23 IN) (23 IN) (23 IN)
J6 8 7
2 J3
J10
F4
F3
P2
P1
114

ILLUSTRATION 115 CLA (MVME3769U HAWK ETHERNET) LEDs AND CONNECTORS
VME RX TX INT
STAT
CLA (MVME3769U HAWK) LED Descriptions: (LEDs not visible on the front 9U panel edge but 5 LEDs do exist on the 6U board edge) VME RX TX INT STAT Indicates board is being accessed over the VME. Indicates Ethernet data packets are being received. Indicates Ethernet data packets are being transmitted. Indicates a VME interrupt is being generated. RED if board not initialized by software. GREEN if board initialized OK.
Ethernet
CLA (MVME3769U HAWK) Front Panel SWITCH Descriptions: (none)
CLA (MVME3769U HAWK) CONNECTOR Descriptions: Ethernet 15pin IEEE 802.3 Ethernet (to external transceiver to STC/ETC network)
115

ILLUSTRATION 116 CLA BOARD (MVME3769U HAWK ETHERNET) JUMPERS
NOTE: The 6U HAWK Ethernet is mounted on a 9U adaptor. LEDs not visible from 9U front panel. JA11 6U circuit board
9U adaptor board
JA4 JA16 JA8 JA9 JA10 P1
VME RX TX INT
STATUS
JA12
ON SW1 OFF
ON TX2 TX1 SW2 OFF
ON SW3 OFF
ribbon cable to 9U panel connector
J1
JA7
P2 JA13 JA1
116

ILLUSTRATION 117 FEP 46327036G2 (GEMS FRONT END PROCESSOR)
RESET
FEP (GEMS Front End Processor) LED Descriptions: D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 EDDF FDDF EIDF FIDF EODF FODF ACC0 ACC1 ABT LINK
J4
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 EDDF FDDF EIDF FIDF EODF FODF ACC0 ACC1 ABT LINK
D0 thru D3 indicates the selftest being run on DSP0 during powerup or reset and then generates an up/down chasing pattern when DSP0 has successfully completed selftest. D4 thru D7 indicates the selftest being run on DSP1 during powerup or reset and then generates an up/down chasing pattern when DSP1 has successfully completed selftest. Indicates an EMPTY DAS DATA FIFO condition during operation. Indicates a FULL DAS DATA FIFO condition during operation. Indicates an EMPTY INPUT DATA FIFO condition during operation. Indicates a FULL INPUT DATA FIFO condition during operation. Indicates an EMPTY OUTPUT DATA FIFO condition during operation. Indicates a FULL OUTPUT DATA FIFO condition during operation. Indicates DSP0 local memory ACCESS. Indicates DSP1 local memory ACCESS Indicates ABORT relay status is OPEN (scanning is NOT enabled). FiberOptic receiver detects a valid light source (fiber connection).
FEP (GEMS Front End Processor) Front Panel SWITCH Descriptions: VCC VEE +12V 12V LGND RESET Momentary pushbutton immediately resets the FEP, causing the selftest to run.
DAS
FEP (GEMS Front End Processor) TEST POINT Descriptions: VCC Onboard test point for +5VDC on the FEP. VEE Onboard test point for 5VDC (generated on the FEP). +12V Onboard test point for +12VDC on the FEP. 12V Onboard test point for 12VDC on the FEP. LGND Onboard test point for LOGIC GROUND on the FEP.
AB
FEP (GEMS Front End Processor) CONNECTOR Descriptions: J4 DAS AB Connector for DSP emulator (factory use only). FiberOptic connector for DAS DATA fiberoptic cable from Gantry/SCOM. Connector for scan abort daisy chain cable from PDU to STC.
117

ILLUSTRATION 118 FEP BOARD (GEMS FRONT END PROCESSOR) JUMPER
JP1 IN OUT
Test Bus Select factory use only normal use (default)
TOP J1
S1 DS1 DS2 DS3 DS4 DS5 DS6 DS7 DS8 DS9 DS10 DS11 DS12 DS13 DS14 DS15 DS16 DS17
J2
J4
TP2 TP3 TP4 TP5 TP6 DS18 Fiber In
NOTE 1: Self store jumper by installing on 1 pin only if jumper removed (OUT) as shown on JP1. JP1 NOTE 2: All IG based systems are fiberoptic only and JP2 must be installed (IN) as shown.
J3
JP2
J5
JP2 IN OUT
DAS Data Source FiberOptic input from front panel only (ALL IG SYSTEMS) Coaxial input from backpanel only (default)
118

ILLUSTRATION 119 IG (GEMS IMAGE GENERATOR)
IG (GEMS Image Generator) LED Descriptions: D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D0 thru D4 indicate the selftest being run on the IG board during poweron or reset and then generates an up/down chasing pattern when the IG is running normally.
IG (GEMS Image Generator) Front Panel SWITCH Descriptions: RESET Momentary pushbutton that immediately resets the IG, causing the selftest to run.
IG (GEMS Image Generator) TEST POINT Descriptions: VCC LGND

RESET
Onboard test point for +5VDC on the IG board. Onboard test point for LOGIC GROUND on the IG board.
IG (GEMS Image Generator) CONNECTOR Descriptions: EMU

EMU
Connector for DSP emulator (factory use only).
VCC LGND
119

ILLUSTRATION 1110 IG (GEMS IMAGE GENERATOR) JUMPERS
RESET DIAG 3 DIAG 2 DIAG 1 DIAG 0
B S1 B
A JP1 JP2 A
A JP3 B
TP1 +5V TP2 LGND
JP1 Emulator Enable A position normal use (default) B position factory use only
JP2, JP3 A position B position
VME Base Address normal use (default) factory use only
1110

ILLUSTRATION 1111 IG SUBSYSTEM 5SLOT VME BACKPANEL (FRONT)
Front View
J1A5 J1A4 J1A3 J1A2 J1A1
Backpanel slot jumpers installed between slots 4 and 5 ONLY (slot 4 is not used). All others removed.
Note that, on the IG VME backpanel, slot 1 is on the far right and that slot 5 is on the left (front view).
5 4 3 2 1
J2A5
J2A4
J2A3
J2A2
J2A1
IG VME Backpanel part number label
J13
J3A5
J3A4
J3A3
J3A2
J3A1
J12
IG VME Backpanel barcode label
1111

ILLUSTRATION 1112 IG SUBSYSTEM 5SLOT VME BACKPANEL LAYOUT (REAR)
Rear View
J1A1 J1A2 J1A3 J1A4 J1A5
VME J1 Termination DIPS (12)
12VDC INPUT TO BACKPANEL 6 5 4 3 2 1
J4
1 2 3 4 5 6
not used +12V RTN 12V RTN not used +12VDC 12VDC
J7 Not Used
J7 J2A1 J2A2 J2A3 J2A4 J2A5
VME J2 Termination DIPS (4)
J5 Not Used
J5
J15 Not Used

J15 DC OUTPUT TO DISK DRIVES J6 4 3 2 1
J16 J3A1 J3A2 J3A3 J3A4 J3A5 J13
1 2 3 4
+12VDC +12V RTN +5V RTN +5VDC
J16 Not Used
J12 5VDC INPUT TO BACKPANEL
J13 +5V RTN J12 +5VDC
1112
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 113 SCU Disk Drives
ILLUSTRATION 1113 RP 2X IG SUBSYSTEM HSSD (HIGH SPEED SCSI DISK) JUMPERS
J2 Jumper Block (left side of drive)

2 1
target ID = 1 parity enabled termination disabled

ST32550N
Reserved
Reserved front
Parity Disable J1 Jumper Block (bottom of drive)

5 6 1 2
J4 Jumper Block (front of drive)

2 1 1 HSSD
Terminator Power Select Terminator Enable
SCSI Bus Cable From SBC

NO TERM
1 2 4 SCSI ID
LSD
TERM
1113

ILLUSTRATION 1114 RP 2.X, IG SUBSYSTEM LSD (LOCAL FUJITSU MI603S512 SCSI DISK) JUMPERS
RP 2.X IG Subsystem LSD (Local SCSI Disk) Jumpers

Pin 7 8 Jumper Installed No Jumper No Jumper front Pin 1 Terminating Resistor installed 2 No Jumper
target ID = 0 parity enabled termination enabled term power from drive
ST5660N
SCSI Bus Cable From SBC 1 0

HSSD NO TERM TERM
LSD
1131
Fujitsu Disk Drive SelfDiagnostics When you turn ON power, the MI603S512 initiates a series of basic hardware and operation selftests. IF the diagnostic detects a hard error, it steadily flashes the green LED on the front of the drive. Do NOT confuse the steady flashing of a hard error with the intermittent blinking that occurs during normal Disk I/O activity. IF the LED flashes continuously after you turn on power: D D Note: Check the incoming power Replace the drive
The Fujitsu Intelligent Disk Drive (IDD) MI603S512 replaces the Seagate STN5660N in forward production and as FRU. The Fujitsu IDD retains the ST5560N disk partitioning and label.
1114

ILLUSTRATION 1115 RP 2.X IG SUBSYSTEM LSD (LOCAL SCSI DISK) JUMPERS
target ID = 0 parity enabled termination enabled term power from drive
ST5660N
J5 Jumper Block (rear of drive)

1 2 5 6
front
J8 Jumper Block (front of drive)

2 1 34 33
4 2 1 SCSI ID
Parity Enable
Terminator Spare Jumpers Power (pins not used) Select
SCSI Bus Cable From SBC

1 HSSD NO TERM
Terminator Disable
LSD
TERM
114
FEP Board
(G2) 46327036G2 (G1) 46327036G1
1141
LEDs The front of the FEP board contains the following 18 LEDs:
Reference Designator DS1 DS2 DS3 DS4 DS5 DS6 DS7
Color Green Green Green Green Green Green Green
Name D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6
Meaning Diagnostic/status LED #0, mapped to Internal Command Register Bit 24 and controlled by DSP0 Diagnostic/status LED #1, mapped to Internal Command Register Bit 25 and controlled by DSP0 Diagnostic/status LED #2, mapped to Internal Command Register Bit 26 and controlled by DSP0 Diagnostic/status LED #3, mapped to Internal Command Register Bit 27 and controlled by DSP0 Diagnostic/status LED #4, mapped to Internal Command Register Bit 28 and controlled by DSP1 Diagnostic/status LED #5, mapped to Internal Command Register Bit 29 and controlled by DSP1 Diagnostic/status LED #6, mapped to Internal Command Register Bit 30 and controlled by DSP1
1115
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 Reference Designator DS8 DS9 DS10 DS11 DS12 DS13 DS14 DS15 DS16 DS17 DS18
Color Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green
Name D7 EDDF FDDF EIDF FIDF EOD FODF ACC0 ACC1 ABT Link Present
Meaning Diagnostic / status LED #7, mapped to Internal Command Register Bit 31 and controlled by DSP1 DAS Data FIFO is empty DAS Data FIFO is full VME Input Data FIFO is empty VME Input Data FIFO is full VME Output Data FIFO is empty VME Output Data FIFO is full DSP #0 is accessing local SRAM DSP #1 is accessing local SRAM Abort line is open (scanning is not enabled) Fiber optic receiver detects a valid light source. THIS DOES NOT INDICATE THAT A VALID RPSCOMFEP TAXI LINK IS PRESENT OR THAT DAS DATA IS VALID.
LEDs DS9 thru DS18 are set by hardware, indicate current board status, and their meaning never changes. However, LEDs DS1 thru DS8 are set by the DSPs during board operation. There are three modes of operation for the FEP: (1) Powerup, (2) Diagnostics, and (3) Applications and the meaning of the DSP settable LEDs changes depending on the FEP mode. In all cases, DSP0 controls D0 thru D3 and DSP1 controls D4 thru D7. 1142 Powerup Mode During powerup diagnostics (PUD, which takes about 2 seconds) LEDs D0 thru D7 flash a count down sequence from FFh (all on) to 00h (all off) indicating the test in progress. If the PUD passes, two 4LED cylon (or Knight Rider) patterns will be present, one for DSP0 and one for DSP1. If either DSP fails its PUD, one of the following 4LED failure codes will rapidly flash to indicate the failing test: Flashing LED Pattern D3 D2 D1 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
D0 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
Description Not Used DSP1 Diagnostic Initialization Failure DSP1 EPROM Checksum Failure DSP1 Loaded Image Checksum Failure DSP1 to DSP1 Interprocessor Communication (semafore) Failure DSP1 Stack Space Failure Not Used Not Used Not Used DSP1 CPU Functionality Failure DSP1 Register Access Failure DSP1 Dual Port RAM Access Failure DSP1 Global Bus Error Detection Failure DSP1 Scan Control (SDV / ODV) Failure DSP1 View Loop Failure
1116
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 1143 Diagnostics Mode
During diagnostic mode scanning, LEDs D0 thru D7 are defined as follows: Indicator D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 1144 Description DSP0 Heartbeat. Flashes once per second if DSP0 is alive DSP0 Diagnostic Mode Enabled. ON indicates software loaded diagnostics into DSP0 and awaits next command DSP0 Diag Exec Processing. ON indicates the diagnostic executive in DSP0 is processing a diagnostic command DSP0 FEPCtl Processing. On indicates that FEP control processing in DSP0 is processing a control command DSP1 Heartbeat. Indicates DSP1 alive when it flashes once per second. DSP1 Diagnostic Mode Enabled. ON indicates software loaded diagnostics into DSP1 and awaits next command. DSP1 Diag Exec Processing. ON indicates the diagnostic executive in DSP1 is processing a diagnostic command DSP1 FEPCtl Processing. On indicates FEP control processing in DSP1 is processing a control command
Applications Mode During application mode scanning, LEDs D0 thru D7 are defined as follows: Indicator D0 D1 D3..D2 D3 OFF OFF ON ON D4 D5 D7..D6 D7 OFF OFF ON ON Description DSP0 Heartbeat. Indicates DSP0 alive when it flashes once per second. DSP0 FEP Mode Active. ON indicates that DSP0 received a scan mode and is actively processing a scan DSP0 Mode Type. Indicates which of the following modes DSP0 is processing: D2 OFF ON OFF ON MODE NOT USED SCOUT AXIAL OTHER (RTS, NONPROPRIETARY DIAGS, NDC)
DSP1 Heartbeat. Flashes once per second if DSP1 is alive. DSP1 FEP Mode Active. ON indicates that DSP1 has received a scan mode and is actively processing a scan DSP1 Mode Type. Indicates which of the following modes DSP1 is processing: D6 OFF ON OFF ON MODE NOT USED SCOUT AXIAL OTHER (RTS, NONPROPRIETARY DIAGS, NDC)
1117
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 1145 Test Points
The front of the FEP contains the following 5 test points: TEST POINT TP2 TP3 TP4 TP5 TP6 1146 Jumpers The 46327036G2 version of the FEP contains 2 jumpers. The 46327036G1 version of the FEP contains one jumper, JP1, located near the J3 VME connector: Jumper JP1 Name TBS Meaning Test Bus select. Selects whether the JTAG test test bus source is the 74ACT8990 test bus controller or the XDS510 test bus interface. 74ACT8990 is test bus source (DEFAULT) XDS510 is test bus source (ENG TEST ONLY) DAS Data Source select. Selects whether the DAS data coming from the RPSCOM is received from a BNC on the RP chassis backplane or from a fiber optic receiver on the FEP front face. BNC is DAS data source (DEFAULT) Fiber optic is DAS data source NAME VCC 5V +12V 12V LGND MEANING +5V LOGIC SUPPLY 5V ECL LOGIC SUPPLY +12V BACKPLANE VOLTAGE 12V BACKPLANE VOLTAGE LOGIC GROUND
Removed: Installed: JP2 DDS
Store position: Installed:
1118
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 1147 Switches
The FEP contains 1 switch. Use switch S1 to powerup reset the FEP.
ILLUSTRATION 1116 FEP G2) 46327036G2 & (G1) 46327036G1 BOARD LAYOUT
J1
S1 DS1 DS2 DS3 DS4 DS5 DS6 DS7 DS8 DS9 DS10 DS11 DS12 DS13 DS14 DS15 DS16 DS17
J2
J4
TP2 TP3 TP4 TP5 TP6 JP1 DS18 Fiber In JP2
J3
J5
1119
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 Test Points, LEDs, Jumpers and switches 115 1151 46264370G1 Cradle Amplifier Cradle Amplifier Board Test Points D D D D D D D D D D D D D 1152
TP1 ISO3: High side of isolation supply for the lower FETs. (Above 14V) TP2 GND: Low side of the amplifier bridge. High power return. TP3 AGND: Analog ground. TP4 +24V: Supplied from the ETC board. TP5 ISO1: High side of the isolation supply for the flowing gate drive of FET Q55. Measured with respect to TP8. TP6 CRADLE PULSEIL*1: Goes low when the amplifier bridge current is at or above 6A nominal TP7: Output of the pushpull driver of the isolation transformer for the DCDC converters. TP8 RTN1: Low side of the isolation supply for Q55 FET drive. TP9 PGND: 24V return. TP10 HV: Positive side of the amplifier bridge. This is nominally +24V. TP11 RTN2: Low side of the isolation supply for Q130 FET drive. TP12 VMTR: The scaled, filtered and buffered cradle motor voltage. TP13 ISO2: Positive side of the isolation supply for Q130 FET drive, measured with respect to TP8.
Cradle Amplifier Board LEDs LEDs are provided to give a feel of the state the circuitry on the amplifier board. The following LEDs receive pulses at various duty cycles (with the exception of DS PS) so they vary in intensity from a fully on LED. D DS67: On when the lower FET is commanded off. This LED indicates the presence of logic drive to the isolated FET drive circuitry, not the state of the Q14s gate direction. DS68: On when +24V is present on the amplifier board. If +24V is not present, the DC DC converter will not work, the relay cannot operate and there isnt any drive voltage present at the bridge. DS98: On when the lower FET is commanded off. This LED indicates the presence of logic drive to the isolated FET drive circuitry, not the state of the Q155s gate directly. DS124: On when DCCLK pulses are present at the amplifier. These pulses are needed for the DCDC converter to operate.
D 1153
Cradle Amplifier Board Switch Settings None
1120

ILLUSTRATION 1117 46264370G1 CRADLE AMPLIFIER
1121
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 116 Heurikon CPU Board Test Points No serviceable test points. 1161 Heurikon CPU Board LEDs Indicator LEDs D D D S = Slave M = Master F = Fail
User LEDs D D D D 1 = User LED1 MSB 2 = User LED2 3 = User LED3 4 = User LED4 LSB
Additional node specific troubleshooting information on the User LEDs is available in the Heurikon CPU self test section. 1162 Status LEDs D D D D D 1163 B = Bus: Another VMEBus master has control of the bus. H = Halt: The MPU has halted. D = DMAC: The DMAC has control of the local bus. U = User: The MPU is in the user state. S = Super: The MPU is in the supervisor state.
Heurikon CPU Board Switch Settings Reset Switch Resets the CPU board and initiates the self test.
1164
Configuration DIP Switch Used to configure the CPU board to a specific node. The correct setting of this DIP switch can be found by selecting the Board Layout button below. Additional information is available in the Heurikon CPU self test section.
1122

ILLUSTRATION 1118 46296377G1 HEURIKON CPU ETC
1123

ILLUSTRATION 1119 46296377G1 HEURIKON CPU STC
1124

ILLUSTRATION 1120 46296377G1 HEURIKON CPU OBC
1125
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 117 1171 46288170G1 Elevation/Tilt Amplifier Elevation/Tilt Amplifier Board Test Points D D D D D D D D D D D D D D 1172
TP1 ISO3: Positive side of the isolation supply for the lower FETs of the HBridge Q20 and Q150. TP2 GND: Low side of the amplifier bridge. It also acts as ISO3 RTN, This is the high voltage supply return. TP3 AGND: Analog ground. TP4 +24v: 24 volts for the relays and the DCDC converter. TP5 ISO1: Positive side of the isolation supply for Q61 FET drive, measured with respect to TP9. TP6 PIL: Elev/Tilt PulseIL*1 Goes low when the amplifier bridge is at or above 6A nominal. TP7 SCKT: Short Circuit signal. This goes low when the bridge current above 12A. TP8: This test point is the output of the pushpull driver of the DCDC converters isolation transformer primaries. TP9 RTN1: Low side of the isolation supply for Q55 FET drive. TP10 PGND: This is the +24V return. TP11 HV: This is the high side of the amplifier bridge. This is at about +170V. TP12 RTN2: Low side of the isolation supply for Q130 FET drive. TP13 ISO2: Positive side of the isolation supply for Q130 FET drive, measured with respect to TP12. TP14 VMTR: The scaled, filtered and buffered E/T motor voltage.
Elevation/Tilt Amplifier Board LEDs LEDs exist to give a feel for the state of the circuitry on the amplifier board. All of the following LEDs are pulsed at various duty cycles (with the exception of DS PS) so they vary in intensity from a fully on LED. D DS74: On when the lower FET is commanded off. This LED indicates the presence of logic drive to the isolated FET drive circuitry, not the state of the Q20s gate direction. DS75: On when the lower FET is commanded off. This LED indicates the presence of logic drive to the isolated FET drive circuitry, not the state of the Q150s gate direction. DS76: On when +24V is present on the amplifier board. If +24V is not present, the DC DC converter will not work, the relay cannot operate and there isnt any drive voltage present of the bridge. DS77: ON when DCCLK pulses are present at the amplifier. These pulses are needed for the DCDC converter to operate.
D 1173
Elevation/Tilt Amplifier Board Switch Settings None
1126

ILLUSTRATION 1121 46288170G1 ELEVATION/TILT AMPLIFIER
1127
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 118 1181 46288856G1 Collimator Board Collimator Board Test Points (46288856G1) D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D 1182 Collimator Board LEDs D D D 1183 DS1 FIL_Z: Filter Zpulse active TP1 APDIR: Aperture direction TP2 AP_A: Aperture Apulse
TP3 APSTEP: Aperture stepper motor drive signal TP4 FIL_B: Filter Bpulse TP5 FIL_A: Filter Apulse TP6 AP_DIS: Aperture disable TP7 DIAG_FILDIR: Diagnostic filter direction TP8 DIAG_FIL EN: Diagnostic filter enable TP9 DIAG_FILSTP: Diagnostic filter stepper drive signal TP10: Power signal for 38V high/low interrupt circuit TP11 FIL ENCPWR: Power signal for filter encoder high/low interrupt circuit TP12: LGND TP13 AP_B: Aperture Bpulse TP14: VCC TP15: +15V TP16: 15V TP17: AGND TP18: 10V_REF TP19 AP_ENCPWR: Power signal for aperture encoder high/low interrupt TP20: +24V TP21: PGND TP22: Spare TP23: Spare TP24 AP_ENCPWR: Power signal for aperture encoder high/low interrupt TP25 FIL ENCPWR: Power signal for filter encoder high/low interrupt circuit TP26: Power signal for 38 V high/low interrupt circuit
DS2 FIL_HM_SW: Indicates filter home DS3 AP_Z: Aperture Zpulse active
Collimator Board Switch Settings None
1128

ILLUSTRATION 1122 46288856G1 COLLIMATOR BOARD
1129
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 119 1191 46321276G1 Collimator Board Collimator Board Test Points (46321276G1) D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D TP1 APDIR: Aperture direction TP2 AP_A: Aperture Apulse
TP3 APSTEP: Aperture stepper motor drive signal TP4 FIL_B: Filter Bpulse TP5 FIL_A: Filter Apulse TP6 AP_DIS: Aperture disable TP7 DIAG_FILDIR: Diagnostic filter direction TP8 DIAG_FIL EN: Diagnostic filter enable TP9 DIAG_FILSTP: Diagnostic filter stepper drive signal TP10: Power signal for 38V high/low interrupt circuit TP11 FIL ENCPWR: Power signal for filter encoder high/low interrupt circuit TP12: LGND TP13 AP_B: Aperture Bpulse TP14: VCC TP15: +15V TP16: 15V TP17: AGND TP18: 10V_REF TP19 AP_ENCPWR: Power signal for aperture encoder high/low interrupt TP20: +24V TP21: PGND TP22: Spare TP23: Spare TP24 AP_ENCPWR: Power signal for aperture encoder high/low interrupt circuit TP25 FIL ENCPWR: Power signal for filter encoder high/low interrupt circuit TP26: Power signal for 38 V high/low interrupt circuit
Collimator Board LEDs D D D 1192 DS1 FIL_Z: Filter Zpulse active DS2 FIL_HM_SW: Indicates filter home DS3 AP_Z: Aperture Zpulse active
Collimator Board Switch Settings None
1130

ILLUSTRATION 1123 46321276G1 COLLIMATOR BOARD
1131
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 6 1110 11101 2138293 CTVRC Board CTVRC Board Test Points D D D D D D D D D D D 11102 CTVRC Board LEDs D D D D D D D D D D D D 11103 DS1: TEST DS2: REV DS3: ON DS4: LOI DS5: LOV DS6: HIV DS7: HUV DS8: LSTU DS9: LSHT DS10: RSTU DS11: RSHT DS12: OVRT TP1: +5V TP2: FA TP3: LPW TP4: FB TP5: RPW TP6: LGND TP9: CUR TP10: PWR TP11: +10V TP12: DVC TP13: DCH1
TP14: DCL0 TP15: LAC TP16: LCUR TP17: RAC TP18: RCUR TP19: WCUR TP22: +15V TP23: SGND TP24: 15V TP500: MUX TP501: SGND
CTVRC Board Jumper and Switch Settings D D D D D D JP1: A=DCRGS B= No DCRGS S1 BOOST: manual mode parameters: run power level 40%; boost power level 60% S2: FORWARD/REVERSE S3: AUTO/MANUAL S4: ASCII code for board version (Insite Switch) S5: Reset
1132

ILLUSTRATION 1124 2138293 CTVRC BOARD
JP1
A DCRGS
B NO DCRGS
Note:
Jumper plug JP1 has two positions: A=DCRGS (regulated 550VDC PDU) B=No DCRGS (CT Compact HVDC PDU 2133533)
1133
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 1111 11111 46288886G1 mA Board mA Board Test Points D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D TP1: +5 REF TP2: SGND TP3: FERR TP4: CAMA TP5: FSIG TP6: LGND TP7: 10REF TP8: ACAL1 TP9: CCAL1 TP10: ANMA TP11: ACAL2 TP12: FSHG TP13: MAFB TP14: CCAL2 TP15: MADMD TP16: +24V TP17: OFIL TP18: IFL1 TP19: EILOC TP20: FILSH TP21: +30V
TP22: FCMD TP23: FCUR TP24: +15V TP25: FIL UC TP26: +30F TP27: FIL CT TP28: PD TP29: FIL2 TP30: PS TP31: FGND TP32: FIL1 TP33: FSH TP34: IPUL TP35: +5LED TP36: CLOOP TP37: 15V TP38: +15AV TP39: FD TP40: FDMD TP41: MAMUX TP42: FGND
mA Board LEDs D D D D D D D D D D D D D D DS1: CLOOP DS2: INVEN DS3: ANC DS4: MA BAL DS5: CAO DS6: FIL FLT DS7: INV FLT DS8: FIL UC DS9: OFIL DS10: SH FIL DS11: FIL OC DS12: SMS DS13: 1FIL DS14: INV ON
1134
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 11112 mA Board Switch Settings D D

ILLUSTRATION 1125 46288886G1 MA BOARD
S1 S2
Reset Board Rev in ASCII (Insite Switch)
1135
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 1112 11121 46321064G1 kV Control Board kV Control Board 46321064G1 Test Points D D D D D TP1 LGND
TP2 SPIT: (TTL 400uS duration); This signal indicates a tube spit, measure for 400uS duration (LOW = Spit). i.e. rapid decay of the kV. TP3 AGND: (Analog 0 Volts); Analog ground. TP4 AGND: (Analog 0 Volts); Analog ground. TP5 PWMA: (TTL 39KHz to 66KHz during scan); This signal is the pulse width modulation for the anode, measure for 39KHz to 66KHz during a scan. TP6 LGND: (TTL 0 Volts); Logic ground. TP7 VPHA: (Analog) This signal is the voltage for an approximate prescan kV value for the phase control of the anode. The approximate prescan values for kV are:
80kV = 2.81 VDC 100kV = 1.97 VDC 120kV = 1.20 VDC 140kV = 0.521 VDC
D D
D D D
TP8 AGND: (Analog 0 Volts); Analog ground. TP9 VCAN: (Analog) This signal is the anode voltage control error signal. TP10 KVCM: (Analog 0 Volts to 10 Volts); This signal is the kV command voltage from the CPU. The approximate values for kV are:
D D
TP11 PWMC: (TTL 39KHz to 66KHz) This signal is the pulse width modulation for the cathode, measure for 39KHz to 66KHz during a scan. TP12 VDRV: (Analog) This signal is input voltage for the voltage controlled oscillator. The approximate prescan values for kV are:
D D D
TP13 VREF: (Analog 10 Volts); This is the voltage reference for the board. TP14 VCO: (TTL) This signal is the voltage controlled oscillator. TP15 VCNT: (Analog) This voltage control signal is sent to the Voltage Controlled Oscillator with the approximate prescan value. The prescan values are:
1136
HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358100 TP16 VPHC: (Analog); This signal is the cathode phase control voltage. The approximate prescan values for kV are:
D D D D D D D D D D D D
TP17: N/A TP18 SAW: (Analog 39KHz to 66KHz during scan) This signal is the sawtooth and is 39KHz to 66KHz during a scan. TP19 VER: (Analog) This signal is the cathode kV voltage error. TP20 INVEN: (TTL) This signal is the inverter enable signal from the CPU to enable the inverter. TP21 LU: (TTL) Use the Left Upper test point to check the fiber optic cables on the kV board by grounding TP21. TP23, TP42, TP36, TP34, TP28: One at a time, make sure the LEDs light in the proper sequence on the inverter gate driver board. TP22 EXCM: (TTL) Exposure Command from the Gentry I/O board. TP23 LL: (TTL) Use the Left Lower test point to check the fiber optic cables on the kV board by grounding TP21, TP23, TP42, TP36, TP34 and TP28: One at a time. Make sure the LEDs light in the proper sequence on the inverter gate driver board. TP24 ASPIT: (Anode Spit Analog) When the fall time of the anode kV is fast enough, a large signal will pass thru the cap. TP25 CSPIT: (Cathode Spit Analog) When the fall time of the cathode is fast enough, a large signal will pass thru the cap. TP26 kVMUX: (Analog) This is a MUXed signal for:
Anode, Cathode kV Anode,Cathode current Total kV +10V Reference VDrive (TP 12)
D D
TP27 EXEN: (Exposure Enable TTL) This is a signal from the rotor to indicate that the rotor is up to speed. TP28 ARL: (TTL). Use the Anode Right Lower test point to check the fiber optic cables on the kV board by grounding TP21, TP23, TP42, TP36, TP34 and TP28 one at a time. Make sure the LEDs light in the proper sequence on the inverter gate driver board. TP29 LEFT: (Left IBGTs TTL) This is the control signal for the left IGBTs on the inverter. TP30 KVTB: (kV Total Analog) This is the signal of the anode and cathode total kV. TP31 TRIG: (Trigger TTL) Use this signal as a convenient way to trigger a scope to the start of a scan. Performing this action is the same as inverter on. TP32 HVON (High Voltage ON TTL) This signal indicates when the anode or cathode kV exceeds 75% of requested kV.
D D D
1137
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 D D
HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358100 TP33 CART: (Cathode Right IGBT TTL) This signal controls the right IGBT of the cathode inverter. TP34 ARU: (TTL) Use the Anode Right Upper test point to check the fiber optic cables on the kV board by grounding TP21, TP23, TP42, TP36, TP34 and TP28 one at a time. Make sure the LEDs light in the proper sequence on the inverter gate driver board. TP35 ANRT: (Anode Right IGBT TTL) This signal controls the right IGBTs of the anode inverter. TP36 CRL: (TTL) Use the Cathode Right Lower test point to check the fiber optic cables on the kV board by grounding TP21, TP23, TP42, TP36, TP34 and TP28 one at a time. Make sure the LEDs light in the proper sequence on the inverter gate driver board. TP37 CAKV: (Analog1 Volt = 10kV Cathode kV) Use this test point to measure the specified cathode kV signal to the cathode inverter. TP38 LGND: Logic ground. TP39 AGND: (Analog 0 Volts); Analog ground. TP40 VERR: Analog Voltage Error. TP41 ANKV: (Analog 1 Volt = 10kV Anode kV) Use this test point to measure the specified anode kV signal to the anode inverter. TP42 CRU: (TTL) Use the Cathode Right Upper test point to check the fiber optic cables on the kV board by grounding TP21, TP23, TP42, TP36, TP34 and TP28 one at a time. Make sure the LEDs light in the proper sequence on the inverter gate driver board. TP43 LGND: Logic ground. TP44 CAOC: (Analog 1 Volt = 10A Cathode Overcurrent) Use this test point to measure the specified current thru the cathode tank. TP45 ANOC: (Analog 1 Volt = 10A Anode Overcurrent) Use this test point to measure the specified current thru the anode tank. TP46 CAST: (Analog) Cathode ShootThru. TP47 ANST: (Analog) Anode ShootThru. TP48 FLT: (TTL Faults) The following errors are ORed at this node:
Anode, Cathode Overcurrent Anode, Cathode ShootThru Anode, Cathode Overvoltage
D D
D D D D D D
D D D D D D
D D
TP49: +15A TP50 FLTS: (TTL Faults) The following errors are ORed at the node:
Anode, Cathode Overcurrent Anode, Cathode ShootThru Anode, Cathode Overvoltage Inverter wiring interlock Fault reset Spit (TP2) Spit 32
D D
TP51: +5V TP52: 15A
1138
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 11122 kV Control Board 46321064G1 Switch Settings D 11123 S1: Reset
kV Control Board 46321064G1 LEDs D D D D D D D D D D DS364: SPIT DS365: INVON DS366: HVON DS367: CAOV DS368: PNOV DS421: CAOC DS422: CAST DS423: ANOC DS424: ANST DS425: INTLK
ILLUSTRATION 1126 46321064G1 KV CONTROL BOARD
1139
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 1113 11131 46321198G1 kV Control Board kV Control Board 46321198G1 Test Points D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D
TP1 HVON: A 1 indicates the kV feedback equals or exceeds 75% of command. TP2 +5v: +5V (VCC) logic power TP3 LGND: Logic ground TP4 TRIG: A 1 indicates the selected inverter(s) is (are) turned on. TP5 EXCM: A 1 indicates an exposure command is being received from the RCOMM board. TP6 EXEN: A 1 indicates exposures are not disabled by the CTVRC, I/O or mA boards. TP7 SPIT: A 1 indicates a spit has been detected and recovery is in process. TP8 KVCM: kV command. Scale: 15kV/V TP9 ANKV: Anode kV feedback. Scale: 10 kV/V TP10 CAKV: Cathode kV feedback. Scale 10kV/V TP11 KVTB: Total kV feedback. Scale 20 kV/V TP12 SGND: Signal ground TP13 MUX: Analog MUX output as selected by firmware TP14 +10V: +10V reference TP15 15V: 15V supply voltage TP16 +15V: +15V supply voltage TP17 KVERR: Integrated kV error signal TP18 PCNT: Average inverter duty cycle. Scale: 12%/V 10% TP19 SGND: Signal ground TP20 ANOC: Anode inverter current. Scale: 25 A/V TP21 CAOC: Cathode inverter current. Scale: 25 A/V TP22 APH: Anode inverter duty cycle. Scale: 20% /V 100% TP23 CPH: Cathode inverter duty cycle. Scale: 200% 20%/V TP24 VCNT: Frequency control voltage. Scale: 19.5 kHz + 2.2kHz/V TP25 LGND: Logic ground TP26 SAW: Sawtooth (5 to 10V) at double the inverter frequency, nominally 39 to 61 kHz TP27 FREQ: 5V squarewave at double the inverter frequency. TP28 APLSA: 1 indicates an ON pulse of the anode inverter TP2 CPLSA: 1 indicates an ON pulse of the cathode inverter
1140
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 11132 kV Control Board 46321198G1 LEDs D D D D D D D D D D D D D 11133
DS1 SPRT: Indicates the maximum spit rate has been exceeded. DS2 GFLT: Indicates a GO fault has occurred. DS3 ANST: Indicates an anode shootthrough has occurred. DS4 CAST: Indicates a cathode shootthrough has occurred. DS5 ANOC: Indicates an anode overcurrent has occurred. DS6 CAOC: Indicates a cathode overcurrent has occurred. DS7 ANOV: Indicates an anode overvoltage has occurred. DS8 CAOV: Indicates a cathode overvoltage has occurred. DS9 AINT: Indicates the anode inverter interlock is open. DS10 CINT: Indicates the cathode inverter interlock is open. DS11 OVRV: Indicates the kV feedback has exceeded the upper limit of the load regulator. May be ignored if on after power up or hardware reset. DS12 HVND: Indicates anode and/or cathode kV feedback signals exceed 10 kV. DS13 INON: Indicates the selected inverter(s) is (are) turned on.
kV Control Board 46321198G1 Switch Settings D S1: Insite System readable 8P dip switch set for the ASCII equivalent of the board assembly version letter.
11134
kV Control Board 46321198G1 Adjustments D R316 CAKV: Adjusts the gain of the cathode kV feedback. Factory adjusted for unity gain. Field adjusted during HV PS cal procedure. Range: approximately 20%. R318 ANKV: Adjusts the gain of the anode kV feedback. Factory adjusted for unity gain. Field adjusted during HV PS cal procedure. Range: approximately 20%. R323 (FREQ): Factory adjusted for minimum frequency of 39.0 kHz 1.0 kHz at TP27 (FREQ) with TP24 (VCNT) set to 0V. Should not require field adjustment.
1141

ILLUSTRATION 1127 46321198G1 KV CONTROL BOARD
1114 11141
46288512G1 Gentry I/O Board Gentry I/O Board Test Points D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D TP3: +5V TP4: LGND TP5: SGND TP6: +15V TP7: 15V TP8: +12V TP9: 12V TP10: +10V TP11: +24V TP12: A/DIN TP13: SOUT TP14: SIN TP15: SRTN TP16: +SIN TP17: PGND
1142
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 11142 Gentry I/O Board LEDs D D D D D D D D D 11143 DS45: ECMD INTR DS46: BCTR INTR DS47: DTHTR INTR DS48: BCTR CLS DS75: AXLTS ON DS76: ADC CMPLT DS77: BTMR EXP DS110: TPRLY ON DS111: INTR CLS
Gentry I/O Board Switch Settings D S1: Reset
ILLUSTRATION 1128 46288512G1 GENTRY I/O BOARD
1143
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 1115 11151 46264806G1 Axial Control Board Axial Control Board Test Points D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D TP1 RD*: Read Strobe
TP2 6MHZ: 6 megahertz board clock TP3 DTACK*: Data Transfer Acknowledgement TP4 AXBE*: Axial board enable TP5 WR*: Write strobe TP6 HOME: Home flag TP7 CHC: Axial encoder channel C TP8 CHB: Axial encoder channel B TP9 CHA: Axial encoder channel A TP10 DEMO: From U127 TP11: VCOSIGIN TP12: VCOCOMIN TP13 PCP: From U127 TP14: VCOCLK TP15 RSTSTB: 250 ms Reset strobe TP16 DOGEN: Watchdog enable status TP17: DELAYINT TP18: TRIGON TP19: STARTINT TP20 ZEROTRIG: Zero trigger (end of scan) TP21 XRAYCOMM: XRay exposure command TP22 DASTRIG: DAS triggers TP23 CLOCKON: DAS trigger control TP24: 10VRF TP25: +2VRF TP26 AXCMD: Axial drive current command TP27: SPARE TP28: 10RF TP29 AMUX: Analog mux output TP30: +24V for XRLE LED TP31: +24V for BUPC LED TP32: +24V for LOPC LED TP33: AX AMP ENABLE RTN TP34: AX AMP RESET RTN TP35: AX BRAKE for BRAKE LED TP36: +15V voltage supply TP37: +24V voltage supply
1144
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 D D D D D D D D D D D D 11152 TP38 15V: 15V voltage supply TP39 +5V: +5V voltage supply
TP40 AGND: Analog power supply ground TP41 LGND: Logic power supply ground TP42 PGND: Unregulated +24V power ground TP43 QDIR: Quadrature direction TP44 AOUT: Xilinx internal channel A TP45 SCLK: Xilinx internal sync clock (2MHz) TP46 BOUT: Xilinx internal channel B TP47 HOMEOUT: Xilinx internal channel C TP48 HOMEINT*: Xilinx home interrupt TP49 OF: Xilinx 32 bit counter overflow bit
Axial Control Board LEDs D D D D D D D D D D D D D DS270: CHA DS271: CHB DS320: CHC DS321: HOME DS322: LPC DS323: VAC DS324: 550V DS390: XRLE DS391: BUPC DS392: LOPC DS393: AMEN DS394: BRAK DS395: AMST
11153
Axial Control Board Switch Settings D S55: RESET SWITCH
1145

ILLUSTRATION 1129 46264806G1 AXIAL CONTROL BOARD
1146
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 1116 11161 46297475G1 SCOM Board SCOM Board Test Points D D D D
TP1 + 5V: (TTL 0 Volts) Use this test point to monitor the+ 5 VDC power supply voltage. TP2 5V: (TTL 0 Volts) Use this test point to monitor the 5 VDC power supply voltage. TP3 LGND: (TTL 0 Volts) Use TP3 as logic ground for TP1 and TP2 when you measure the power supply voltages. TP4 GND: (TTL Ground) N/A GE manufacturing uses this test point to test the board with an external clock signal during gantry assembly. It has no purpose for scanner applications. TP5 ECEN: (TTL) N/A GE manufacturing uses the External Clock Enable test point to test the board with an external clock signal during gantry assembly. It has no purpose for scanner applications. TP6 ECLK: (TTL) N/A GE manufacturing uses the External Clock test point to test the board with an external clock signal during gantry assembly. It has no purpose for scanner applications.
11162
SCOM Board Switch Settings A four position toggle DIP switch is located just under the LEDs and is labeled SW3..SW0 for switch bit 3 .. switch bit 0. This is a general purpose DIP switch and can be accessed by the CPU through the SCOM Board Status Register. When a switch is in the OFF position, the CPU will read a logic 0.
11163
SCOM Board LEDs D DS1 ALV: (Alive Mode LED) This is the only green LED on SCOM and is labeled ALV for alive. If this green LED is not lit, either the board power is off or the board is being held in reset. In either case, SCOM will not operate if the green LED is not lit. DS2 BC7: (Board Command bit 7) One of eight general purpose LEDs accessed by the CPU through the SCOM Board Command Register. These LEDs have no use for scanner applications. DS3 BC6: (Board Command bit 6) One of eight general purpose LEDs accessed by the CPU through the SCOM Board Command Register. These LEDs have no use for scanner applications. DS4 BC5: (Board Command bit 5) One of eight general purpose LEDs accessed by the CPU through the SCOM Board Command Register. These LEDs have no use for scanner applications. DS5 BC4: (Board Command bit 4) One of eight general purpose LEDs accessed by the CPU through the SCOM Board Command Register. These LEDs have no use for scanner applications. DS6 BC3: (Board Command bit 3) One of eight general purpose LEDs accessed by the CPU through the SCOM Board Command Register. These LEDs have no use for scanner applications. DS7 BC2: (Board Command bit 2) One of eight general purpose LEDs accessed by the CPU through the SCOM Board Command Register. These LEDs have no use for scanner applications.
1147
HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358100 DS8 BC1: (Board Command bit 1) One of eight general purpose LEDs accessed by the CPU through the SCOM Board Command Register. These LEDs have no use for scanner applications. DS9 BC0: (Board Command bit 0) One of eight general purpose LEDs accessed by the CPU through the SCOM Board Command Register. These LEDs have no use for scanner applications. DS10 TX: (Transmit Status) This amber LED flickers as data is transmitted out of SCOM. The intensity of the LED increases as the data transmit rate increases. DS11 RX: (Receive Status) This amber LED will flicker as data is received into SCOM. The intensity of the LED increases as the data rate increases. DS12 VLT: (Link Violation Status) This amber LED extinguishes when the TAXI Receiver is properly locked onto the incoming serial data stream. If the LED is on or flickering, then either the transmitter in the OBC has been turned off or a problem exists somewhere in the slip ring communication channel. This LED is an excellent and quick indication of the overall health of the subsystem. DS13 EC: (Exposure Command) This amber LED lights when the command to set Exposure Command on RCOM has been transmitted across the slip ring (there is no guarantee, however, that it has been received on the rotating gantry). If the LED is not lit, then the command to reset Exposure Command on RCOM was transmitted or the SCOM board was reset. DS14 PA: (Parity Bit) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15...D0), the parity bit (labeled PA), the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY), and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK), as they are presented to the AP. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP, to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables. DS15 CK: (Synchronous Clock Bit) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15...D0), the parity bit (labeled PA), the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY), and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK), as they are presented to the AP. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP, to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables. DS16 SY: (Synchronization Control Bit) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15...D0), the parity bit (labeled PA), the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY), and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK), as they are presented to the AP. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP, to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables. DS17 D15: (DAS Data Bit 15) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15...D0), the parity bit (labeled PA), the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY), and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK), as they are presented to the AP. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP, to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables.
1148
HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358100 DS18 D14: (DAS Data Bit 14) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15...D0), the parity bit (labeled PA), the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY), and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK), as they are presented to the AP. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP, to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables. DS19 D13: (DAS Data Bit 13) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15...D0), the parity bit (labeled PA), the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY), and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK), as they are presented to the AP. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP, to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables. DS20 D12: (DAS Data Bit 12) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15...D0), the parity bit (labeled PA), the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY), and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK), as they are presented to the AP. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP, to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables. DS21 D11: (DAS Data Bit 11) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15...D0), the parity bit (labeled PA), the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY), and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK), as they are presented to the AP. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP, to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables. DS22 D10: (DAS Data Bit 10) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15...D0), the parity bit (labeled PA), the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY), and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK), as they are presented to the AP. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP, to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables. DS23 D9: (DAS Data Bit 9) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15...D0), the parity bit (labeled PA), the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY), and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK), as they are presented to the AP. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP, to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables. DS24 D8: (DAS Data Bit 8) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15...D0), the parity bit (labeled PA), the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY), and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK), as they are presented to the AP. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP, to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables.
1149
HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358100 DS25 D7: (DAS Data Bit 7) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15...D0), the parity bit (labeled PA), the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY), and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK), as they are presented to the AP. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP, to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables. DS26 D6: (DAS Data Bit 6) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15...D0), the parity bit (labeled PA), the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY), and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK), as they are presented to the AP. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP, to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables. DS27 D5: (DAS Data Bit 5) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15...D0), the parity bit (labeled PA), the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY), and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK), as they are presented to the AP. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP, to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables. DS28 D4: (DAS Data Bit 4) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15...D0), the parity bit (labeled PA), the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY), and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK), as they are presented to the AP. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP, to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables. DS29 D3: (DAS Data Bit 3) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15...D0), the parity bit (labeled PA), the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY), and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK), as they are presented to the AP. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP, to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables. DS30 D2: (DAS Data Bit 2) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15...D0), the parity bit (labeled PA), the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY), and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK), as they are presented to the AP. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP, to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables.
1150
HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358100 DS31 D1: (DAS Data Bit 1) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15...D0), the parity bit (labeled PA), the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY), and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK), as they are presented to the AP. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP, to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables. DS32 D0: (DAS Data Bit 0) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15...D0), the parity bit (labeled PA), the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY), and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK), as they are presented to the AP. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP, to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables.
ILLUSTRATION 1130 46297475G1 SCOM BOARD
1151
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 1117 11171 46288854G1 RCOM Board RCOM Board Test Points D D D D
TP1 5V: (TTL 0 Volts) Use this test point to monitor the 5 VDC power supply voltage. TP2 + 5V: (TTL 0 Volts) Use this test point to monitor the + 5 VDC power supply voltage. TP3 LGND: (TTL 0 Volts) Use TP3 as logic ground for TP1 and TP2 when you measure the power supply voltages. TP4 ECLK: (TTL) N/A GE manufacturing uses the External Clock test point to test the board with an external clock signal during gantry assembly. It has no purpose for scanner applications. TP5 GND: (TTL Ground) N/A GE manufacturing uses this test point to test the board with an external clock signal during gantry assembly. It has no purpose for scanner applications. TP6 ECEN: (TTL) N/A GE manufacturing uses the External Clock Enable test point to test the board with an external clock signal during gantry assembly. It has no purpose for scanner applications.
11172
RCOM Board Switch Settings D D S1: Reset S2: A four position toggle DIP switch is located beneath the LEDs and is labeled SW3..SW0 for switch bit 3 .. switch bit 0. This is a general purpose DIP switch and can be accessed by the CPU through the SCOM Board Status Register. When a switch is in the OFF position, the CPU will read a logic 0.
11173
RCOM Board LEDs D DS1 ALV: (Alive Mode LED) This is the only green LED on SCOM and is labeled ALV for alive. If this green LED is not lit, either the board power is off or the board is being held in reset. In either case, SCOM will not operate if the green LED is not lit. DS2 BC7: (Board Command bit 7) One of eight general purpose LEDs accessed by the CPU through the RCOM Board Command Register. These LEDs have no use for scanner applications. DS3 BC6: (Board Command bit 6) One of eight general purpose LEDs accessed by the CPU through the RCOM Board Command Register. These LEDs have no use for scanner applications. DS4 BC5: (Board Command bit 5) One of eight general purpose LEDs accessed by the CPU through the RCOM Board Command Register. These LEDs have no use for scanner applications. DS5 BC4: (Board Command bit 4) One of eight general purpose LEDs accessed by the CPU through the RCOM Board Command Register. These LEDs have no use for scanner applications. DS6 BC3: (Board Command bit 3) One of eight general purpose LEDs accessed by the CPU through the RCOM Board Command Register. These LEDs have no use for scanner applications. DS7 BC2: (Board Command bit 2) One of eight general purpose LEDs accessed by the CPU through the RCOM Board Command Register. These LEDs have no use for scanner applications.
1152
HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358100 DS8 BC1: (Board Command bit 1) One of eight general purpose LEDs accessed by the CPU through the RCOM Board Command Register. These LEDs have no use for scanner applications. DS9 BC0: (Board Command bit 0) One of eight general purpose LEDs accessed by the CPU through the RCOM Board Command Register. These LEDs have no use for scanner applications. DS10 TX: (Transmit Status) This amber LED flickers as data is transmitted out of RCOM. The intensity of the LED increases as the data transmit rate increases. DS11 RX: (Receive Status) This amber LED will flicker as data is received into RCOM. The intensity of the LED increases as the data rate increases. DS12 VLT: (Link Violation Status) This amber LED extinguishes when the TAXI Receiver is properly locked onto the incoming serial data stream. If the LED is on or flickering, then either the transmitter in the OBC has been turned off or a problem exists somewhere in the slip ring communication channel. This LED is an excellent and quick indication of the overall health of the subsystem. DS13 EC: (Exposure Command) This amber LED lights when the command to set Exposure Command on RCOM has been transmitted across the slip ring (there is no guarantee, however, that it has been received on the rotating gantry). If the LED is not lit, then the command to reset Exposure Command on RCOM was transmitted or the SCOM board was reset. DS14 PA: (Parity Bit) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15...D0), the parity bit (labeled PA), the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY), and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK), as they are presented to the AP. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP, to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables. DS15 CK: (Synchronous Clock Bit) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15...D0), the parity bit (labeled PA), the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY), and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK), as they are presented to the AP. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP, to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables. DS16 SY: (Synchronization Control Bit) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15...D0), the parity bit (labeled PA), the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY), and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK), as they are presented to the AP. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP, to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables. DS17 D15: (DAS Data Bit 15) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15...D0), the parity bit (labeled PA), the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY), and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK), as they are presented to the AP. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP, to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables.
1153
HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358100 DS18 D14: (DAS Data Bit 14) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15...D0), the parity bit (labeled PA), the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY), and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK), as they are presented to the AP. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP, to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables. DS19 D13: (DAS Data Bit 13) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15...D0), the parity bit (labeled PA), the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY), and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK), as they are presented to the AP. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP, to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables. DS20 D12: (DAS Data Bit 12) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15...D0), the parity bit (labeled PA), the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY), and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK), as they are presented to the AP. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP, to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables. DS21 D11: (DAS Data Bit 11) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15...D0), the parity bit (labeled PA), the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY), and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK), as they are presented to the AP. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP, to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables. DS22 D10: (DAS Data Bit 10) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15...D0), the parity bit (labeled PA), the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY), and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK), as they are presented to the AP. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP, to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables. DS23 D9: (DAS Data Bit 9) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15...D0), the parity bit (labeled PA), the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY), and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK), as they are presented to the AP. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP, to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables. DS24 D8: (DAS Data Bit 8) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15...D0), the parity bit (labeled PA), the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY), and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK), as they are presented to the AP. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP, to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables.
1154
HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358100 DS25 D7: (DAS Data Bit 7) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15...D0), the parity bit (labeled PA), the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY), and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK), as they are presented to the AP. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP, to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables. DS26 D6: (DAS Data Bit 6) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15...D0), the parity bit (labeled PA), the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY), and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK), as they are presented to the AP. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP, to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables. DS27 D5: (DAS Data Bit 5) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15...D0), the parity bit (labeled PA), the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY), and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK), as they are presented to the AP. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP, to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables. DS28 D4: (DAS Data Bit 4) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15...D0), the parity bit (labeled PA), the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY), and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK), as they are presented to the AP. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP, to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables. DS29 D3: (DAS Data Bit 3) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15...D0), the parity bit (labeled PA), the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY), and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK), as they are presented to the AP. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP, to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables. DS30 D2: (DAS Data Bit 2) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15...D0), the parity bit (labeled PA), the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY), and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK), as they are presented to the AP. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP, to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables.
1155
HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358100 DS31 D1: (DAS Data Bit 1) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15...D0), the parity bit (labeled PA), the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY), and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK), as they are presented to the AP. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP, to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables. DS32 D0: (DAS Data Bit 0) One of 19 amber LEDs located at the bottom of the board that indicate the status of the 16 data bits (labeled as D15...D0), the parity bit (labeled PA), the Transmit Synchronization control bit (labeled SY), and the synchronous clock bit (marked as CK), as they are presented to the AP. These 19 LEDs also exist on RCOM in the OBC and the DASIOP board in the AP, to make it easier to isolate bad components or cables.
ILLUSTRATION 1131 46288854G1 RCOM BOARD
1156
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 1118 11181 46288778G1 Rot. Terminator Bd Rotating Terminator Board 46288778G1 Test Points This board does not have any Test Points. 11182 Rotating Terminator Board 46288778G1 Connectors D D D D D D 11183
J6: Power ground to board OUTBOUND_GND from Rotating Buffer board J5: LOGIC CH (CMOS levels, high current) OUTBOUND_SIGNAL from Rotating Buffer board J4: Power input to board +10.6V_OUTBOUND from Rotating Buffer board J3: Power ground to board INBOUND_GND from Stationary Buffer board J2: LOGIC CH (CMOS levels, high current) INBOUND_SIGNAL from Stationary Buffer board J1: Power input to board +12V_INBOUND from Stationary Buffer board
Rotating Terminator Board 46288778G1 LEDs There are no LEDs on this board.
11184
Rotating Terminator Board 46288778G1 Switch Settings None
ILLUSTRATION 1132 46288778G1 ROT. TERMINATOR BD
ROTATING TERMINATOR BOARD 46288778G1A
J1 J2 J3 J4 J5 J6
CHASSIS GROUND
1157
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 1119 11191 46321054G1 Rot. Terminator Bd Rotating Terminator Board Test Points This board does not have any Test Points. 11192 Rotating Terminator Board Connectors D D D D D D 11193
J6: Power ground to board OUTBOUND_GND from Rotating Buffer bd. J5: LOGIC CH (CMOS levels, high current) OUTBOUND_SIGNAL from Rotating Buffer board J4: Power input to board +10.6V_OUTBOUND from Rotating Buffer board J3: Power ground to board INBOUND_GND from Stationary Buffer board J2: LOGIC CH (CMOS levels, high current) INBOUND_SIGNAL from Stationary Buffer board J1: Power input to board +12V_INBOUND from Stationary Buffer board
Rotating Terminator Board LEDs There are no LEDs on this board.
11194
Rotating Terminator Board Switch Settings None
1158

ILLUSTRATION 1133 46321054G1 ROT. TERMINATOR BD
1159
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 1120 11201 46288776G1 Rot. Buffer Bd Rotating Buffer Board 46288776G1 Test Points This board does not have any Test Points. 11202 Rotating Buffer Board Connectors D D D D D D D D 11203
J1: Center Conductor LOGIC CAC (CMOS levels, AC coupled) RX_OUTPUT to the OBC. Shield Ground RX_OUT_GND to the OBC. J2: Center Conductor LOGIC CAC (CMOS levels, AC coupled) TX_INPUT from the STC. Shield Ground TX_IN_GND from the STC. J3: Power ground to board OUTBOUND_GND to Stationary Buffer board J4: LOGIC CH (CMOS levels, high current) OUTBOUND_SIGNAL to Stationary Buffer board J5: Power input to board +10.6V_OUTBOUND to Stationary Buffer board J6: Power ground to board INBOUND_GND from Stationary Buffer board J7: LOGIC CH (CMOS levels, high current) INBOUND_SIGNAL from Stationary Buffer board J8: Power input to board +12V_INBOUND from Stationary Buffer board
Rotating Buffer Board 46288776G1 LEDs There are no LEDs on this board.
11204
Rotating Buffer Board 46288776G1 Switch Settings None
1160

ILLUSTRATION 1134 46288776G1 ROT. BUFFER BD
1161
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 1121 11211 46288774G1 Stat. Terminator Bd Stationary Terminator Board 46288774G1 Test Points This board does not have any Test Points. 11212 Stationary Terminator Board (Old) Connectors D D D D D D 11213
Stationary Terminator Board (OLD) LEDs There are no LEDs on this board.
11214
Stationary Terminator Board (OLD) Switch Settings None
ILLUSTRATION 1135 46288774G1 STAT. TERMINATOR BD
J1 J2 J3 J4 J5 J6
CHASSIS GROUND
STATIONARY TERMINATOR 46288774G1A
1162
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 1122 11221 46321058G1 Rot. Buffer Bd Rotating Buffer Board Test Points This board does not have any Test Points. 11222 Rotating Buffer Board Connectors D D D D D D D D 11223
J1: Center Conductor, LOGIC CAC (CMOS levels, AC coupled) RX_OUTPUT to the OBC. Shield, Ground RX_OUT_GND to the OBC. J2: Center Conductor, LOGIC CAC (CMOS levels, AC coupled) TX_INPUT from the STC. Shield, Ground TX_IN_GND from the STC. J3: Power ground to board, OUTBOUND_GND to Stationary Buffer board J4: LOGIC CH (CMOS levels, high current) OUTBOUND_SIGNAL to Stationary Buffer board J5: Power input to board, +10.6V_OUTBOUND to Stationary Buffer board J6: Power ground to board, INBOUND_GND from Stationary Buffer board J7: LOGIC CH (CMOS levels, high current), INBOUND_SIGNAL from Stationary Buffer board J8: Power input to board, +12V_INBOUND from Stationary Buffer board
Rotating Buffer Board LEDs There are no LEDs on this board.
11224
Rotating Buffer Board Switch Settings None
1163

ILLUSTRATION 1136 46321058G1 ROT. BUFFER BD
1164
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 1123 11231 46321052G1 Stat. Terminator Bd Stationary Terminator Board Test Points This board does not have any Test Points. 11232 Stationary Terminator Board Connectors D D D D D D 11233
Stationary Terminator Board LEDs There are no LEDs on this board.
11234
Stationary Terminator Board Switch Settings None
1165

ILLUSTRATION 1137 46321052G1 STAT. TERMINATOR BD
1166
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 1124 11241 46288772G1 Stat. Buffer Bd Stationary Buffer Board 46288772G1 Test Points This board does not have any Test Points. 11242 Stationary Buffer Board Connectors D D D D D D D D D D D 11243
J1: Center Conductor, LOGIC CAC (CMOS levels, AC coupled) RX_OUTPUT to the OBC. Shield Ground RX_OUT_GND to the OBC. J2: Center Conductor, LOGIC CAC (CMOS levels, AC coupled) TX_INPUT from the STC. Shield Ground TX_IN_GND from the STC. J3 Pin 1: Power input to board +12V_INBOUND from +12V Power Supply J3 Pin 2: Power ground to board INBOUND_GND from +12V Power Supply J3 Pin 3: Shield connection CHASSIS GND from +12V Power Supply J4: Power ground to board OUTBOUND_GND from Rotating Buffer board J5: LOGIC CH (CMOS levels, high current) OUTBOUND_SIGNAL from Rotating Buffer board J6: Power input to board +10.6V_OUTBOUND from Rotating Buffer board J7: Power ground to board INBOUND_GND to Rotating Buffer board J8: LOGIC CH (CMOS levels, high current) INBOUND_SIGNAL to Rotating Buffer board J9: Power input to board +12V_INBOUND to Rotating Buffer board
Stationary Buffer Board 46288772G1 LEDs There are no LEDs on this board.
11244
Stationary Buffer Board 46288772G1 Switch Settings None
1167

ILLUSTRATION 1138 46288772G1 STAT. BUFFER BD
CHASSIS GROUND
J1
J4 J5 J6 J7 J8 J9
CHASSIS GROUND
J2
J3
STATIONARY BUFFER BOARD 46288772G1A
1168
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 1125 11251 46321056G1 Stationary Buffer Bd Stationary Buffer Board Test Points This board does not have any Test Points. 11252 Stationary Buffer Board Connectors D D D D D D D D D D D 11253
J1: Center Conductor, LOGIC CAC (CMOS levels, AC coupled) RX_OUTPUT to the OBC. Shield Ground RX_OUT_GND to the OBC. J2: Center Conductor, LOGIC CAC (CMOS levels, AC coupled) TX_INPUT from the STC. Shield Ground TX_IN_GND from the STC. J3 Pin 1: Power input to board +12V_INBOUND from +12V Power Supply J3 Pin 2: Power ground to board INBOUND_GND from +12V Power Supply J3 Pin 3: Shield connection CHASSIS GND from +12V Power Supply J4: Power ground to board OUTBOUND_GND from Rotating Buffer board J5: LOGIC CH (CMOS levels, high current) OUTBOUND_SIGNAL from Rotating Buffer board J6: Power input to board +10.6V_OUTBOUND from Rotating Buffer board J7: Power ground to board INBOUND_GND to Rotating Buffer board J8: LOGIC CH (CMOS levels, high current) INBOUND_SIGNAL to Rotating Buffer board J9: Power input to board +12V_INBOUND to Rotating Buffer board
Stationary Buffer Board LEDs There are no LEDs on this board.
11254
Stationary Buffer Board Switch Settings None
1169

ILLUSTRATION 1139 46321056G1 STATIONARY BUFFER BD
1170
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 1126 11261 46264756G1 Console Autovoice Bd Console Autovoice Board Test Points D D D D D D D D D 11262
TP1: Console speaker signal prior to volume reduction TP2: Remote intercom microphone signal TP3: Signal ground TP4: Remote speaker signal prior to volume reduction TP5: Console microphone signal TP6: Record input signal TP7: Play output signal TP8: +6V TP9: Logic ground
Console Autovoice Board LEDs D DS86 RUN: Autovoice microcontroller active
11263
Console Autovoice Board Switch Settings D S253: Reset
ILLUSTRATION 1140 46264756G1 CONSOLE AUTOVOICE BD
1171
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 1127 11271 46264888G1 Relay Control Board Relay Control Board Test Points D
TP1 Analog 120/110 VAC Will be 120/110 VAC when the axial is enabled. Will be at 0 VAC if the servo over current relay opens to disable the servo. TP2 Analog 120/110 VAC Coil Power at 120/110 VAC for the servo enable contactor K2. At 120/110VAC for the servo to be able to drive gantry axial rotation. TP3 Analog 120/110 VAC 120/110 VAC coil power for circuit breaker K1 (Table vertical drive and Gantry tilt) and K2 (Table horizontal drive). Present when drives are ON at the REM box. TP4 Analog 120/110 VAC Power to turn on the SRU and the Operator console contactors. 120/110 VAC when Data Processing power is on at the REM box. TP5 Analog 120/110 VAC Power for DCRGS contactor K1. Should be at 120/110 VAC if Gantry I/O, 550 enable switch in gantry and REM box drives are ON. TP6 Analog 120/110 VAC Power for DCRGS contactor K1. Requires power at TP5, key switch closure and activation of circuit breaker assembly contactors K2, K1, and K4. TP7 Analog 120/110 VAC Same function as TP6 if relay control board K33 is functioning properly. TP8 Analog 120/110 VAC from 32KVA transformer. TP9 Analog 120/110 VAC 60 Hz. and 110 VAC for 50Hz. Input for 120/110 contactor coil power Coil Power at the RCB. 120 VAC for
D D D D
TP10 Analog 208 VAC 208 VAC line to line on these points when circuit breaker contactor K1 is on to produce 160 VDC power for table vertical drive and gantry tilt. 0 VAC when drives are OFF. TP11 Analog 208 VAC 208 VAC line to line on these points when circuit breaker contactor K1 is on to produce 160 VDC power for table vertical drive and gantry tilt. 0 VAC when drives are OFF. TP12 Analog 208 VAC 208 VAC line to line on these points when circuit breaker contactor K1 is on to produce 160 VDC power for table vertical drive and gantry tilt. 0 VAC when drives are OFF. TP13 Analog +24VDC +/ 4 +24 VDC (18 28 DVC). Loop On status, +24 when the servo is TP14 Analog +24VDC enabled.
D D D D D D
TP15 Analog +24VDC OK to turn on Gantry Servo Output. Should be at +24 VDC for Gantry Axial Rotation to be enabled. TP16 Analog +24VDC Hospital XRay ON control power. At +24 VDC when the external hospital light should be ON. TP17 Analog +24VDC Drives On, should be at +24 when the REM box XRay/Drives On is activated. TP18 Analog +24VDC At +24 VDC when XRay Drives On is activated at the REM box. At 0 VDC when drives are Off. This is the pilot function for Drives On.
1172
HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358100 TP19 Analog +24VDC At +24 VDC when Data Processing Power is activated at the REM box. At 0 VDC when Off. This is the pilot function for PDU On. TP20 Analog +24VDC Read back for 550 enabled. At +24 VDC when DCRGS contactor K1 is on and 550 VDC is enabled. TP21 Analog +24VDC Table and Console EStop operates properly at +24 VDC except when table or console EStop is engaged. TP22 Analog +24VDC VDC at all times. TP23 TP24 TP25 TP26 Analog +160 VDC Analog Neutral Analog Neutral Analog Neutral +24 VDC power supply output. At +24 At 160 when drives are on. Ground Ground Ground
D D D D D D D D D D 11272
TP27 Analog +24VDC Part of XRay Interlock circuit. At +24 nominally unless the axial control board detects a fault. TP28 TP29 Analog Neutral Analog Neutral Ground Ground
Relay Control Board LEDS and Lamps D DS29 NEON LAMP120 VAC neon lamp is on when the power from the 32KVA transformer is present on the relay control board to supply 120/110 VAC. DS79 NEON LAMPExternal 120 VAC at J12 is on when relay K59 is energized. This neon lamp indicates that the 120/110 VAC is present for the hospital light.
11273
Relay Control Board Switch Settings D S65 MANUAL 550 VDC
1173

ILLUSTRATION 1141 46264888G1 RELAY CONTROL BOARD
1174
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 1128 11281 46264884G1 DCRGS Control Board DCRGS Control Board Test Points D D D D D D D
TP1 CBV: CAPACITOR BALANCE VOLTAGE 50V/V TP2 DUTV: OUTPUT VOLTAGE 200V/V TP3 OUTCUR: OUTPUT CURRENT 10 AMPS/VOLT TP4: GND TP5 UVRST: UNDER VOLTAGE RESET TP6: PHLOSS TP7 I2*: A low signal on this line prevents gating of the SCRs. When this signal is taken from a low to a high state the gate firing board limits the rate of delay angle change. The actual firing angle changes from 120 degrees to the final value over a specified period of time. VIL = 1.0V, Max VIH 10.0V min. TP8 DLYCMD: DELAY ANODE COMMAND, 33 DEG/V 120 DEG = 5.0V TP9: VR2.5 TP10: VR7.5 TP11 INPV: PEAK RECT. LINE VOLTAGE 200V/V TP12: 12R TP13: AGND TP14: AGND TP15: AGND TP16 +30V: +30V 2V TP17 +12V: +12V 0.5V TP18 +5V: +5V 0.05V TP19 +22V: +22.2V 1V with respect to TP13
D D D D D D D D D D D D 11282
DCRGS Control Board LEDs Condition/state of LEDs with backup contactor OFF when 120 VAC power is initially applied to SCR Regulator board. D D D D D D D DS190 LINE VOLTAGE LOW: DS191 22V POWER ON: DS192 INTLK OPEN: DS193 CAP UNBALANCE: DS194 OVER CURRENT: DS195 UNDER VOLT: DS196 PHASE LOSS: yellow green yellow yellow yellow yellow yellow off on off off (on most units) on (on most units) on (on most units) on
11283
DCRGS Control Board Switch Settings D S96 550V/HVTEST: Normal switch position 550V
1175

ILLUSTRATION 1142 46264884G1 DCRGS CONTROL BOARD
1176
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 1129 11291 SCR Firing Board SCR Firing Board Test Points None 11292 SCR Firing Board LEDs
Condition/state of LEDs with backup contactor OFF when 120 VAC power is initially applied to SCR Regulator board. D D D 11293 PD1 PHASE LOSS: PD2 INHIBIT: PD3 12V POWER OK: yellow yellow green on on on
SCR Firing Board Switch Settings D J10: 50/60Hz Jumper
Conditions: 1. Turn on 550 VDC supply back up contactor. Yellow, PHASE LOSS LED on SCR Firing Board to be OFF (If ON then input fuse may be open or phase sensing leads at J 7B on the SCR Firing Board may be faulty). A large number of 2M ohm resistors in phase sensing leads to J7B on the SCR Firing Board have failed open. All yellow LEDs must now be off. Once back up contactor deenergized, all yellow LEDs on the regulator board must be OFF except for the PHASE LOSS LED. Note: The CAP UNBALANCE (DS 193), OVER CURRENT (DS 194), and UNDER VOLT (DS 195) are latched faults that are reset by back up contactor energizing. Refer to figure 1143 TP2 and TP3 DCRGS Control Board for the time to reach 435 volts after Phase Loss lamp turned off. 2. At TP3 during the no load condition there shall be no missing pulses and peak to peak voltages to be 1000 200mV, refer to No load current at TP3. There are sets of six pulses per full cycle and each may have two pulses that are higher or lower than the other two. This trace will detect SCRs that may have opened.
Note:
1177

ILLUSTRATION 1143 SCR FIRING BOARD
1178
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 1130 11301 46264368G1 ETC Board ETC Board Test Points D D D D D D D D D D D D
TP1 +5V: (Digital +5 volts) Power Supply Test Point TP2 LGND: (Digital LGND) Power Supply Test Point TP3: (Digital 12 volts) RS232 Table XMIT TP4: (Digital 12 volts) RS232 Table REC TP5: (Digital +5 volts) Spare TP6: (Digital 0 5 volts) Long Encoder CH C TP7 AGND: (Analog) AGND Power Supply Test Point TP8: (Analog 15 volts) Cradle Tach (relatively noisy signal) Gain = 75 mm/sec = 6.3 volts at TP TP9: (Digital 0 5 volts) Long Encoder CH B TP10: (Digital 0 5 volts) Long Encoder CH A TP11 15v: (Analog 15 volts) Power Supply Test Point TP12: (Analog 0 10 volts) Elev/Tilt Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Control (controls AR689 pulse width) Gain =5 uSec pulse Width / volt command TP13: (Analog +10 volts) +10 Reference TP14: (Analog 0 15 volts) Cradle Current Integrator (averages out pulses from AR653) Wider pulses = more amp current = higher signal TP15 15V: (Analog 0 15 volts) Elev/Tilt Current Integrator (averages out pulses from AR563) Wider pulses = more amp current = higher signal. TP16: (Analog 0 10 volts) Cradle Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Control (controls AR669 pulse width) Gain = 5 uSec pulse Width / volt command Analog Signal TP17: (Digital 0 15 volts) Cradle Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) sets output (v) of power amp. Volts out = Pulse width (uSec) * 24 / 56 TP18 AGND: (Analog Ground) Power Supply Test Point TP19: (Analog 15 volts) Elev/Tilt Motor Voltage Feedback (Filtered map pulse width modulation signal, fc = 39 cps, gain TP19/amp voltage =.05v/v TP20: (Digital 0 15 volts) Trigger SYNCH Signal PWM trigger for power amps (17.72 KHz) TP21 +15V: (Analog +15 volts) Power Supply Test Point TP22: (Digital 0 5 volts) Elev/Tilt Command Direction (+5V = Up/Forward) TP23: (Digital 0 15 volts) Elev/Tilt PWM (sets output (v) of power amp. volts out = pw (uSec) * 160 /56 TP24 PGND: (Analog Physical Ground) Power Supply Test Point TP25 +24V: (Analog +24 volts) Power Supply Test Point TP26: (Analog 15 volts) Cradle motor voltage Feedback (filtered amp pwm signal), FC = 64 CPS Gain (TP26/amp voltage) = .41v/v
D D D
D D D D D D D D D D
1179
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 11302 ETC Board LEDs D D D D D D D 11303
DS263 CRA: Cradle Encoder Apulse active DS264 CRB: Cradle Encoder Bpulse active DS265 CRC: Cradle Encoder Cpulse active DS266 ELC: Elevation Encoder Cpulse active DS310 CSTALL: Cradle stalled when on DS311 ETFAULT: Elevation/Tilt Amp fault elevation or tilt drive shorted when on DS312 ETSTALL: Elevation/Tilt Amp stall or tilt drive stalled when on
ETC Board Switch Settings D S162: Reset
ILLUSTRATION 1144 46264368G1 ETC BOARD
1180
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 1131 1132 Westamp Servo Amp
Westamp Servo Amp Internal Test Points (NonAccessible) D D D D D D TP1: Tachometer input TP2: Signal input TP3: Output of velocity control amplifier TP4: Output of current error amplifier TP5: Base drive oscillator TP6: Base drive oscillator
1133
Westamp Servo Amp LEDs D D CR35: NO FAULT CR36 REM LIM: J18, remote enable/disable (nonlatching) J16, A limit switch (nonlatching) J17, B limit switch (nonlatching). CR37 TEMP: Indicates excessive ambient temperature. CR38 OV VOLT: Bus overvoltage. CR39 RMS: Indicates excessive current draw. CR40 LOGIC: Indicates 12 VDC logic supply. CR41 GND FAULT: Indicates output short to ground. CR42 SURGE: Indicates excessive transistor current or shorted outputs. CR43: PWR ON CR44 BUS: Indicates DC bus power, even with logic power off.
D D D D D D D D 1134
Westamp Servo Amp Switch Settings None
1181

ILLUSTRATION 1145 WESTAMP SERVO AMP
1182
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 1135 11351
Axial Servo Amp Control Board Allen Bradley Servo Amp Axial Servo Amp Control Board LEDsAllen Bradley Servo Amp D CURRENT FOLDBACK, The red current foldback LED illuminates when the current foldback circuitry is operating. Indicates that the time vs. current overload rating of the power transistors has been exceeded. The intensity of the LED varies in proportion to the amount of overload.
Current Foldback LED is illuminated 1. The logic supply (12 VDC, +5V) circuits have malfunctioned (fuse blown, etc.) or the AC input at A3TB19,10,11 is incorrectly wired. 2. The output current is exceeding its timecurrent rating. a. The acceleration/deceleration command to the servo is requiring peak current for an excessive amount of time. b. The gain pot is set too high, causing excessive peak currents. c. The machine friction, inertial load and/or viscous loading is excessive.
d. A short circuit exists across the servo output terminals. e. The current ripple is excessive, caused by load inductance being below minimum.
ENABLE (EN) The application of an Enable signal by the system will cause the Green enable LED to illuminate. Enable LED is NOT illuminated 1. The system has not enabled the servo. 2. The enable wiring to the servo is open. 3. The axial interface board enable relay has malfunctioned. 4. The system has detected a system malfunction that will not allow the servo to be enabled. 5. Power has not been applied to the servo. 6. The logic supply (12 VDC, +5 VDC) circuits have malfunctioned (fuse blown, etc.) or the AC input at A3TB 19,10,11 is incorrectly wired. Enable LED is illuminated, but servo does not enable 1. A servo malfunction has occurred but is not annunciated by the LED indicators. Check the status of the fault contact output. 2. A component malfunction exists in the enable circuit. 3. The servo circuit breaker (CB1) is tripped.
1183
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 4. Servo fan/contactor fuse has blown. Verify that the fan is operational with power applied. 5. The line/DB contactor has malfunctioned inside the servo. 6. The servo logic supplies are not operational a. The logic supply fuses are blown. b. Logic supply AC voltage is missing 7. UV LED is illuminated. a. Enable signal is present prior to power being applied to the power transformer (wait at least 1 second after the 120 VAC, threephase power is applied before enabling the servo). Also wait at least 1 second after a servo reset cycle before enabling the servo.
MOTOR OVERLOAD (MOD) The red motor overload LED illuminates when the motor overload detection circuit trip point has been exceeded. IMPORTANT: This overload indication may take several minutes to reset. If cycling the power does not cause a reset, remove power from the controller for about 3 minutes, then retry. Motor Overload LED is illuminated 1. The logic supply (12 VDC, +5VDC) circuits have malfunctioned (fuse blown, etc) or the AC input at A3TB19,10,11 is incorrectly wired. 2. The continuous rating of the servomotor is being exceeded. a. The programmed duty cycle requires an RMS torque exceeding the motor rating. b. The machine frictional force or alignment is improperly set. c. A mechanical limit or stop on the machine is causing the motor to develop excessive torque.
d. The servo peak current pot is set higher than the motor rating. e. The motor is partially demagnetized causing excessive current draw.
OVER TEMPERATURE (OT) When illuminated, the red LED indicates that the heat sink over temperature device inside the servo has tripped. Over temperature LED is illuminated 1. The logic supply (12 VDC, +5VDC) circuits have malfunctioned (fuse blown, etc) or the AC input at A3TB19,10,11 is incorrectly wired. 2. The heat sink thermal overload has tripped. One or more of the following may have occurred (if the surface temperature of the exposed heat sink adjacent to the ground stud measures greater than 90 degrees Celsius). a. The cabinet ambient temperature is too high.
1184
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 b. The machine duty cycle requires an RMS current exceeding the continuous rating of the servo. c. The integral fan is not functioning.
d. The airflow access to the servo is limited or blocked. e. The input line voltage exceeds the maximum controller input voltage.
OVERVOLTAGE (OV) The DC power bus is continuously monitored. If it exceeds 265VDC a fault is sensed and the red LED is illuminated. Overvoltage LED is illuminated 1. The logic supply (12 VDC, +5VDC) circuits have malfunctioned (fuse blown, etc) or the AC input at A3TB19,10,11 is incorrectly wired. 2. Check shunt regulator resistors fuse on the servo panel. 3. Motor armature is shorted to ground. 4. The power bus voltage has exceeded 265VDC a. The logic or shunt regulator board is malfunctioning and incorrectly sensing the bus voltage. b. The input line voltage exceeds the maximum controller input voltage. c. Shunt regulator board or transistor has malfunctioned.
TRANSISTOR OVERCURRENT (TOC) This red LED illuminates when the peak current rating of the power transistor(s) has been exceeded. Transistor overcurrent LED is illuminated 1. The logic control board has malfunctioned. 2. The transistor base driver board is inoperative. 3. The logic control board common is not properly grounded. 4. The logic supply (12VDC, +5VDC) circuits have malfunctioned (fuse blown, etc) or the AC input at A3TB19,10,11 is incorrectly wired. 5. The peak rating of the power transistors has been exceeded. a. Servo output or servomotor has been short circuited or grounded. b. A power transistor module has malfunctioned.
1185
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 UNDERVOLTAGE (UV)
If the DC power bus drops below 75 VDC (+/ 20%) and the servo is enabled or the logic supplies have dropped 10% below their nominal value, this red LED is illuminated. Undervoltage LED is illuminated 1. The power bus voltage has dropped below 75 VDC. c. The line/DB contactor has not energized or has dropped out (inside the servo).
d. The line/DB contactor fuse is blown. e. The input line voltage is low. f. The power bus capacitor has malfunctioned.
g. The servo circuit breaker (CB1) has tripped. h. The threephase input line is open. i. The transformer is providing the incorrect line voltage or has malfunctioned.
2. The logic supplies have dropped 10% below their nominal value. a. The input line voltage is low. b. The transformer auxiliary logic supply winding is open. c. The logic supply (12 VDC, +5VDC) circuits have malfunctioned (fuse blown, etc.) or the AC input at A3TB19,10,11 is incorrectly wired.
3. The enable LED is also illuminated. a. The enable signal is present prior to the power being applied to the transformer (wait at least 1 second after the 120 VAC, threephase power is applied before enabling the controller). Also wait at least 1 second after a servo reset cycle before enabling the servo. b. The controller circuit breaker is open. 11352 Test Points None 11353 Switches Axial Servo Amp Control BoardAB None
1186
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 1136 11361 Axial Interface BoardAB Axial Interface BoardAB Test Points D D D D
TP1 AGND: Analog Ground and Neutral of transformer input TP2: +12VOutput of +12 volt regulator TP3: 12VOutput of 12 volt regulator TP4 ENABLE: Collector of Enable OptoIsolator. When the optoisolator is off, the voltage at the +12 volt (not enabled) should be greater than supply test point (TP1) minus 50 millivolts. When the optoisolator is on (enabled), the voltage at this test point should be less than the voltage at the +12 volt supply test point (TP1) minus 7 volts. TP5 I_RTN: Amplifier current output readback return TP6 I_OUT: Amplifier current output readback TP7 +15V: Output of +15 volt regulator TP8 15V: Output of 15 volt regulator TP9 RESET: Collector of Reset OptoIsolator. When the optoisolator is off, the voltage at the +12 volt (not reset) should be greater than supply test point (TP1) minus 50 millivolts. When the optoisolator is on (reset), the voltage at this test point should be less than the voltage at the +12 volt supply test point (TP1) minus 7 volts.
D D D D D
11362
Axial Interface BoardAB LEDs None
11363
Axial Interface BoardAB Switch Settings None
1187

ILLUSTRATION 1146 AXIAL INTERFACE BOARDAB
1188
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 1137 11371 Zeus Remote Intercom X Board
Zeus Remote Intercom X Board Test Points D D D D D D TP1: Noise Cancel circuit output TP2: Level Control amp output TP3: Line Driver circuit input TP4: Line Driver circuit output TP5: Automatic Gain Control (AGC) for Level Control amp TP6: Regulator circuit output
11372
Zeus Remote Intercom X Board LEDs None
11373
Zeus Remote Intercom X Board Switch Settings None
ILLUSTRATION 1147 ZEUS REMOTE INTERCOM X BOARD
1189
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 1138 11381 Interface Measurement Board Interface Measurement Board Test Points D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D 11382
TP1 KV: Sensed kV signal Scale 10 kV / V TP2 KV: kV signal to OBC TP3 KV GND: kV return signal to OBC TP4 TP5 MA: Sensed kV signal Scale 100 kV / V TP6 MA GND: mA return signal to OBC TP7 PS1: Pressure Switch 1 TP8 PS2: Pressure Switch 2 TP9 TH1: Thermistor 1 (not used) TP10 TH2: Thermistor 2 (not used) TP11 XS2: Small Filament 2 TP12 XSC: Small Filament Common TP13 XS1: Small Filament 1 TP14 XL2: Large Filament 2 TP15 XLC: Large Filament Common TP16 XL1: Large Filament 1 TP17 MAout: mA signal to OBC TP18 GND: Tank ground TP19 kV: Sensed kV signal Scale 10 kV / V TP20 GND: Tank ground
Interface Measurement Board LEDs None
11383
Interface Measurement Board Switch Settings None
1190

ILLUSTRATION 1148 INTERFACE MEASUREMENT BOARD
1191
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 1139 1/2 Mag Tape Controller Board
ILLUSTRATION 1149 1/2 MAG TAPE CONTROLLER BOARD
1192
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 1140 11401 LM02 Board LMO2 Test Points None 11402 LEDS None 11403 Switches None 11404 Jumper Settings
These jumpers should have been previously installed at the factory, however make certain to verify the correct jumpers have been set prior to inserting the board into the card cage. D D D D X1: X2: X3: X3: 1 Jumper IN All Jumpers Out 3 Jumpers In HSA 4 Jumpers Out 2 Jumpers IN HSARP 4 Jumpers OUT
1193

ILLUSTRATION 1150 LM02 BOARD
1194
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 1141 11411 FEP Board 46327036G1 FEP Board Test Points D D D D D 11412 FEP Board LEDs D DS1 Green D0 TP2 VCC: +5V Logic Supply TP3 5V: 5V ECL Logic Supply TP4 +12V: +12V Backplane Voltage TP5 12V: 12V Backplane Voltage TP6 LGND: Logic Ground
Diagnostic / status LED #0, mapped to the Internal Command Register Bit 24 and controlled by DSP0. Diagnostic / status LED #1, to the Internal Command Register Bit 25 and controlled by DSP0. Diagnostic / status LED #2, mapped to the Internal Command Register and set by DSPs Diagnostic / status LED #3, mapped to the Internal Command Register and set by DSPs Diagnostic / status LED #4, mapped to the Internal Command Register and set by DSPs Diagnostic / status LED #5, mapped to the Internal Command Register and set by DSPs Diagnostic / status LED #6, mapped to the Internal Command Register and set by DSPs Diagnostic / status LED #7, mapped to the Internal Command Register and set by DSPs DAS Data FIFO is empty DAS Data FIFO is full VME Input Data FIFO is empty VME Input Data FIFO is full VME Output Data FIFO is empty VME Output Data FIFO is full DSP #0 is accessing local SRAM DSP #1 is accessing local SRAM Abort line is open (scanning is not enabled) Command Register and set by DSPs
DS2
Green D1
DS3
Green D2
DS4
Green D3
DS5
Green D4
DS6
Green D5
DS7
Green D6
DS8
Green D7
D D D D D D D D D
DS9 DS10 DS11 DS12 DS1 DS14 DS15 DS16 DS17
Green EDDF Green FDDF Green EIDF Green FIDF Green EODF Green FODF Green ACC0 Green ACC1 Green ABT
1195
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 11413 FEP Board Switch Settings
There is one switch on the FEP. Use switch S1 to powerup reset the FEP. 11414 FEP Board Jumpers D JP1 TBS: Test bus select. Selects whether the JTAG test bus source is the 74ACT8990 test bus controller or the XDS510 test bus interface.
Jumper removed (Normal Operation Position): 74ACT8990 is the test bus source Jumper installed (Engineering Test Only Position): XDS510 is the test bus source
ILLUSTRATION 1151 FEP BOARD
1196
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 1142 11421 Ethernet Transceiver Ethernet Transceiver Test Points None. 11422 Ethernet Transceiver LEDs D D D D D Lanview LEDs Power Light Transmit Light Receive Light Collision Light
Troubleshooting Ethernet Light Problems: A. No Lanview LEDs ON. 1. Check power ON at host 2. Check proper connection via transceiver cable 3. Check power pair of transceiver cable B. Power LED ON, transmit LED OFF, receive LED ON steady, collision LED ON steady. 1. Transceiver tap not making contact with center conductor on coax. C. Power LED ON, transmit LED OFF, receive LED OFF, collision LED ON. 1. TDR 5000 on network with Ebutton depressed. D. Power LED ON, transmit, receive, collision LEDs flashing simultaneously 1. Open in coax. E. Power LED ON, Transmit LED flashing, receive LED ON or OFF, collision LED OFF. 1. Coax cable shorted. 2. Transceiver tap shorted.
1197
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 11423 Ethernet Transceiver Switch Settings D SQE Switch
To configure the heartbeat (SQE) switch, slide the SQE switch to the left to enable the heartbeat (SQE) test and to the right to disable the heartbeat (SQE) test. This switch should be set in the disabled position, switched to the right. D SQE OFF Jumper
When the transceiver is received from stock the jumper will more than likely be set up incorrectly. If the jumper is in the wrong position the SQE LED on the transceiver will be illuminated. What this is indicating is that the heartbeat test is enabled. There is a chance that if the heartbeat test is enabled the system ethernet circuitry may not function correctly. Set the jumper inside the ethernet to jumper between slots 4 and 5. This is the SQE OFF setting.
ILLUSTRATION 1152 ETHERNET TRANSCEIVER
1198
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 1143 11431 AP120 Board AP120 Board Test Points None 11432 AP120 Board LEDs D Status
A bicolor status indicator LED is just below the reset button. When the board first powersup, the indicator is off. The LED turns yellow when all four onboard DSPs have successfully begun diagnostic tests, and green upon completion. If the indicator remains off after power on, this indicates that at least one of the DSPs on the board has a major failure and is unable to complete its initialization routine. If it remains yellow, this indicates a diagnostic routine error. D Bus Activity
The AP120 front panel has two green LED indicators just below the status indicator. The top indicator reflects activity on the HSB and the lower indicator reflects activity on the VME bus. Each indicator is illuminated when its bus is actively transmitting or receiving data. The LED intensity is proportional to the duty cycle of the active to nonactive state. 11433 AP120 Board Switch Settings D Reset The AP120 has a manual reset switch on the front panel. This switch is useful in returning the board to a known state after a system problem. During troubleshooting, use the reset switch to reset the AP120 and start self tests. 11434 Internal Cable Connections The AP120 board has a front panel connector for the diagnostic processor; however, this is not implemented and has no function as a diagnostic tool. 11435 AP120 Board Configuration D Setting Up the VMEbus Address The front panel provides access to four rotary hexidecimal switches for programming the VMEbus address of the board. These switches are preset at the factory to address 0xD0000000 and then sealed with plugs in the front panel. The service technician has no access to these switches. The AP120 always responds as an A32 slave. The APp120 responds as an A24 slave if the A24 Decode Enable jumper is installed at location J3_1. If the jumper is removed, the AP120Ap120 does not respond as an A24 slave. The board maps to a 4Mbyte contiguous region of the VME address space selected by the rotary switches. The J3_1 jumper and rotary switches are on the component side of the board, see board layout. D Setting Up High Speed Bus Jumpers
The HSB has nine header strips to configure the bus and clock connections. The headers are all located together in an area represented by the shaded box near P2 on the board layout diagram.
1199
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 11436 AP120 Board Jumper Settings D AP120 MCS Header (J39_1, J39_2)
The AP120 MCS jumpers (J39_1 and J39_2) are installed if the AP120 being configured is the MCS for the system. These headers have two rows of three pins. (Pin 1 is the topmost pin on the right of the header. Since the AP120 being configured is not the MCS for the system, remove the jumpers from the J39_1 and J39_2 headers. D Clock/Sync Receive Header (J41_1, J41_2)
The Clock/Sync Headers (J41_1 and J41_2) isolate the onboard clock circuitry from the connector P2 row C. These headers have two rows of three pins. (Pin 1 is the topmost pin on the right of the header.) Since the AP120 uses the high speed bus and receives clock 0, place the jumpers for the clock/sync headers in the position shown in the board layout diagram. D Use HSB/No HSB (J41_3)
The J41_3 header, three rows of three pins, uses 1x2 jumpers, which are placed in one of the positions shown in the board layout diagram. Since the AP120 in the RPRp subsystem uses the HSB, place jumpers in the pin 3 position. D Bus Isolation Header (J51_1, J51_2, J50_3, J50_4)
The four large headers (J50_1, J50_2, J50_3, and J50_4) isolate the onboard HSB circuitry from the connector P2 rows A & C. Each header has 18 rows. When a jumper must be installed, use a 16row shorting block installed over the center 16 rows. The AP120 in the RPp uses the HSB, so place all four jumpers as shown in the board layout diagram.
11100

ILLUSTRATION 1153 AP120 BOARD
11101
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 1144 11441 BPP Board BPP Board Test Points None 11442 BPP Board LEDs D Status
A bicolor status indicator LED is just below the reset button. When the board first powersup, the indicator is off. The LED turns yellow when all four onboard DSPs have successfully begun diagnostic tests, and green upon completion. If the indicator remains off after power on, this indicates that at least one of the DSPs on the board has a major failure and is unable to complete its initialization routine. If it remains yellow, this indicates a diagnostic routine error. D Bus Activity
The BPP front panel has two green LED indicators just below the status indicator. The top indicator reflects activity on the HSB and the lower indicator reflects activity on the VME bus. Each indicator is illuminated when its bus is actively transmitting or receiving data. The LED intensity is proportional to the duty cycle of the active to nonactive state. 11443 BPP Board Switch Settings Reset The BPP has a manual reset switch on the front panel. This switch is useful in returning the board to a known state after a system problem. During troubleshooting, use the reset switch to reset the BPP and start self tests. 11444 BPP Board Configuration The front panel provides access to three rotary hexidecimal switches for programming the VMEbus address of the board. These switches are preset at the factory to address 0xE0000000 and then sealed with plugs in the front panel. The service technician has no access to these switches. The BPP responds as an A32 slave. The board maps to an 8Mbyte Contiguous region of the VME address space selected by the rotary switches. The rotary switches are on the component side of the board.
11102
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 11445 BPP Board Jumper Settings None.

ILLUSTRATION 1154 BPP BOARD
11103
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 1145 11451 CLA Board CLA Board Test Points NONE 11452 CLA Board LEDs D D D D D 11453 CLA Board Switches D D D (H7) (H11) (H12) 4, 6, 7, 8 1, 2, 3, 5 1, 6 7, 8 4, 6, 7 1, 2, 3, 5, 8 On Off On Off On Off
SYSFAIL: Red until UNIX boots and successfully attaches to device, then turns green. VME: VME Access Pulses when active RX: Receive Packets Pulses when active. TX: Transmit Packets Pulses when active. INT: VME Interrupt Pulses when active.
11104

ILLUSTRATION 1155 CLA BOARD
NOTE: The 6U HAWK Ethernet is mounted on a 9U adaptor. LEDs not visible from 9U front panel.
9U adaptor board
6U circuit board
JA11
JA4 JA16
VME RX TX INT
JA8
JA9
JA10
P1
JA12
STATU S ON
SW1
OFF
ON
TX2 TX1
SW2
OFF
ON ribbon cable to 9U panel connector
SW3 J1 JA13 JA1 JA7

OFF
P2
11105
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 1146 11461 Motorola MVME167 Board (SBC) Motorola MVME167 Board (SBC) LEDs D
FAIL (Board Failure)
The red FAIL LED lights when the active BRDFAIL signal line indicates a failure. D STAT (Status)
The yellow STAT LED is driven by the decoded MC68040 status lines. This LED lights when it receives a halt condition from the MC68040 processor. D SCON (System Controller)
The green SCON LED indicates whether the SBC is the system controller. When the VMEchip2 in the MVME167 is the VMEbus system controller, the SCON LED lights. D VME (VMEbus Activity)
The green VME LED lights when the SBC is using the VMEbus and when the VMEbus accesses the SBC (VMEchip2 is local bus master). D RUN (Local Bus Active)
The green RUN LED lights when one of the local bus masters is executing a local bus cycle. D LAN and SCSI (Local Bus Master)
The green SCSI LED lights when the SCSI chip is local bus master. The green LAN LED lights when the LAN chip is local bus master. D +12V (LAN Power)
The SBC supplies +12V power to the Ethernet transceiver interface through a fuse. The green +12V LED lights when power is available to the transceiver interface. 11462 Motorola MVME167 Board (SBC) Switch Settings The SBC has a manual reset switch and an abort switch on the front panel. The reset and abort switches, which are useful in returning the board to a known state after a system problem, are enabled by software. These switches are used in the following ways. D Reset Switch
Pressing and releasing the front panel reset switch initiates a system reset. Cold and warm reset modes are available. By default, 167Bug is in cold mode. During cold reset, a total system initialization takes place, as if the SBC had just been powered up. All static variables (including disk device and controller parameters) are restored to their default states. The breakpoint table and offset registers are cleared. The target registers are invalidated. Input and output character queues are cleared. Onboard devices (timer, serial ports, etc...) are reset, and the first two serial ports are reconfigured to their default state. During warm reset, the 167Bug variables and tables are preserved, as well as the target state registers and breakpoints. Reset must be used if the processor ever halts, or if the 167Bug environment is ever lost (vector table is destroyed, stack corrupted, etc...). 11106
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 D Abort Switch
Abort is invoked by pressing and releasing the abort switch on the SBC front panel. Whenever abort is invoked when executing a user program (running target code) a snapshot of the processor state is captured and stored in the target registers. For this reason, abort is most appropriate when terminating a user program that is being debugged. Abort should be used to regain control if the program gets caught in a loop, etc... The target PC, register contents, etc..., help to pinpoint the malfunction. Pressing and releasing the abort switch generates a local board condition, which may interrupt the processor if enabled. The target registers, reflecting the machine state at the time the abort switch was pressed, are displayed on the screen. Any breakpoints installed in your code are removed and the breakpoint table remains intact. Control is returned to the debugger. 11463 Internal Cable Connections The SBC board has no front panel connectors. The SBC has two 96position DIN connectors (P1 and P2). P1 rows A, B, and C and P2 row B are the VMEbus interconnection. P2 rows A and C provide connection to the serial ports 1 and 2, SCSI interface, and Ethernet for the Operators Console. 11464 Motorola MVME167 Board (SBC) Configuration The Motorola MVME167 has a board information block, which is stored in the NonVolatile (NVRAM) beginning at address 0xFFFC1EF8. To display this information, execute the cnfg command. The following is the board information displayed. Board (PWA) Serial Number: The boards Serial Number. For example, 1216794. Board Identifier: For the MVME167, value=mvme167. Artwork (PWA) IdentifierThe SBCs printed wire assembly number (PWA). Consists of the prefix 01W followed by a part number, and the final character designating the revision level of the board. For the RPRp subsystem, the PWA number is 01w3826b34a. MPU Clock Speed: The boards speed in MHz. First 2 bytes are the whole number of MHz; last 2 bytes are fractions of MHz. For the MVME167, the value is 3300. Ethernet Address: 8 bytes, hexidecimal format. Last 2 bytes are not used. For the RP subsystem, the value is system dependent. Local SCSI ID: For the RP subsystem , the value is 07. Optional Board 1 Artwork (PWA): The SBCs PWA number for Identifier of the first option board. The final character designates the revision level of the board. For the RP subsystem, the number is 3800b04a. Optional Board 1 (PWA): Serial Number12 bytes, ASCII format store the boards serial number. For example, 1212163.
11107
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 11465 EPROM Setup
Be sure that four EPROMs are installed in the proper sockets on the SBC module and that the physical chip orientation is correct, with the flattened corner of each EPROM aligned with the corresponding portion of the EPROM socket. Two 128K x 16 167Bug EPROMs are installed. The odd label EPROM (such as B01) is installed in socket XU1, and even label EPROM (such as B02) is installed in XU2. Two 128K x 16 Stealth boot PROMs are installed. The U3 EPROM is installed in socket XU3, and the U4 EPROM is installed in XU4. 11466 View and Change EPROM Parameters When power is applied to the SBC, 167Bug executes some selfchecks and automatically boots UNIX. To display the 167diag prompt, you must do one of the following: D D D If the UNIX prompt is displayed, Press the Break key before self tests start to execute. If running TIP, press the tilde and pound sign (~#) keys before the self tests execute. If the 167Bug prompt is displayed, enter the sd command.
To set up the operational parameters stored in the SBC Battery Back Up RAM (BBRAM) to the default configuration, execute the following 167Bug command at the 167diag prompt. D ENV ;D
The SBC EPROM Setup table shows the setup of EPROM for a system that includes an SBC, LSD, HSDC, and HSD. Parameters that differ from the Motorola default values are printed in boldface type. Note: In the unlikely event that these parameters require change, execute the following command: D ENV
You must execute the ENV command once without error to load the parameters into NVRAM. After modifying these parameters, be sure to reset the system to activate any changes.
11108
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 11467 SBC EPROM Setup Table
TABLE 111 MVME167 (SBC BOARD) EEPROM SETUP VALUES
PARAMETER Bug or System Environment [B/S] Field Service Menu Enable [Y/N] Remote Start Method Switch [G/M/B/N] Probe System for Supported I/O Controllers [Y/N] Negate VMEbus SYSFAIL* Always [Y/N] Local SCSI Bus Reset on Debugger Startup [Y/N] Local SCSI Bus Negotiations Type [A/S/N] Ignore CFGA Block on a Hard Disk Boot [Y/N] Auto Boot Enable [Y/N] Auto Boot at Powerup Only [Y/N] Auto Boot Controller LUN Auto Boot Device LUN Auto Boot Abort Delay Auto Boot Default String [Y (NULL String)/(String)] ROM Boot Enable [Y/N] ROM Boot at Powerup Only [Y/N] ROM Boot Enable Search of VMEbus [Y/N] ROM Boot Abort Delay ROM Boot Direct Starting Address ROM Boot Direct Ending Address Network Auto Boot Enable [Y/N] Network Auto Boot at POwerup Only [Y/N] Network Auto Boot Controller LUN Network Auto Boot Device LUN Network Auto Boot Abort Delay Network Auto Boot Configuration Parameters Pointer (NVRAM) Memory Search Starting Address Memory Search Ending Address Memory Search Increment Size Memory Search Delay Enable [Y/N] Memory Search Delay Address Memory Size Enable [Y/N] Memory Size Starting Address Memory Size Ending Address Base Address of Local Memory Size of Local Memory Board #0 Size of Local Memory Board #1
VALUE S N N Y N Y N Y N N 00 00 0 null Y N N 0 FFA00000 FFBFFFFC N N 00 00 0 FFFC0818 FFE00000 FFE10000 00010000 N FFFFCE0F Y 00000000 02000000 00000000 02000000 00000000
11109
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 PARAMETER Slave Enable #1 [Y/N] Slave Starting Address #1 Slave Ending Address #1 Slave Address Translation Address #1 Slave Address Translation Select #1 Slave Control #1 Slave Enable #2 [Y/N] Slave Starting Address #2 Slave Ending Address #2 Slave Address Translation Address #2 Slave Address Translation Select #2 Slave Control #2 Master Enable #1 [Y/N] Master Starting Address #1 Master Ending Address #1 Master Control #1 Master Enable #2 [Y/N] Master Starting Address #2 Master Ending Address #2 Master Control #2 Master Enable #2 [Y/N] Master Starting Address #2 Master Ending Address #2 Master Control #2 Master Enable #3 [Y/N] Master Starting Address #3 Master Ending Address #3 Master Control #3 Master Enable #4 [Y/N] Master Starting Address #4 Master Ending Address #4 Master Address Translation Address #4 Master Address Translation Select #4 Master Control #4 Short I/O (VMEbus A16) Enable [Y/N] Short I/O (VMEbus A16) Control FPage (VMEbus A24) Enable [Y/N] FPage (VMEbus A24) Control ROM Speed Bank A Code ROM Speed Bank B Code
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 VALUE N 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 03FF N 00000000 01FFFFFF 00000000 00000000 03EF N 02000000 EFFFFFFF 0D N 00000000 00000000 00 N 00000000 00000000 00 N 00000000 00000000 00 N 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00 N 01 N 02 04 04
11110
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 PARAMETER Static RAM Speed Code PCC2 Vector Base VMEC2 Vector Base #1 VMEC2 Vector Base #2 VMEC2 GCSR Group Base Address VMEC2 GCSR Board Base Address VMEbus Global Time Out Code Local Bus Time Out Code VMEbus Access Time Out Code
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 VALUE 00 05 06 07 CC 00 01 00 02
11111
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 11468 View and Change the Self Test Mask
The SBC is already configured with a mask that blocks the execution of certain self tests at powerup. To see which tests are currently masked, enter the following 167Bug command at the 167diag prompt: D MASK
This mask is stored in the SBC Battery Back Up RAM (BBRAM). The SBC Masked Self Tests table shows the tests that are normally masked. Note: In the unlikely event that these parameters require change, execute the following command: MASK testname (for each test that you wish to mask.) 11469 MVME167 (SBC Board) Masked Self Tests
TABLE 112 MASKED SELFTEST NAMES
RAM QUIK RAM ALTS RAM CODE RAM REF RAM PATS RAM ADR RAM PERM RAM RNDM RAM BTOG SRAM QUIK SRAM ALTS SRAM CODE 114610
SRAM REF SRAM PATS SRAM ADR SRAM PERM SRAM RNDM SRAM BTOG PCC2 TMR1C PCC2 TMR2C PCC2 ADJ PCC2 PRNTA PCC2 PRNTB PCC2 PRNTC
PCC2 PRNTD PCC2 PRNTE MCECC CBIT MCECC SBE MMU INVPAGE MMU WPPAGE VME2 REGB VME2 TMRK ST2401 POLL ST2401 INTR ST2401 DMA ST2401 BAUD
View and Change the Network I/O Teach (NIOT) Configurations The SBC debugger has already been set up with controller and device descriptor tables for network configuration, and this information is stored in the SBCs Battery Backed Up RAM (BBRAM). These tables (one for each controller/device LUN combination) are used by .NETxxx system calls. The service technician who is installing the system must modify two systemdependent parameters (Client IP Address and Server IP Address) in the descriptor tables at the time of installation. These parameters do not require modification at any time other than installation. To modify these parameters, enter the following 167Bug command at the 167diag prompt: D NIOT
167Bug presents a series of prompts asking for values for the NIOT parameters. Most of these parameters are already set correctly. At the prompt for Client IP Address, enter the SBC IP address. At the prompt for Server IP Address, enter the OC IP address. The SBC NIOT Settings table lists the correct SBC NIOT settings for the RP subsystem.
11112
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 114611 NIOT Settings

TABLE 113 NIOT SETTINGS
PARAMETER Controller LUN Device LUN Node Control Memory Address *Client IP Address *Server IP Address Subnet IP Address Mask Broadcast IP Address Gateway IP Address Boot File Name Argument File Name Boot File Load Address Boot File Execution Address Boot File Execution Delay Boot File Length Boot File Byte Offset BOOT/RARP Request Retry TFTP/ARP Request Retry Trace Character Buffer Address BOOT/RARP Request Control BOOT/RARP Reply Update Control 114612 Motorola MVME167 Board (SBC) Jumper Settings D General Purpose Readable Jumpers (J1)
VALUE 00 00 00000000 0.0.0.0* 0.0.0.0* 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0 NULL NULL 10000 10000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00 00 00000000 W Y
The SBC can be configured with readable jumpers that can read as a register (at 0xFFF40088) in the VMEchip2 LCSR. MVME167Bug uses these bits. The bit values are read as a 1 when the jumper is off, and a 0 when the jumper is on. D System Controller Jumper (J2)
The SBC is the system controller. The system controller function is enabled and disabled by jumpers on header J2. When the SBC is the system controller, the SCON LED is lighted. The VMEchip2 is configured as system controller. D Serial Port 4 Clock Configuration Select (J6 and J7)
Serial port 4 can be configured to use clock signals from the RTXC4 and TRXC4 signal lines. Headers J6 and J7 configure serial port 4 to drive or receive RTXC4 and TRXC4. The correct configuration is with port4 set to receive both signals.
11113

ILLUSTRATION 1156 MOTOROLA MVME167 BOARD (SBC)
11114
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 1147 11471 Motorola MVME166 Board
Motorola MVME166 Board Jumper Settings D Processor Module J2= SCSI Termination Power (IN)
(12 OUT, else IN) J3= General Purpose IO (IN) (35, 46 IN) (Dont Care) J6= VME System Controller J7= SRAM Power Control J10= VSBchip2 Arbitration Select F1= +12 Volt Power Fuse F2= SCSI Termination Power F3= 12 Volt Power Fuse F4= +5 Volt Power Fuse D Transition Module J6= Keyboard/Mouse Select J12= Serial J13= Port J14= Module J15= Select
(IN) (23 IN) (23 IN) (23 IN) (23 IN)
11115

ILLUSTRATION 1157 MOTOROLA MVME166 BOARD
11116
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 1148 Scan Chassis Backplane Jumpers
Illustration 1158 shows the slot assignments for the SCU scan chassis and the location of the backplane jumpers. The configuration and description for these jumpers are shown in Illustration 1159.
ILLUSTRATION 1158 SCAN CHASSIS BACKPLANE
VME Backplane (front view)
SLOT ASSIGNMENTS A1 SUN 3/60 SBC A2 CLA

A3 XYLOGICS CONTROLLER
SLOT
A1
A2
A3
A4
Note: Shaded connectors indicate occupancy by the assigned board.
11117
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 1149 11491 RP 1.x Scan Chassis Backplane Backplane Test Points None 11492 Backplane LEDs None 11493 Backplane Switches None 11494 Backplane Configuration
Configuring the backplane consists of jumpering the bus grant and IACK headers and mounting the SCSI active/passive voltage source jumper. The jumpers are installed at the factory and no additional configuration is necessary. The appropriate settings for the RP subsystem are given in this section for troubleshooting purposes. 11495 Backplane Jumper Settings D Bus Grant and IACK Jumpers The bus grant and IACK headers are jumpered for slots 4, 5, and 9. These jumpers are not installed for any other slots. The board layout diagram shows a partial view of the backplane with the correct jumper settings. D SCSI Active/Passive Voltage Source
The SCSI Active/Passive Voltage Source header determines the type of SCSI termination used between the backplane and the local SCSI drive. The board layout diagram shows the correct jumper setting to select active termination.
11118

ILLUSTRATION 1159 BACKPLANE, RP ORIGINAL SLOTS 4, 5, AND 9 JUMPERS
BG0 SLOT 9 JUMPERS S8 S9

CBA 1 BG0 CBA 1 BG0 BG1 BG2 BG3
SLOT 5 JUMPERS S7
CBA 1 BG0 BG1 BG2 BG3
SLOT 4 JUMPERS S3
CBA 1 1 BG0 BG1 BG2 BG3 BG0 BG1 BG2 BG3
BG1
S6
S5
CBA 1 BG0 BG1
S4
CBA
S2
S1
CBA 1
BG2
BG1 BG2 BG3
P1
BG2 BG3
IACK
IACK
IACK
IACK
IACK
IACK
IACK
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
IACK
BG3
32
IACK
SCSI ACTIVE PASSIVE VOLTAGE SOURCE
SCSI ACTIVE/PASSIVE VOLTAGE SOURCE JUMPER
VME Backplane Jumper Configuration Original RP Subsystem
11119

ILLUSTRATION 1160 BACKPLANE SLOTS 3, 4, AND 5 JUMPERS
BG0 SLOT 5 JUMPERS BG1 S10 S9

CBA
SLOT 3 SLOT 4 JUMPERS JUMPERS S3

CBA 1
S8
CBA 1 BG0 BG0 BG1 BG2 BG3
S7
S6
S5
CBA
S4
CBA
S2
CBA 1 BG0 BG1 BG2 BG3 BG0 BG1 BG2 BG3
S1
CBA 1
BG0 BG1
BG0 BG1 BG2 BG3
BG2
BG1 BG2 BG3
P1
BG2 BG3
IACK
IACK
IACK
IACK
IACK
IACK
IACK
32
32
32
32
32
IACK
BG3
32
IACK
SCSI ACTIVE PASSIVE VOLTAGE SOURCE
SCSI ACTIVE/PASSIVE VOLTAGE SOURCE JUMPER
VME Backplane Jumper Configuration RP-S Subsystem
11120
RP & RPS Scan Chassis Power Supply Jumpers and Settings Illustration 1161, 1162 shows jumpers and Adjustments for the SCU scan chassis power supply.
ILLUSTRATION 1161 RP SCAN CHASSIS POWER SUPPLIES
5 VDC OUTPUT TERMINALS
GROUND
Power Supply Assembly DC and AC Terminals 1000-Watt Power Supply
11121
V4
J1
LINE (LABELED NEUT)
1/0 (ON/OFF SWITCH)
REC
V3
LINE
TB2
V2
+V3
+V4
V3
TERMINAL BLOCK 2
+V2
V2
V1 + V1
V1 RTN TB1
VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT POTENTIOMETERS

ILLUSTRATION 1162 RPS SCAN CHASSIS POWER SUPPLIES
5 VDC OUTPUT TERMINALS
V1
V1 RTN
TERMINAL BLOCK 2 GROUND LINE (LABELED NEUT) LINE

TB2 +
VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT POTENTIOMETERS
1/0 (ON/OFF SWITCH)

Power Supply Assembly DC and AC Terminals 500-Watt Power Supply
11122
REC
V1 V4 V2 J1 V3 TB1
+V2 V2 +V3 V3 +V4 V4
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 1151 SBC Jumper Settings
Illustration 1163 shows jumper and settings for the Sun 3/60 SBC.
ILLUSTRATION 1163 3/60 SBC JUMPER LOCATIONS AND SETTINGS
Keyboard Diagnostic LEDs Norm/Diag switch Memory Jumpers Ethernet/Thin Ethernet Jumper High Resolution Jumper
J800
Ethernet
Serial Port B
Serial Port A
Memory Module Inserts SCSI
Mono
SUN 3/60 SBC J800

MEMORY, ETHERNET, AND RESOLUTION JUMPERS SUN 3/60 SBC 4MB Jumper here for 4MB or above memory size 8MB Jumper here for 8MB or above memory size 12MB Jumper here for 12MB or above memory size 16MB Jumper here for 16MB or above memory size 20MB Jumper here for 20MB or above memory size 24MB Jumper here for 24MB memory size EXTXUR Jumper in/out for Ethernet/Thin Ethernet respectively HIGHRES Jumper here for high resolution
11123
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 1152 11521 HSDC Controller Board HSDC Controller Board Test Points None 11522 HSDC Controller Board LEDs D Busy
The green LED lights when the HSDC is active. D Error
The yellow Error LED lights during powerup, and then goes off. If the LED remains on, or lights during operation, this denotes a fatal error. In self test loop mode, the Error LED lights for approximately 8 seconds and then goes off for approximately onehalf second with every pass of the self test. If an error occurs during the self test, this LED remains constantly amber without flashing. Self test loop mode is disabled for the RP subsystem as described under the heading Self Test Disable (JST). 11523 HSDC Controller Board Switch Settings The HSDC has no front panel switches or buttons. 11524 Internal Cable Connections The HSDC board has one 50pin shielded front panel connector (channel 0). It also has two 96position DIN connectors (P1 and P2). These pins carry the VMEbus interface signals. 11525 HSDC Controller Board Configuration Configuring the high speed disk controller consists of circuit board jumper configuration. The appropriate settings for the RP subsystem are given in this section. D Board Labels/Revision Control
The Xylogics SV6800 HSDC has a revision control label. The revision label is important when discussing configuration issues. 11526 HSDC Controller Board Jumper Settings D Base Address Selection (JB2) Jumper block JB2 controls the base address. Inserting a jumper makes the HSDC respond to zero on that address line: removing a jumper makes the HSDC respond to a one. Connect the jumper between similar pin numbers on each block. The HSDC uses bits 1 through 3 to determine which register is being accessed. The HSDC is an A16 slave, and responds to address modifier 0x2D, and optionally to 0x29. D Bus Request and Bus Grant Lines (JB3, JB4, JB5)
11124
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 The HDSC used the Bus Request and Bus Grant Lines to become bus master. In VMEbus arbitration, there are four Bus Request/Grant levels 0 through 3. The HDSC drives one Bus Request line, according to the jumper scheme you choose. The arbiter responds by driving the associated Bus Grant In Line (i.e. BG0IN responds to BR0). If the HSDC receives a Bus Grant on any of the Bus Grant In Lines (BG0IN through BG3IN), and is not requesting the bus on that line, it passes the grant to the appropriate Bus Grant Out Line (BG0OUT through BG3OUT). Select a request level by jumpering one bus request (BR0 through BR3), one Bus Grant In, and one Bus Grant Out line to match the selected request level. Jumper the remaining Bus Grant In/Out lines so that the incoming signal phases through the board (for example, jumper BGxIN to BGxOUT, where x represents the remaining grant levels). D Parallel Arbitration (JB4, JB5)
If you are using the HSDC in parallel arbitration, and the Bus Grant Out lines must be isolated from the next slots Bus Grant lines, remove all jumpers between JB4 and JB5. The RP subsystem does not use parallel arbitration. D Self Test Disable (JST)
When jumper JST is installed, the HSDC operates in normal mode. On powerup, the controller executes one pass of the self test diagnostic and then enters normal mode. When the jumper is out, the controller operates in a self test loop mode. Check to ensure that the jumper is in. D ACFail Enable (JAC)
When jumper JAC is installed, the HSDC supports the ACFail* line as defined in the VMEbus specification. If the ACFail* line is asserted, the HSDC halts disk activity, sets the Fatal Error bit in the CSR, and reports an 0xF6 error code in the Fatal Error Register. The factory configuration is out.
11125

ILLUSTRATION 1164 HSDC CONTROLLER BOARD
11126

ILLUSTRATION 1165 XYLOGICS DISK CONTROLLER SWITCH AND JUMPER SETTINGS
Jumper Block JA
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4
Selects base address of EE40
Jumper Blocks JB, JC & JD

Bus Request 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Bus Grant/Out 1 2 3 4 Bus Grant/In 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 level 0 1 2 3
JB
Selects Bus Request level 3 Selects NO Parallel Arbitration
JC
JD
Jumper Block JE
2 1 4 3
Selects unrestricted use of Maintenance Mode Selects to execute 754 selftest on powerup
11127

ILLUSTRATION 1166 SCSI Disk Drive Assembly in RP-S Subsystem SCSI I/O AND DC POWER CONNECTORS ON BACK OF DRIVES
HANG THESE OPENINGS OVER BOLTS
FRONT OF SCSI HSD DRIVE
FRONT OF LSD DRIVE
DISK DRIVE PLATE DISK DRIVE MOUNTING BRACKET
THUMB SCREWS SCSI Disk Drive Assembly in RP-S Subsystem
1153
Scan Chassis Disks
11128
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 1154 11541 ST3390 LSD Drive ST3390 LSD Test Points None 11542 ST3390 LSD LEDs None 11543 ST3390 LSD Switch Settings None 11544 Internal Cable Connections
The Local SCSI disk has two connectors, which are visible only when the disk mounting plate has been pulled from the RP Subsystem chassis. Connector D D 11545 J3 J4 Type 4pin Description DC power connector. Connects LSD to power supply.
50pin I/O connector. Connects disk to SBC.
ST3390 LSD Drive Configuration The Seagate ST3390N LSD has a product label affixed to the bottom of the disk and two bar code labels affixed to the side of the disk. These labels are important when discussing configuration issues. The product label shows the model number Seagate ST3390N. The top bar code label is the serial number of the disk; for example, CV3398745. The lower bar code label is the configuration part number for the local SCSI disk. For the RP subsystem, this number is 917004001.
11546
ST3390 LSD Drive Jumper Settings D Parity Enable Option (J12) When a jumper is installed on pins 1 and 2 of the options jumper block (J12), the parity block is used. Check to ensure that a jumper is installed here. D Start/Stop Option (J12)
When a jumper is installed on pins 3 and 4 of the options jumper block(J12), the drive waits for a start/atop unit command from the host before starting or stopping the spindle motor. Check to ensure that this jumper is not installed. D SCSI Address (J5)
Each device on the SCSI must have a unique SCSI ID. Because the SBC controls only one SCSI drive, use SCSI ID0 (no jumper installed). When selecting the SCSI ID, you can install jumpers on either (not both) the SCSI ID jumper block (J5) or the user configuration jumper block (J8) pins 1 through 6. However, since the SCSI ID for the LSD is 0, neither of these jumper blocks has jumpers installed.
11129
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 Terminator Power Source (J6)
To select the terminator power source, install jumpers on the terminator power source jumper block. The RP subsystem provides terminator power to the SCSI connector and the drive terminator packs. Check to ensure that jumpers are installed on pins 1 and 2 and pins 3 and 4 of J6 for this configuration. D Active/Passive Termination (J9)
Installing a jumper on pins 1 and 2 of the active/passive termination jumper block selects active termination. The terminating resistor packs must also be present. Check to ensure that both the jumper and the three resistor packs are present.
ILLUSTRATION 1167 LSD (3390) DRIVE SWITCHES AND JUMPERS
11130

ILLUSTRATION 1168 ST5660N Local SCSI Disk Jumpers and Connectors PRODUCT LABEL (ON TOP OF DISK) J8 (SEE FRONT VIEW)
BAR CODE LABEL (ON SIDE OF DISK)
J5 AUXILIARY SELECTION FOR SCSI ID (DO NOT USE)
SCSI I/O CONNECTOR (PIN 1) DC POWER CONNECTOR BOTTOM/BACK VIEW BAR CODE LABEL J8 PIN LABEL
J8 (PIN 1) 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26
(JUMPERS ON PINS 28 AND 30 AND PINS 32 AND 34 ARE SPARES) 28 30 32 34
11
13 15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
FRONT VIEW
ST5660N Local SCSI Disk Jumpers and Connectors 1155 11551 IPI High Speed Disk High Speed Disk Test Points None 11552 High Speed Disk LEDs The high speed disk controller has one activity LED (not visible when the cabinet front panel is in place). The activity indicator LED is green. It flashes during powerup, then lights when the disk is accessed.
11131
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 11553 High Speed Disk Switch Settings None 11554 High Speed Disk LEDS
The High speed disk controller has one activity LED (not visible when the cabinet front panel is in place). The activity indicator LED is green. It flashes during powerup; then lights when the disk is accessed. 11555 High Speed Disk Switch Settings None 11556 Internal Cable Connections The High Speed disk has three connectors, which are visible only when the disk mounting plate has been pulled from the RP Subsystem chassis. Connector D D D 11557 J15 J31 J32 Type 4pin Description DC power connector. Connects HSD to power supply.
50pin Port A I/O connector. Not used. 50pin Port B I/O connector. Connects disk to HSDC.
High Speed Disk Configuration Configuring the high speed disk consists of circuit board jumper configuration. The appropriate settings for the RP subsystem are given in this section. Disk Label/Revision Control The Seagate ST41800K high speed disk has a revision control label affixed to the side of the disk drive. The revision level is important when discussing configuration issues. The label includes the following information:
Serial Number is different for each disk. Model Number for the RP subsystem is ST41800K. Download Code Revision Number. Part Number for the RP subsystem is 990005001. Lot Number. For example, M0193516.
11558
High Speed Disk Jumper Settings CAUTION: DO NOT REMOVE CIRCUIT BOARDS TO SET JUMPERS.
11132
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 11559 I/O Board Jumpers D
Master/Slave Jumper
Placing a plug in the master/slave jumper establishes the drive as a master. Removing the plug establishes the drive as a slave. Be sure that this plug is installed. D Local/Remote Jumper
Removing the plug from the local/remote jumper establishes the drive as a local drive and disk spin up starts (after a delay) when power is applied. Placing a plug in the jumper establishes the drive as a remote. Be sure that this plug is removed. D Disable Read/Write Diagnostics Jumper
Removing the plug from the disable read/write diagnostics jumper enables the internal diagnostic program to perform read and write operations. Placing a plug in the jumper prevents the internal diagnostic program from doing so. Be sure that this jumper is removed. D Microcode ID Jumpers
The microcode ID jumpers assign a unique device configuration code. The setting shown is for 1,986 Mbyte drives. 115510 Control Board Jumpers D Enable Sweep Only On Seeks Jumpers (J12) When a plug is installed on the Enable Sweep Only on Seeks Jumper, each sweep segment is part of a controllerdriven direct seek. This is the factory setting, do not change this setting. D Sweep Cycle Enable Jumper (J4B)
Placing a jumper on J4B enables sweep cycles at the drive level. If the jumper is removed, sweep cycles are disabled and the system must use sweep cycles enabled at the system or subsystem level. Be sure that this jumper is installed. D Write Protect, Disable Ports, and Unit Selectors Jumpers (J4A)
Normally, the Write Protect jumper is removed. Installing the jumper prevents writing to the drive. Be sure that the jumper is removed. The Disable Port Jumpers are not installed at the factory. Installing a jumper in Disable Port A or Disable Port B disables the port. Check to ensure that neither jumper is installed. D The Select Unit ID jumpers designate the ID of the system drive.
This is a 3bit binary number representing an integer value of 0 through 7. Be sure the unit ID is set to 0 (no jumpers installed).
11133

ILLUSTRATION 1169 IPI HIGH SPEED DISK
11134

ILLUSTRATION 1170 IPI HIGH SPEED DISK CONTROL BOARD JUMPERS
11135

ILLUSTRATION 1171 IPI HIGH SPEED DISK I/O BOARD JUMPERS
ILLUSTRATION 1172 IPI2 HIGH SPEED DRIVE SWITCHES
11136

ILLUSTRATION 1173 IPI-2 High Speed Disk I/O Board Jumpers (WYDX-2) MASTER/ SLAVE
LOCAL/ REMOTE
DISABLE R/W DIAGNOSTICS
MICROCODE ID 23 22 21 20
IPI-2 High Speed Disk I/O Board Jumpers (WYDX-2)
ILLUSTRATION 1174 IPI-2 High Speed Disk I/O Board Jumpers (WYDX-3) MASTER/ SLAVE LOCAL/ REMOTE DISABLE R/W DIAGNOSTICS
MICROCODE ID 23 22 21 20
IPI-2 High Speed Disk I/O Board Jumpers (WYDX-3)
11137

ILLUSTRATION 1175 IPI2 CONTROL BOARD JUMPERS
ILLUSTRATION 1176 IPI-2 High Speed Disk Control Board Jumpers (UYDX-2) J12 ENABLE SWEEP CYCLE
DISABLE PORT B
DISABLE PORT A
WRITE PROTECT
ID0 ID1 ID2
J4A
IPI-2 High Speed Disk Control Board Jumpers (UYDX-2)
UNIT SELECTORS
11138
CHAPTER 12 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES

Computer THE CIRCUIT BOARDS ARE VERY STATIC SENSITIVE!! Static sensitive components may be damaged if not handled in a static free environment. Take appropriate precautions (e.g. wear properly grounded wrist strap) when handling all boards.
Static Sensitive Devices
121
46282067P54 1/2 MAG Tape Controller System Shutdown: The system software must be shutdown (i.e., Unix is down) and the hardware must be powered down. 1. Starting at the applications level, press the UTILITIES button on the plasma display. Turn off the computer power and disconnect the system power cord. 2. Remove three (3) 1/4 turn fasteners from the Sun Computer front cover. These are located at the bottom of the front cover. 3. Remove Sun Computer front cover from the computer. 4. Remove Sun Computer Cable Tray. 5. Remove four (4) screws to GAI Bus Cover and then remove P1 connector from GAI card. Disconnect the GAI Serial Interface Cable and Plasma Cable. Avoid handling any delicate electronic components or touching any of the board traces.
6. Remove 4 screws attached to Sun Computers Cable Tray. 7. Use a 2 mm hex wrench to remove the hex screws at the top and the bottom of the board. 8. Push the top ejection lever up and the bottom ejection lever down to unseat the board from the backplane. 9. Slide the board out of the chassis and place in a staticfree environment. 10. Remove the Controller Board from the packing material and compare the jumper settings to the Illustration on page 1192. 11. Install into slot 8 using the instructions from Section 22, CIRCUIT BOARD INSTALLATION. 12. Connect the four I/O cables (items #3, #6, #7, #8) between Controller Board and Tape Drive Unit as indicated by cable labelling. 13. Remove backplane jumpers. 14. Continue setting up the Tape Drive Unit.
121
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 122 46269601P1 Computer Active Scsi Terminator
No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 123 46282067P37 Computer 16 MB Circuit Bd System Shutdown: The system software must be shutdown (i.e., Unix is down) and the hardware must be powered down. 1. Starting at the applications level, press the UTILITIES button on the plasma display. Turn off the computer power and disconnect the system power cord. 2. Remove three (3) 1/4 turn fasteners from the Sun Computer front cover. These are located at the bottom of the front cover. 3. Remove Sun Computer front cover from the computer. 4. Remove Sun Computer Cable Tray. Avoid handling any delicate electronic components or touching any of the board traces. Static Sensitive Devices 5. Remove 4 screws attached to Sun Computers Cable Tray. 6. Use a 2 mm hex wrench to remove the hex screws at the top and the bottom of the board. 7. Push the top ejection lever up and the bottom ejection lever down to unseat the board from the backplane. 8. Slide the board out of the chassis and place in a staticfree environment. 9. Compare the replacement board DIP switch or jumper settings with the defective board DIP switch and jumper settings. If necessary, set the DIP switches on the replacement board to match those on the defective board. Ensure that the front settings are positioned for board 0. 10. Push the replacement board into the chassis card guides until the board seats into the backplane connectors. The Component side of the board should face the right side of the cardcage. 11. If installing 16MB in slot 5 ensure that jumper setting on front panel is jumpered in a 0 Board position. If Board goes into slot 4 of Sun Computer ensure that front jumper selection of 16MB Board is jumpered to Board number 1 jumper position. 12. Use a 2mm hex wrench to secure the board to the chassis. 13. Reattach Sun Computer Cable Tray Cover. 14. Turn on Sun Computer and console. 15. Reinstall computer front cover.
122
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 124 46307090P1 Computer 1600 Watt PS
1. Turn off the Sun computer and then unplug the Genesis computer from the Genesis console. If computer is on and UNIX is running type SU root. Password is Genesis. You will get a root prompt then type SYNC and press Return. Then type SYNC again and press Return. Then type halt and press Return. In approximately 15 seconds the screen will return to the character prompt. 2. Remove the front cover from the Genesis computer. Remove three (3) 1/4 turn fasteners underneath the front end of the cover. 3. Loosen the screws that hold the Serial I/O Panel in place, remove the panel and set aside. 4. Loosen the screws that hold the power supply cover in place and remove the cover. Note that the screws are captive to the cover and cannot be removed completely.
CAUTION
Wait at least five minutes after turning off the system before disconnecting the power supply wires in the next step to let the power supply completely discharge. 5. Disconnect the wires from the system power supply. 6. Carefully slide the power supply tray out through the front of the cabinet. 7. Remove the four screws holding the power supply to the power supply tray. 8. Attach the replacement power supply to the power supply tray with four screws. 9. Carefully slide the power supply tray into position through the front of the cabinet, being careful to not get the power supply wires behind the supply. 10. Reconnect the wires to the power supply. 11. Reconnect the power supply ground strap on the rear of the cabinet. 12. Plug in the computer to the console, then turn on the console, and then turn on the computer. 13. Verify that the power supply voltages are within the tolerances listed in Table on the next page. If not replace the power supply.
TABLE 121 POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGES
Voltage +5 +12 5 12
Tolerance 4.95 to 5.05 11.76 to 12.24 4.9 to 5.1 11.76 to 12.24
Test Point +5V & 5 Studs TB2, +12 Analog TB2, 5.2 TB2, 12
14. Reattach the Power Supply Cover. 15. Put back the Serial I/O with cables. 16. Reattach the Sun computer front cover.
123
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 125 46282067P38 Computer 32 MB Circuit Bd System Shutdown:
The system software must be shutdown (i.e., Unix is down) and the hardware must be powered down. 1. Starting at the applications level, press the UTILITIES button on the plasma display. Turn off the computer power and disconnect the system power cord. 2. Remove three (3) 1/4 turn fasteners from the Sun Computer front cover. These are located at the bottom of the front cover. 3. Remove Sun Computer front cover from the computer. 4. Remove Sun Computer Cable Tray. Avoid handling any delicate electronic components or touching any of the board traces. Static Sensitive Devices 5. Remove 4 screws attached to Sun Computers Cable Tray. 6. Use a 2 mm hex wrench to remove the hex screws at the top and the bottom of the board. 7. Push the top ejection lever up and the bottom ejection lever down to unseat the board from the backplane. 8. Slide the board out of the chassis and place in a staticfree environment. 9. Compare the replacement board DIP switch or jumper settings with the defective board DIP switch and jumper settings. If necessary, set the DIP switches on the replacement board to match those on the defective board. Ensure that the front settings are positioned for board 0. 10. Push the replacement board into the chassis card guides until the board seats into the backplane connectors. The Component side of the board should face the right side of the cardcage. 11. Use a 2mm hex wrench to secure the board to the chassis. 12. Reattach Sun Computer Cable Tray Cover. 13. Turn on Sun Computer and console. 14. Reinstall computer front cover.
124
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 126 46282067P54 9 Track Mag Tape Controller (Optional) System Shutdown:
The system software must be shutdown (i.e., Unix is down) and the hardware must be powered down. 1. Starting at the applications level, press the UTILITIES button on the plasma display. Turn off the computer power and disconnect the system power cord. 2. Remove three (3) 1/4 turn fasteners from the Sun Computer front cover. These are located at the bottom of the front cover. 3. Remove Sun Computer front cover from the computer. 4. Remove four (4) cables from the 9 Track Controller Board. 5. Disconnect Sun Computer Cable Tray. Avoid handling any delicate electronic components or touching any of the board traces. 6. Remove 4 screws attached to Sun Computers Cable Tray. 7. Use a 2 mm hex wrench to remove the hex screws at the top and the bottom of the board. 8. Push the top ejection lever up and the bottom ejection lever down to unseat the board from the backplane. 9. Slide the board out of the chassis and place in a staticfree environment. 10. Push the top ejection lever up and the bottom ejection lever down to unseat the board from the backplane. 11. Push out on the two ejection levers to unseat the board from the backplane connectors (push the top lever up and the bottom lever down). 12. Slide the board out of the chassis and store in a staticfree environment. 13. Compare the replacement board DIP switch or jumper settings with the defective board DIP switch and jumper settings. If necessary, set the DIP switches on the replacement board to match those on the defective board. 14. Push the replacement board into the chassis card guides until the board seats into the backplane connectors. The Component side of the board should face the right side of the cardcage. 15. Use a 2mm hex wrench to secure the board to the chassis. 16. Reconnect 4 cables to Controller Board. Ensure that the cables coming from the 9 Track Tape Drive Unit are installed correctly. Cables A to A and B to B. 17. Reattach Sun Computer Cable Tray. 18. Turn on console and Sun Computer. 19. Reinstall front cover of Sun Computer.
125
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 127 46307090P24 Computer Backplane Circuit Bd
1. Shutdown systems applications using the system shutdown button under UTILITIES. If applications are not running and the system is at UNIX level, login as genesis and type haltSystem. This will bring the system to the boot prompt. 2. Remove the three (3) 1/4 turn screws from the bottom of the computer front cover. 3. Remove the computer front cover. 4. Remove the four (4) screws from the computer cable tray. 5. Remove the computer cable tray. 6. Turn the computer power OFF. 7. Remove the hex screw at the top and bottom of the board you are going to replace. Use ESD Precautions when handling all circuit boards!!! Static Sensitive Devices 8. Remove the board using the board ejectors and carefully slide it from the slot. 9. Compare jumper and DIP switch settings on the new board with the old one. Adjust settings to match the old one if necessary. 10. Install the new board into the slot with the components facing to the right of the board. Seat the board fully using caution not to bend the EMC/EMI tabs. 11. Install the hex screws in the top and bottom of the board. 12. Turn the computer power ON. Make sure the computer boots with no problems. (If not, recheck your work and troubleshoot problem.) 13. Using caution not to switch OFF the computer switch, replace the computer cable tray and front cover. 128 46307090P29 Computer I/O Cable, SCSI Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good service practices. 129 46307090P29 GAI Serial Cable Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good service practices.
126
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 1210 46301975P1 CIPRICO Controller Bd
No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 1211 46282067P31 CPU Circuit Bd, Computer System Shutdown: The system software must be shutdown (i.e., Unix is down ) and the hardware must be powered down. 1. Starting at the applications level, press the UTILITIES button on the plasma display. Turn off the computer power and disconnect the system power cord. 2. Remove three (3) 1/4 turn fasteners from the Sun Computer front cover. These are located at the bottom of the front cover. 3. Remove Sun Computer front cover from the computer. Avoid handling any delicate electronic components or touching any of the board traces. Static Sensitive Devices 4. Remove 4 screws attached to Sun Computers Cable Tray and disconnect Sun Computer Cable Tray. 5. Remove the ethernet cable. 6. Use a 2 mm hex wrench to remove the hex screws at the top and the bottom of the board. 7. Push the top ejection lever up and the bottom ejection lever down to unseat the board from the backplane. 8. Push out on the two ejection levers to unseat the board from the backplane connectors (push the top lever up and the bottom lever down). 9. Slide the board out of the chassis and store in a static free environment. 10. Compare the replacement board DIP switch or jumper settings with the defective board DIP switch and jumper settings. If necessary, set the DIP switches on the replacement board to match those on the defective board. 11. Push the replacement board into the chassis card guides until the board seats into the backplane connectors. The Component side of the board should face the right side of the cardcage. 12. Take the ID Prom from the defective board and insert it into new board at location U1907. Be sure to match the pin 1 indicator (usually a small dot or indentation at one end of the chip) with the indentation on the socket. 13. Secure the board to the chassis with two hex screws using a 2mm hex wrench. 14. Reconnect the ethernet cable. 15. Ensure Diag/Normal Switch on front of CPU Board is in the normal position. 16. Reattach Sun Computer Cable Tray. 17. Turn on Sun Computer. 18. Reinstall front cover of Sun Computer
127
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 19. Depress L1 and A key at the same time i.e., you will see the prom monitor level i.e., >. 20. Enter Q and hit return. 21. Press [Spacebar] and it will return you to prom monitor level. 22. Boot UNIX, i.e., type b then return.
Note:
Have Unix running but not applications at this point. Approximately in a minute you will be prompted, Do you want System to Autoboot ? Type in NO and press return. 23. Log in as root, password is Genesis. 24. Type in Add OD and answer the questions. 25. Reinstall Front Cover. If Caution is not taken, the optical disk will not operate.
CAUTION
1212 46282067P34 GAI Circuit Bd System Shutdown: The system software must be shutdown (i.e., Unix is down) and the hardware must be powered down. 1. Starting at the applications level, press the UTILITIES button on the plasma display. Turn off the computer power and disconnect the system power cord. 2. Remove three (3) 1/4 turn fasteners from the Sun Computer front cover. These are located at the bottom of the front cover. 3. Remove Sun Computer front cover from the computer. 4. Remove Sun Computer Cable Tray. 5. Remove four (4) screws to GAI Bus Cover and then remove P1 connector from GAI card. Disconnect the GAI Serial Interface Cable and Plasma Cable. Avoid handling any delicate electronic components or touching any of the board traces. Static Sensitive Devices 6. Remove 4 screws attached to Sun Computers Cable Tray. 7. Use a 2 mm hex wrench to remove the hex screws at the top and the bottom of the board. 8. Push the top ejection lever up and the bottom ejection lever down to unseat the board from the backplane. 9. Slide the board out of the chassis and place in a staticfree environment. 10. Compare the replacement board DIP switch or jumper settings with the defective board DIP switch and jumper settings. If necessary, set the DIP switches on the replacement board to match those on the defective board.
128
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 11. Push the replacement board into the chassis card guides until the board seats into the backplane connectors. The Component side of the board should face the right side of the cardcage. 12. Secure the board to the chassis with two hex screws using a 2mm hex wrench. 13. Reconnect P1 GAI Bus Cable, Plasma Cable and GAI Serial Interface Cable. 14. Reattach GAI Bus Cable Cover. 15. Reattach Sun Computer Cable Tray Cover. 16. Turn on Sun Computer and console. 17. Reinstall computer front cover.
1213
46321280G1 GBM Circuit Bd (New Style) System Shutdown: The system software must be shutdown (i.e., Unix is down ) and the hardware must be powered down. 1. Starting at the applications level, press the UTILITIES button on the plasma display. Turn off the computer power and disconnect the system power cord. 2. Remove three (3) 1/4 turn fasteners from the Sun Computer front cover. These are located at the bottom of the front cover. 3. Remove Sun Computer front cover from the computer. 4. Disconnect Sun Computer Cable Tray. 5. Disconnect GAI Bus Cover. 6. Disconnect P2 Bus Cable from Frame Buffer. 7. Label and disconnect any video BNC connections on Frame Buffer Board. 8. Push the top ejection lever up and the bottom ejection lever down to unseat the board from the backplane. 9. Push out on the two ejection levers to unseat the board from the backplane connectors (push the top lever up and the bottom lever down). 10. Slide the board out of the chassis and store in a staticfree environment. 11. Compare the replacement board DIP switch or jumper settings with the defective board DIP switch and jumper settings. If necessary, set the DIP switches on the replacement board to match those on the defective board. 12. Push the replacement board into the chassis card guides until the board seats into the backplane connectors. The Component side of the board should face the right side of the cardcage. 13. Use a 2mm hex wrench to secure the board to the chassis. 14. Reattach Sun Computer Cable Tray. 15. Turn on console and Sun Computer. 16. Reinstall front cover of Sun Computer.
129
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 1214 46282067P35 GFB Circuit Bd System Shutdown:
The system software must be shutdown (i.e., Unix is down ) and the hardware must be powered down. 1. Starting at the applications level, press the UTILITIES button on the plasma display. Turn off the computer power and disconnect the system power cord. 2. Remove three (3) 1/4 turn fasteners from the Sun Computer front cover. These are located at the bottom of the front cover. 3. Remove Sun Computer front cover from the computer. 4. Disconnect Sun Computer Cable Tray. 5. Disconnect GAI Bus Cover. 6. Disconnect P2 Bus Cable from Frame Buffer. 7. Label and disconnect any video BNC connections on Frame Buffer Board. 8. Push the top ejection lever up and the bottom ejection lever down to unseat the board from the backplane. 9. Push out on the two ejection levers to unseat the board from the backplane connectors (push the top lever up and the bottom lever down). 10. Slide the board out of the chassis and store in a staticfree environment. 11. Compare the replacement board DIP switch or jumper settings with the defective board DIP switch and jumper settings. If necessary, set the DIP switches on the replacement board to match those on the defective board. 12. Push the replacement board into the chassis card guides until the board seats into the backplane connectors. The Component side of the board should face the right side of the cardcage. 13. Use a 2mm hex wrench to secure the board to the chassis. 14. Reattach Sun Computer Cable Tray. 15. Reconnect P2 Bus Cable to Frame Buffer Board. 16. Install GAI Bus Cover. 17. Reinstall Video BNC Cables to Frame Buffer Board. 18. Turn on console and Sun Computer. 19. Reinstall front cover of Sun Computer.
1210
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 1215 46282067P36 GIP Circuit Bd System Shutdown:
The system software must be shutdown (i.e., Unix is down ) and the hardware must be powered down. 1. Starting at the applications level, press the UTILITIES button on the plasma display. Turn off the computer power and disconnect the system power cord. 2. Remove three (3) 1/4 turn fasteners from the Sun Computer front cover. These are located at the bottom of the front cover. 3. Remove Sun Computer front cover from the computer. 4. Locate the slot of the defective board. 5. Remove four (4) screws attached to the Sun Computers Cable Tray. 6. Push the top ejection lever up and the bottom ejection lever down to unseat the board from the backplane. 7. Push out on the two ejection levers to unseat the board from the backplane connectors (push the top lever up and the bottom lever down). 8. Slide the board out of the chassis. 9. 9.Compare the replacement board DIP switch or jumper settings with the defective board DIP switch and jumper settings. If necessary, set the DIP switches on the replacement board to match those on the defective board. 10. Push the replacement board into the chassis card guides until the board seats into the backplane connectors. The Component side of the board should face the right side of the cardcage. 11. Use a 2mm hex wrench to secure the board to the chassis. 12. Reattach Sun Computer Cable Tray. 13. Turn on console and Sun Computer. 14. Reinstall front cover of Sun Computer. 1216 46296604P1 Computer Second ETHERNET Circuit Bd System Shutdown: The system software must be shutdown (i.e., Unix is down ) and the hardware must be powered down. 1. Starting at the applications level, press the UTILITIES button on the plasma display. Turn off the computer power and disconnect the system power cord. 2. Remove three (3) 1/4 turn fasteners from the Sun Computer front cover. These are located at the bottom of the front cover. 3. Remove Sun Computer front cover from the computer. 4. Remove ethernet cable from ethernet board. 5. Remove Sun Computer Cable Tray Cover.
1211
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 Avoid handling any delicate electronic components or touching any of the board traces.
6. Remove 4 screws attached to Sun Computers Cable Tray. 7. Use a 2 mm hex wrench to remove the hex screws at the top and the bottom of the board. 8. Push the top ejection lever up and the bottom ejection lever down to unseat the board from the backplane. 9. Slide the board out of the chassis and place in a staticfree environment. 10. 10.Compare the replacement board DIP switch or jumper settings with the defective board DIP switch and jumper settings. If necessary, set the DIP switches on the replacement board to match those on the defective board. Ensure that the front settings are positioned for board 0. 11. Push the replacement board into the chassis card guides until the board seats into the backplane connectors. The Component side of the board should face the right side of the cardcage. 12. Secure the board to the chassis with two hex screws using a 2mm hex wrench. 13. Reconnect Ethernet Cable to Board. 14. Reattach Sun Computer Cable Tray Cover. 15. Turn on Sun Computer and console. 16. Reinstall Sun Computer front cover.
1217
46306519P1 DAT Tape Drive (5.25 inch) System Shutdown: The system software must be shutdown (i.e., Unix is down) and the hardware must be powered down. 1. Starting at the applications level, press the UTILITIES button on the plasma display. 2. Press the SHUTDOWN button on the plasma display. A popup message appears on the screen asking Really shut the scanner down? Press the YES button to shut down the scanner. Wait 15 to 30 seconds and Unix will halt itself and you will notice the prom monitor level, i.e. >. 3. Turn the console and computer off. The defective tape drive is located on the SCSI tray inside of the computer. To remove this tray proceed as follows: 4. Remove three (3) 1/4 turn fasteners from the Sun Computer front cover. These are located at the bottom of the front cover. 5. Remove Sun Computer front cover from the computer. 6. Remove the SCSI Tray faceplate by removing the two screws on the bottom of the faceplate.
1212
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 7. Remove all cables connected to Serial I/O Panel. 8. Loosen the screws that hold the Serial I/O Panel in place and remove the panel. Rotate the serial I/O panel down and out of the way with the cables still attached. Attach the antistatic wrist strap to your wrist and to a bare metal grounding point on the computer chassis before continuing. Permanent damage to the staticsensitive boards may occur if the wrist strap is not used. 9. Disconnect the SCSI Terminator, SCSI Interface Cable, and SCSI Tray Power Connector from the underside of the SCSI Tray and loosen the two captive screws. THE SCSI TRAY IS HEAVY AND ONCE THE SCREWS ARE LOOSENED, THE TRAY IS NOT ATTACHED TO THE COMPUTER IN ANY WAY. IN ADDITION, THE TRAY DOES NOT HAVE END STOPS. TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY OR SCSI TRAY DAMAGE, REMOVE THE TRAY SLOWLY, READJUSTING YOUR GRIP TO BALANCE THE TRAY EVERY FEW INCHES. FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. 10. Remove the SCSI tray from the computer by pulling the tray out. Remove DAT Tape Drive: 11. Place the SCSI Tray on its side and unfasten the screws that hold the DAT tape drive to the SCSI tray. Keep the screws for use later. 12. Slide tape drive forward a couple of inches and remove SCSI Cable and power cables from the DAT Tape Drive. 13. Slide the tape drive out from the tray. 14. Lay the SCSI Tray aside. DAT Tape Drive Installation: 15. Assemble replacement DAT drive as shown in adapter kit instructions (packaged with kit). 16. Set switch settings on bottom center of drive as follows: 17: ON, 8: OFF 17. Check rear jumper settings as shown. On rear of drive, remove term power jumper bit 1 (disables termination resistors). Ignore other jumpers. 18. Slide the tape drive back into the SCSI tray. 19. Connect the SCSI ribbon cable to the DAT tape drive.
WARNING
Note:
This side up for use with P51 DAT tape faces up. Connect the power cable, with the cable marked DAT to the tape drive. 20. Place the SCSI Tray on its side. Secure the tape drive to the SCSI tray with the same 4 mounting screws. 21. Reinstall the SCSI tray into the Sun computer. 22. Place SCSI Tray into Sun Computer.
1213
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 23. Connect SCSI Power Cable to SCSI Tray. 24. Reattach the Serial I/O Panel. 25. Reconnect SCSI Interface Cable and Terminator. 26. Tighten the 2 screws underneath the SCSI Tray. 27. Turn Sun Computer on. 28. Once power is returned to the system, check LEDs to verify the new DAT drive is operating properly.
1218
46306519P2 DAT Tape Drive (3.5) System Shutdown: Shutdown the system software (i.e., Unix is down) and power down the hardware. 1. Starting at the applications level, press the UTILITIES button on the plasma display. 2. Press the SHUTDOWN button on the plasma display. A popup message appears on the screen asking Really shut the scanner down? Press the YES button to shut down the scanner. Wait 15 to 30 seconds and Unix will halt itself and you will notice the prom monitor level, i.e. >. 3. Turn the console and computer off. The defective tape drive is located on the SCSI tray inside of the computer. To remove this tray proceed as follows: 4. Remove three (3) 1/4 turn fasteners from the Sun Computer front cover. These are located at the bottom of the front cover. 5. Remove Sun Computer front cover from the computer. 6. Remove the SCSI Tray faceplate by removing the two screws on the bottom of the faceplate.
1214
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 Remove the SCSI Tray: 7. Remove all cables connected to Serial I/O Panel. 8. Loosen the screws that hold the Serial I/O Panel in place and remove the panel. Rotate the serial I/O panel down and out of the way with the cables still attached. Attach the antistatic wrist strap to your wrist and to a bare metal grounding point on the computer chassis before continuing. Permanent damage to the staticsensitive boards may occur if the wrist strap is not used. 9. Disconnect the SCSI Terminator, SCSI Interface Cable, and SCSI Tray Power Connector from the underside of the SCSI Tray and loosen the two captive screws. THE SCSI TRAY IS HEAVY AND ONCE THE SCREWS ARE LOOSENED, THE TRAY IS NOT ATTACHED TO THE COMPUTER IN ANY WAY. IN ADDITION, THE TRAY DOES NOT HAVE END STOPS. TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY OR SCSI TRAY DAMAGE, REMOVE THE TRAY SLOWLY, READJUSTING YOUR GRIP TO BALANCE THE TRAY EVERY FEW INCHES. FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. 10. Remove the SCSI tray from the computer by pulling the tray out. Remove DAT Tape Drive: 1. Place the SCSI Tray on its side and unfasten the screws that hold the DAT tape drive to the SCSI tray. Keep the screws for use later. 2. Slide tape drive forward a couple of inches and remove SCSI Cable and power cables from the DAT Tape Drive. 3. Slide the tape drive out from the tray. 4. Lay the SCSI Tray aside.
WARNING
1215
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 DAT Tape Drive Installation: 1. Assemble replacement DAT drive as shown in adapter kit instructions (packaged with kit). 2. Set switch settings on bottom center of drive as follows: 17: ON, 8: OFF 3. Check rear jumper settings as shown. On rear of drive, remove term power jumper bit 1 (disables termination resistors). Ignore other jumpers. 4. Slide the tape drive back into the SCSI tray. 5. Connect the SCSI ribbon cable to the DAT tape drive. The side of the ribbon cable marked.
Note:
This side up for use with P51 DAT tape faces up. Connect the power cable, with the cable marked DAT to the tape drive. 6. Place the SCSI Tray on its side. Secure the tape drive to the SCSI tray with the same 4 mounting screws. 7. Reinstall the SCSI tray into the Sun computer. 8. Place SCSI Tray into Sun Computer. 9. Connect SCSI Power Cable to SCSI Tray. 10. Reattach the Serial I/O Panel. 11. Reconnect SCSI Interface Cable and Terminator. 12. Tighten the 2 screws underneath the SCSI Tray. 13. Turn Sun Computer on. 14. Once power is returned to the system, check LEDs to verify the new DAT drive is operating properly.
1219
46306519P2 DAT Drive (3.5 inch) System Shutdown: The system software must be shutdown (i.e., Unix is down) and the hardware must be powered down. 1. Starting at the applications level, press the UTILITIES button on the plasma display. 2. Press the SHUTDOWN button on the plasma display. A popup message appears on the screen asking Really shut the scanner down ? Press the YES button to shut down the scanner. Wait 15 to 30 seconds and Unix will halt itself and you will notice the prom monitor level, i.e. >. 3. Turn the console and computer off. The defective tape drive is located on the SCSI tray inside of the computer. To remove this tray proceed as follows: 4. Remove three (3) 1/4 turn fasteners from the Sun Computer front cover. These are located at the bottom of the front cover. 5. Remove Sun Computer front cover from the computer.
1216
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 6. Remove the SCSI Tray faceplate by removing the two screws on the bottom of the faceplate. Remove the SCSI Tray: 7. Remove all cables connected to Serial I/O Panel. 8. Loosen the screws that hold the Serial I/O Panel in place and remove the panel. Rotate the serial I/O panel down and out of the way with the cables still attached. Attach the antistatic wrist strap to your wrist and to a bare metal grounding point on the computer chassis before continuing. Permanent damage to the staticsensitive boards may occur if the wrist strap is not used. 9. Disconnect the SCSI Terminator, SCSI Interface Cable, and SCSI Tray Power Connector from the underside of the SCSI Tray and loosen the two captive screws. THE SCSI TRAY IS HEAVY AND ONCE THE SCREWS ARE LOOSENED, THE TRAY IS NOT ATTACHED TO THE COMPUTER IN ANY WAY. IN ADDITION, THE TRAY DOES NOT HAVE END STOPS. TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY OR SCSI TRAY DAMAGE, REMOVE THE TRAY SLOWLY, READJUSTING YOUR GRIP TO BALANCE THE TRAY EVERY FEW INCHES. FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. 10. Remove the SCSI tray from the computer by pulling the tray out. Remove DAT Tape Drive: 1. Place the SCSI Tray on its side and unfasten the screws that hold the DAT tape drive to the SCSI tray. Keep the screws for use later. 2. Slide tape drive forward a couple of inches and remove SCSI Cable and power cables from the DAT Tape Drive. 3. Slide the tape drive out from the tray. 4. Lay the SCSI Tray aside. DAT Tape Drive Installation: 1. Assemble replacement DAT drive as shown in adapter kit instructions (packaged with kit). 2. Set switch settings on bottom center of drive as follows: 17: ON, 8: OFF 3. Check rear jumper settings as shown. On rear of drive, remove term power jumper bit 1 (disables termination resistors). Ignore other jumpers. 4. Slide the tape drive back into the SCSI tray. 5. Connect the SCSI ribbon cable to the DAT tape drive. The side of the ribbon cable marked.
WARNING
Note:
This side up for use with P51 DAT tape faces up. Connect the power cable, with the cable marked DAT to the tape drive.
1217
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 6. Place the SCSI Tray on its side. Secure the tape drive to the SCSI tray with the same 4 mounting screws. 7. Reinstall the SCSI tray into the Sun computer. 8. Place SCSI Tray into Sun Computer. 9. Connect SCSI Power Cable to SCSI Tray. 10. Reattach the Serial I/O Panel. 11. Reconnect SCSI Interface Cable and Terminator. 12. Tighten the 2 screws underneath the SCSI Tray. 13. Turn Sun Computer on. 14. Once power is returned to the system, check LEDs to verify the new DAT drive is operating properly.
1220
46307090P12 Computer DC Power Cable Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good service practices.
1221
46307090P23 Computer Fan in Rack Drawer 1. Turn off the Sun computer and then unplug the Genesis computer from the Genesis console. If computer is on and UNIX is running type SU root. Password is Genesis. You will get a root prompt then type SYNC and press Return. Then type SYNC again and press Return. Then type halt and press Return. In approximately 15 to 30 seconds Unix will halt itself and you will notice the prom monitor level, i.e., >. 2. Remove the front cover from the Genesis computer. Remove three (3) 1/4 turn fasteners at the bottom front end of the cover. 3. Remove the Terminator and SCSI Cable from SCSI Tray. 4. Loosen the four captive screws that hold the Serial I/O Panel in place and remove the I/O Panel and set aside. 5. Disconnect the fan tray power connector. 6. Loosen the two screws that hold the fan tray in place and slide the tray out of the Sun computer. 7. Remove the two screws that hold the defective fan. Remove the power connector from the defective fan. 8. Remove defective fan. 9. Attach the replacement fan to the fan tray with the two (2) screws. Manufacturers label should be facing upward. 10. Connect the fan power connector to the replacement fan and attach the fan to the fan tray.
1218
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 11. Reinstall the fan tray into the Sun computer, attach it with the two captive screws and reconnect the Fan Tray Power Connector. 12. Attach the Serial I/O Panel. 13. Connect SCSI Interface Cable to SCSI tray and also Terminator. 14. Plug in Genesis computer to Console, turn on console, then computer, then verify if fan is working. Then put on front cover.
1222
46515270 LMO2 (3D Renderer) Board 1. Shutdown systems applications using the system shutdown button under UTILITIES. If applications are not running and the system is at UNIX level, login as genesis and type haltSystem. This will bring the system to the boot prompt. 2. Remove the three (3) 1/4 turn screws from the bottom of the computer front cover. 3. Remove the computer front cover. 4. Remove the four (4) screws from the computer cable tray. 5. Remove the computer cable tray. 6. Turn the computer power OFF. 7. Remove the hex screw at the top and bottom of the board you plan to replace. USE ESD PRECAUTIONS WHEN HANDLING ALL CIRCUIT BOARDS!!! 8. Remove the board using the board ejectors and carefully slide it from the slot. 9. Compare jumper and DIP switch settings on the new board with the old one. Adjust settings to match the old one if necessary. 10. Install the new board into the slot with the components facing to the right of the board. Seat the board fully using caution not to bend the EMC/EMI tabs. 11. Install the hex screws in the top and bottom of the board. 12. Turn the computer power ON. Make sure the computer boots with no problems. (If not, recheck your work and troubleshoot problem.) 13. Using caution not to switch OFF the computer switch, replace the computer cable tray and front cover.
WARNING
1219
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 1223 46320144G1 Motorola MVME166GE Board (OC CPU)
1. Shutdown systems applications using the system shutdown button under UTILITIES. If applications are not running and the system is at UNIX level, login as genesis and type haltSystem. This will bring the system to the boot prompt. 2. Remove the three (3) 1/4 turn screws from the bottom of the computer front cover. 3. Remove the computer front cover. 4. Remove the four (4) screws from the computer cable tray. 5. Remove the computer cable tray. 6. Turn the computer power OFF. 7. Remove the hex screw at the top and bottom of the board you are going to replace. ****** Use ESD Precautions when handling all circuit boards!!! ****** 8. Remove the board using the board ejectors and carefully slide it from the slot. 9. Compare jumper and DIP switch settings on the new board with the old one. Adjust settings to match the old one if necessary. 10. Install the new board into the slot with the components facing to the right of the board. Seat the board fully using caution not to bend the EMC/EMI tabs. 11. Install the hex screws in the top and bottom of the board. 12. Turn the computer power ON. Make sure the computer boots with no problems. (If not, recheck your work and troubleshoot problem.) 13. Using caution not to switch OFF the computer switch, replace the computer cable tray and front cover.
1220
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 1224 46269587P1 Mounting ST1980N Dual Disks
Replace a Disk Drive In The SCSI Tray: 1. Remove the SCSI tray from the cabinet. 2. Place the SCSI tray on its side and, while supporting the drive, unfasten the Phillips screws that hold the drive and mounting bracket to the SCSI tray. 3. Partially withdraw the drive from the tray, then remove the three cables from the rear of the drive. 4. Remove the drive from the tray. 5. Check the disk drive jumper configuration. 6. Install the replacement drive in the SCSI tray. 7. Attach the three cables to the rear of the drive. 8. Install the SCSI tray into the cabinet and attach it with the two screws. 9. Connect the SCSI tray power connector. 10. Install the Serial I/O Panel. 11. Connect all the cables to the Serial I/O Panel. 12. Connect the SCSI Interface cable. 13. Attach the cabinet front cover. 14. Plug in the system power cord and turn on the system power. 15. Reformat the disk and install the software. Return to ST1980N disk drive procedure.
1225
46307575P1 Pioneer DDU7001 Rewritable, MOD System Shutdown: The system software must be shut down (i.e., Unix is down) and the hardware must be powered down. 1. Starting at the applications level, press the UTILITIES button on the plasma display. 2. Press the SHUTDOWN button on the plasma display. A popup message appears on the screen asking Really shut the scanner down ? Press the YES button to shut down the scanner. Wait until you get to the prom monitor level, (i.e. > ). 3. Turn off the Sun computer and then unplug the Genesis computer from the Genesis console. If computer is on and UNIX is running type SU root. Password is Genesis. You will get a root prompt then type SYNC and press Return. Then type SYNC again and press Return. Then type halt and press Return. In about 15 seconds the screen returns to the character prompt. 4. Remove the front cover from the Genesis computer. Remove three (3) 1/4 turn fasteners at the front end of the cover.
1221
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 Remove the Tape Drive in the SCSI Tray (to access screws on optical drive): 1. Remove the SCSI tray from the cabinet. 2. Place the SCSI tray on its side and, while supporting the drive, remove the four Phillips screws that hold the drive to the SCSl tray. 3. Partially withdraw the drive from the tray, then remove the cables from the rear of the drive. 4. Remove the drive from the tray. Remove Optical Disk Drive Controller Board (if replacing WORM OD with MOD): 1. Disconnect the cables from the Optical Disk Controller Board and loosen the three screws. 2. Remove the Controller Board. 3. Remove the metal plate and standoffs which rest underneath the Optical Disk Controller. They will no longer be needed. Remove the Optical Disk Drive (if replacing WORM OD with MOD): These steps in this section are not necessary if WORM OD does not exist in computer. 1. Disconnect the cables from the Optical Disk Drive and loosen the four screws (two on each side of the Optical Disk Drive). 2. Remove the Optical Disk. 3. Remove Front cover plate inside lower half of opening by removing two screws (one on each side of cover plate). Route New Ribbon Cable/Remove Old Ribbon Cable (If replacing WORM OD with MOD): These steps in this section are not necessary if WORM OD does not exist in computer. 1. Position new ribbon cable to match old ribbon cable route. 2. Remove old ribbon cable. 3. Install new ribbon cable. Install MOD Drive: 1. Remove two SCSI Terminating Resistors from bottom of drive (look like PROMs). 2. Set the SCSI ID Switch Settings. 3. Set Drive Select Jumpers to OFF (lower positions) on rear of drive. 4. Position new MOD Drive between brackets where old Optical Disk Drive was installed. Push the drive through the brackets and through the opening in the front of the tray (FROM THE INSIDE OUT) until the threaded holes in the drive are centered in the slotted holes of the brackets. This should leave 1/8 inch of the drive extending through the front of the tray, which will give the best fit to the bezel. Line up the lower two holes on each bracket with the holes on each side of the Drive. 5. Install screws and tighten. 6. Make one Power Harness connection to the MOD drive under the small cable at the back of the drive. It may be necessary to disconnect one end of the small ribbon cable, just while you are inserting the connector. Then make a second Power Harness connection next to the SCSI connector of the MOD drive.
1222
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 7. Attach the connector ends of the SCSI Ribbon Cable to the input and output ports in the bottom of the tray. Then, connect the ribbon cable to the MOD drive. Pay attention to the location of pin #1 and the colored edge of the cable on all three connectors. Reinstall Tape Drive and Reassemble Computer: 1. Reconnect cable ribbon and power cable. 2. Reinstall screws and tighten. 3. Make sure all peripherals are connected to the ribbon cable and respective power cables. 4. Reinstall SCSI tray. 5. Reassemble computer covers. 6. Power up computer. 7. Login as root on the OC: <suiteID>_OC0@login:root <enter> password:<default root password> <enter> 8. Load the HLFC tape into the tape drive. 9. Type addOD <enter> 10. After the addOD script runs, the software automatically reboots. 11. Bring up Applications to complete the MOD installation.
1226
46307575P4 Pioneer DEUH7101 Rewritable, MOD System Shutdown: The system software must be shut down (i.e., Unix is down) and the hardware must be powered down. 1. Starting at the applications level, press the UTILITIES button on the plasma display. 2. Press the SHUTDOWN button on the plasma display. A popup message appears on the screen asking Really shut the scanner down ? Press the YES button to shut down the scanner. Wait until you get to the prom monitor level, i.e. >. 3. Turn off the Sun computer and then unplug the Genesis computer from the Genesis console. If computer is on and UNIX is running type SU root. Password is Genesis. You will get a root prompt then type SYNC and press Return. Then type SYNC again and press Return. Then type halt and press Return. In approximately 15 seconds the screen will return to the character prompt. 4. Remove the front cover from the Genesis computer. Remove three (3) 1/4 turn fasteners at the front end of the cover.
1223
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 Remove the Tape Drive in the SCSI Tray (to access screws on optical drive): 1. Remove the SCSI tray from the cabinet. 2. Place the SCSI tray on its side and, while supporting the drive, remove the four Phillips screws that hold the drive to the SCSl tray. 3. Partially withdraw the drive from the tray, then remove the cables from the rear of the drive. 4. Remove the drive from the tray. Remove Optical Disk Drive Controller Board (if replacing WORM OD with MOD): 1. Disconnect the cables from the Optical Disk Controller Board and loosen the three screws. 2. Remove the Controller Board. 3. Remove the metal plate and standoffs which rest underneath the Optical Disk Controller. They will no longer be needed. Remove the Optical Disk Drive (if replacing WORM OD with MOD): These steps in this section are not necessary if WORM OD does not exist in computer. 1. Disconnect the cables from the Optical Disk Drive and loosen the four screws (two on each side of the Optical Disk Drive). 2. Remove the Optical Disk. 3. Remove Front cover plate inside lower half of opening by removing two screws (one on each side of cover plate). Route New Ribbon Cable/Remove Old Ribbon Cable (If replacing WORM OD with MOD): These steps in this section are not necessary if WORM OD does not exist in computer. 1. Position new ribbon cable to match old ribbon cable route. 2. Remove old ribbon cable. 3. Install new ribbon cable. Install MOD Drive: 1. Remove two SCSI Terminating Resistors from bottom of drive (look like PROMs). 2. Set the SCSI ID Switch Settings. 3. Set Drive Select Jumpers to OFF (lower positions) on rear of drive. 4. Position new MOD Drive between brackets where old Optical Disk Drive was installed. Push the drive through the brackets and through the opening in the front of the tray (FROM THE INSIDE OUT) until the threaded holes in the drive are centered in the slotted holes of the brackets. This should leave 1/8 inch of the drive extending through the front of the tray, which will give the best fit to the bezel. Line up the lower two holes on each bracket with the holes on each side of the Drive. 5. Install screws and tighten. 6. Make one Power Harness connection to the MOD drive under the small cable at the back of the drive. It may be necessary to disconnect one end of the small ribbon cable, just while you are inserting the connector. Then make a second Power Harness connection next to the SCSI connector of the MOD drive.
1224
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 7. Attach the connector ends of the SCSI Ribbon Cable to the input and output ports in the bottom of the tray. Then, connect the ribbon cable to the MOD drive. Pay attention to the location of pin #1 and the colored edge of the cable on all three connectors. Reinstall Tape Drive and Reassemble Computer: 1. Reconnect cable ribbon and power cable. 2. Reinstall screws and tighten. 3. Make sure all peripherals are connected to the ribbon cable and respective power cables. 4. Reinstall SCSI tray. 5. Reassemble computer covers. 6. Power up computer. 7. Login as root on the OC: <suiteID>_OC0@login:root <enter> password:<default root password> <enter> 8. Load the HLFC tape into the tape drive. 9. Type addOD <enter> 10. After the addOD script runs, the software automatically reboots. 11. Bring up Applications to complete the MOD installation.
1225
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 1227 46282067P34 GAI Circuit Bd System Shutdown:
The system software must be shutdown (i.e., Unix is down) and the hardware must be powered down. 1. Starting at the applications level, press the UTILITIES button on the plasma display. Turn off the computer power and disconnect the system power cord. 2. Remove three (3) 1/4 turn fasteners from the Sun Computer front cover. These are located at the bottom of the front cover. 3. Remove Sun Computer front cover from the computer. 4. Remove Sun Computer Cable Tray. 5. Remove four (4) screws to GAI Bus Cover and then remove P1 connector from GAI card. Disconnect the following cables: GAI Serial Interface Cable and Plasma Cable, Avoid handling any delicate electronic components or touching any of the board traces. Static Sensitive Devices 6. Remove 4 screws attached to Sun Computers Cable Tray. 7. Use a 2 mm hex wrench to remove the hex screws at the top and the bottom of the board. 8. Push the top ejection lever up and the bottom ejection lever down to unseat the board from the backplane. 9. Slide the board out of the chassis and place in a staticfree environment. 10. Compare the replacement board DIP switch or jumper settings with the defective board DIP switch and jumper settings. If necessary, set the DIP switches on the replacement board to match those on the defective board. 11. Push the replacement board into the chassis card guides until the board seats into the backplane connectors. The Component side of the board should face the right side of the cardcage. 12. Use a 2mm hex wrench to secure the board to the chassis. 13. Reconnect P1 GAI Bus Cable, Plasma Cable and GAI Serial Interface Cable. 14. Reattach GAI Bus Cable Cover. 15. Reattach Sun Computer Cable Tray Cover. 16. Turn on Sun Computer and console. 17. Reinstall computer front cover.
1226
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 1228 46307090P17 GBM Circuit Bd (Old Style) System Shutdown:
The system software must be shutdown (i.e., Unix is down ) and the hardware must be powered down. 1. Starting at the applications level, press the UTILITIES button on the plasma display. Turn off the computer power and disconnect the system power cord. 2. Remove three (3) 1/4 turn fasteners from the Sun Computer front cover. These are located at the bottom of the front cover. 3. Remove Sun Computer front cover from the computer. 4. Disconnect Sun Computer Cable Tray. 5. Disconnect GAI Bus Cover. 6. Disconnect P2 Bus Cable from Frame Buffer. 7. Label and disconnect any video BNC connections on Frame Buffer Board. 8. Push the top ejection lever up and the bottom ejection lever down to unseat the board from the backplane. 9. Push out on the two ejection levers to unseat the board from the backplane connectors (push the top lever up and the bottom lever down). 10. Slide the board out of the chassis and store in a staticfree environment. 11. Compare the replacement board DIP switch or jumper settings with the defective board DIP switch and jumper settings. If necessary, set the DIP switches on the replacement board to match those on the defective board. 12. Push the replacement board into the chassis card guides until the board seats into the backplane connectors. The Component side of the board should face the right side of the cardcage. 13. Use a 2mm hex wrench to secure the board to the chassis. 14. Reattach Sun Computer Cable Tray. 15. Turn on console and Sun Computer. 16. Reinstall front cover of Sun Computer.
1227
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 1229 46282067P35 GFB Circuit Bd System Shutdown:
The system software must be shutdown (i.e., Unix is down ) and the hardware must be powered down. 1. Starting at the applications level, press the UTILITIES button on the plasma display. Turn off the computer power and disconnect the system power cord. 2. Remove three (3) 1/4 turn fasteners from the Sun Computer front cover. These are located at the bottom of the front cover. 3. Remove Sun Computer front cover from the computer. 4. Disconnect Sun Computer Cable Tray. 5. Disconnect GAI Bus Cover. 6. Disconnect P2 Bus Cable from Frame Buffer. 7. Label and disconnect any video BNC connections on Frame Buffer Board. 8. Push the top ejection lever up and the bottom ejection lever down to unseat the board from the backplane. 9. Push out on the two ejection levers to unseat the board from the backplane connectors (push the top lever up and the bottom lever down). 10. Slide the board out of the chassis and store in a staticfree environment. 11. Compare the replacement board DIP switch or jumper settings with the defective board DIP switch and jumper settings. If necessary, set the DIP switches on the replacement board to match those on the defective board. 12. Push the replacement board into the chassis card guides until the board seats into the backplane connectors. The Component side of the board should face the right side of the cardcage. 13. Use a 2mm hex wrench to secure the board to the chassis. 14. Reattach Sun Computer Cable Tray. 15. Reconnect P2 Bus Cable to Frame Buffer Board. 16. Install GAI Bus Cover. 17. Reinstall Video BNC Cables to Frame Buffer Board. 18. Turn on console and Sun Computer. 19. Reinstall front cover of Sun Computer.
1228
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 1230 46282067P36 GIP Circuit Bd System Shutdown:
The system software must be shutdown (i.e., Unix is down ) and the hardware must be powered down. 1. Starting at the applications level, press the UTILITIES button on the plasma display. Turn off the computer power and disconnect the system power cord. 2. Remove three (3) 1/4 turn fasteners from the Sun Computer front cover. These are located at the bottom of the front cover. 3. Remove Sun Computer front cover from the computer. 4. Locate the slot of the defective board. 5. Remove four (4) screws attached to the Sun Computers Cable Tray. 6. Push the top ejection lever up and the bottom ejection lever down to unseat the board from the backplane. 7. Push out on the two ejection levers to unseat the board from the backplane connectors (push the top lever up and the bottom lever down). 8. Slide the board out of the chassis. 9. 9.Compare the replacement board DIP switch or jumper settings with the defective board DIP switch and jumper settings. If necessary, set the DIP switches on the replacement board to match those on the defective board. 10. Push the replacement board into the chassis card guides until the board seats into the backplane connectors. The Component side of the board should face the right side of the cardcage. 11. Use a 2mm hex wrench to secure the board to the chassis. 12. Reattach Sun Computer Cable Tray. 13. Turn on console and Sun Computer. 14. Reinstall front cover of Sun Computer. 1231 CG29515270 LMO2 Bd (Mother & Daughter) No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices.
1229
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 1232 46307090P31 Power Indicator and Cable
1. Turn off the Sun computer and then unplug the Genesis computer from the Genesis console. If computer is on and UNIX is running type SU root. Password is Genesis. You will get a root prompt then type SYNC and press Return. Then type SYNC again and press Return. Then type halt and press Return. In approximately 15 seconds the screen will return to the character prompt. 2. Remove the front cover from the Genesis computer. Remove three (3) 1/4 turn fasteners at the bottom front end of the cover. 3. Remove the Serial I/O Panel and set aside. 4. Loosen the two (2) screws that hold the power supply cover in place and remove the cover. Note that the screws are captive to the cover and cannot be removed completely. 5. Remove the two (2) wires of defective power indicator from the Sun computer power supply terminal strip. 6. Remove the light from the power supply cover. NOTE: This light is press fitted to cover. 7. Install the new power indicator in the power supply cover. 8. Attach the two wires to the Sun computer power supply terminal strip.
1233
46307636G1 Cable, SCSI Harness No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices.
1234
46328012P1 Cable, SCSI Ribbon No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices.
1235
2101566 Cable, SCSI Ribbon No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices.
1230
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 1236 46307681P1 SCSI Tray Fan
1. Turn off the Sun computer and then unplug the Genesis computer from the Genesis console. If computer is on and UNIX is running type SU root. Password is Genesis. You will get a root prompt then type SYNC and press Return. Then type SYNC again and press Return. Then type halt and press Return. In approximately 15 to 30 seconds Unix will halt itself and you will notice the prom monitor level, i.e., >. 2. Remove the front cover from the Genesis computer. Remove three (3) 1/4 turn fasteners at the bottom front end of the cover. 3. Remove the Terminator and SCSI Cable from SCSI Tray. 4. Loosen the four captive screws that hold the Serial I/O Panel in place and remove the I/O Panel and set aside. 5. Disconnect the fan tray power connector. 6. Loosen the two screws that hold the fan tray in place and slide the tray out of the Sun computer. 7. There is a tight fit between the Optical Disk Controller Board and the fan, therefore use needle nose pliers to remove the leads from the (+) and () fan DC power terminals from the fan. 8. Remove 4 screws/nuts that secure the fan to the tray. Remove the defective fan. 9. Pay attention the direction of air flow on the replacement fan. (Look for the air flow arrow on the fan). 10. Connect the blue power lead to the (+) terminal and the black lead to the () terminal on the fan. 11. Secure the fan to the tray chassis using the same hardware removed in step 3. 12. To reassemble, reverse steps.
1231
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 1237 46269587P1 Seagate ST1980N Magnetic Disc Drive
CAUTION
Do not move or bump the RP cabinets when they are running as you may cause damage/failures to the LSD and/or the HSD. Be extremely careful when installing front covers and closing cabinet doors. Do not roll the cabinet when power is applied (and the drives are spinning). The drives can absorb up to 75gs with power off, but only 2gs when spinning. Replace a disk drive in the SCSI Tray: 1. Remove the SCSI tray from the cabinet. 2. Place the SCSI tray on its side and, while supporting the drive, unfasten the Phillips screws that hold the drive and mounting bracket to the SCSI tray. 3. Partially withdraw the drive from the tray, then remove the three cables from the rear of the drive. 4. Remove the drive from the tray. 5. Check the disk drive jumper configuration. 6. Install the replacement drive in the SCSI tray. 7. Attach the three cables to the rear of the drive. 8. Install the SCSI tray into the cabinet and attach it with the two screws. 9. Connect the SCSI tray power connector. 10. Install the Serial I/O Panel. 11. Connect all the cables to the Serial I/O Panel. 12. Connect the SCSI Interface cable. 13. Attach the cabinet front cover. 14. Plug in the system power cord and turn on the system power. 15. Reformat the disk and install the software. To install dual ST1980N disk drives, see the procedure for Mounting Dual Disks.
1232
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 1238 46282067P53 Second ETHERNET Circuit Bd, Computer (Intersuite Computer Only) System Shutdown:
The system software must be shutdown (i.e., Unix is down ) and the hardware must be powered down. 1. Starting at the applications level, press the UTILITIES button on the plasma display. Turn off the computer power and disconnect the system power cord. 2. Remove three (3) 1/4 turn fasteners from the Sun Computer front cover. These are located at the bottom of the front cover. 3. Remove Sun Computer front cover from the computer. 4. Remove ethernet cable from ethernet board. 5. Remove Sun Computer Cable Tray Cover. Avoid handling any delicate electronic components or touching any of the board traces. Static Sensitive Devices 6. Remove 4 screws attached to Sun Computers Cable Tray. 7. Use a 2 mm hex wrench to remove the hex screws at the top and the bottom of the board. 8. Push the top ejection lever up and the bottom ejection lever down to unseat the board from the backplane. 9. Slide the board out of the chassis and place in a staticfree environment. 10. Compare the replacement board DIP switch or jumper settings with the defective board DIP switch and jumper settings. If necessary, set the DIP switches on the replacement board to match those on the defective board. Ensure that the front settings are positioned for board 0. 11. Push the replacement board into the chassis card guides until the board seats into the backplane connectors. The Component side of the board should face the right side of the cardcage. 12. Use a 2mm hex wrench to secure the board to the chassis. 13. Reconnect Ethernet Cable to Board. 14. Reattach Sun Computer Cable Tray Cover. 15. Turn on Sun Computer and console. 16. Reinstall Sun Computer front cover. 1239 46307090P30 Serial I/0 Panel No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices.
1233
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 1240 46296604P1 VME ETHERNET 3207 Hawk Board System Shutdown:
The system software must be shutdown (i.e., Unix is down ) and the hardware must be powered down. 1. Starting at the applications level, press the UTILITIES button on the plasma display. Turn off the computer power and disconnect the system power cord. 2. Remove three (3) 1/4 turn fasteners from the Sun Computer front cover. These are located at the bottom of the front cover. 3. Remove Sun Computer front cover from the computer. 4. Remove ethernet cable from ethernet board. 5. Remove Sun Computer Cable Tray Cover. Avoid handling any delicate electronic components or touching any of the board traces. Static Sensitive Devices 6. Remove 4 screws attached to Sun Computers Cable Tray. 7. Use a 2 mm hex wrench to remove the hex screws at the top and the bottom of the board. 8. Push the top ejection lever up and the bottom ejection lever down to unseat the board from the backplane. 9. Slide the board out of the chassis and place in a staticfree environment. 10. Compare the replacement board DIP switch or jumper settings with the defective board DIP switch and jumper settings. If necessary, set the DIP switches on the replacement board to match those on the defective board. Ensure that the front settings are positioned for board 0. 11. Push the replacement board into the chassis card guides until the board seats into the backplane connectors. The Component side of the board should face the right side of the cardcage. 12. Use a 2mm hex wrench to secure the board to the chassis. 13. Reconnect Ethernet Cable to Board. 14. Reattach Sun Computer Cable Tray Cover. 15. Turn on Sun Computer and console. 16. Reinstall Sun Computer front cover.
1234
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 1241 46301975P1 VME, SCSI Controller
Shutdown systems applications using the system shutdown button under UTILITIES. If applications are not running and the system is at UNIX level, login as genesis and type haltSystem. 1. This will bring the system to the boot prompt. 2. Remove the three (3) 1/4 turn screws from the bottom of the computer front cover. 3. Remove the computer front cover. 4. Remove the four (4) screws from the computer cable tray. 5. Remove the computer cable tray. 6. Turn the computer power OFF. 7. Remove the hex screw at the top and bottom of the board you plan to replace. Use ESD Precautions when handling all circuit boards!!!
WARNING
8. Remove the board using the board ejectors and carefully slide it from the slot. 9. Compare jumper and DIP switch settings on the new board with the old one. Adjust settings to match the old one if necessary. 10. Install the new board into the slot with the components facing to the right of the board. Seat the board fully using caution not to bend the EMC/EMI tabs. 11. Install the hex screws in the top and bottom of the board. 12. Turn the computer power ON. Make sure the computer boots with no problems. (If not, recheck your work and troubleshoot problem.) 13. Using caution not to switch OFF the computer switch, replace the computer cable tray and front cover.
1242
46301976P1 Wren V Disk Drive System Shutdown: Shut down system software (ie Unix is down) and power down hardware. 1. Turn console and computer off. 2. Starting at the applications level, press the UTILITIES button on the plasma display. 3. Press the SHUTDOWN button on the plasma display. A popup message appears on the screen asking Really shut the scanner down ? Press the YES button to shut down the scanner Remove the Sun Computer Cover and SCSI Tray Faceplate. Remove the front cover of the computer,to access and remove any of the listed hardware.
4. Remove three (3) 1/4 turn fasteners.
1235
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 5. Pull off the front cover.
6. Remove the SCSI Tray faceplate by removing the 2 screws on the bottom of the face. Remove the SCSI Tray 7. Leave all cables connected to Serial I/O Panel. 8. Loosen the four screws that hold the Serial I/O Panel in place and remove the panel. Rotate the serial I/O panel down and out of the way with the cables still attached and unhook the cables from the SCSI Tray.
Attach the antistatic wrist strap to your wrist and to a bare metal grounding point on the computer chassis before continuing. Permanent damage to the staticsensitive boards may occur if the wrist strap is not used. 9. Disconnect the SCSI Terminator and SCSI Interface Cable from the underside of the SCSI Tray. Loosen the two captive screws and lay SCSI Tray on its side.
CAUTION
The SCSI Tray is heavy and once the screws are loosened, the tray is not attached to the computer in any way. In addition, the tray does not have end stops. To avoid personal injury or SCSI Tray damage, remove the tray slowly, readjusting your grip to balance the tray every few inches. 10. Remove two (2) screws from bottom front of SCSI Tray. Install Disk Drive: 1. Place the SCSI Tray on its side. 2. Remove power cable connector and the SCSI Interface Cable off the faulty WREN 5 Drive. 3. Remove four (4) screws that attach the drive to the SCSI Tray. 4. On new drive remove remove the three Termination Resistors. These Termination Resistors are next to the SCSI Interface Cable. 5. As shown in the Picture, locate the Drive Select header which is next to the 50 pin SCSI Cable Connector on the rear of the disk drive. Verify that there are no jumpers installed on the header pins. 6. Connect Disk Drive Cables (i.e. power and SCSI). Ensure cable has the correct orientation. Pin 1 for Pin 1. 7. Install the Disk Drive with the four screws that you removed. Place the SCSI Tray back to its original position. 8. Connect SCSI Tray Power Cable. 9. Connect I/0 Panel with its associated cables. Connect SCSI Interface Cable and Terminator to SCSI Tray. 10. Secure SCSI Tray by screwing 2 screws to bottom of SCSI Tray. 11. Power up console and computer. 12. Reattach Sun Computer Cover. 13. Refer to Load from Cold Procedures.
1236
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 Console 1243 46287766P1 18 Button Rubber Keypad
1. Remove seven 1032 x 3/8 screws which secure the bottom pan to the console. 2. Set the bottom pan on the floor. The ground wire is still connected and should be long enough to allow the pan to rest on the floor. If not, disconnect ground wire from the bottom pan. 3. To replace the IP Keypad, proceed as follows: Remove J1 to J6 from the board. Remove ground wire from terminal J7. Remove 6 screws (item 25849) to remove board. Remove IP Keypad Board. Remove 6 screws (item 05773) which secure two aluminum spacers to console chassis. Remove spacers and rubber keypad.
4. To replace the 18 Button (IP/View) Rubber Keypad, proceed as follows:
5. Replace IP Keypad Board or rubber keypad by reversing the previous steps. Reassemble Console. 1244 46287394P1 8 Button Rubber Keypad, IC 1. Remove seven 1032 x 3/8 screws which secure the bottom pan to the console. 2. Set the bottom pan on the floor. The ground wire is still connected and should be long enough to allow the pan to rest on the floor. If not, disconnect ground wire from the bottom pan. 3. To replace the System Keypad Board, proceed as follows: Remove cable and ground wire from the board. Remove 4 screws (item 25849) to remove board. Remove System Keypad Board. Remove 4 screws (item 05773) which secure two aluminum spacers to console chassis. Remove spacers and rubber keypad.
4. To replace the 8 Button (Scan/Image) Rubber Keypad, proceed as follows:
5. Replace IP Keypad Board or rubber keypad by reversing the previous steps. Reassemble Console.
1237
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 1245 46282921P1 8 Button Rubber Keypad, OC
1. Remove seven 1032 x 3/8 screws which secure the bottom pan to the console. 2. Set the bottom pan on the floor. The ground wire is still connected and should be long enough to allow the pan to rest on the floor. If not, disconnect ground wire from the bottom pan. 3. To replace the System Keypad Board, proceed as follows: Remove cable and ground wire from the board. Remove 4 screws (item 25849) to remove board. Remove System Keypad Board. Remove 4 screws (item 05773) which secure two aluminum spacers to console chassis. Remove spacers and rubber keypad.
4. To replace the 8 Button (Scan/Image) Rubber Keypad, proceed as follows:
5. Replace IP Keypad Board or rubber keypad by reversing the previous steps. Reassemble Console. 1246 46287429P1 8 Ohm, 6 Watt Speaker, OC The speaker is located behind the swingout panel which holds the plasma display, GCP Board and Autovoice Board. Proceed as follows: 1. Locate 5 tab clips which secure the bezel to the console. Flip each clip upward by inserting a screwdriver into the slot of each clip and rotate upward. Bezel is still secured to console at bottom, so do not try to remove it at this point. 2. Remove seven 1032 by 3/8 screws which secure the bottom pan to the console. 3. Set the bottom pan on the floor. The ground wire is still connected and should be long enough to allow the pan to rest on the floor. If not, disconnect ground wire from the bottom pan. 4. From underneath the keyboard shelf, using a 7/64 allen wrench, remove five 632 by 1/2 socket head screws and washers which secure the bezel to the keyboard support structure. Remove the bezel. 5. Remove a little black latch that secures the plasma swing out panel closed. Removing the latch requires removing the 1032 screw that holds it in place. This step is necessary before the plasma can be swung open. 6. Grasp the left side of the plasma support structure and swing it out toward you all of the way to the right. 7. Locate the speaker which is behind the swingout panel. 8. Remove 2 screws which secure the speaker mounting bracket to the console chassis. 9. Remove the black and white wires from the respective spade lug terminals on the speaker. 10. Remove 4 screws and 4 nuts which secure the speaker to its mounting bracket. 11. Replace the speaker and reassemble the console. 1238
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 1247 46282885P1 A/N Keyboard
1. Remove seven 1032 x 3/8 screws which secure the bottom pan to the console. 2. Set the bottom pan on the floor. The ground wire is still connected and should be long enough to allow the pan to rest on the floor. If not, disconnect ground wire from the bottom pan. 3. Remove cables from the keyboard circuit board. 4. Unscrew ground wire from keyboard circuit board. 5. Remove 8 screws which secures keyboard to console chassis. Remove defective keyboard. 6. Replace the keyboard by reversing the previous steps.
CAUTION
1248 46264756G5 Autovoice Bd, OC
Be sure to properly align the new keyboard in the console cutout. Improper alignment may cause some keys to stick after depression.
This section describes the procedure for replacing the Autovoice Board located in the OC. Be sure that console power is turned off. Attach the antistatic wrist strap to your wrist and to the console chassis before handling any circuit boards. Permanent damage to the static sensitive circuit boards may occur if the wrist strap is not used.
1. Locate 5 tab clips which secure the bezel to the console. Flip each clip upward by inserting a screwdriver into the slot of each clip and rotate upward. Bezel is still secured to console at bottom, so do not try to remove it at this point. 2. Remove seven 1032 by 3/8 screws which secure the bottom pan to the console. 3. Set the bottom pan on the floor. The ground wire is still connected and should be long enough to allow the pan to rest on the floor. If not, disconnect ground wire from the bottom pan. 4. From underneath the keyboard shelf, using a 7/64 allen wrench, remove five 632 by 1/2 socket head screws and washers which secure the bezel to the keyboard support structure. Remove the bezel. 5. Remove the Emergency Stop button to prevent damage when opening the plasma. Refer to the picture for location of the Emergency Stop Button. 6. Remove a little black latch that secures the plasma swing out panel closed. Removing the latch requires removing the 1032 screw that holds it in place. This step is necessary before the plasma can be swung open. 7. Grasp the left side of the plasma support structure and swing it out toward you all of the way to the right.
1239
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 If console is Model 2118256 perform steps 8 and 9. Otherwise skip to step 10. 8. Remove the supper housing cover by unloosening its (4) quick release fasteners. Inspect gasket material for visible tears. Schedule replacement if necessary. Set cover aside. 9. Remove the lower housing cover by unloosening its (4) quick release fasteners. Leave cable interface as is and set aside. Use protective cover to prevent scratching keyboard area. 10. Notice that the Autovoice Board is the small piggy back board on the GCP Board. Remove the respective cables from the following connectors on the Autovoice Board: J8, J14, J4, J6, J5, J3. Also disconnect the black ribbon cable from J6 on the GCP Board. 11. Remove the Autovoice Board from the GCP Board standoffs (6 screws). 12. Replace the Autovoice Board and reassemble console.
1249
46271382P6 Circuit Breaker (1 Pole, 15 A.)
CAUTION
Before starting this procedure either unplug the console or shut off power from PDU to Console. 1. Remove pedestal front door. 2. Swing out panel with Security Board to get access to the front panel of the Console Power Modules. 3. Turn twist lock at top of power module panel and swing front down (panel is hinged at the bottom). 4. Remove wires from the circuit breaker that you want to replace. 5. Remove the screw that affix the respective circuit breaker to the front panel of the power module. Remove circuit breaker. 6. Replace Circuit Breaker.
1250
CAUTION
1240
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 1251 46271382P3 Circuit Breaker (2 Pole, 20 A.)
CAUTION
1252
CAUTION
1253
46301520P1 Console PS 1. Remove pedestal front door. 2. Disconnect cable assembly. You have to break tie wraps. 3. Remove Security Board (6 screws). Do not remove cables from board. Instead, just lie it down in front of pedestal or let it hang. 4. Disconnect all harnesses from top of power supply. 5. Remove 4 screws that secure power supply to swing panel. 6. Replace power supply by reversing the above steps.
1241
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 1254 46307619P1 Emergency Stop Button, OC
1. Locate 5 tab clips which secure the bezel to the console. Flip each clip upward by inserting a screwdriver into the slot of each clip and rotate upward. Bezel is still secured to console at bottom, so do not try to remove it at this point. 2. Remove seven 1032 by 3/8 screws which secure the bottom pan to the console. 3. Set the bottom pan on the floor. The ground wire is still connected and should be long enough to allow the pan to rest on the floor. If not, disconnect ground wire from the bottom pan. 4. From underneath the keyboard shelf, using a 7/64 allen wrench, remove five 632 by 1/2 socket head screws and washers which secure the bezel to the keyboard support structure. Remove the bezel. 5. Remove a little black latch that secures the plasma swing out panel closed. Removing the latch requires removing the 1032 screw that holds it in place. This step is necessary before the plasma can be swung open. 6. Grasp the left side of the plasma support structure and swing it out toward you all of the way to the right. 7. Locate the Emergency Stop button. 8. Grasp the Emergency Stop button and pull it off of the switch actuator bar. 9. If you are replacing the label, peel off the old label from the button. Remove the paper protector from the adhesive side of the new label and put the new label on the button. 10. Push the button back on to the switch actuator bar. 11. Reassemble the console. 1255 46287759P1 Emergency Stop Label 1. Locate 5 tab clips which secure the bezel to the console. Flip each clip upward by inserting a screwdriver into the slot of each clip and rotate upward. Bezel is still secured to console at bottom, so do not try to remove it at this point. 2. Remove seven 1032 by 3/8 screws which secure the bottom pan to the console. 3. Set the bottom pan on the floor. The ground wire is still connected and should be long enough to allow the pan to rest on the floor. If not, disconnect ground wire from the bottom pan. 4. From underneath the keyboard shelf, using a 7/64 allen wrench, remove five 632 by 1/2 socket head screws and washers which secure the bezel to the keyboard support structure. Remove the bezel. 5. Remove a little black latch that secures the plasma swing out panel closed. Removing the latch requires removing the 1032 screw that holds it in place. This step is necessary before the plasma can be swung open. 6. Grasp the left side of the plasma support structure and swing it out toward you all of the way to the right. 7. Locate the Emergency Stop button.
1242
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 8. Grasp the Emergency Stop button and pull it off of the switch actuator bar. 9. If you are replacing the label, peel off the old label from the button. Remove the paper protector from the adhesive side of the new label and put the new label on the button. 10. Push the button back on to the switch actuator bar. 11. Reassemble the console.
1256
46301046P1 Encoder Assembly, Console 1. Remove seven 1032 x 3/8 screws which secure the bottom pan to the console. 2. Set the bottom pan on the floor. The ground wire is still connected and should be long enough to allow the pan to rest on the floor. If not, disconnect ground wire from the bottom pan. 3. Unplug cable to circuit board. 4. Loosen set screw that secures encoder shaft to flywheel. 5. Remove 3 nuts which secures the encoder to the encoder support plate. Remove defective encoder. 6. To replace the encoder, hold the flywheel down against the encoder support plate with one hand while holding the new encoder in the other hand.
CAUTION
This step is very important. You must hold down the flywheel before inserting the encoder shaft up through the support plate into the flywheel. Otherwise, the compression spring and friction pin may pop out of the flywheel. 7. Insert the shaft of the new encoder up through the encoder support plate into the flywheel. 8. Slightly lift the flywheel up from support plate and tighten set screw. 9. Spin flywheel and verify that it spins freely. 10. Reconnect cable. 11. Reassemble console.
1257
46282986P1 Encoder Knob 1. Grab defective knob and firmly pull upward to remove. 2. Grab new knob and press firmly down to slide it on to the encoder shaft. Note: Be sure that new Encoder Knob has compression spring prior to installation.
1243
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 1258 46264380G7 Console GCP Board
This section describes the procedure for replacing the GCP Board located in the OC and IC. Be sure that console power is turned off. Attach the antistatic wrist strap to your wrist and to the console chassis before handling any circuit boards. Permanent damage to the static sensitive circuit boards may occur if the wrist strap is not used. 1. Locate 5 tab clips which secure the bezel to the console. Flip each clip upward by inserting a screwdriver into the slot of each clip and rotate upward. Bezel is still secured to console at bottom, so do not try to remove it at this point. 2. Remove seven 1032 by 3/8 screws which secure the bottom pan to the console. 3. Set the bottom pan on the floor. The ground wire is still connected and should be long enough to allow the pan to rest on the floor. If not, disconnect ground wire from the bottom pan. 4. From underneath the keyboard shelf, using a 7/64 allen wrench, remove five 632 by 1/2 socket head screws and washers which secure the bezel to the keyboard support structure. Remove the bezel. 5. Remove a little black latch that secures the plasma swing out panel closed. Removing the latch requires removing the 1032 screw that holds it in place. This step is necessary before the plasma can be swung open. 6. Grasp the left side of the plasma support structure and swing it out toward you all of the way to the right. Note: If console is Model 2118256 perform steps 8 and 9. Otherwise skip to step 10. 7. Remove the supper housing cover by unloosening its (4) quick release fasteners. Inspect gasket material for visible tears. Schedule replacement if necessary. Set cover aside. 8. Remove the lower housing cover by unloosening its (4) quick release fasteners. Leave cable interface as is and set aside. Use protective cover to prevent scratching keyboard area. 9. Next, remove the respective cables from the following connectors on the GCP Board: J1, J2, J3, J4, J5, J6, J7,J8, J9, J10, J11,J12,J13,J14 10. If the Genesis console is used as an OC remove the autovoice PWA by removing J3,J4,J5,J6,J14. 11. Remove the four (4) screws that hold Autovoice to the GCP Board. 12. Remove the four (4) standoffs and nuts that secure the GCP Board to the metal plate. 13. Compare jumper settings and firmware rev. of old board to new board. 14. Replace the GCP Board and reassemble Console.
1244
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 1259 46282884P1 Image Monitor
1. Locate the 5 tab clips which secure the bezel to the console. a. Insert a screwdriver into the slot of each clip. b. Rotate the clip upward. Note: Do not try to remove the bezel at this time. The bezel is still fastened to the console at bottom. 2. Remove seven 1032x 3/8 screws which secure the bottom pan to the console. 3. Set the bottom pan on the floor. The ground wire is still connected and should be long Enough to allow the pan to rest on the floor. If not disconnect ground wire from the bottom pan. 4. From underneath the keyboard shelf, using a 7/64 allen wrench, remove five 632 x 1/2 socket head screws and washers which secure the bezel to the keyboard support structure. Remove the bezel. 5. Remove a little black latch that secures the plasma swing out panel closed. Flip the latch by loosening the screw and flipping the tab horizontally. This step is necessary before the plasma can be swung open. 6. Grasp the left side of the plasma support structure and swing it out toward you all of the way to the right. 7. Using the special pullout tool attached on the right support leg of the console, grasp the monitor and pull it out of the console until the slide rails are fully extended. THE MONITOR WEIGHS 70 LBS (32KG) THEREFORE, REMOVE THE MONITOR USING TWO PEOPLE. FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE MONITOR OR INJURY TO PERSONNEL SUBSEQUENT TO DROPPING THE MONITOR. 8. Disconnect the cables from the left side of the monitor chassis. 9. Press the slide rail buttons and remove monitor. 10. Replace monitor, reconnect cables and reassemble console. 11. After restoring power to the console, verify the image monitor is working properly. 12. If Image Monitor display has vertical deformations, loosen the connector under the monitor and sliding it to the left or right while applying upward pressure to adjust the image monitors vertical display.
WARNING
1245
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 1260 46317878G1 Intercom Pot Assembly, OC
The Intercom Pot Assembly is located on the back of the bezel, therefore the bezel must be removed as follows: 1. Locate 5 tab clips which secure the bezel to the console. Flip each clip upward by inserting a screwdriver into the slot of each clip and rotate upward. Bezel is still secured to console at bottom, so do not try to remove it at this point. 2. Remove seven 1032 by 3/8 screws which secure the bottom pan to the console. 3. Set the bottom pan on the floor. The ground wire is still connected and should be long enough to allow the pan to rest on the floor. If not, disconnect ground wire from the bottom pan. 4. From underneath the keyboard shelf, using a 7/64 allen wrench, remove five 632 by 1/2 socket head screws and washers which secure the bezel to the keyboard support structure. Remove the bezel. 5. While holding the bezel with one hand, disconnect the harness wires to the Pot Assembly. 6. Install new pot assembly. 7. Reassemble console. 1261 46320682G1 Microphone, OC The microphone is located on the back of the bezel, therefore the bezel must be removed as follows: 1. Locate 5 tab clips which secure the bezel to the console. Flip each clip upward by inserting a screwdriver into the slot of each clip and rotate upward. Bezel is still secured to console at bottom, so do not try to remove it at this point. 2. Remove seven 1032 by 3/8 screws which secure the bottom pan to the console. 3. Set the bottom pan on the floor. The ground wire is still connected and should be long enough to allow the pan to rest on the floor. If not, disconnect ground wire from the bottom pan. 4. From underneath the keyboard shelf, using a 7/64 allen wrench, remove five 632 by 1/2 socket head screws and washers which secure the bezel to the keyboard support structure. Remove the bezel. 5. While holding the bezel with one hand, disconnect the harness wires to the microphone. 6. Install new microphone assembly. 7. Reassemble console.
1246
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 1262 46264508G1 IP Keypad Board
1. Remove seven 1032 x 3/8 screws which secure the bottom pan to the console. 2. Set the bottom pan on the floor. The ground wire is still connected and should be long enough to allow the pan to rest on the floor. If not, disconnect ground wire from the bottom pan. 3. To replace the IP Keypad, proceed as follows: Remove J1 to J6 from the board. Remove ground wire from terminal J7. Remove 6 screws (item 25849) to remove board. 4. To replace the 18 Button (IP/View) Rubber Keypad, proceed as follows: Remove IP Keypad Board. Remove 6 screws (item 05773) which secure two aluminum spacers to console chassis. Remove spacers and rubber keypad. 5. Replace IP Keypad Board or rubber keypad by reversing the previous steps. Reassemble Console. 1263 46301195G2 Security Board 1. Remove pedestal front door. 2. Locate security board. 3. Remove screw that secures tie wrap to Security Board. 4. Remove cable connectors from J20 and J21 on Security Board. 5. Remove Security Board (6 screws). 6. Replace Security Board by reversing the above steps. 1264 46264510G1 System Keypad Board 1. Remove seven 1032 x 3/8 screws which secure the bottom pan to the console. 2. Set the bottom pan on the floor. The ground wire is still connected and should be long enough to allow the pan to rest on the floor. If not, disconnect ground wire from the bottom pan. 3. To replace the System Keypad Board, proceed as follows: Remove cable and ground wire from the board. Remove 4 screws (item 25849) to remove board. 4. To replace the 8 Button (Scan/Image) Rubber Keypad, proceed as follows: Remove System Keypad Board. Remove 4 screws (item 05773) which secure two aluminum spacers to console chassis. Remove spacers and rubber keypad. 5. Replace IP Keypad Board or rubber keypad by reversing the previous steps. Reassemble Console.
1247
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 1265 2119588 Touch Screen Assembly
This section describes the procedure for replacing the Touch Screen Assembly located in the OC or IC. Be sure that console power is turned off. Attach the antistatic wrist strap to your wrist and to the console chassis before handling any circuit boards. Permanent damage to the static sensitive circuit boards may occur if the wrist strap is not used. 1. Locate 5 tab clips which secure the bezel to the console. Flip each clip upward by inserting a screwdriver into the slot of each clip and rotate upward. Bezel is still secured to console at bottom, so do not try to remove it at this point. 2. Remove seven 1032 by 3/8 screws which secure the bottom pan to the console. 3. Set the bottom pan on the floor. The ground wire is still connected and should be long enough to allow the pan to rest on the floor. If not, disconnect ground wire from the bottom pan. 4. From underneath the keyboard shelf, using a 7/64 allen wrench, remove five 632 by 1/2 socket head screws and washers which secure the bezel to the keyboard support structure. Remove the bezel. 5. Remove the Emergency Stop button to prevent damage when opening the plasma. Refer to the picture for location of the Emergency Stop Button. 6. Remove a little black latch that secures the plasma swing out panel closed. Removing the latch requires removing the 1032 screw that holds it in place. This step is necessary before the plasma can be swung open. 7. Grasp the left side of the plasma support structure and swing it out toward you all of the way to the right. Note: If console is Model 2118256 perform steps 8 and 9. Otherwise skip to step 10. 8. Remove the supper housing cover by unloosening its (4) quick release fasteners. Inspect gasket material for visible tears. Schedule replacement if necessary. Set cover aside. 9. Remove the lower housing cover by unloosening its (4) quick release fasteners. Leave cable interface as is and set aside. Use protective cover to prevent scratching keyboard area. 10. Remove J4 from the Touch Screen Assembly. 11. Remove 2 screws that secure the circuit board support plate to the Touch Screen Assembly. Move the support plate (with circuit boards) away from the Touch Screen Assembly. NOTE: Do not remove circuit boards from the support plate. Also do not remove cables from the circuit boards on the support plate. 12. Remove J7 from the Touch Screen Assembly. 13. With your thumb, press down on the pivot shaft until the spring compresses. Refer to the Picture. Continue to press the pivot shaft downward until you can remove it. 14. Remove the defective Touch Screen and replace it.
1248
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 1266 46282936P1 Trackball Assembly
1. Remove seven 1032 x 3/8 screws which secure the bottom pan to the console. 2. Set the bottom pan on the floor. The ground wire is still connected and should be long enough to allow the pan to rest on the floor. If not, disconnect ground wire from the bottom pan. 3. To remove the defective trackball, disconnect one cable and remove 4 screws. 4. Reverse previous steps to install new trackball. 1267 46288872G1 Video Relay Circuit Board This section describes the procedure for replacing the video relay located in both the OC and IC. Be sure that console power is turned off. 1. Remove the signal cable strain relief (4 screws). 2. Disconnect video cables from the BNC connectors on top of the Console I/F Panel (J13, 14 or 15). 3. Remove the video relay 2wire harness from its mating connector. 4. Remove the video relay 2wire harness from the tyrap which secures it to the top of the Console I/F Pane. 5. Remove 4 screws (item 18329) which secure the video relay to the top of the Console I/F Panel. Remove the video relay assembly. 6. Unsolder the yellow and orange wires from the two terminals of the defective relay. 7. Unsolder the rectifier from the same two terminals of the defective relay. 8. Solder the rectifier, removed from the old relay in step 7, across the two terminals of the new video relay. Also solder the old 2wire harness to the terminals of the new video relay. 9. Install the new video relay assembly into the console panel.
1249
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 1268 46282884P3 Remote Board
No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. Gantry (with EDAS) 1269 Gantry Precautions GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS: Safety glasses must be worn at all times. Use approved lifting methods. Observe Ryerson Road Standard Safety Protocol. SPECIFIC SAFETY REQUIREMENTS: ANTISTATIC HANDLING If the boards are not in the DAS or in a conductive bag, you must wear a wrist strap when handling DAS Boards. Boards must never be placed on nonconductive surfaces such as white bench tops, plastic covered books or nonconductive plastic bags. CLEANLINESS Any dirt on the surface increases leakage current on the filter or converter cards and will cause the DAS to fail the drift spec. All testers will be required to use white cotton gloves or the board extractor when inserting or removing boards from DAS. Finger prints on the board will cause trouble when humidity is high. 1270 46198495P1 Drive Belt 1. Position Table to lowest elevation. 2. Turn off facility power to PDU use tag and lock out procedure. 3. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. 4. Turn off all 3 switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. 5. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. 6. Remove scan window. 7. Open Rear and Front Covers. 8. Rotate Gantry so tube is at the 12 oclock position. 9. Lock Gantry into the 12 oclock position. 10. Remove and set aside Anode,right side of Gantry, Inverter Cover. 11. Remove and set aside the Axial Brake assembly. 12. Loosen Idler assembly to relieve drive belt tension by loosening three 3/816 bolts. 13. Remove old belt by cutting or reversing step #14. 14. To replace belt first place the belt around the tube, followed by the CTVRC, cathode tank and inverter, both DAS, work over Anode inverter and tank, and lastly over the OBC. 15. Replace Anode Inverter Cover.
1250
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 16. With the Drive Belt properly positioned on the gear ring, fold belt and pull through the opening in frame where axial motor shaft protrudes. Loop gear belt over brake shaft and around drive pulley. 17. Properly position the drive belt on and around the gear ring, the idler pulleys, and the drive pulley. 18. Perform preliminary idler assembly adjustment so belt is snug. 19. Rotate Gantry by hand through 3 complete revolutions. 20. Make final tension adjustments on the drive belt by turning Idler Pulley Adjustment screw until spring has a compressed length of 0.90 inches. 21. Replace Axial Brake assembly. 22. 2Adjust Cpulse: Refer to the CPulse Procedure. 23. Unlock Gantry. 24. To finish reassembly, reverse steps 17.
1271
46296058G1 Drive Belt Idler Pulley 1. Position table to lowest elevation. 2. Turn off facility power to PDUuse tag and lockout procedures. 3. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. 4. Turn off all 3 switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. 5. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. 6. Remove scan window. 7. Open front cover. 8. Relieve tension on drive belt by loosening three 3/8 16 bolts. 9. Identify which Idler Pulley needs replacement Stationary or Tensioning. Remove Stationary Pulley: 1. Remove Shoulder Belt. 2. Replace pulley and shoulder belt. 3. Apply Loctite 242 to bolt threads and torque to 25 ftlbs. (0.024 mkg) Note: On later model gantries (G3 or later) an access hole has been incorporated which may be used to turn out the set screw holding the pulley mounting bolt in the event the set screw breaks. Access is still restricted, but extraction of the broken blot may be faster than using an EZ out tool. Remove Tensioning Pulley: 1. Remove Tensioning assembly from Gantry by removing five 3/816 bolts. 2. Remove Pulley from Tensioning assembly by removing internal hex screw from back side of Tensioning assembly. 3. Install new Pulley to Tensioning assembly. 4. Reattach Tensioning assembly to Gantry.
1251
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 5. Properly position the Drive Belt on and around the Gear ring,the idler pulleys,and the drive pulley on the axial drive motor. Perform preliminary idler assembly adjustment so belt is snug. 6. Rotate Gantry by hand through 3 complete revolutions. 7. Make final tension adjustments on the drive belt by turning Idler Pulley Adjustment screw until spring has a compressed length of 0.285 inches. 8. Adjust Cpulse: Refer to the CPulse Procedure. 9. To reassemble, reverse steps 16.
1272
46136334P23 F/C interlock switch 1. Position table to lowest elevation. 2. Turn off facility power to PDU. Use tag and lockout procedures. 3. Remove and set aside gantry side covers. 4. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. 5. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. 6. Remove scan window. 7. Open Front Cover. 8. Disconnect the two electrical connections at the front cover interlock limit switch. 9. Loosen nut and remove limit switch. 10. Install and adjust new limit switch such that push roller is 0.94 inches from metal support bracket. 11. Reconnect two (2) electrical connections. Black wire to N.O. Red wire to Comm. 12. To reassemble, reverse steps 17.
1273
46220234P3 Fan, OBC 1. Move table to lowest elevation. 2. Turn off facility power to PDU. Use tag and lockout procedures. 3. Remove gantry side covers. 4. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. 5. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. 6. Remove scan window. 7. Open front cover. 8. Rotate Gantry so OBC is at 3 oclock position and engage rotational lock. 9. Disconnect Power Cord from Fan. 10. Remove and keep 4 screws holding Fan and Grill in place. 11. Replace Fan. 12. To reassemble, reverse steps.
1252
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 1274 46321246G1 RPSCOM Board
1. Move table to lowest elevation. 2. Remove gantry side covers. 3. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on the right side of the gantry. 4. Remove left Side Cover. 5. Loosen two (2) screws retaining front cover of STC and remove cover. 6. Loosen two (2) wingnuts retaining STC Chassis. 7. Rotate STC Chassis 90 degrees and lock into position. Note: Wear grounded wrist strap when removing circuit boards. 8. Remove PWB using extractors. 9. Install new SCOM board assembly by reversing the above steps. Note: 1275 46220234P3 Fan, STC 1. Turn facility circuit breaker OFF, tag and lock. 2. Remove and set aside Left Side Cover. 3. Loosen 2 wing nuts holding card cage in place. 4. Swing card cage 90 degrees to fully open position. 5. Remove 4 screws attaching fan to card cage. 6. Unplug power cable from fan. 7. Remove fan and grill from card cage. 8. Install new fan and same grill by reversing above steps. Note: 1276 46183027P120 Filter Bd, EDAS Use pushtorelease tab to rotate card cage back into place. Use pushtorelease tab to rotate card cage back into position.
WARNING
GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS: Safety glasses must be worn at all times. Use approved lifting methods. Observe Ryerson Road Standard Safety Protocol.
1253
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 SPECIFIC SAFETY REQUIREMENTS:
WARNING
ANTISTATIC HANDLING If the boards are not in the DAS or in a conductive bag, you must wear a wrist strap when handling DAS Boards. Boards must never be placed on nonconductive surfaces such as white bench tops, plastic covered books or nonconductive plastic bags. CLEANLINESS Any dirt on the surface increases leakage current on the filter or converter cards and will cause the DAS to fail the drift spec. All testers will be required to use white cotton gloves or the board extractor when inserting or removing boards from DAS. Finger prints on the board will cause trouble when humidity is high.
1277
46183027P128 Filter Bd, Reduced Gain EDAS
WARNING
GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS: Safety glasses must be worn at all times. Use approved lifting methods. Observe Ryerson Road Standard Safety Protocol. SPECIFIC SAFETY REQUIREMENTS:
WARNING
1254
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 1278 46297335P2 Filter, Pwr L, OBC
1. Turn facility circuit breaker OFF, tag and lock. 2. Remove and set aside gantry side covers. 3. Remove and set aside scan window. 4. Lift Top Cover and engage prop rod. 5. Turn off Axial Drive Switch. 6. Remove Front Cover. 7. Rotate Gantry so OBC is at 3:00 position. 8. Locate Line Filter mounted to OBC assembly, between X Ray Tube and OBC Assemblies. 9. Note wire location on Line Filter. Verify there is no voltage on the wires attached to the line filter. 10. Disconnect 4 leads from Line Filter. 11. Remove and keep 2 screws mounting Line Filter to OBC assembly. 12. Replace Line Filter. 13. To reassemble, reverse steps.
CAUTION
1279 46297335P2 Filter, Pwr L, STC
Do not connect any leads to Ground Terminal on Line Filter.
1. Turn off facility power to PDU. Use tag and lockout procedures. 2. Remove left Side Cover. 3. Loosen two wingnuts retaining STC Chassis. 4. Rotate STC Chassis 90 degrees and lock into position. 5. Note the location of the leads going to the line filter on the right side of the STC Chassis. 6. Remove leads from line filter. 7. Remove two(2) 832 screws attaching line filter to STC Chassis and remove filter. 8. Install new filter by reversing the above steps. Note: 1280 46241601G2 Flex Circuit Assm 1. Position table to lowest elevation. 2. Turn off facility power to PDUuse tag and lockout procedure. 3. Remove gantry side covers. 4. Turn off all 3 switches on status control box on right side of Gantry. 5. Open top cover and engage prop rod. 6. Remove scan window. Use pushtorelease tab to rotate card cage back into position
1255
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 7. Open front cover.
8. Rotate Gantry until tube is at 9:00 position, and lock into position. Note: Operator must be wearing a grounded wrist strap before performing the following procedure. 9. Remove DAS and detector covers from Gantry (4 pcs). 10. Locate the flex circuits to be replaced. 11. Note connector locations for each flex circuit. 12. Carefully remove the flex circuit from the detector by pulling the flex circuit connector from the pin header on back of the detector. Remove other end of flex circuit connector from DAS circuit card, and slide out of flex guide. 13. Replace defective flex circuit. 14. To reassemble, reverse steps. 1281 46296868G1 G1 Front Cover Assm No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 1282 46327207G1 Front Cover Assm (G3 Gantry) No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 1283 46296870G1 Top Lens Assembly No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 1284 46296869G1 Side Lens Assembly 46288938G1 Front Cover Mic Bd No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 1286 46297488P1 Front Cover Microphone 1. Move table to lowest elevation. 2. Turn off facility power to PDU. Use tag and lockout procedures. 3. Remove gantry side covers. 4. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. 5. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. 6. Remove scan window. 7. Open Front Cover. 8. Locate Front microphone interface PWB on the inside of the front cover just below the laser window and remove the red and black leads from the terminal block by loosening retaining screws.
1285
1256
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 9. Remove two (2) nuts from studs and remove microphone by pulling the device straight out from the front side of the front cover. 10. Install new microphone by threading the red and black leads through the bottom mounting hole in the front cover. Next insert the two studs on the microphone into the two mounting holes in the front cover. (Be sure the red and black leads are in the slotted cutout which is a part of the bottom mounting hole.) 11. Thread red and black leads through center hole on microphone interface PWB and place PWB over the two mounting studs on inside of cover and install the two mounting nuts. 12. Connect the red and black leads to the terminal block and reverse steps 17 to complete the installation. Note: Red lead to position 1 and black lead to position 2.
1287
46170021P79 Fuse (30A, 700V) 45435967 Gate Driver/Filter Board 46170021P52 Fuse, Collimator 46170021P52 Fuse (DAS) 3A, 250V 1. Move table to lowest elevation. 2. Turn off facility power to PDU. Use tag and lockout procedures. 3. Remove gantry side covers. 4. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. 5. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. 6. Remove scan window. 7. Open front cover. 8. Rotate Gantry so OBC is at 4:00 position. 9. Locate Fuse and remove cap from fuseholder. 10. Replace Fuse. 11. To reassemble, reverse steps.
1288
1289
1290
1291
46170021P30 Fuse (DAS) 2A, 350V 1. Move table to lowest elevation. 2. Turn off facility power to PDU. Use tag and lockout procedures. 3. Remove gantry side covers. 4. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. 5. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. 6. Remove scan window.
1257
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 7. Open front cover.
8. Rotate Gantry so OBC is at 4:00 position. 9. Locate Fuse and remove cap from fuseholder. 10. Replace Fuse. 11. To reassemble, reverse steps. 1292 46170021P15 Fuse, Filament Power Supply 1. Move table to lowest elevation. 2. Turn off facility power to PDU. Use tag and lockout procedures. 3. Remove gantry side covers. 4. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. 5. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. 6. Remove scan window. 7. Open Front Cover. 8. Rotate gantry so that Filament Power Assembly is at the 3 oclock position., 9. Engage gantry rotational lock. 10. Loosen four (4) capture screws on Filament Power Assembly cover and remove cover. 11. Locate fuses on inside surface of filament power assembly. 12. Remove cap from fuse holder and remove fuse. 13. To replace fuse, reverse the above steps. 1293 46170021P52 Fuse (3A 120V) 1. Move table to lowest elevation. 2. Turn off facility power to PDU. Use tag and lockout procedures. 3. Remove gantry side covers. 4. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. 5. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. 6. Remove scan window. 7. Open Front Cover. 8. Rotate gantry so that Filament Power Assembly is at the 3 oclock position., 9. Engage gantry rotational lock. 10. Loosen four (4) capture screws on Filament Power Assembly cover and remove cover. 11. Locate fuses on inside surface of filament power assembly. 12. Remove cap from fuse holder and remove fuse. 13. To replace fuse, reverse the above steps.
1258
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 1294 46170021P52 & 46 170021P74 Fuse, Detector Heater
1. Move table to lowest elevation. 2. Turn off facility power to PDU. Use tag and lockout procedures. 3. Remove gantry side covers. 4. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. 5. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. 6. Remove scan window. 7. Open Front Cover. 8. Rotate gantry so that Filament Power Assembly is at the 3 oclock position., 9. Engage gantry rotational lock. 10. Loosen four (4) capture screws on Filament Power assembly cover and remove cover. 11. Locate fuses on inside surface of filament power assembly. 12. Remove cap from fuse holder and remove fuse. 13. To replace fuse, reverse the above steps. 1295 46170021P30 (2A 350V) & 46170021P52 (3A, 250V) Fuse, (DAS) 1. Move table to lowest elevation. 2. Turn off facility power to PDU. Use tag and lockout procedures. 3. Remove gantry side covers. 4. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. 5. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. 6. Remove scan window. 7. Open front cover. 8. Rotate Gantry so OBC is at 4:00 position. 9. Locate Fuse and remove cap from fuseholder. 10. Replace Fuse. 11. To reassemble, reverse steps.
1296
46170021P15, 46170021P52 Filament Power Assembly Fuse 1. Move table to lowest elevation. 2. Turn off facility power to PDU. Use tag and lockout procedures. 3. Remove gantry side covers. 4. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. 5. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. 6. Remove scan window.
1259
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 7. Open Front Cover.
8. Rotate gantry so that Filament Power assembly is at the 3 oclock position., 9. Engage gantry rotational lock. 10. Loosen four (4) capture screws on Filament Power assembly cover and remove cover. 11. Locate fuses on inside surface of filament power assembly. 12. Remove cap from fuse holder and remove fuse. 13. To replace fuse, reverse the above steps. 1297 46170021P74 Fuse, Tube Cooling 1. Position table to lowest elevation. 2. Turn off facility power to PDU use tag and lockout procedure. 3. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. 4. Turn off all 3 switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. 5. Open top cover and engage prop rod. 6. Remove and set aside Gantry scan window. 7. Open front cover. 8. Rotate Gantry so that OBC is at the 3 oclock position and engage gantry rotational lock. 9. Remove fuse from fuse holder located at the top of the control assembly. 10. Replace fuse by reversing the above steps. 1298 46296209P1 Counterbalancing Gas Spring Note: Due to alignment and dimensional variation of the Gantry Front cover, the Front cover may need to be removed to allow replacement of a Gantry Gas Spring. If necessary, the task of removing the Front Cover will require three people for a short period of time. The front cover assembly weighs less than 200 lbs. 1. Position table to lowest elevation. 2. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. 3. Turn off three (3) switches on the status control box on right side of gantry. 4. Remove scan window. 5. Engage Indexer Pin and lock gantry 6. On right side of gantry, remove the two (2) flat head screws holding the spacer block on the Bases hard stop. Leave the spacer sitting in position for the time being. 7. Tilt the gantry until the front stop on the pivot sector touches the loose spacer block left in position on the Base as described in step 6. 8. Stop tilting and remove the spacer block.
1260
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 9. CAUTION The gantry must be able to tilt +/ 30.25 degrees at a very minimum to meet system requirements. With the spacer block in position the gantry will be able to meet this requirement. When the spacer block is removed, the gantry is capable of tilting forward further than 30.25 degrees. HOWEVER, with the spacer block removed the gas springs will most likely prevent the gantry hardstops from coming all the way together. DO NOT force the gantry hard stops together the gas springs may become damaged and rupture. Proceed to tilt with caution bearing in mind two issues: A) Gas Spring Length Wiggle both gas springs as the two hard stops approach each other, stopping when one of the gas springs feels unloaded (reaches full extension). IMPORTANT both gas springs will have to be monitored to ensure that they are not being extended past their fully extended length. B) Front Cover interference Due to dimensional variation in the Front Cover, the Front Cover and/or Front Cover hinge doors may contact the Gantry Base during tilting operations greater than 30.25 degrees and prevent enough tilt to exchange a gas spring. Monitor the relationship between the front fiberglass covers and the Gantry Base (on both sides of the Gantry) during tilting operations. If interference occurs, STOP TILTING. Return gantry to an upright position (zero degrees of tilt) and remove the front cover per the following steps. If interference is not an issue proceed to tilt, monitoring the gas spring length and go on to step 10. Remove Front Cover a. Return gantry to zero degrees of tilt. b. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. c. Open front cover.
d. Disconnect electrical connection near the top hinge on left side of gantry. e. Remove Front Cover by having two people lift the front cover, while a third person removes the two hinge pins on the left side of the gantry. f. Place the front cover horizontally on a clean protected surface, such as on a blanket on the floor. Special handling will be necessary to protect the covers surface from becoming scratched.
g. Disengage the top cover prop rod and gently lower the top cover down onto the gantry. DO NOT ROTATE THE GANTRY IN THIS STATE. If the top cover is left in the propped position, it may fall rearward during tilting operations. h. Repeat steps 6, 7, 8 and 9 10. Remove the two (2) retaining clips from the ends of the gas spring that has reached full extension even if it is not the gas spring that needs to be replaced. 11. Grasp the gas spring near the top end fitting and firmly pull away from the gantry. Once the top end fitting is free, continue pulling until the bottom end fitting is also freed. Note: The retaining clips must be removed prior to gas spring removal. 12. If it is necessary to remove the second gas spring, continue tilting the gantry until the second gas spring has reached full extension. Remove the gas spring as detailed in steps 10 and 11.
1261
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 13. Clean and inspect the ball studs. If the ball studs are worn or damaged, remove and replace using Loctite 242. Torque to 40 ftlbs. ( 0.0384 mkg) 14. Take the new gas spring(s) and ensure the end fittings are tightened down. Tilt the gantry until the gas spring will fit on to the two (2) ball studs. If both gas springs have been removed, place the first gas spring on the longest side first (longest meaning the side that has the greatest distance between ball studs). Then proceed to tilt toward zero degrees until the second gas spring fits on to the other two ball studs. 15. Install the gas spring in the rod down/tube up position. Firmly push the end fitting around the ball stud on both the top and bottom. Replace the retaining clip on each end fitting. IMPORTANT to effectively retain the gas spring in position around the ball stud, the retaining clip must be properly positioned through both openings in the end fitting. 16. To verify that the new gas spring(s) will allow the system to meet the tilt requirement of +/30.25 degrees, simply attempt to insert the spacer block between the base and pivot sector hardstops at the the time of gas spring installation. If the spacer block CAN NOT be inserted due to lack of space between the two hardstops, then the gas spring installation length is ACCEPTABLE. If the spacer block CAN be inserted, then the gas spring length must be increased by utilizing a flat washer (ie. P/N 1000904P489 0.328 ID/ 0.500 OD/ 0.062 Thk) as a spacer between the end fitting and gas spring. Remove one end fitting and install one flat washer. Apply Loctite 242 and tighten end fitting. Adjust the tilt and install the gas spring. Again, use the spacer block as a test to ensure that the system has proper tilt capability. 17. Once the new gas spring is installed, return the gantry to the zero degree tilted position as indicated by the tilt indicator bracket on the right side of the Gantry. Reinstall the spacer block to the Base hard stop using the two (2) flat head screws. 18. If the Front Cover was removed, then: a. Lift the Top Cover and engage the prop rod b. Replace Front Cover and reconnect the electrical connection c. Adjust/align Front Cover
d. Lower Top Cover 19. To ensure a successful gas spring replacement, tilt the gantry to +30 degrees and 30 degrees as indicated by the display monitor located on top of the Front Cover. Note: THE TOP COVER MUST BE IN THE DOWN POSITION BEFORE TILTING OCCURS. 20. To complete reassembly, reverse steps 16 1299 46264958G1 Gantry Display Daughterboard No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices.
1262
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12100 46264896G1 Gantry Display Motherboard
No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 12101 46278120P1 Gear Reducer 1. Position table to lowest elevation. 2. Turn off facility power to PDUuse tag and lockout procedure. 3. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. 4. Turn off all three switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. 5. Open top cover and engage prop rod. 6. Remove and set aside Gantry scan window. 7. Open front cover. 8. Install shipping brackets to secure gantry from tilting. a. Gantry must be at 0 degrees tilt to install brackets. b. Install three (3) bolts for each bracket. 9. Remove and set aside tilt motor. 10. Remove one (1) tilt chain adjusting bolt and washer. 11. Remove two (2) tilt chain locking bolts from adjusting block. 12. Place chain on the ground and remove chain from drive pulley. 13. Remove and keep four (4) bolts that secure gear reducer to the gantry base. 14. Remove set screw on output end of gear box, which holds potentiometer. 15. Slide Pot assembly off output shaft of Gear Reducer Box. 16. Remove Gearbox from Gantry. 17. Remove and set aside the drive pulley from the output shaft of gear reducer by removing two (2) set screws. 18. Install drive pulley to output shaft of new Gear Reducer. a. Position with gears toward pulley. Refer to drawing. b. Torque and use 242 Loctite on two (2) set screws. 19. While repositioning the new gear reducer on the gantry base, place the chain around the drive pulley and the two (2) idler pulleys. Loosely attach the tilt chain adjustment block to the pivot sector with two (2) bolts, with Loctite 242 applied. 20. Replace the tilt chain adjusting bolt and washer, and tighten to a chain tension of 5 1 lbf. 21. Tighten tilt chain locking bolts to 25 ftlbs. 22. Replace Tilt Motor. 23. Loosely install set screw on output end of new gear reducer. 24. Slide Pot Assembly on output shaft of Gear box. 25. Adjust pot shaft into end of output shaft of gear reducer. 26. Torque set screw, with 242Loctite applied.
1263
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 27. Remove and set aside shipping brackets. 28. Position Gantry at 0 degrees by aligning Gantry with tilt indicator on the right side of Gantry Base. 29. To adjust potentiometer. 30. To reassemble, reverse steps.
12102
46297428P1 Grounding Strap, Base Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good service practices.
12103
46296377P1 Heurikon Bd, OBC 1. Remove and set aside gantry side covers. 2. Turn off all 3 switches on status control box. 3. Rotate Gantry so OBC is at 3 oclock position and engage rotational lock. 4. Put on grounding wrist strap. 5. Remove OBC Front Cover by loosening 8 captive screws. 6. Remove ribbon cable from serial port on front panel. 7. Remove board from slot A7 by loosening 2 retaining screws and rotating ejectors. 8. Place Board in Static Bag. 9. Install new board by reversing the above steps.
12104
46296377P1 Heurikon Bd, STC 1. Move table to lowest elevation. 2. Remove gantry side covers. 3. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on the right side of the gantry. 4. Open only Left Side Cover. 5. Loosen 2 screws retaining front cover of STC and remove cover. 6. Loosen two wingnuts retaining STC Chassis. 7. Rotate STC Chassis 90 degrees and lock into position. Note: Wear grounded wrist strap when removing circuit boards. 8. Remove and set aside Scom Circuit Board. 9. Unscrew top and bottom fasteners then remove board. 10. To reassemble, reverse steps. Note: Use pushtorelease tab to rotate card cage back into position.
1264
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 12105 46195120G16 HV Anode Cable
1. Position table to lowest elevation. 2. Turn off facility power to PDU use tag and lockout procedure. 3. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. 4. Turn off all 3 switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. 5. Open top cover and engage prop rod. 6. Remove and set aside Gantry scan window. 7. Open front cover. 8. Rotate Gantry until tube is at the 12 oclock position. 9. Lock Gantry into the 12 oclock position. 10. On left side of Gantry unscrew two wing nuts holding STC card cage in place. Rotate Card Cage 90 degrees and lock in place to gain access to Anode HV Transformer Tank. 11. Place rag around Anode HV Cable connecter opening on transformer tank. 12. Use spanner wrench to loosen nut retaining Anode HV cable connector to HV transformer tank and remove cable. Ground the end of the cable to the Gantry Frame to verify no voltage. 13. Wipe excess oil from HV cable connector and HV transformer tank connector well. (Wipe well clean prior to rotating Gantry) 14. Rotate the Gantry so tube is at the 3 oclock position. 15. Repeat steps 1113 to remove Anode HV Cable connector from XRay tube HV connector well. 16. Unscrew two cable clamps to remove Anode HV Cable from rotating base. 17. Cut all remaining tyraps and remove cable from Gantry. 18. With the tube at the 3 oclock position and the Gantry rotational lock engaged, add 20 ml (0.7 oz.) of dielectric oil to the anode HV connector well of the XRay Tube. 19. Place rag around tube connector well to absorb excess oil during Anode cable insertion. 20. Insert the Anode HV Cable connector into Anode HV well of XRay tube. 21. Tighten nut with spanner wrench. 22. 2Wipe excess oil from tube. 23. Unlock and rotate Gantry so tube is at the 12 oclock position. Lock Gantry in place. 24. Add 20 ml (0.7 oz) of dielectric oil to the well of the HV Anode transformer tank. 25. Place rag around transformer tank connector well to absorb excess oil during Anode cable insertion. 26. Insert the Anode HV cable connector into Anode HV transformer well. 27. Tighten nut with spanner wrench. 28. Reattach Anode cable to rotating base using existing screws and cable clamps. 29. Wipe excess oil from tube.
1265
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 30. Use tyraps as required to dress cables so minimum loop exists on each end. 31. Tighten tyraps on rotating base (Qty2). 32. Wrap rag or paper towel around both ends of the Anode HV cable. Use tape to hold rags in place. 33. Unlock Gantry. Return STC to its original position. Tighten down two wing nuts to secure STC in place. 34. Rotate Gantry by hand through two complete revolutions, checking to make sure the Anode cable does not catch on any stationary components. 35. After completing hand rotation, remove rags and wipe up excess dielectric oil found near the HV Anode Cable ends. 36. Restore power to the Gantry. (Reverse steps 4 and 2) 37. Rotate the Gantry at a speed of 1 Revolution per second, for several revolutions. Stop gantry and shut down power. 38. Turn off facility power to PDUuse tag and lockout procedures. 39. Turn off all 3 switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. 40. Check to ensure that no dielectric oil is leaking from the tube or transformer tank wells. 41. To reassemble, reverse steps.
12106
46195120G16 HV Cathode Cable 1. Position table to lowest elevation. 2. Turn off facility power to PDU use tag and lockout procedure. 3. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. 4. Turn off all 3 switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. 5. Open top cover and engage prop rod. 6. Remove and set aside Gantry scan window. 7. Open front cover. 8. Rotate Gantry until tube is at the 12 oclock position. 9. Lock Gantry into the 12 oclock position. 10. Place rag around Cathode HV Cable connecter opening on transformer tank. 11. Use spanner wrench to loosen nut retaining Cathode HV cable connector to HV transformer tank and remove cable. Ground the end of the cable to the Gantry Frame to verify no voltage. 12. Wipe excess oil from HV cable connector and HV transformer tank connector well. (Wipe well clean prior to rotating Gantry). 13. Rotate the Gantry so that the tube is at the 3:00 position. 14. Repeat steps 1012 to remove Cathode HV Cable connector from XRay tube HV connector well. 15. Unscrew two tyraps to remove Cathode HV Cable from rotating base. 16. Cut all remaining tyraps and remove cable from Gantry.
1266
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 17. Install new tyraps (Qty 2) using existing screws. Note Leave tyraps loose around cable until final adjustment. 18. With the tube at the 3 oclock position and the Gantry rotational lock engaged, add 20 ml (0.7 oz.) of dielectric oil to the cathode HV connector well of the XRay Tube. 19. Place rag around tube connector well to absorb excess oil during cathode cable insertion. 20. Insert the Cathode HV Cable connector into Cathode HV well of XRay tube. 21. Tighten nut with spanner wrench. 22. Wipe excess oil from tube. 23. Unlock and rotate Gantry so tube is at the 12 oclock position. Lock Gantry in place. 24. Add 20 ml (0.7 oz) of dielectric oil to the well of the HV cathode transformer tank. 25. Place rag around transformer tank connector well to absorb excess oil during cathode cable insertion. 26. Insert the cathode HV cable connector into cathode HV transformer well. 27. Tighten nut with spanner wrench. 28. Wipe excess oil from tube. 29. Use tyraps as required to dress cables so minimum loop exists on each end. 30. Tighten tyraps on rotating base (Qty 2). 31. Wrap rag or paper towel around both ends of the cathode HV cable. Use tape to hold rags in place. 32. Rotate Gantry by hand through two complete revolutions, checking to make sure the cathode cable does not catch on any stationary components. 33. After completing hand rotation, remove rags and wipe up excess dielectric oil found near the HV Cathode Cable ends. 34. Restore power to the Gantry. (Reverse steps 4 and 2) 35. Rotate the Gantry at a speed of 1 Revolution per second, for several revolutions. Stop Gantry and shut down power. 36. Turn off facility power to PDUuse tag and lockout procedures. 37. Turn off all 3 switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. 38. Check to ensure that no dielectric oil is leaking from the tube or transformer tank wells. 39. To reassemble, reverse steps.
12107
46288512G1 I/O Board 1. Remove and set aside gantry side covers. 2. Turn off all 3 switches on status control box. 3. Rotate Gantry so OBC is at 3 oclock position and engage rotational lock. 4. Put on grounding wrist strap. 5. Remove OBC Front Cover by loosening 8 captive screws.
1267
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 6. Remove board from appropriate slot (listed above) by rotating ejectors and removing board from card cage. 7. Place board in Static Bag. 8. Install new board by reversing the above steps.
12108
46296516G1 Indexer Assm No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices.
12109
46288766G1 Intercom Circuit Bd 1. Move table to lowest elevation. 2. Turn off facility power to PDU. Use tag and lockout procedures. 3. Remove gantry side covers. 4. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. 5. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. 6. Remove scan window. 7. Open rear gantry cover. 8. Remove 25 pin sub D connector from Intercom PWB. 9. Remove two AC leads from line filter. Note location of each lead. 10. Remove DC connector (J3) from Assembly. 11. Remove four (4) screws mounting assembly to gantry and remove assembly from gantry. Note: Wear grounded wrist strap before starting the following procedures. 12. Remove four (4) nuts mounting Intercom PWB cover to bracket and remove cover with PWB from assembly. 13. Remove four (4) screws mounting PWB to cover and remove PWB. 14. Install new Intercom PWB by reversing the above steps.
12110
54358P25 Inverter Fuse (120 VAC), Anode 1. Open Gantry 2. Turn facility power OFF, lock and tag. 3. Rotate Gantry to position where Inverter is at 3:00 position. 4. Unscrew fuseholder cover. Replace Fuse and fuseholder cover.
12111
54358P25 Inverter Fuse (120 VAC), Cathode 1. Open Gantry 2. Turn facility power OFF, lock and tag. 3. Rotate Gantry to position where Inverter is at 3:00 position. 4. Unscrew fuseholder cover. Replace Fuse and fuseholder cover.
1268
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 12112 54367P50 Inverter Fuse (550VDC), Anode 1. Open Gantry
2. Turn facility power OFF, lock and tag. 3. Rotate Gantry to position where Inverter is at 3:00 position. 4. Remove 4 Screws and Inverter Cover. 5. Verify Capacitor Voltage on C5 and C6 is 0 VDC. 6. Remove 2 screws, 2 lockwashers and 2 flat washers that mount fuse to brass standoffs. 7. Replace Fuse. 12113 54367P50 Inverter Fuse (550VDC), Cathode 1. Open Gantry 2. Turn facility power OFF, lock and tag. 3. Rotate Gantry to position where Inverter is at 3 oclock position. 4. Remove 4 Screws and Inverter Cover. 5. Verify Capacitor Voltage on C5 and C6 is 0 VDC. 6. Remove 2 screws, 2 lockwashers and 2 flat washers that mount fuse to brass standoffs. 7. Replace Fuse. 12114 54358P18 Inverter Fuse (600V), Anode 1. Open Gantry 2. Turn facility power OFF, lock and tag. 3. Rotate Gantry to position where Inverter is at 3 oclock position. 4. Unscrew fuseholder cover. Replace Fuse and fuseholder cover. 12115 54358P18 Inverter Fuse (600V), Cathode 1. Open Gantry 2. Turn facility power OFF, lock and tag. 3. Rotate Gantry to position where Inverter is at 3 oclock position. 4. Unscrew fuseholder cover. Replace Fuse and fuseholder cover. 12116 46321064G1 kV Circuit Bd 1. Remove and set aside the right gantry side covers. 2. Turn off all 3 switches on status control box. 3. Rotate Gantry so OBC is at 3 oclock position and engage rotational lock. 4. Put on grounding wrist strap.
1269
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 5. Remove OBC Front Cover by loosening 8 captive screws. 6. Remove board from appropriate slot (listed above) by rotating ejectors and removing board from card cage. 7. Place board in Static Bag. 8. Install new board by reversing the above steps.
12117
46321198G1 KV Circuit Bd 1. Remove and set aside the right gantry side covers. 2. Turn off all 3 switches on status control box. 3. Rotate Gantry so OBC is at 3 oclock position and engage rotational lock. 4. Put on grounding wrist strap. 5. Remove OBC Front Cover by loosening 8 captive screws. 6. Remove board from appropriate slot (listed above) by rotating ejectors and removing board from card cage. 7. Place board in Static Bag. 8. Install new board by reversing the above steps.
12118
46196464P1 Lead Weight Use the Gantry Static Balance Procedure when adding or replacing lead weights.
12119
46296938G1 G1 Left Side Cover Assm No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices.
12120
46327202G1 Left Side Cover Assm No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices.
12121
46288886G1 mA Circuit Bd 1. Remove and set aside the right gantry side covers. 2. Turn off all 3 switches on status control box. 3. Rotate Gantry so OBC is at 3 oclock position and engage rotational lock. 4. Put on grounding wrist strap. 5. Remove OBC Front Cover by loosening 8 captive screws. 6. Remove board from appropriate slot (listed above) by rotating ejectors and removing board from card cage. 7. Place board in Static Bag. 8. Install new board by reversing the above steps.
1270
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12122 46296263P1 Micro Stepper Drive (Aperture)
1. Position table to lowest elevation. 2. Turn off facility power to PDUuse tag and lockout procedure. 3. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. 4. Turn off all three switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. 5. Open top cover and engage prop rod. 6. Remove and set aside Gantry scan window. 7. Open front cover. 8. Rotate Gantry until Collimator is at the 3 oclock position. 9. Lock Gantry into position by engaging indexer pin lock. 10. Remove two 8 pin electrical connectors, one from the top and one from the bottom (when collimator is in the 3 oclock position) of the Aperture Micro Stepper drive. To remove connectors pull firmly in the Zdirection. 11. Remove Micro Stepper Drive, by removing four 632 hex nuts. 12. Replace Micro Stepper Drive.. 13. To complete reassembly, reverse steps. 12123 46296080G1 OBC Assembly No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 12124 46264660G1 OBC Backplane 1. Move table to lowest elevation. 2. Turn off facility power to PDU. Use tag and lockout procedures. 3. Remove gantry side covers. 4. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. 5. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. 6. Remove scan window. 7. Open front cover. 8. Rotate Gantry so OBC is at 3:00 position. 9. Put on grounding wrist strap. 10. Remove OBC Front Cover by loosening 8 captive screws. 11. Remove Circuit Boards from slots A1 through A6 by rotating ejectors and removing Boards from Card Cage. 12. Place Boards in Static Bag. 13. Remove and keep ribbon cable from front of CPU Board. 14. Remove and keep CPU Board from slot A8 by loosening 2 screws on front plate of Board assembly Place in a static bag.
1271
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 15. Remove ribbon cable, J9, from OBC backplane inside of Card Cage. 16. Rotate Gantry so OBC is at 6 oclock position. Disconnect 5 connectors J1 through J5 attached to Control assembly. 17. Remove J9 connector which leads AC Power to OBC. 18. Remove tyraps mounting cables to control assembly brackets. 19. Remove 4 screws retaining control assembly bracket to OBC and Casting. 20. Remove control assembly and bracket from Gantry. 21. Remove and keep 2 screws assembling Collimator Connector Bulk Head to OBC assembly. 22. Remove 8 Fiber Optic Link Connectors from OBC Backplane. 23. Remove DC Power Connector, J6,from OBC Backplane. 24. Remove 2 coaxial cables, J4 and J5 from OBC Backplane. 25. Remove Ground Strap connecting OBC Backplane to Chassis. 26. Remove 6 (six) 96 Position Connectors from J3 on slots A1 through A6 on OBC Backplane. 27. Remove and keep 2 screws holding Harness Ground Bracket to OBC Chassis. 28. Disconnect DAS DC Power Connector J 29. Remove Filament Power Connector J17 from OBC Backplane. 30. Using a short screw driver remove 8 screws mounting OBC Backplane to Card Cage.
CAUTION
Note:
Carefully check locations before installing connectors.
Install Backplane and replace all 8 screws but do not tighten. Install Circuit Boards in A1 and A6 to align Backplane to Card Cage then securely tighten 8 mounting screws. 31. Remove Backplane. 32. Replace Backplane. 33. To reassemble, reverse steps.
12125
46297603G1 OBC Thermistor 1. Move table to lowest elevation. 2. Turn off facility power to PDU. Use tag and lockout procedures. 3. Remove gantry side covers. 4. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. 5. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. 6. Remove scan window. 7. Open front cover. 8. Rotate Gantry OBC to the 3 oclock position.
1272
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 9. Loosen 4 captive screws on DAS PS Assembly and remove cover. 10. Remove and set aside Power Cord from Fan. 11. Remove and keep 2 screws mounting cables to fan housing. 12. Remove and keep 6 screws mounting fan housing to OBC Chassis. Three Screws are located in the base of the DAS PS Assembly. The remaining 3 screws are located on the opposite side of the Card Cage. 13. Remove and set aside Fan Housing. 14. Detach J8 Connector from OBC Chassis. 15. Unscrew Thermistor from OBC Chassis. 16. Replace Thermistor. 17. To reassemble, reverse steps.
CAUTION
12126 46296317P1 OBCSTC PS, OBC
Use care to route through thermistor leads so that fan housing will not pinch leads.
1. Move table to lowest elevation. 2. Turn off facility power to PDU. Use tag and lockout procedures. 3. Remove gantry side covers. 4. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. 5. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. 6. Remove scan window. 7. Open front cover. 8. Rotate gantry OBC to the 2 oclock position and engage rotational lock. 9. Remove two (2) nuts mounting Z Bracket near the center of the power supply and remove bracket. 10. Verify there is no voltage on the leads connected to power supplies. 11. Remove all leads from each end of power supply. 12. Remove two (2) screws mounting power supply to OBC and remove supply. 13. Install new power supply by reversing the above steps. a. Make sure voltage selection jumper located near AC input terminals is in the 115 VAC Position. b. When reconnecting leads to power supply be sure to observe marking on leads for correct location. 12127 46296317P1 OBCSTC PS, STC 1. Turn off facility power to PDU. Use tag and lockout procedures. 2. Remove left Side Cover.
1273
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 3. Loosen two wingnuts retaining STC Chassis. 4. Rotate STC Chassis 90 degrees and lock into position. 5. Remove seven leads from DC output (bottom) of Power Supply. 6. Remove small connector with single black lead (J1) from DC output area of Power Supply (bottom). 7. Remove two(2) AC input leads from Power Supply. 8. Remove two (2) nuts retaining power supply Z bracket and remove bracket. 9. Remove two (2) screws fastening Power Supply to front flange on card cage and remove Power Supply. 10. Replace Power Supply by reversing the above steps.
Note:
Use care to ensure power supply lead connections are correct. Use pushtorelease tab to rotate card cage back into position.
12128
46264832P1 SCALAN Board, STC No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices.
12129
46297837G1 Power Brush Block Assm ETC 1. Position table to lowest elevation. 2. Turn off facility power to PDUuse tag and lockout procedure. 3. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. 4. Turn off all three (3) switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. 5. Open top cover and engage prop rod. 6. Remove and set aside Gantry scan window. 7. Open rear cover. 8. Remove the slip ring covers.
CAUTION
See Slip Ring Brush Debris Handling and Removal Procedures before proceeding. 9. There are three (3) brush blocks, two (2) signal and one (1) power. To remove either of the signal brush blocks, a stationary board (buffer) must be removedrefer to their procedures for a detailed explanation. To remove the power brush block the grounding strap must be removed from at least the power brush block bracket. If the power brush block is being replaced, the grounding strap must be removed from the power brush block, as well. 10. Remove Brush Block: a. Remove two (2) of the four (4) bolts, one on the top of the block and one on the bottom. b. With one hand, hold the brush block against the brackets and remove the remaining screws with the other hand. c. Remove brush block from the brackets.
1274
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 11 11. Install Brush Block:
a. Hold Brush Block in the correct position and align brush tips with slip ring tracks. b. Compress brush tip springs against the slip ring tracks and hold brush block against the brackets. c. Install all four (4) screws, but do not tighten.
d. Center both top and bottom of brush tips for all brushes by adjusting brush block. e. Tighten all four (4) screws to 22+/ 3inlbs. (0.254 +/ .035 mkg) 12. Rotate Gantry manually and check that the brush tips are centered between the track barriers. 13. To reassemble, reverse steps 19. 12129A S/A Pwr Brush Asm 2238140-2, High 2257517, Low 2257529 Replacement
1. 2. Position table to lowest elevation. Turn off facility power to PDU.
DANGER
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. CAUTION Avoid inhalation
USE AND FOLLOW TAG AND LOCK OUT PROCEDURES.

Remove, and set aside, both gantry side covers. Turn off all three (3) switches on the status control box, on right side of Gantry. Open top cover, and engage prop rod. Remove, and set aside, Gantry scan window. Open rear cover. Remove the slip ring covers. Read The Handling and Removal of Slip Ring Brush Debris before you start this procedure. 9. The Gantry contains three (3) brush blocks: two for signal and one for power. a. Remove the stationary buffer board or stationary terminator to access and remove either of the signal brush blocks. Refer to the corresponding procedures for a detailed explanation. b. Remove the grounding strap at the power brush block bracket before you remove the power brush block. 10. Remove Brush Block: a. Remove two (2) of the four (4) bolts, one on the top of the block and one on the bottom. b. With one hand, hold the brush block against the brackets, and remove the remaining screws with the other hand. 11. Remove brush block from the brackets. (Skip step 12 if replacing entire assembly) 12. Remove and install replacement modules: a. Place brush block on a hard surface with the tips in the up position. There are five high power modules and three low power modules. b. To remove a module, push the tab on the module out of the locking position. While pushing the tab out of the locking slot, pull the module up. Only pull the module out 2 mm, or just enough to keep the tab from snapping back into the slot. Repeat this procedure on the other side of the module.
1275
Figure 12-1 Power Module Push Tab
Figure 12-2 Power Module Tab c. With the tabs on each side of the module out of the locking slot, pull the module straight out of the brush block housing.
1275A
Figure 12-3 Module Removal d. Align the replacement module in slots and push into brush block housing until the module tabs snap into the locking holes. 13. Install Brush Block: a. Hold the Brush Block in position, and align the brush tips with the slip ring tracks. b. Compress the brush tip springs against the slip ring tracks, and hold the brush block against the brackets. c. Install all four (4) screws, but do not tighten. d. Adjust the brush blocks up against the set screws on the bracket to center the top and bottom of the brush tips on the ring. e. Tighten all four (4) screws to 22 +/-3in-lbs. (0.254 +/-0.035 m-kg) 14. Manually rotate Ganty while you check that the brush tips are centered between the track barriers. 15. Reassamble Gantry.
1275B
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 11 12130 46183027P95 Power Filter Assy, EDAS
No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 12131 46183027P91 Processor Bd, EDAS
WARNING
GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS: Safety glasses must be worn at all times. Use approved lifting methods. Observe Ryerson Road Standard Safety Protocol. SPECIFIC SAFETY REQUIREMENTS: ANTISTATIC HANDLING If the boards are not in the DAS or in a conductive bag, you must wear a wrist strap when handling DAS Boards. Boards must never be placed on nonconductive surfaces such as white bench tops, plastic covered books or nonconductive plastic bags. CLEANLINESS Any dirt on the surface increases leakage current on the filter or converter cards and will cause the DAS to fail the drift spec. All testers will be required to use white cotton gloves or the board extractor when inserting or removing boards from DAS. Finger prints on the board will cause trouble when humidity is high.
12132
46288308G1 Printed wire assembly, Laser Control 1. Move table to lowest elevation. 2. Turn off facility power to PDU. Use tag and lockout procedures. 3. Remove gantry side covers. 4. Turn off all three switches on status control box on right side of Gantry. 5. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. 6. Remove scan window. 7. Open front cover.
1275C
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 8. Rotate Gantry so that OBC is at the 3 oclock position and engage gantry rotational lock. 9. Remove connectors J1 through J5 from control assembly. 10. Remove 4 screws which mount control assembly to the back side of the OBC.
Note:
Wear grounded wrist strap when removing circuit boards. 11. From the bottom of the control assembly, locate the laser control PWB and remove the four (4) mounting screws attaching PWB to Control assembly. 12. Remove the J1 connector from the laser control PWB and remove board. 13. Install new laser control PWB by reversing the above steps.
12133
46321058G1 or 46-264698G1 or 2253794 Rotating Buffer Board Note: There are three (3) types of buffer and terminator PWBs. Check the part numbers of the PWBs on your system before ordering replacement parts.
CAUTION
See Slip Ring Brush Debris Handling and Removal Procedures before proceeding. 1. Position table to lowest elevation. 2. Turn off facility power to PDU use tag and lockout procedure. 3. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. 4. Turn off all three (3) switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. 5. Open top cover and engage prop rod. 6. Remove and set aside Gantry scan window. 7. Open rear cover. 8. Attach Grounded Wrist Strap. 9. Locate the rotating buffer PWB on the inside surface of the slip ring. (The Buffer PWB has two coax cables connected to it.) 10. Disconnect the two (2) coax cables connected to J1 and J2 on the Buffer PWB. 11. Remove the seven (7) 440 screw and one (1) 1/420 ground screw fastening the Buffer PWB to the slip ring and remove Buffer PWB from Gantry. 12. Install the new Rotating Buffer PWB by reversing the above steps.
12134
46264698G1 No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices.
12135
46321054G1 or 46-264702G1 or 2238323 Rotating Terminator Board
WARNING
NOTE: THERE ARE THREE (3) TYPES OF BUFFER AND TERMINATOR PWBS. CHECK THE PART NUMBERS OF THE PWBS ON YOUR SYSTEM BEFORE ORDERING REPLACEMENT PARTS.
1276
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 See Slip Ring Brush Debris Handling and Removal Procedures before proceeding. 1. Position table to lowest elevation. 2. Turn off facility power to PDU use tag and lockout procedure. 3. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. 4. Turn off all three (3) switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. 5. Open top cover and engage prop rod. 6. Remove and set aside Gantry scan window. 7. Open rear cover. 8. Attach grounded wrist strap. 9. Locate the rotating terminator PWB on the inside surface of the slip ring. (The Terminator PWB has no cables attached to it.) 10. Remove the seven (7) 440 screws and one (1) 1/420 ground screw fastening the terminator PWB to the slip ring and remove terminator PWB from Gantry. 11. Install the new rotating terminator PWB by reversing the above steps.
CAUTION
12136
46264702G1 No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices.
12137
46321056G1 or 46-264696G1 or 2253794 Stationary Buffer Board Note: There are three (3) types of buffer and terminator PWBs. Check the part numbers of the PWBs on your system before ordering replacement parts. See Slip Ring Brush Debris Handling and Removal Procedures before proceeding. 1. Position table to lowest elevation. 2. Turn off facility power to PDU use tag and lockout procedure. 3. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. 4. Turn off all 3 switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. 5. Open top cover and engage prop rod. 6. Remove and set aside Gantry scan window. 7. Open rear cover. 8. Remove slip ring covers. 9. Attach a Grounded Wrist Strap. 10. Disconnect three cables at connectors J1, J2 and J3. 11. Remove eight (8) 440 screws fastening the Stationary Buffer PWB to the brush block assembly.
CAUTION
1277
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 12. Remove the Stationary Buffer PWB from the Gantry. 13. Install the new Stationary Buffer PWB by reversing the above steps.
12139
46321052G1 or 46264696G1 or 2238323 Stationary Terminator Board Note: There are three (3) types of buffer and terminator PWBs. Check the part numbers of the PWBs on your system before ordering replacement parts. See Slip Ring Brush Debris Handling and Removal Procedures before proceeding. 1. Position table to lowest elevation. 2. Turn off facility power to PDUuse tag and lockout procedure. 3. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. 4. Turn off all three (3) switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. 5. Open top cover and engage prop rod. 6. Remove and set aside Gantry scan window. 7. Open rear cover. 8. Remove slip ring covers. 9. Attach a Grounded Wrist Strap. 10. Remove seven(7) 440 screws fastening the terminator PWB to the brush block assembly. 11. Remove terminator PWB from Gantry. 12. Replace terminator PWB by reversing the above steps.
CAUTION
12140
46264700G1 RCOM Bd 1. Turn facility circuit breaker OFF, tag and lock. 2. Remove and set aside gantry side covers. 3. Turn off all 3 switches on status control box. 4. Rotate Gantry so OBC is at 3 oclock position and engage rotational lock. 5. Put on grounding wrist strap. 6. Remove OBC Front Cover by loosening 8 captive screws. 7. Remove board from appropriate slot (listed above) by rotating ejectors and removing board from card cage. 8. Place board in Static Bag. 9. Install new board by reversing the above steps.
1278
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12141 46296898G1 G1 Rear Cover Assm
No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 12142 46327212G1 Rear Cover Assm (G3 Gantry) No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 12143 46229342P1 Rear Cover Lamp 1. Turn off facility power to PDU use tag and lock out procedures. 2. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. 3. Turn off all 3 switches on the status Control box on right side of Gantry. 4. Lift Top Cover and engage prop rod. 5. Remove scan window. 6. Open Rear Cover. 7. Disconnect 2 wires leading to Lamp, which is located in upper center portion of the rear cover. 8. Remove and keep Retaining Ring from inside of Cover. 9. Replace Lamp and retaining ring. 10. 10.To reassemble, reverse steps. 12144 46288938G1 Rear Cover Mic Bd 46297488P1 Rear Microphone 1. Move table to lowest elevation. 2. Turn off facility power to PDU. Use tag and lockout procedures. 3. Remove gantry side covers. 4. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. 5. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. 6. Remove scan window. 7. Open rear cover. 8. Locate Rear Microphone Interface PWB on the inside of the rear cover near the top of the cone and remove the red and black leads from the terminal block by loosening retaining screws. 9. Remove two (2) nuts from studs and remove microphone by pulling the device straight out from the outside of the rear cover. 10. Install new microphone by threading the red and black leads through the bottom mounting hole in the rear cover. Next insert the two studs on the microphone into the two mounting holes in the rear cover. (Be sure the red and black leads are in the slotted cutout which is a part of the bottom mounting hole.)
12145
1279
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 11. Thread red and black leads through center hole on microphone interface PWB and place PWB over the two mounting studs on inside of cover and install the two mounting nuts. 12. Connect the red and black leads to the terminal black and reverse steps 17 to complete the installation. Note: Red lead to position 1 and black lead to position 2.
12146
46297445P1 Ribbon Cable, OBC 1. Turn facility circuit breaker OFF, tag and lock. 2. Remove and set aside gantry side covers. 3. Turn off all three switches on status control box. 4. Rotate Gantry so OBC is at 3 oclock position and engage rotational lock. 5. Attach Ground Wrist Strap. 6. Loosen 8 screws and remove Front Cover from OBC assembly. 7. Remove Circuit Board from slot 6 on OBC. 8. Place Board in Static Bag. 9. Use ejectors to remove Ribbon Cable connectors from front of CPU card and OBC Backplane. 10. Open Cable Clamp holding Ribbon Cable located next to CPU Card. 11. Replace Ribbon Cable. 12. To reassemble, reverse steps.
12147
46296937G1 G1 Right Side Cover Assm No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices.
12148
46327201G1 Right Side Cover Assm No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices.
12149
46297291G1 Rotating Harness, Gantry (Use with 12V Laser) No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices.
12150
2100664 Rotating Harness, Gantry (Use with 5V Laser) No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices.
1280
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12151 46327086G1 RPSCOM to Gantry Bulkhead, 75 Ohms
Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good service practices. 12152 46296993G1 Scan Switch Assm 1. Turn off facility power to PDU. Use tag and lockout procedures. 2. Remove right side cover. 3. Disconnect main harness connectors, J1 and J2, from back side of scan switch assembly. 4. Remove lower screw from scan switch assembly mounting flange. (This screw is located behind the bracket containing the revolution counter and service switch connector and also mounts this bracket to the gantry.) Carefully set revolution counter assembly aside leaving leads connected for reassembly later. 5. Remove upper screw from scan switch assembly and remove assembly from gantry. 6. Install new scan switch assembly by reversing the above steps. Note: Place all switches on the scan switch assembly in the OFF Position before turning on power.
12153
2101967 Scan Window Remove Scan Window: 1. To remove the Scan Window grab the window at the top and pull firmly downward. Continue pulling until the top of the scan window is in contact with the bottom portion of the scan windows. 2. While holding the top and bottom portions of the scan window together, grasp both sides of the scan window and move them together while lightly pulling up until the window can be freed from between the front and rear covers. Install Scan Window: 1. Before installing the scan window ensure that both the front and rear covers are in the closed position. 2. With the scan window deformed as shown in Figure 3, nest the scan window at the bottom of the opening between the front and rear covers (Figure 4) such that the rivets are in the 6 oclock position. 3. Once the initial seating of scan window is complete, let the window unfold slowly, working both sides of the window into position, starting at the bottom and finishing at the top. 4. Verify that the window is properly positioned with the rivets at the 12 oclock position and the mylar window slit at either the 3 or 9 oclock position.
1281
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 11 12154 46297475G1 SCOM Bd
1. Turn off facility power to PDU. Use tag and lockout procedures. 2. Remove left Side Cover. 3. Loosen 2 screws retaining front cover of STC and remove cover. 4. Loosen two wingnuts retaining STC Chassis. 5. Rotate STC Chassis 90 degrees and lock into position. Note: Wear grounded wrist strap when removing circuit boards. 6. Remove PWB using extractors. 7. Install new SCOM board assembly by reversing the above steps. Note: 12155 Use pushtorelease tab to rotate card cage back into position.
46297839G1 Signal Brush Block ETC
CAUTION
See Slip Ring Brush Debris Handling and Removal Procedures before proceeding. 1. Position table to lowest elevation. 2. Turn off facility power to PDUuse tag and lockout procedure. 3. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. 4. Turn off all three (3) switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. 5. Open top cover and engage prop rod. 6. Remove and set aside Gantry scan window. 7. Open rear cover. 8. Remove the slip ring covers. 9. There are three (3) brush blocks, two (2) signal and one (1) power. To remove either of the signal brush blocks, a stationary circuit board must be removed; refer to their procedures for a detailed explanation. To remove the power brush block the grounding strap must be removed from at least the power brush block bracket. If the power brush block is being replaced, the grounding strap must be removed from the power brush block, as well. 10. Remove Brush Block: a. Remove two (2) of the four (4) bolts, one on the top of the block and one on the bottom. b. With one hand, hold the brush block against the brackets and remove the remaining screws with the other hand. c. Remove brush block from the brackets.
11. Install Brush Block: a. Hold Brush Block in the correct position and align brush tips with slip ring tracks. b. Compress brush tip springs against the slip ring tracks and hold brush block against the brackets. 1282
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 11 c.
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 Install all four screws, but do not tighten.
d. Center both top and bottom of brush tips for all brushes by adjusting brush block. e. Tighten all four (4) screws to 22 +/ 3 inlbs. (0.254 +/ 0.35 mkg). 12. Rotate Gantry manually and check that the brush tips are centered between the track barriers. 13. To reassemble, reverse steps 19. 12155A S/A Signal Brush Block 2238141-2 or Signal Brush Module 2254362
CAUTION Avoid inhalation Read The Handling and Removal of Slip Ring Brush Debris before you start this procedure. 1. 2. Position table to lowest elevation. Turn off facility power to PDU.
DANGER
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
USE AND FOLLOW TAG AND LOCK OUT PROCEDURES.

Remove, and set aside, both gantry side covers. Turn off all three (3) switches on the status control box, on right side of Gantry. Open top cover, and engage prop rod. Remove, and set aside, Gantry scan window. Open rear cover. Remove the slip ring covers. The Gantry contains three (3) brush blocks: two for signal and one for power. Remove the stationary buffer board to access and remove either of the signal brush blocks. Refer to the corresponding procedures for a detailed explanation. Remove the grounding strap from at the power brush block bracket before you remove the power brush block.
10. Remove Brush Block: a. Remove two (2) of the four (4) bolts, one on the top of the block and one on the bottom. b. With one hand, hold the brush block against the brackets, and remove the remaining screws with the other hand. c. Remove brush block from the brackets. 11. Remove and install replacement modules: a. Place the signal brush block on a hard surface with the tips down and remove the two screws that attach the module to the brush block body.
Terminator
These screws remove the signal module
Figure 12-4 Signal Brush Block Module
1283

b. Insert the replacement module and tighten the screws. 12. Install Brush Block: a. Hold the Brush Block in position, and align the brush tips with the slip ring tracks. b. Compress the brush tip springs against the slip ring tracks, and hold the brush block against the brackets. c. Install all four (4) screws, but do not tighten. d. Adjust the brush blocks up against the set screws on the bracket to center the top and bottom of the brush tips on the ring. e. Tighten all four (4) screws to 22 3in-lbs. (0.254 0.035 m-kg) 13. Manually rotate Gantry while you check that the brush tips are centered between the track barriers. 14. Reassemble Gantry.
12156
46297840G1 or 46-296001G1 or 2239006 (ETC and S/A) Slip Ring Assm Precondition: 2 Serviceman are needed to replace this part. An additional person will be needed for approximately 5 minutes.
CAUTION
See Slip Ring Brush Debris Handling and Removal Procedures before proceeding. 1. Position table to lowest elevation. 2. Turn off facility power to PDU use tag and lockout procedure. 3. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. 4. Turn off all three (3) switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. 5. Open top cover and engage prop rod. 6. Remove and set aside Gantry scan window. 7. Open Rear cover. 8. Disconnect two (2) electrical connections leading to the top and rear covers located on the inside of the rear covers left hinge arm. Also disconnect the two (2) wires leading to the rear cover lamp and the harness leading to the rear cover microphone. 9. Remove the top cover. Start with prop rod engaged. (2 people are required). a. Disconnect the top cover gas spring at the top cover by removing the retaining clip and grasping the gas spring and firmly pulling outward. Let the gas spring swing down and hang from the rear cover support. Reinstall the retaining clip into the gas spring for safe keeping. b. Remove the rear cover portion of the middle hinge used to hold the top cover in place. By removing this portion of the middle hinge, the top cover can be moved laterally to the right to free the top cover from the rear cover. Set the top cover aside, out of the way of the rear cover removal process. 10. Remove the Rear Cover by having two (2) people grabbing the bottom of the cover on each side near the swing doors. 11. While lifting on the Rear Cover Assembly, a third person needs to guide the pivot pins out of the pivot arm on each side.
1283A
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 12. Place Rear Cover against the wall and on top of a blanket to prevent scratching. If space permits, lay cover horizontally on blanket on floor. 13. Remove the two (2) Slip Ring Covers.
CAUTION
See Slip Ring Brush Debris Handling and Removal Procedures before proceeding. 14. Attach Grounded Wrist Strap. 15. Remove two (2) BNC Connectors (J1 and J2) from Rotating Buffer Board. 16. Remove both the Rotating Buffer Board and the Rotating Terminator Board by removing seven (7) 440 socket head cap screws and one (1) 1/4 20 screw per board. Once the two (2) boards are removed, from the slip ring, they must be placed in antistatic bags. 17. Remove and keep two (2) Lexan terminal covers that cover the electrical junctions between the gantry and the slip ring. Each cover is held on by two (2) 1/4 20 screws. 18. Disconnect all cable connections on the inside of the Slip Ring, including the two (2) Ground Strap connections. 19. Remove both the Stationary Terminator Board (seven(7) screws) and the Stationary Buffer Board (eight (8) screws) by removing the appropriate number of 440 socket head cap screws. Also, on the Stationary Buffer Board, three (3) BNC connectors (J1,J2 and J3) need to be disconnected. Once the two (2) boards are removed from the Slip Ring, they must be placed in antistatic bags. 20. Remove and set aside the three (3) Brush Blocks, two (2) signal and one power. Each Brush Block is held in place with four (4) bolts. The Power Brush electrical connections and the grounding strap must be disconnected prior to removal. 21. Remove and set aside the six (6) Brush Block Brackets. Each bracket is retained by a shoulder screw and a socket head cap screw. 22. Open the front cover and remove two (2) access panels. 23. Rotate gantry until one bolt is located in each of the two (2) access holes. 24. Remove and keep two (2) bolts located in the access holes. 25. Rotate Gantry until another set of bolts are located in the access holes. 26. Repeat steps 24 and 25 until six (6) bolts have been removed. 27. Rotate Gantry until final set of bolts are in the access holes. 28. One Service person should push against the back face of the Slip Ring.
Note:
There is a cutout on the Slip Ring and a pilot on the bearing flange to hold Slip Ring in place provided there is pressure against the back face of the Slip Ring. 29. Remove Slip Ring assembly by grasping Slip Ring with both hands, one person on each side, and pull Slip Ring off bearing flange. NOTE: The epoxy Slip Ring is fragile and extreme care should be used in handling. DO NOT STAND SLIP RING ON END, LIE IT FLAT.
1284
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 30. To replace the Slip Ring, hold the Slip Ring next to Bearing flange and rotate the bearing and /or Slip Ring to align the black line on the inside of Slip Ring with the small hole on the bearing flange pilot. 31. Mount Slip Ring onto Bearing Flange (One Person should continue holding the Slip Ring onto Bearing Flange while the other person performs step 32. 32. Install 2 of 8 Slip Ring Mounting Screws. Use a small amount of 242Loctite.
Note:
Make sure Slip Ring is flush against Bearing Flange before tightening screws to 5 ft.lbs. 33. Install the remaining six (6) screws. NOTE: Torque screws to 5 ftlbs. (0.0048 mkg) 34. Check torque of all eight (8) screws a second time to 5 ftlbs. (0.0048 mkg) 35. To reassemble, reverse steps 122.
Note: 12157
A third person is needed for a short period of time to install the Rear Cover.
46313423G1 Solid State (SS) Detector Kit 1. Open all gantry covers. WHEN THE GANTRY COVERS ARE OPEN, NEVER PERFORM A PROCEDURE ON THE GANTRY UNTIL THE GANTRY SCAN DRIVE IS IN THE OFF POSITION. FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING CAN RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR LOSS OF LIFE TO YOURSELF OR OTHERS. 2. Turn off the Scan Drive power switch. 3. Rotate the gantry so the tube is at 45 degrees. 4. Lock the gantry in position at 45 degrees. BE SURE THE LOCKING PIN IS ENGAGED IN THE LOCKED POSITION BEFORE REMOVING THE DETECTOR. POSSIBLE INJURY COULD RESULT FROM BEING STRUCK BY THE MOVING GANTRY. 5. Remove the DAS covers. 6. Disconnect the 3 Heater Controller Cables which connect the detector to the detector heater. 7. Install the hoist. The hoist should be connected to the hole which is drilled into the main detector plate at the center of the detector. The hoist cable should be pulled snug. 8. Carefully disconnect all 47 flex cables from the Detector and DAS. Remove the cables and label them so they can be reinstalled into the same location. 9. Remove and keep the 2 detector mounting nuts from each detector mount. 10. Carefully swing the detector off its mounts and out into the gantry. Make sure you do not damage or lose any of the mounting hardware.
WARNING
WARNING
1285
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 11. Carefully lower the detector onto a skid. Make sure you do not set the detector on any cables. 12. At this time it is possible to change damaged mounting hardware. 13. The detector should be installed using the hoist and the hole which is the center of the detector mounting plate. 14. Verify that all mounting hardware is present and in place. 15. Swing the detector into position and install the washer and nuts. Do not tighten the mounting bolts. 16. Mechanically align the detector to the base plate. Check and adjust 3.5 inches across the full arc of the detector. 17. Connect one lead of a DVM to the Frame of the detector and one lead to the gantry rotating base. Verify that the detector is isolated from ground. There should be an infinite resistance measured. If the resistance is not infinite you may have the fiber washers wrong. 18. After the rough alignment is complete, torque the inside detector mounting nut to 25 ftlbs. When the inside nuts have been torqued, tighten the outside nut to 25 ftlbs while holding the inside nut to keep it from turning. If a torque wrench is not available the nuts should be tightened finger tight and tightened 1/2 half a flat with a wrench.
CAUTION
12158 46241600G806 SS Detector
Do not over tighten. Since there are no longer shocks, the detector can be twisted and damaged by excess force.
1. Open all gantry covers. WHEN THE GANTRY COVERS ARE OPEN, NEVER PERFORM A PROCEDURE ON THE GANTRY UNTIL THE GANTRY SCAN DRIVE IS IN THE OFF POSITION. FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING CAN RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR LOSS OF LIFE TO YOURSELF OR OTHERS. 2. Turn off the Scan Drive power switch. 3. Rotate the gantry so the tube is at 45 degrees. 4. Lock the gantry in position at 45 degrees. BE SURE THE LOCKING PIN IS ENGAGED IN THE LOCKED POSITION BEFORE REMOVING THE DETECTOR. POSSIBLE INJURY COULD RESULT FROM BEING STRUCK BY THE MOVING GANTRY. 5. Remove the DAS covers. 6. Disconnect the 3 Heater Controller Cables which connect the detector to the detector heater.
WARNING
WARNING
1286
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 7. Install the hoist. The hoist should be connected to the hole which is drilled into the main detector plate at the center of the detector. The hoist cable should be pulled snug. 8. Carefully disconnect all 47 flex cables from the Detector and DAS. Remove the cables and label them so they can be reinstalled into the same location. 9. Remove and keep the 2 detector mounting nuts from each detector mount. 10. Carefully swing the detector off its mounts and out into the gantry. Make sure you do not damage or lose any of the mounting hardware. 11. Carefully lower the detector onto a skid. Make sure you do not set the detector on any cables. 12. At this time it is possible to change damaged mounting hardware. 13. The detector should be installed using the hoist and the hole which is the center of the detector mounting plate. 14. Verify that all mounting hardware is present and in place. 15. Swing the detector into position and install the washer and nuts. Do not tighten the mounting bolts. 16. Mechanically align the detector to the base plate. Check and adjust 3.5 inches across the full arc of the detector. 17. Connect one lead of a DVM to the Frame of the detector and one lead to the gantry rotating base. Verify that the detector is isolated from ground. There should be an infinite resistance measured. If the resistance is not infinite you may have the fiber washers wrong. 18. After the rough alignment is complete, torque the inside detector mounting nut to 25 ftlbs. When the inside nuts have been torqued , tighten the outside nut to 25 ftlbs while holding the inside nut to keep it from turning. If a torque wrench is not available the nuts should be tightened finger tight and tightened 1/2 half a flat with a wrench.
CAUTION
Do not over tighten. Since there are no longer shocks, the detector can be twisted and damaged by excess force. Perform the following checks after completion of this procedure: Alignments QCal Crosstalk Calibration DAS integration Alpha Vector Cal N number check/adjust Image Series
12159
46241600G6 SS Detector Kit No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices.
1287
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12160 46297092G1 Stationary AC Harness
Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good service practices. 12161 46296748G1 Stationary Harness, Gantry Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good service practices. 12162 46296664P1 Stepper Motor Drive (Filter) 1. Position table to lowest elevation. 2. Turn off facility power to PDUuse tag and lockout procedure. 3. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. 4. Turn off all three switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. 5. Open top cover and engage prop rod. 6. Remove and set aside Gantry scan window. 7. Open front cover. 8. Rotate Gantry until Collimator is at the 3 oclock position. 9. Lock Gantry into position by engaging indexer pin lock. 10. To gain access to the BowTie Filter Stepper Motor Drive, the aperture Micro Stepper Drive must be removed. Refer to the Micro Stepper Drive Procedure for details. 11. Through the cut away in the Micro Stepper Drive mounting plate, disconnect the two (2) 6 pin electrical connector from the front of the Stepper Motor Drive, and remove four 832 bolts holding the Stepper Motor Drive. 12. Replace Stepper Motor Drive 13. To reassemble, reverse steps.
1288
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 12163 46136343P12 Switch, STC Assm
1. Turn off facility power to PDU. Use tag and lockout procedures. 2. Remove left Side Cover. 3. Loosen two wingnuts retaining STC Chassis. 4. Rotate STC Chassis 90 degrees and lock into position. 5. Remove two leads from the back of the toggle switch on the right side of the STC Chassis. 6. Remove the retaining nut from the front of the toggle switch and remove the switch from the chassis. 7. Install new switch by reversing the above steps. Note: 12164 46221880P24 Terminal Strip, Base No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 12165 46287264P1 Terminator, STC Assm No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 12166 46296145P1 Tilt Chain No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 12167 46296363P1 Tilt Motor 1. Position table to lowest elevation. 2. Turn off facility power to PDUuse tag and lockout procedure. 3. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. 4. Turn off all 3 switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. 5. Open top cover and engage prop rod. 6. Remove and set aside Gantry scan window. 7. Open front cover. 8. Remove and set aside the center and right inside Base Covers, and the table footswitch cover. 9. Remove the Tilt Motor Power harness to the table connection point and disconnect. Cut and remove the tyraps used to retain the harness. 10. Remove the three bolts that mount motor to gear reducer. Note: One of the four mounting holes is not used 11. Slide Motor off gearbox. 12. Replace Motor, reconnect harness to table, and tyrap harness to base. Use pushtorelease tab to rotate card cage back into position.
1289
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 13. Install key into motor shaft. Align key with keyway in Gearbox.
CAUTION
Key must be fully inserted into motor shaft. No overhang is permissible. 14. Attach Motor to Gear Box. NOTE: Apply Loctite 242 to three bolts. 15. To reassemble, reverse steps.
12168
46183027P90 Timing Bd, EDAS (Slot 55) GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS: Safety glasses must be worn at all times. Use approved lifting methods. Observe Ryerson Road Standard Safety Protocol. SPECIFIC SAFETY REQUIREMENTS:
WARNING
12169
46220247P2 Top Cover Fan 1. Turn off facility power to PDU. Use tag and lockout procedures. 2. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. 3. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. 4. Open top cover and engage prop rod. 5. Remove and set aside gantry scan window. 6. Open Rear Cover. 7. Locate which of the four (4) fans need to be replaced. 8. Disconnect the electrical connection on the fan to be replaced. 9. Loosen/remove the three (3) screws and washers as needed, which holds the faulty fan in place. 10. Remove fan from top cover. 11. Remove fan guard from faulty fan. 12. Place fan guard on to new fan. 13. Install new fan into top cover. 14. Reconnect electrical connection. 15. To complete reassembly, reverse steps.
1290
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 12170 46297738P1 Top Cover Gas Spring
NOTE: DUE TO ALIGNMENT AND DIMENSIONAL VARIATION OF THE GANTRY FRONT COVER, THE FRONT COVER MAY NEED TO BE REMOVED TO ALLOW REPLACEMENT OF A GANTRY GAS SPRING. IF NECESSARY, THE TASK OF REMOVING THE FRONT COVER WILL REQUIRE THREE PEOPLE FOR A SHORT PERIOD OF TIME. THE FRONT COVER ASSEMBLY WEIGHS LESS THAN 200 LBS. 1. Position table to lowest elevation. 2. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. 3. Turn off all three (3) switches on the status control box on right side of gantry. 4. Remove scan window. 5. Engage Indexer Pin and lock gantry 6. On right side of gantry, remove the two (2) flat head screws holding the spacer block on the Bases hard stop. Leave the spacer sitting in position for the time being. 7. Tilt the gantry until the front stop on the pivot sector touches the loose spacer block left in position on the Base as described in step 6. 8. Stop tilting and remove the spacer block. 9. CAUTION: The gantry must be able to tilt +/ 30.25 degrees at a very minimum to meet system requirements. With the spacer block in position the gantry will be able to meet this requirement. When the spacer block is removed, the gantry is capable of tilting forward further than 30.25 degrees. HOWEVER, with the spacer block removed the gas springs will most likely prevent the gantry hardstops from coming all the way together. DO NOT force the gantry hard stops together the gas springs may become damaged and rupture. Proceed to tilt with caution bearing in mind two issues: A) Gas Spring Length Wiggle both gas springs as the two hard stops approach each other, stopping when one of the gas springs feels unloaded (reaches full extension). IMPORTANT both gas springs will have to be monitored to ensure that they are not being extended past their fully extended length. B) Front Cover interference Due to dimensional variation in the Front Cover, the Front Cover and/or Front Cover hinge doors may contact the Gantry Base during tilting operations greater than 30.25 degrees and prevent enough tilt to exchange a gas spring. Monitor the relationship between the front fiberglass covers and the Gantry Base (on both sides of the Gantry) during tilting operations. If interference occurs, STOP TILTING. Return gantry to an upright position (zero degrees of tilt) and remove the front cover per the following steps. If interference is not an issue proceed to tilt, monitoring the gas spring length and go on to step 10. Front Cover Removal a. Return gantry to zero degrees of tilt. b. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. c. Open front cover.
1291
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 d. Disconnect electrical connection near the top hinge on left side of gantry. e. Remove Front Cover by having two people lift the front cover, while a third person removes the two hinge pins on the left side of the gantry. f. Place the front cover horizontally on a clean protected surface, such as on a blanket on the floor. Special handling will be necessary to protect the covers surface from becoming scratched.
g. Disengage the top cover prop rod and gently lower the top cover down onto the gantry. DO NOT ROTATE THE GANTRY IN THIS STATE. If the top cover is left in the propped position, it may fall rearward during tilting operations. h. Repeat steps 6, 7, 8 and 9 10. Remove the two (2) retaining clips from the ends of the gas spring that has reached full extension even if it is not the gas spring that needs to be replaced. 11. Grasp the gas spring near the top end fitting and firmly pull away from the gantry. Once the top end fitting is free, continue pulling until the bottom end fitting is also freed. Note: The retaining clips must be removed prior to gas spring removal. 12. If it is necessary to remove the second gas spring, continue tilting the gantry until the second gas spring has reached full extension. Remove the gas spring as detailed in steps 10 and 11. 13. Clean and inspect the ball studs. If the ball studs are worn or damaged, remove and replace using Loctite 242. Torque to 40 ftlbs. ( 0.0384 kgm) 14. Take the new gas spring(s) and ensure the end fittings are tightened down. Tilt the gantry until the gas spring will fit on to the two (2) ball studs. If both gas springs have been removed, place the first gas spring on the longest side first (longest meaning the side that has the greatest distance between ball studs). Then proceed to tilt toward zero degrees until the second gas spring fits on to the other two ball studs. 15. Install the gas spring in the rod down/tube up position. Firmly push the end fitting around the ball stud on both the top and bottom. Replace the retaining clip on each end fitting. IMPORTANT TO EFFECTIVELY RETAIN THE GAS SPRING IN POSITION AROUND THE BALL STUD, THE RETAINING CLIP MUST BE PROPERLY POSITIONED THROUGH BOTH OPENINGS IN THE END FITTING. 16. To verify that the new gas spring(s) will allow the system to meet the tilt requirement of 30.25 degrees, simply attempt to insert the spacer block between the base and pivot sector hardstops at the the time of gas spring installation. If the spacer block CAN NOT be inserted due to lack of space between the two hardstops, then the gas spring installation length is ACCEPTABLE. If the spacer block CAN be inserted, then the gas spring length must be increased by utilizing a flat washer (ie. P/N 1000904P489 0.328) ID/ 0.500 OD/ 0.062 Thk) as a spacer between the end fitting and gas spring. Remove one end fitting and install one flat washer. Apply Loctite 242 and tighten end fitting. Adjust the tilt and install the gas spring. Again, use the spacer block as a test to ensure that the system has proper tilt capability.
1292
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 17. Once the new gas spring is installed, return the gantry to the zero degree tilted position as indicated by the tilt indicator bracket on the right side of the Gantry. Reinstall the spacer block to the Base hard stop using the two (2) flat head screws. 18. If the Front Cover was removed, then: a. Lift the Top Cover and engage the prop rod b. Replace Front Cover and reconnect the electrical connection c. Adjust/align Front Cover
d. Lower Top Cover 19. To ensure a successful gas spring replacement, tilt the gantry to +30 degrees and 30 degrees as indicated by the display monitor located on top of the Front Cover. Note: Top cover must be in the down position before tilting occurs. 20. To complete reassembly, reverse steps 16 12171 46297797G1 Top Cover Thermostat Assm 1. Turn off facility power to PDU. Use tag and lockout procedures. 2. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. 3. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box of right side of gantry. 4. Open top cover and engage prop rod. 5. Remove and set aside gantry scan window. 6. Open Rear Cover. 7. Locate thermostat assembly on left side of gantry top cover. 8. Disconnect two (2) electrical connections, one from each side of the thermostat assembly. 9. Remove four (4) screws and thermostat assembly. 10. Replace thermostat assembly. 11. Reconnect the two electrical connections. 12. To complete reassembly, reverse steps 1 12172 46296936G1 Top Cover Assm No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 12173 46297396P1 Tube Cooling Relay 1. Position table to lowest elevation. 2. Turn off facility power to PDUuse tag and lockout procedure. 3. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. 4. Turn off all 3 switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. 5. Open top cover and engage prop rod.
1293
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 6. Remove and set aside Gantry scan window. 7. Open front cover. 8. Rotate Gantry so that OBC is at the 3 oclock position and engage gantry rotational lock. 9. Remove connectors J1 through J5 from control assembly. 10. Remove 4 screws which mount control assembly to the back of the OBC. 11. From the bottom of the control assembly locate the tube cooling relay (normally closed) and remove the four (4) leads attached to positions 1 through 4. 12. Remove two (2) nuts attaching relay to chassis and remove relay. 13. Install new relay by reversing the above steps.
12174
46309500G1 XRay Tube Tube Change: Remove Old Tube WARNING: BE SURE THAT THE LOCKING PIN IS ENGAGED IN THE LOCKED POSITION BEFORE REMOVING THE TUBE UNIT. POSSIBLE INJURY COULD RESULT FROM BEING STRUCK BY MOVING PARTS ON THE ROTATING STRUCTURE. 1. This procedure involves opening the Gantry Covers for access to the tube mounting interface. 2. Flip the AXIAL DRIVE ENABLE and 550 VDC (HVDC) ENABLE switches to the OFF position. These switches are located inside of the Gantry facing the *right side cover. Note: Right side is referenced when viewing the Gantry from the table side. 3. Rotate the failed tube unit to the 3 oclock position. 4. Lock the Gantry in place using the locking mechanism. Rotate the Gantry until the locking pin lines up with the desired positioning hole in the Gantry. Turn off facility power to PDU. Use tag and lockout procedures. 5. Remove retainer bolt and raise the gantry crane to its uppermost position and insert locking pin. 6. Turn off the Gantry Power. 7. Disconnect the system stator cable from the 4 pin matenlok connector on front of the tube unit. Also disconnect the tube I.D. (12 pin connector) system cable on top of the tube unit. Then, disconnect the pump and fan (4 pin matenlok) power system cable and the ground strap from the top of the tube unit. 8. Remove the anode and the cathode cable by first loosening each cable locking ring with the spanner wrench. Pull the cable terminal out of the receptacles. Clean up any oil that drips from the cable terminal. Soak up any oil in oil wells with paper towels. 9. Attach the hoist to the crane and tube. Ground the ends of the cable to the Gantry frame to ensure no voltage.
WARNING
1294
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 10. Remove four 3/816 hex nuts and two mounting bars. First, remove the lower mounting bar and the associated hex nuts. Next, remove the upper mounting bar and the associated hex nuts.
CAUTION
To minimize the chance of injuring your hand, the mounting bars must be removed in the order indicated. 11. Lower the failed tube unit on to the floor with the tube unit resting on fans. 12. After every tube change, shutdown the software and then start it up again. This protocol is required so that the system can interrogate the proper config file that contains information on the tube I.D. resistors. To shut down the system, proceed as follows:
Note:
Words on the command line below that are underlined followed by <ENTER> means to type that word and then press the ENTER key. <suiteID>_OCOsd<ENTER> The system will shut down to the PROM monitor level as indicated by the caret prompt (>). To start up the system from PROMmonitor level, proceed as follows: > b <ENTER> Boot Unix, but answer N to not start applications. Tube Failure Codes: The following Tube Failure Codes are used for tube tracking. Use these codes to report the reason a tube was changed. AI: Image Artifact BG: Broken Glass CA: Casing Arcing CB: Casing Bubbles/Particles Seen CL: Casing Oil Leak GS: Grid Short OC: OtherCathode Related OE: Tube Loss Due to Failure Elsewhere OF: Open Filament OG: Arcing OH: OtherHousing Related OL: Generator Overload OR: OtherRotor Related PF: Overheat/Pump Failure PT: Pulled Tube (No Failure) RF: Frozen Rotor RN: Noisy Rotor SD: Shipping Damage/Error SS: Stator Open/Stator Short XL: Low XRay Output
1295
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 Install New Tube: 1. If the new tube unit was in a cold environment during transport or storage, etc., allow it to warm to room temperature prior to installation. 2. Visually inspect the port to verify that the fixed moly filter is present. The moly filter is identified by 2 dots on the filter at one end of the port. If the filter is not present, DO NOT USE THE TUBE. Turn off facility power to the PDU. Use tag and lockout procedures. 3. Using the hoist, lift the new tube unit up and position the four 1 mounting holes on the tube support bracket over the four threaded studs on the gantry tube support plate. Position the 3 alignment pins on the tube support bracket into the alignment holes on the Gantry Tube Support Plate. Secure the Tube Unit to the rotating structure using the four 3/816 hex nuts and two mounting bars.
Note:
Install the top mounting bar before the bottom one for ease of installation. Torque the 3/816 hex nuts to 30+/1 ft.lbs. 4. Connect the system stator cable to the 4 pin, mateNlok, connector on front of the tube unit near the oil pump. Connect the tube I.D. cable to the 12 pin mateNlok connector on top of the tube. Connect the tube pump and fan power cable to the 4 pin mateNlok connector. Connect the grounding strap to the 1/420 ground stud on the top of the tube unit. 5. Remove the plastic cap plug from each cable receptacle on the tube unit. Be careful not to lose the rubber quad ring. 6. Wet the rubber quad ring in the new tube unit lightly with transformer oil (917) and install it back into the slot at the top of the receptacle retaining ring. 7. Pour transformer oil (917) into the receptacle to a depth of 0.375. 8. Align the cable terminal orienting key with the notch in the receptacle, keeping it centered. Slowly insert the cable to engage the connector pins and to fully seat. 9. Engage the cable locking ring. 10. Rotate the cable strain relief as required for clean cable dress; then tighten the locking ring using a spanner wrench and a torque wrench. Torque to 11 1 ft.lb.
CAUTION
Do not over tighten the locking ring. Over tightening may deform the cable plug sealing surfaces, break the oil seal between receptacle and housing, twist the receptacle, and disrupt internal wiring. 11. Back off on the cable locking ring without disturbing the cable plug. Retighten the locking ring and torque to 7 1ft.lbs.
Note:
The spanner wrench is specifically designed for use with a torque wrench in tightening the highvoltage cables on the tube unit. It must be used for accurate torque readings when installing the highvoltage cables.
1296
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 IF OIL GETS ON THE HANDS, WASH THEM NOW!
WARNING
12. Carefully wipe up all excess oil. 13. Disconnect hoist from tube and crane. Return crane to normal storage position. Be sure to install and tighten crane storage retaining bolt. 14. Wrap the cable horns with paper toweling held in place with tape. Then position the tube at the 6 oclock position. Return the Gantry to the 3 oclock position, remove the toweling and wipe up all excess oil. 15. Wipe off the cable horns, locking ring, and strain relief with a rag damp with alcohol. Repeat with a dry rag. 16. To detect any subsequent oil leakage, wrap the cable strain relief and locking ring with a single layer of absorbent paper tissue. The paper should readily show when it is wet with oil so that a leak can be detected. Two inch wide strips cut from a paper napkin have been found suitable. The bottom edge of the paper should be wrapped around the top end of the cable horn on the tube unit and secured with tape. The top edge should extend up over the threads of the cable locking ring. It should then be crimped over the top of the locking ring and secured with tape to the plastic cable strain relief. Remove paper after leak check. 17. Turn gantry power on and wait at least 10 minutes for the filament to warm before doing alignments. Run Changetube This program will keep tube usage statistics on the new tube for tube warranty data and trend analysis. changeTube Run this program when you change your tube. [L1 b] type sd i ( this will bring down applications software). Type su Enter password: <root password> Type changeTube Enter failure code for removed tube <failcode> From the menu on the screen, enter the number which corresponds to your tube type From Housing S/N, enter Insert S/N <serial number> From OCO root prompt, Control D, to exit back to genesis. Bring up applications Type st (Should be in /w directory)
ALIGNMENTS: refer to System Service Manual General Service Manual Plane of Rotation (POR) XRay Beam on Window (BOW) Isocenter Center Body Filter (CBF) and SAG
1297
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 GENERATOR CALIBRATIONS: refer to System Service Manual General Service Manual kV Meter Verification mA Meter Verification Calibration of HV Tank Feedback Resistors Install NEW TUBE program Auto mA Calibration KV Rise and Fall Times Verification of Internal Scan Timer Heat Soak and Seasoning
Note:
Monitor the system for high voltage overcurrents, shootthroughs, and spits while you run the Tube Heat Soak and/or Seasoning Tool. If the previously mentioned errors occur during the seasoning steps, touch |Resume| and press (Start Scan) when it flashes. If the errors continue, repeat the process up to four times before you pull the tube. Use only on a MX_165_CT_I Select the |Heat Soak & Season| tool every time you install a new xray tube. Select the |Season| function when you encounter tube spits, image streaks and/or scan aborts on the currently installed tube. Touch |Utilities| Touch |CT Tools| Touch |Heat Soak & Season| Touch |Heat Soak & Season| (for new tube installations) Press (Start Scan) when it flashes. Touch |Cancel| when the tool completes
Select the Large Focal Spot for every scan.
1298
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 The HiSpeed Advantage Tube Heat Soak and Seasoning function supports only the MX_165_CT_I xray tube. Use the Large Focal Spot parameter with the following Tube Heat Soak and Seasoning protocols:
TABLE 122 TUBE HEAT SOAK AND SEASONING PROTOCOLS
MX 165 CT I kV Scan Group Warmup Heat Input Anode Soak 1 Anode Soak 2 Casing Soak 1 Casing Soak 2 Casing Soak 3 Seasoning 1 Seasoning 2 Seasoning 3 Seasoning 4 Seasoning 5 Seasoning 6 Seasoning 7 Seasoning 8 Seasoning 9 Note: 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 90 100 110 120 130 135 140 145 150 100 300 300 300 300 300 300 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 15 24 25 9 45 45 10 5 5 5 5 5 5 10 10 15 2 2 5 1 12 12 7 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 mA # of scans ISD (sec) Scan Time (sec) 2 3 3 1 2 2 1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1
Pre Group Delay (sec) 2 2 3 2 60 0 7 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Static/ Rotate (4.0sec) S R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R
When you run the Tube Heat Soak and/or Seasoning program(s), monitor the system for high voltage overcurrents, shootthroughs, and tube spits. If these errors occur during the seasoning steps, touch |Resume|, and press (Start Scan) when it flashes, to proceed. If the errors continue, repeat the process up to four times before you pull the tube. Upon completion of the high voltage stability test, torque the locking ring on each H.V. cable (at the tube) to 7 1ft. lbs. or 84 12 in. lbs. Also, replace the paper toweling around the tube locking rings, to absorb excess oil. Remove the paper towels after several revolutions of the gantry. Exposure Time Accuracy: Begin with the top level plasma, and execute the following sequence of softkeys. Touch |Utilities| Touch |1|,|2|,|3| Touch |CT Tools| Touch |Genrator Charact| Touch |Monitor Enable|
Now, the message log displays the scan times. Touch |Cancel|
1299
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 6 Scout Scan Time:
Take the following scout scans at the distances called out below using 120kV 40mA and record the scan time that is displayed in the message log on the HHS data sheet. Distance in mm: 20, 25, 30, 40, 150, 300, 480 Axial and Helical Time: Take the scans in the tables below using Applications mode (Scan Rx) using 120kV and 40 mA Axial Scans Selected Time FOV 0.6sec 0.6sec 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 smallFOV largeFOV largeFOV largeFOV largeFOV largeFOV
Helical Scans: Selected Time Required Technic 15.0 120kV/40mA/10mm/S70170 Note: 28.0 30.0 120kV/40mA/10mm/S135I135 120kV/40mA/10mm/S145I145
When complete go back into Generator Charact and toggle off Monitor Enable, otherwise your message log will be filled with kV, mA and scan times. CALS: Refer to System Service Manual General Service Manual and System Operator Guide. QCal Crosstalk Calibration Calibration Procedure, Standard Cals N# Check/Adjust QA Noise Test Thermal Test
The thermal test should only be run if you suspect cold tube/hot tube image problems. A cold XRay tube is required for the thermal test. Allow a minimum of 60 minutes before continuing these scans. Scan the water portion of the QA phantom at the following: Small, 120 kV, 200 mA, 4 sec (from a cold tube) 1mm, 1slice 10mm, 20slices 1mm, 1slice
Check images for artifacts that vary with temperature. Look for thermal bands. Use a 14cm x 14cm ROI box, centered at 0.0, 0.0cm. It is a failure if the means vary more than 4 counts between the two 1mm scans or from images 1 to 20 for the 10mm scans.
12100
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 12175 46297460P1 Tube Studs
Tube Stud Replacement Procedure: 1. Remove Tube (See Tube Removal Instructions). Follow all Safety Instructions detailed in Tube Removal procedure. 2. Remove the damaged stud(s) using double 3/816 nuts and a 9/16 wrench or an adjustable wrench. 3. Apply Loctite 271 to one side of the replacement stud and install this side into the rotating base casting. 4. Adjust the stud to a height of 1.90 0.04 from the surface of the rotating base casting. Follow the procedure as outlined in step 2 above. 5. Replace Tube (See Tube Installation Instructions). Follow all Safety Instructions detailed in Tube Installation procedures. 12176 46296701P1 38V Filament Supply 1. Move table to lowest elevation. 2. Turn off facility power to PDU. Use tag and lockout procedures. 3. Remove gantry side covers. 4. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. 5. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. 6. Remove scan window. 7. Open Front Cover. 8. Rotate gantry so that Filament Power assembly is at the 3 oclock position., 9. Engage gantry rotational lock. 10. Loosen four (4) captive screws on Filament Power assembly cover and remove cover. 11. Measure voltage across filter capacitor to verify that bleeder resistor has dissipated energy to a safe level. 12. Unsolder Black and White wires from terminals one (1) and two (2) on the transformer. 13. Disconnect Red lead from fuse. 14. Disconnect Black lead from filter capacitor by removing screw from negative terminal. 15. Remove and save four (4) bolts mounting Filament Power Supply to gantry and remove supply. 16. Install new supply by reversing the above steps. Note: Input leads: Black, to transformer terminal one (1); White, to transformer terminal two (2).
12101
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12177 46183027P111 ADC Bd (SLOT 51,52,53, & 54), EDAS
GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS: Safety glasses must be worn at all times. Use approved lifting methods. Observe Ryerson Road Standard Safety Protocol. SPECIFIC SAFETY REQUIREMENTS: ANTISTATIC HANDLING If the boards are not in the DAS or in a conductive bag, you must wear a wrist strap when handling DAS Boards. Boards must never be placed on nonconductive surfaces such as white bench tops, plastic covered books or nonconductive plastic bags. CLEANLINESS Any dirt on the surface increases leakage current on the filter or converter cards and will cause the DAS to fail the drift spec. All testers will be required to use white cotton gloves or the board extractor when inserting or removing boards from DAS. Finger prints on the board will cause trouble when humidity is high. 12178 46183027P129 ADC Bd (Reduced Gain EDAS) GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS: Safety glasses must be worn at all times. Use approved lifting methods. Observe Ryerson Road Standard Safety Protocol. SPECIFIC SAFETY REQUIREMENTS: ANTISTATIC HANDLING If the boards are not in the DAS or in a conductive bag, you must wear a wrist strap when handling DAS Boards. Boards must never be placed on nonconductive surfaces such as white bench tops, plastic covered books or nonconductive plastic bags. CLEANLINESS Any dirt on the surface increases leakage current on the filter or converter cards and will cause the DAS to fail the drift spec. All testers will be required to use white cotton gloves or the board extractor when inserting or removing boards from DAS. Finger prints on the board will cause trouble when humidity is high. 12179 45561210 Anode (Transformer Tank) 1. Position table to lowest elevation. 2. Turn off facility power to PDU use tag and lockout procedure. 3. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. 4. Turn off all 3 switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. 5. Open top cover and engage prop rod. 6. Remove and set aside Gantry scan window. 7. Open front cover. 8. Rotate gantry so that Anode H.V. Supply is at the 9 oclock position and engage gantry rotational lock.
12102
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 9. Loosen two (2) wing handled screws holding STC Chassis in place and rotate card cage 90 degrees to lock into position. 10. Use spanner wrench to remove high voltage cable connector from H.V. Transformer Tank. Use rags or paper toweling to wipe excess oil from H.V. cable connector and tank well. 11. Ground the end of the HV cable to the Gantry frame to ensure no voltage. 12. Disengage gantry rotational lock and rotate gantry so that Anode H.V. Supply is at the 3 oclock position. 13. Remove cables J1 and J2 from measurement PWB on HV Transformer Tank. 14. Remove four screws fastening cover to inverter assembly and remove cover. 15. Measure voltage on two large capacitor to verify 0 volts. 16. Disconnect J1 connector from side of inverter assembly. 17. Disconnect J6 connector from gate driver PWB. 18. Verify no voltage on the 550VDC cable. 19. Carefully disconnect four fiber optic cables from gate driver board. 20. Disconnect 550VDC cable from capacitor PWB. 21. Cut tyraps from side plate of inverter and remove all cables from inverter assembly. 22. Remove two (2) inverter output leads from H.V. Transformer Tank at locations P1 and P2. 23. Remove four (4) 3/8 bolts from inverter baseplate which fasten inverter assembly to H.V. Transformer Tank and remove inverter assembly from gantry. 24. Attach hoist to boom arm in gantry. 25. Attach hoist to lifting bracket on bottom of Anode H.V. Transformer Tank and remove slack from chain. 26. Remove four (4) bolts which fasten transformer tank to rotating base. 27. Use hoist to lower transformer tank to floor. 28. Install new transformer tank by reversing the above steps.
Note:
Install four (4) 3/8 tank mounting bolts and torque to 25 ftlbs (3.462 mkg). Before installing HV Cable Connector add 20 cc of dielectric oil to the HV Connector well in the HV Transformer Tank. Use spanner wrench to tighten securely and wipe excess oil with rags or toweling. After installation is complete rotate gantry to verify cable clearance and to drain excess oil from H.V. cable strain relief. Again wipe excess oil with rags or toweling.
12180
45435960 Anode Inverter 1. Position table to lowest elevation. 2. Turn off facility power to PDU use tag and lockout procedure. 3. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. 4. Turn off all 3 switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. 5. Open top cover and engage prop rod.
12103
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358-100 6. Remove and set aside Gantry scan window. 7. Open front cover. 8. Rotate Gantry so that anode inverter is at the 3:00 o'clock position and engage gantry rotational lock. 9. Remove four screws fastening cover to inverter assembly and remove cover. 10. Measure voltage on two large capacitors to verify 0 volts. 11. Disconnect J1 connector from side of inverter assembly. 12. Disconnect J6 connector from gate driver PWB. 13. Carefully disconnect four fiber optic cables from gate driver PWB. 14. Disconnect 550 VDC cable from capacitor PWB. 15. Cut ty-raps from side plate of inverter and remove all cables from inverter assembly. 16. Remove two(2) inverter output leads from H.V. Transformer Tank at locations P1 and P2. 17. Remove four (4) 3/8 bolts from inverter baseplate which fastens inverter assembly to H.V. Transformer Tank and remove inverter assembly from gantry. 18. To install new inverter assembly reverse the above steps.
Note:
Use Loctite 242, and install four (4) 3/8 tank mounting bolts and torque to 25 ft-lbs (3.462 m-kg).
12-181
46-297703P1 Anode Inverter 1. Position table to lowest elevation. 2. Turn off facility power to PDU - use tag and lockout procedure. 3. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. 4. Turn off all 3 switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. 5. Open top cover and engage prop rod. 6. Remove and set aside Gantry scan window. 7. Open front cover. 8. Rotate Gantry so that anode inverter is at the 3:00 o'clock position and engage gantry rotational lock. 9. Remove four screws fastening cover to inverter assembly and remove cover. 10. Measure voltage on two large capacitors to verify 0 volts. 11. Disconnect J1 connector from side of inverter assembly. 12. Disconnect J6 connector from gate driver PWB. 13. Carefully disconnect four fiber optic cables from gate driver PWB. 14. Disconnect 550 VDC cable from capacitor PWB. 15. Cut ty-raps from side plate of inverter and remove all cables from inverter assembly. 16. Remove two(2) inverter output leads from H.V. Transformer Tank at locations P1 and P2.
12-104
HSA-RP GENERAL SYSTEM SER VICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358-100 17. Remove four (4) 3/8 bolts from inverter baseplate which fastens inverter assembly to H.V. Transformer Tank and remove inverter assembly from gantry. 18. To install new inverter assembly reverse the above steps.
Note:
Use Loctite 242, and install four (4) 3/8 tank mounting bolts and torque to 25 ft-lbs (3.462 m-kg).
12-182
45554264 or 2100553 Anode Transformer Tank Measurement Bd 1. Position table to lowest elevation. 2. Turn off facility power to PDU - use tag and lockout procedures. 3. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. 4. Turn off all 3 switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. 5. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. 6. Remove Scan window. 7. Open front cover. 8. Rotate Measurement Board to 3:00 position. 9. Unplug connectors J1,J2, J5,and J6 10. Remove 6 screws and washers that mount measurement board to HV Supply. 11. Carefully pry measurement board off High Voltage Tank. 12. Replace Measurement Board. Note: Carefully align connector pins from Interface Measurement Board to Round Interface Board on High Voltage Supply.
12-183
46-297875P1 Axial Brake 1. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. 2. Turn off all three switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. 3. Open top cover and engage prop rod. 4. Remove and set aside Gantry scan window. 5. Open rear cover. 6. Engage Manual Indexer Pin Lock to prevent gantry rotation. 7. Disconnect electrical connection to Axial Brake. 8. Remove and keep three set screws on aluminum hex nut on end of brake shaft. 9. Remove hex nut and key. 10. Remove four bolts holding brake to torque plate and remove brake. 11. Mount replacement brake onto torque plate. 12. To assemble the hex nut to the brake shaft and aperture plate, power must be restored to energize the brake. To do this turn on the gantry 120VAC switch ONLY on the status control box on right side of gantry. Once the brake is energized, the aperture plate can be aligned with the hex nut on the brake shaft.
12-105
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 13. Insert key.
14. Adjust hex nut. Dimension from the outer surface of the brake to the outer surface of the hex nut to be 0.370 0.010 inches. 15. Apply 242 Loctite sparingly to three set screws, and torque to 2530 inlbs. (0.288 mkg). 16. To finish reassembly, reverse steps 17. 12184 46264806G1 Axial Control Bd 1. Move table to lowest elevation. 2. Remove gantry side covers. 3. Turn off three (3) switches on status control box on the right side of the gantry. 4. Remove left Side Cover. 5. Loosen 2 screws retaining front cover of STC and remove cover. 6. Loosen two wingnuts retaining STC chassis. 7. Rotate STC Chassis 90 degrees and lock into position. Note: Wear grounded wrist strap when removing circuit boards. 8. Remove BNC Connector from front of Axial Control PWB and use extractors to remove PWB. 9. Install new Axial Control PWB by reversing the above steps. Note: 12185 46296158P1 Axial Motor 1. Position table to lowest elevation. 2. Turn off facility power to PDUuse tag and lockout procedure. 3. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. 4. Turn off all 3 switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. 5. Open top cover and engage prop rod. 6. Remove and set aside Gantry scan window. 7. Open front and rear covers. 8. Remove and set aside Axial Brake. 9. Remove plastic cover from access hole in Aluminum Encoder fixturing plate. 10. Rotate gantry until screw of coupling is inline with access hole in Aluminum Encoder fixturing plate, and loosen screw. 11. Remove four (4) bolts attaching fixturing plate to motor, and remove Encoder fixture plate assembly. 12. Disconnect Axial Motor Encoder electrical connections. 13. Loosen screw on motor shaft side of coupling, and remove coupling. 14. Loosen three screws of Idler Tensioning assembly Loosen Tensioning Bolt until spring is unloaded. Use pushtorelease tab to rotate card cage back into position.
12106
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 15. Remove and set aside electrical box cover on motor. a. Remove and keep all 3 conductors of cable. b. Cut tyraps to free cable from motor. 16. To gain clearance for removal of Axial Motor mounting hardware rotate gantry until sagittal laser bracket is positioned near axial motor. 17. Remove and keep bottom two motor bolts. 18. Place hoist into working position and attach hoist strap around motor centered on housing. Remove all slack in hoist strap. 19. Remove remaining two bolts securing motor. 20. Swing motor around pivot sector and out of Gantry and lower to the floor. 21. Once Axial Motor has been removed from Gantry loosen two 3/8 inch set screws on axial drive pulley and remove pulley from motor shaft. ReAssemble the Gantry: 1. Attach the Pulley to the new Motor Shaft and position 0.285 inches from pilot on Motor Mounting flange. Apply 242 Loctite to set screws and torque to 25 ftlbs. (.024 mkg) 2. Using the hoist, move the new motor into proper position. Apply 242 Loctite to four mounting bolts and torque to 25 ftlbs. (.024 mkg) 3. Reinstall power cables and secure cable to motor with large tyraps. 4. Install Brake Assembly. 5. Replace Encoder/Fixturing Plate assembly. a. Install coupling to motor shaft. Use 242 Loctite on screw. b. Loosen screw on Encoder side of coupling. c. Install Encoder/fixturing plate assembly by sliding encoder shaft into coupling and aligning plate mounting holes.
d. Torque bolts to 25 ftlbs. (.024 mkg) 6. Properly position the drive belt on and around the gantry gear ring, the two idler pulleys, and the drive pulley on the axial drive motor. a. Perform preliminary idler assembly adjustment so belt is snug. b. Rotate the Gantry by hand through three (3) complete revolutions. c. Retension drive belt by turning idler pulley adjustment screw until spring has a compressed length of 0.285 inches.
7. Torque tensioning adjustment plate bolts to 25 ftlbs. (.024 mkg)
12107
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 8. Adjust the CPulse.
a. Turn on facility power to the PDU. b. Turn on the 120V power switch on the status control box on the right side of the gantry. Note: Both the STC and DAS power switches must be on. c. Rotate the Gantry until the tube reaches the 12 oclock position.
d. Slightly loosen the 3 sync clamps that hold the axial motor encoder in place. Note: Do not loosen the sync clamps too much or you will have trouble maintaining the encoder position when the clamps are tightened. e. Place a torpedo level on the machined surface beneath the the collimator and level the gantry. f. Rotate the Axial Motor Encoder until the CPulse Light on the Status Control Box remains lit.
g. Tighten the 3 sync clamps to fasten the encoder in the current position. h. Turn off facility power to the PDU. 9. Restore gantry scan window and covers. 10. Restore system power and verify system operation. 12186 46296320G1 Axial Motor Assm No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices.
12108
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 12187 46296854P1 Axial Motor Encoder
1. Position table to lowest elevation. 2. Turn off facility power to PDU. Use tag and lockout procedures. 3. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. 4. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. 5. Open top cover and engage prop rod. 6. Remove and set aside Gantry Scan Window. 7. Open Front Cover. 8. Remove plastic cover from access hole in aluminum encoder fixturing plate. 9. Rotate gantry until screw of coupling is inline with access hole in aluminum encoder fixturing plate, and loosen screw. 10. Loosen/remove three (3) synclamps holding encoder to aluminum fixturing plate. 11. Remove Encoder from fixturing plate. 12. Disconnect Encoder electrical connection. 13. To reassemble, reverse steps 812. 14. Adjust the CPulse. a. Turn on facility power to the PDU. b. Turn on the 120V power switch on the status control box on the right side of the gantry. Note: Both the STC and DAS power switches must be on. c. Rotate the Gantry until the tube reaches the 12 oclock position.
d. Slightly loosen the 3 sync clamps that hold the axial motor encoder in place. Note: Do not loosen the sync clamps too much or you will have trouble maintaining the encoder position when the clamps are tightened. e. Place a torpedo level on the machined surface beneath the the collimator and level the gantry. f. Rotate the Axial Motor Encoder until the CPulse Light on the Status Control Box remains lit.
g. Tighten the 3 sync clamps to fasten the encoder in the current position. h. Turn off facility power to the PDU. 15. Restore gantry scan window and covers. 16. Restore system power and verify system operation.
12109
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 12188 46296157P1 Axial Motor Pulley
No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 12189 46186462G1 Azimuth Circuit Bd 1. Position table to lowest elevation. 2. Turn off facility power to PDUuse tag and lockout procedure. 3. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. 4. Turn off all 3 switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. 5. Open top cover and engage prop rod. 6. Remove and set aside Gantry scan window. 7. Open front cover. 8. Open Rear Cover. 9. Rotate gantry so that tube is at 12 oclock position. 10. Remove two screws fastening PWB cover to right side of upper front main bearing frame and remove cover. 11. Remove left side slip ring cover (as viewed from rear facing forward). Wear grounded wrist strap for steps 12 through 14. 12. Disconnect cable from J1 on circuit board. 13. From the rear of the gantry remove the two (2) screws attaching the Board mounting bracket to the main bearing frame and remove assembly from gantry. 14. Remove three (3) screws mounting PWB to bracket and remove PWB.
12110
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 15. Install new PWB by reversing the above steps. Note: Adjust PWB center flag in optical detector slot on PWB. Flag depth should be adjusted to 0.1 inches 0.02 in. from bottom of slot in optical detector, and centered radially back between the slot opening.
12190
46264802G1 Backplane, STC 1. Move table to lowest elevation. 2. Remove gantry side covers. 3. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of the gantry. 4. Turn off facility power to PDU. Use tag and lockout procedures. 5. Remove left Side Cover. 6. Loosen 2 screws retaining front cover of STC and remove cover. 7. Loosen two wingnuts retaining STC Chassis. 8. Rotate STC Chassis 90 degrees and lock into position. Note: Wear grounded wrist strap when removing circuit boards. 9. Remove BNC Connector from front of Axial Control PWB and use extractors to remove PWB. 10. Use extractors to remove SCOM PWB. 11. Remove CPU PWB by loosening two (2) captive screws in the front bezel and use extractors to remove from card cage. 12. Store all circuit boards in static bags. 13. Remove J4 connector from Backplane inside of card cage. 14. Press release tab and rotate card cage into its retracted position. a. Loosen two (2) screws retaining the rear STC cover and remove cover. 15. Remove J5 and J6 BNC Connector from Backplane. 16. Remove three 96 position connectors from Backplane. 17. Remove Ground Strap between the backplane and chassis. 18. Remove two screws from bottom of card cage which fastens the harness bracket to chassis. 19. Using a short screwdriver remove eight (8) 632 screws mounting the Backplane to the card cage and remove the Backplane PWB from the STC assembly. 20. Remove two (2) terminator assemblies from old Backplane. 21. To install new backplane reverse the above procedure.
12191
46183027P112 BackplaneLeft, EDAS No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices.
12192
46183027P94 BackplaneRight, EDAS No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices.
12111
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12193 46296564G1 Base Harness
Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good service practices. 12194 46296948G1 Cable, AC/Pwr, EDAS Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good service practices. 12195 46183027P104 Cable, Analog, EDAS Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good service practices. 12196 46296943G1 Cable, Anode AC Pwr Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good service practices. 12197 46296947G1 Cable, Axial Drive Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good service practices.
12112
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12198 46296942G1 Cable, Cathode AC Pwr
Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good service practices. 12199 46296949G1 Cable, DC/Pwr, EDAS Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good service practices. 12200 46183027P103 Cable, Digital, EDAS Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good service practices. 12201 46266838G1 Cable, Ribbon, EDAS Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good service practices.
12113
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 12202 46183027P89 Cal/Aux Bd, EDAS
WARNING
GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS: Safety glasses must be worn at all times. Use approved lifting methods. Observe Ryerson Road Standard Safety Protocol. SPECIFIC SAFETY REQUIREMENTS: ANTISTATIC HANDLING If the boards are not in the DAS or in a conductive bag, you must wear a wrist strap when handling DAS Boards. Boards must never be placed on nonconductive surfaces such as white bench tops, plastic covered books or nonconductive plastic bags. CLEANLINESS Any dirt on the surface increases leakage current on the filter or converter cards and will cause the DAS to fail the drift spec. All testers will be required to use white cotton gloves or the board extractor when inserting or removing boards from DAS. Finger prints on the board will cause trouble when humidity is high.
12203
53214P40 Capacitor, Inverter No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 45561211 Cathode (Transformer Tank) 1. Position table to lowest elevation. 2. Turn off facility power to PDU use tag and lockout procedure. 3. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. 4. Turn off all 3 switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. 5. Open top cover and engage prop rod. 6. Remove and set aside Gantry scan window. 7. Open front cover. 8. Rotate gantry so that Cathode HV transformer tank is at the 3 oclock position and engage gantry rotational lock. Verify 550 VDC or 120 VAC is not present. 9. Use spanner wrench to remove high voltage cable connector from high voltage transformer tank. Ground the ends of the H.V. to the Gantry frame to ensure no voltage at end of cable. Use rags or paper toweling to wipe excess oil from High Voltage Cable Connector and tank well. 10. Remove cables J1,J2 and J6 from measurement PWB. 11. Remove four screws fastening cover to inverter assembly and remove cover. 12. Measure voltage on two large capacitor to verify 0 volts. 13. Disconnect J1 connector from side of inverter assembly. 14. Disconnect J6 connector from gate driver PWB. 15. Carefully disconnect four fiber optic cables from gate driver board.
12204
12114
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 16. Verify 550 VDC or 120 VAC is not present. 17. Disconnect 550VDC cable from capacitor PWB. 18. Cut tyraps from side plate of inverter and remove all cables from inverter assembly 19. Remove two (2) inverter output leads from H.V. Transformer Tank at locations P1 and P2. 20. Remove four (4) 3/8 bolts from inverter baseplate which fasten inverter assembly to H.V. Transformer Tank and remove inverter assembly from gantry. 21. Attach hoist to boom arm in gantry. 22. Attach hoist lifting chain to eyebolt on transformer tank and remove slack from chain. 23. Use tool to remove four (4) bolts which fasten transformer tank to rotating base. 24. Use hoist to lower transformer tank to floor. 25. Install new transformer tank by reversing the above steps.
Note:
When installing four (4) 3/8 tank mounting bolts torque to 25 ftlbs (3.462 mkg). Before installing HV Cable Connector add 20 cc of dielectric oil to the HV Connector well in the HV Transformer Tank. Use spanner wrench to tighten securely and wipe excess oil with rags or toweling. After installation is complete rotate gantry to verify cable clearance and to drain excess oil from H.V. cable strain relief. Again wipe excess oil with rags or toweling.
12205
45435962 Cathode Inverter 1. Position table to lowest elevation. 2. Turn off facility power to PDU use tag and lockout procedure. 3. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. 4. Turn off all 3 switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. 5. Open top cover and engage prop rod. 6. Remove and set aside Gantry scan window. 7. Open front cover. 8. Rotate Gantry so that cathode inverter is at the 3:00 oclock position and engage gantry rotational lock. 9. Remove four screws fastening cover to inverter assembly and remove cover. 10. Measure voltage on two large capacitor to verify 0 volts. 11. Disconnect J1 connector from side of inverter assembly. 12. Disconnect J6 connector from gate driver PWB. 13. Carefully disconnect four fiber optic cables from gate driver PWB. 14. Disconnect 550 VDC cable from capacitor PWB. 15. Cut tyraps from side plate of inverter and remove all cables from inverter assembly. 16. Remove two(2) inverter output leads from H.V. Transformer Tank at locations P1 and P2.
12115
HSA-RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358-100 17. Remove four (4) 3/8 bolts from inverter baseplate which fastens inverter assembly to H.V. Transformer Tank and remove inverter assembly from gantry. 18. To install new inverter assembly reverse the above steps.
Note:
When installing four (4) 3/8 tank mounting bolts, use Loctite 242 and torque to 25 ft-lbs (3.462 m-kg).
12-206
46-297703P2 Cathode Inverter 1. Position table to lowest elevation. 2. Turn off facility power to PDU - use tag and lockout procedure. 3. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. 4. Turn off all 3 switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. 5. Open top cover and engage prop rod. 6. Remove and set aside Gantry scan window. 7. Open front cover. 8. Rotate Gantry so that cathode inverter is at the 3:00 o'clock position and engage gantry rotational lock. 9. Remove four screws fastening cover to inverter assembly and remove cover. 10. Measure voltage on two large capacitor to verify 0 volts. 11. Disconnect J1 connector from side of inverter assembly. 12. Disconnect J6 connector from gate driver PWB. 13. Carefully disconnect four fiber optic cables from gate driver PWB. 14. Disconnect 550 VDC cable from capacitor PWB. 15. Cut ty-raps from side plate of inverter and remove all cables from inverter assembly. 16. Remove two(2) inverter output leads from H.V. Transformer Tank at locations P1 and P2. 17. Remove four (4) 3/8 bolts from inverter baseplate which fastens inverter assembly to H.V. Transformer Tank and remove inverter assembly from gantry. 18. To install new inverter assembly reverse the above steps. Note: When installing four (4) 3/8 tank mounting bolts, use Loctite 242 and torque to 25 ft-lbs (3.462 m-kg).
12-207
45554264 or 2100553 Cathode Transformer Tank Measurement Bd 1. Position table to lowest elevation. 2. Turn off facility power to PDU - use tag and lock-out procedures. 3. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. 4. Turn off all 3 switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. 5. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. 12-116
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 10 6. Remove scan window. 7. Open front cover.
8. Rotate Measurement Board to 3:00 position. 9. Unplug connectors J1,J2, J5,and J6 10. Remove 6 screws and washers that mount measurement board to High Voltage Supply. 11. Carefully pry measurement board off High Voltage Tank. 12. Replace Measurement Board. Note: Carefully align connector pins from Interface Measurement Board to Round Interface Board on High Voltage Supply.
12208
46296300G4 Collimator Assm The SmartBeam collimator, 46296300G4, replaces the G3 version in forward production, and eventually, as FRU for the installed base of G1, G2 and G3 collimators. (See Table 123, below.) The system requires an option key and RP1.4 or RP2.2 software to enable operation of the SmartBeam filter. Systems with G1, G2 or G3 collimators: You must install RP1.4 or RP2.2 release software and calibrate the system when you replace one of the older collimators with the G4 version. Failure to update the software could result in Image Quality and dose issues. The Calibration procedures remain the same, but the presence of the SmartBeam filter increases the required number of scans per kV. The system automatically adjusts the screens to show the correct number of scans.
TABLE 123 HSA COLLIMATOR HISTORY
Model Number 46296300G1 46296300G2 46296300G3 46296300G4 46296300G5
Comments Original HiSpeed Advantage Collimator Aperture modified to reduce xray scatter; backwards compatible with G1 Excess parts removed from collimator assembly; backwards compatible with G1 and G2 More durable Aluminum Carbon (AlC) SmartBeam filter replaces Teflon filter in collimator; backwards compatible with G1, G2 and G3 collimators Backward compatible with G1, G2, G3, and G4 with HSAZE, RP 1.6 and RP 2.5 software releases. Provides higher reliability
12117
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 1. Position table to lowest elevation. 2. Turn off facility power to PDU use tag and lockout procedure. 3. Remove and set aside gantry side covers. 4. Turn off all three switches on status control box on right side of Gantry. 5. Lift Top Cover and engage prop rod. 6. Remove scan window 7. Open Front Cover. 8. Rotate Gantry until the Collimator is at the 6 oclock position. 9. Disconnect the electrical connections to the Collimator. Disconnect J2,J3, J4 at OBC. Disconnect the J1 harness from left side of Collimator. 10. Remove and keep two nuts on adjustment bracket from right side of collimator. Remove hardware. 11. Remove and keep four (4) 1/420 bolts, washers, and lock washers that hold collimator in place. 12. Remove old Collimator. Note weight is 42lbs. (19kgs). 13. Replace Collimator. 14. Update the Collimator characterization table by entering the corresponding numbers from the Collimator Rating plate. 15. Align collimator: Verify that the table has been withdrawn from the tube and the detector field of view. Nothing shall obstruct the attenuation of the XRay beam to detector window. Available functions for CBF and SAG alignment are: Default CBF Scan (Also used for SAG calculation) List/Select DD Files Store DD Result File
Results display for CBF and SAG are: Success of failure of scan performed. Collimator adjustment recommendations (if required). SAG measurement value.
The sequence of sort keys required to perform a CBF and SAG scan/calculation is as follows, beginning from the tube alignment screen. Touch |CBF and SAG| Note: On the CBF and SAG screen, the last ISO Air.DD filename will be the default isocal applied for CBF and SAG calculation. Also, the average of the small and large spot isocenter value will be displayed. Verify the Large Air ISO Air CAl is selected. Touch |CBF Scan| (Push scan enable when lit)
Upon completion of the scan the average centroid value for the CBF will be automatically displayed along with the collimator movement recommendations, if any. Also, the SAG will be calculated and displayed. If the Calculated CBF values is not in specification (373.75 0.2), the collimator will have to be adjusted by the amount displayed on the CRT via the following steps: Wait 5 minutes between exposures.
12118
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 Mount the gauge and its nonmagnetic holding fixture to the special mounting bracket of the collimator. Zero out the gauge and loosen the four mounting bolts of the collimator which are located at the four slotted holes of the collimator. Adjust the 3/4 inch bolt (located at the end of the collimator) to move the collimator right or left the required amount. CRT displays CBF adjustments in up and down direction. UP=Collimator movement to the right, and DOWN = collimator movement to the left. Bolt down the collimator. The torque requirement on the four lock bolts is 5 0.5 ft. lbs. (120 12 in. lbs). Repeat CBF scans and this adjustment until the CBF specification is satisfied. Remove gauge and holding fixture from Gantry. Record the CBF and SAG values on data sheet. 16. To reassemble, reverse steps.
12209
46288856G1 Collimator Bd 1. Remove and set aside the right gantry side covers. 2. Turn off all 3 switches on status control box. 3. Rotate Gantry so OBC is at 3 oclock position and engage rotational lock. 4. Put on grounding wrist strap. 5. Remove OBC Front Cover by loosening 8 captive screws. 6. Remove board from appropriate slot (listed above) by rotating ejectors and removing board from card cage. 7. Place board in Static Bag. 8. Install new board by reversing the above steps.
12210
46321276G1 Collimator Bd 1. Remove and set aside the right gantry side covers. 2. Turn off all 3 switches on status control box. 3. Rotate Gantry so OBC is at 3 oclock position and engage rotational lock. 4. Put on grounding wrist strap. 5. Remove OBC Front Cover by loosening 8 captive screws. 6. Remove board from appropriate slot (listed above) by rotating ejectors and removing board from card cage. 7. Place board in Static Bag. 8. Install new board by reversing the above steps.
12211
46321276G1 Collimator II Bd 1. Remove and set aside the right gantry side covers. 2. Turn off all 3 switches on status control box. 3. Rotate Gantry so OBC is at 3 oclock position and engage rotational lock. 4. Put on grounding wrist strap. 5. Remove OBC Front Cover by loosening 8 captive screws.
12119
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 6. Remove board from appropriate slot (listed above) by rotating ejectors and removing board from card cage. 7. Place board in Static Bag. 8. Install new board by reversing the above steps.
12212
46251198P37 Collimator PS 1. Move table to lowest elevation. 2. Turn off facility power to PDU. Use tag and lockout procedures. 3. Remove gantry side covers. 4. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. 5. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. 6. Remove scan window. 7. Open Front Cover. 8. Rotate gantry so that Filament Power assembly is at the 3 oclock position. 9. Engage gantry rotational lock. 10. Loosen four (4) capture screws on Filament Power assembly cover and remove cover. 11. Unsolder Black and White leads from terminals: one (1) and (2) on the Power Supply Transformer. 12. Unsolder Red and Black leads from (+) and () power supply output terminals. 13. Remove and save four (4) screws mounting collimator power supply to gantry. 14. Install new supply by reversing steps 11 through 14 above. Input leads: Black to transformer terminal one (1) White to transformer terminal two (2) Output leads: Red to PWB terminal (+) OUT Black to PWB terminal () OUT 15. Collimator P.S. output checks: a. Connect positive voltmeter lead to +OUT terminal on power supply. b. Connect negative voltmeter lead to OUT terminal on power supply. c. Energize 24hr AC Pwr on Gantry. d. Turn voltage adjustment pot to adjust the output voltage to 39.5 0.5VDC. e. Remove power from Gantry (tag and lockout procedures) 16. Reassemble Gantry by reversing steps 1 through 10 above.
12213
46296885P1 Communication PS 1. Move table to lowest elevation. 2. Turn off facility power to PDU. Use tag and lockout procedures. 3. Remove gantry side covers.
12120
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 4. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. 5. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. 6. Remove scan window. 7. Open rear gantry cover. 8. Remove 25 pin sub D connector from Intercom PWB. 9. Remove two AC leads from line filter. Note location of each lead. 10. Remove DC connector (J3) from assembly. 11. Remove four (4) screws mounting assembly to gantry and remove assembly from gantry. 12. Remove three (3) connectors from power supply. Note location of connector for later replacement. 13. Remove four (4) screws mounting power supply to bracket and remove supply. 14. Install new power supply by reversing steps 9 through 13 above. 15. Communication P.S. output check: a. Connect positive voltmeter lead to pin 1 of J3. b. Connect negative voltmeter lead to pin 2 of J3. c. Energize Gantry 24hr AC power.
d. Turn the voltage adjustment pot to adjust the output voltage to read 12.0 0.25 VDC. e. Remove power from Gantry (tag and lockout procedures). 16. Reassemble Gantry by reversing steps 1 through 8 above. 12214 46288858G1 CTVRC Control Board 1. Remove and set aside the right gantry side covers. 2. Turn off all 3 switches on status control box. 3. Rotate Gantry so OBC is at 3 oclock position and engage rotational lock. 4. Put on grounding wrist strap. 5. Remove OBC Front Cover by loosening 8 captive screws. 6. Remove board from appropriate slot (listed above) by rotating ejectors and removing board from card cage. 7. Place board in Static Bag. 8. Install new board by reversing the above steps. 12215 45435961 CTVRC Power Module 1. Move table to lowest elevation. 2. Turn off facility power to PDU. Use tag and lockout procedures. 3. Remove gantry side covers. 4. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry.
12121
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 5. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. 6. Remove scan window. 7. Open Front Cover. 8. Rotate gantry so that Filament Power assembly is at the 3 oclock position., 9. Engage gantry rotational lock. 10. Loosen four (4) captive screws on Filament Power assembly cover and remove cover. 11. Measure voltage across filter capacitor to verify that bleeder resistor has dissipated energy to a safe level. 12. Remove 550 Volt leads from CTVRC control board. 13. Remove 2 Feedback connectors (J3,J9) from Gate Driver/ Filter Board. 14. Remove 120 Volt AC connector (J6) from Board. 15. Disconnect Stator Cable connector from XRay Tube (J10). 16. Remove hardware that mounts support bracket to back of CTVRC base. 17. Remove and keep 4 bolts that mount CTVRC to Filament Power assembly. 18. Remove CTVRC. 19. Replace CTVRC. 20. To reassemble, reverse steps.
12216
46136343P12 DAS Pwr Switch 1. Turn off facility power to PDU. Use tag and lockout procedures. 2. Remove gantry side covers. 3. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. 4. Rotate gantry so that OBC is at the 3 oclock position and engage gantry rotational lock. 5. Loosen four (4) captive screws on DAS Power Supply cover and remove. 6. Remove two (2) leads from DAS power supply switch. 7. Remove mounting hardware from switch and remove switch from base of DAS power supply assembly. 8. Install new switch by reversing the above steps.
12217
46251198P30 DC PS (EDAS), 15V 1. Move table to lowest elevation. 2. Turn off facility power to PDU. Use tag and lockout procedures. 3. Remove gantry side covers. 4. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. 5. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. 6. Remove scan window. 7. Open front cover.
12122
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 8. Rotate Gantry so OBC is at 3:00 position. 9. Loosen 4 captive screws holding DAS Power Supply Cover and remove.
Note:
Note Location of Leads connected to Power Supply. 10. Unsolder Leads from Power Supply. 11. Remove 4 standoffs mounting Power Supply to DAS assembly. 12. Replace Power Supply. 13. DAS P.S. output check: a. Connect positive voltmeter lead to +OUT terminal. b. Connect negative voltmeter lead to OUT terminal. c. Energize Gantry 24hr AC power.
d. Turn the voltage adjustment pot to adjust the output voltage to read between 15.0 and 15.25 VDC. e. Remove power from Gantry (tag and lockout procedures). 14. Reassemble Gantry by reversing steps. 12218 46251198P26 DC PS (EDAS), 5V 1. Move table to lowest elevation. 2. Turn off facility power to PDU. Use tag and lockout procedures. 3. Remove gantry side covers. 4. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. 5. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. 6. Remove scan window. 7. Open front cover. 8. Rotate Gantry so OBC is at 3:00 position. 9. Loosen 4 captive screws holding DAS Power Supply Cover and remove. Note: Note Location of Leads connected to Power Supply. 10. Unsolder Leads from Power Supply. 11. Remove 4 standoffs mounting Power Supply to DAS assembly. Note: ITEM 46251198P26 only a. Remove 2 standoffs from Power Supply near Regulator Board. b. Remove 2 screws and 2 nuts mounting Power Supply to bracket near transformer. 12. Replace Power Supply.
12123
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 13. DAS 5V Power Supply Output Check: Attach appropriate measuring devices to the DC output terminals of the DAS 5V supply. Turn ON the Gantry AC power at the A1 panel and service switch box. Use an insulated screwdriver of the appropriate size to rotate the voltage adjustment potentiometer on the power supply regulator PWB until the output voltage falls between 5.00 and 5.25 VDC. 14. Turn OFF the AC power to gantry. 15. To reassemble, reverse steps.
12219
46297104P1 Detector Heater PS 1. Move table to lowest elevation. 2. Turn off facility power to PDU. Use tag and lockout procedures. 3. Remove gantry side covers. 4. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. 5. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. 6. Remove scan window. 7. Open Front Cover. 8. Rotate gantry so that Filament Power assembly is at the 3 oclock position., 9. Engage gantry rotational lock. 10. Loosen four (4) captive screws on Filament Power Assembly cover and remove cover. 11. Measure voltage across filter capacitor to verify that bleeder resistor has dissipated energy to a safe level. 12. Unsolder Black and White leads from transformer terminals one (1) and three (3). 13. Remove Red and Black leads from output capacitor by removing the two screws connecting the leads to the filter capacitor. 14. Remove and save the four (4) screws mounting the Detector Heater Power Supply to the gantry. 15. Install new power supply by reversing steps 12, 13, 14. Note: Input leads:Black to transformer terminal one (1); White to transformer terminal three. Output leads :Red to Filter Capacitor Terminal marked (+); Black to remaining capacitor terminal. 16. Detector Heater P.S. output check: a. Connect positive voltmeter lead to the red lead on output filter capacitor. b. Connect negative voltmeter lead to the black lead on output filter capacitor. c. Energize Gantry 24hr AC power.
d. The voltage reading should be 2332 VDC. 17. Remove power from Gantry (tag and lockout procedures). Reassemble Gantry by reversing steps 1 through 10 above.
12124
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12220 46188067P1 Detector Heater Relay
1. Position table to lowest elevation. 2. Turn off facility power to PDU use tag and lockout procedure. 3. Remove and set aside both gantry side covers. 4. Turn off all 3 switches on the status control box on right side of Gantry. 5. Open top cover and engage prop rod. 6. Remove and set aside Gantry scan window. 7. Open front cover. 8. Rotate Gantry so that OBC is at the 3 oclock position and engage gantry rotational lock. 9. Remove connectors J1 through J5 from control assembly. 10. Remove 4 screws which mount control assembly to the back of the OBC. 11. From the bottom of the control assembly locate the detector heater relay (normally open) and remove the four (4) leads attached to positions 1 through 4. 12. Remove two (2) nuts attaching relay to chassis and remove relay. 13. Install new relay by reversing the above steps. 12221 46297301G3 Diode Laser, Bottom (12V)
WARNING
WARNING: NEVER STARE INTO THE LASER ALIGNMENT LIGHT BEAM. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THIS INSTRUCTION COULD RESULT IN INJURY TO THE EYES. 1. Determine which of the three assemblies need to be replaced. (Right Side G1, Left Side G2 BottomG3) 2. Position the table to lowest elevation. 3. Turn off facility power to PDU. Use tag and lockout procedures. 4. Remove and set aside gantry side covers. 5. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. 6. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. 7. Remove scan window. 8. Open Front Cover. 9. Disconnect the electrical connection at the LASER Assembly to be replaced. 10. Remove appropriate LASER Assembly by removing three (3) bolts. 11. Replace new laser assembly. 12. Reconnect electrical connections. 13. Align Laser light. 14. To reassemble, reverse steps 29.
12125
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12222 46327058G3 Diode Laser, Bottom (5V)
WARNING
12223
46297301G2 Diode Laser, LS (12V)
WARNING
NEVER STARE INTO THE LASER ALIGNMENT LIGHT BEAM. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THIS INSTRUCTION COULD RESULT IN INJURY TO THE EYES. 1. Determine which of the three assemblies need to be replaced. (Right Side G1, Left Side G2 BottomG3) 2. Position the table to lowest elevation. 3. Turn off facility power to PDU. Use tag and lockout procedures. 4. Remove and set aside gantry side covers. 5. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. 6. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. 7. Remove scan window. 8. Open Front Cover. 9. Disconnect the electrical connection at the LASER Assembly to be replaced. 10. Remove appropriate LASER Assembly by removing three (3) bolts. 11. Replace new laser assembly. 12. Reconnect electrical connections. 13. Align Laser light. 14. To reassemble, reverse steps.
12126
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12224 46327058G2 Diode Laser, LS (5V)
WARNING
12225
46297301G1 Diode Laser, RS (12V)
WARNING
WARNING: NEVER STARE INTO THE LASER ALIGNMENT LIGHT BEAM. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THIS INSTRUCTION COULD RESULT IN INJURY TO THE EYES. 1. Determine which of the three assemblies need to be replaced. (Right Side G1, Left Side G2 BottomG3) 2. Position the table to lowest elevation. 3. Turn off facility power to PDU. Use tag and lockout procedures. 4. Remove and set aside gantry side covers. 5. Turn off all three (3) switches on status control box on right side of gantry. 6. Lift top cover and engage prop rod. 7. Remove scan window. 8. Open Front Cover. 9. Disconnect the electrical connection at the LASER Assembly to be replaced. 10. Remove appropriate LASER Assembly by removing three (3) bolts. 11. Replace new laser assembly. 12. Reconnect electrical connections.
12127
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 13. Align Laser light.
14. To reassemble, reverse steps 29. 12226 46327058G1 Diode Laser, RS (5V)
WARNING
12227
46296341G1 Gantry Display Assm Gantry Display Replacement Procedure Remove Gantry Display: 1. Remove the four 1/4x20 machine screws holding gantry module 2. Disconnect the display cable and remove the gantry display from the support arms 3. Remove the two nylon 8/32 x .500 machine screws holding the cover plate and remove cover plate 4. Remove the four 1/4x20 x 3.25 machine screws holding the support arms and standoffs and remove the support arms and standoffs 5. Remove the two cable clamps from the left support arm. 6. Remove the two bearings on the pin from the support arm. Perform this task for both arms. Install Gantry Display: 1. Install the two bearings on the pin and install on the support arm. Complete this assembly procedure on both support arms. 2. Attach two cable clamps to the left support arm.
12128
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 3. Mount the support arms and the standoffs to the Gantry with four 1/4x20 x 3.25 machine screws. 4. Mount the cover plate to the support arms with two nylon 8/32 x .500 machine screws 5. Route and connect the display cable and attach the gantry display to the support arms making sure that display is seated properly. 6. Attach the Gantry module to the display assembly with four 1/4x20 x .75 machine screws. The gantry display installation is now complete.
Power Distribution Unit (PDU) 12228 46170026P14 32kVA Xfmr, CR1CR3 1. Disconnect wires from C4,C5 and C6. 2. Remove and keep 3 screws from bar. 3. Remove screw next to Varistor. 4. To reassemble, reverse steps. 12229 46170026P17 32 kVA Xfmr, CR4CR6 1. Remove screws,nuts and washers and disconnect wires. 2. Leaving wires attached to bar remove bar to Varistor screws that hold varistor to fuse panel. 3. Replace Varistor. 4. To reassemble, reverse steps. 12230 46296221P15 32kVA Xfmr, F10F12 1. Remove bolt and washer. NOTE: DO NOT PRY ON FUSE. 2. Replace Fuse. 12231 46170021P85 32kVA Xfmr, F13 1. Remove bolt and washer. NOTE: DO NOT PRY ON FUSE. 2. Replace Fuse. 12232 46313346P1 32kVA Xfmr, F14F16 1. Pry fuse out. 2. Replace Fuse.
WARNING
WARNING
12129
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12233 46170021P44 32kVA Xfmr, F17F19 (Top Board)
1. Use fuse puller to remove fuse from fuseholder. 2. Replace Fuse. 12234 46170021P96 32kVA Xfmr, F20, F21 (Top Board) 1. Use fuse puller to remove fuse from fuseholder. 2. Replace Fuse. 12235 46170021P86 32kVA Xfmr, F4F6 1. Pry Fuse out. 2. Replace Fuse.1. Pry Fuse out. 3. Replace Fuse. 12236 46170021P84 32kVA Xfmr, F7F9 1. Pry out end of fuse with screwdriver or fuseholder. 2. Replace Fuse. 12237 45433453 AC Inductor 1. Safety Check:Verify Voltage Check at Terminal Strip (1and 2) on the DCRGS assembly. The check should be between TS1, TS2 and TS1 or TS2 to ground. Verify no voltage at 3 Phase Input Terminals to PDU on Isolation Transformer Fuse Panel. 2. Remove 3 leads from Backup Contactor Terminals: T1,T2 and T3. 3. Remove 3 wires from SCR Bridge Terminals TS1L1,TS1L2, and TS1L3. 4. Unplug connector J2 from DCRGS Regulator Control Board. 5. Unplug Connector J7B from SCR Bridge Gate Driving Board. 6. Loosen 4 screws and washers that mount AC Inductor to DCRGS main panel. 7. Replace AC Inductor. 8. To reassemble, reverse steps. 12238 46296136P1 Westamp Amplifier 1. Disconnect and set aside Cable from J1. 2. Disconnect and push aside wires from TB401. 3. Remove 3 screws from each mounting bracket at top of amplifier. 4. Loosen 2 screws on left side mounting bracket of amplifier. 5. Remove 2 screws on right side mounting bracket of Amplifier. 6. Remove Amplifier. 7. To reassemble, reverse steps.
12130
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 12239 46297910P1 Allen Bradley Servo Amplifier
1. Remove connectors J1, J2, and J3 from axial interface PWB. 2. Remove the four (4) nuts attaching the axial interface PWB cover to the Servo assembly. 3. Remove the cover. 4. Remove four (4) position option connectors from the Logic Control PWB. 5. Remove three (3) screws fastening Logic Control PWB cover to Servo panel. 6. Loosen three (3) screws fastening Logic Control PWB cover to Servo amplifier. 7. Lift and remove cover. 8. Remove connectors from TB1 and TB2 and the left side of the Logic Control PWB. 9. Remove seven (7) leads from the terminal strip on the right side of the amplifier and keep. 10. Remove the nut attaching the ground lead to the ground stud located at the lower right corner of the Servo amplifier. 11. Remove the ground lead from the stud. 12. Remove and keep the three (3) nuts mounting the Servo amplifier to the Servo panel. 13. Remove the Servo amplifier. 14. Replace by reversing the above steps. 12240 46288748G1 Axial Drive Filter Bd 1. Remove and set aside cable from J1. 2. Remove and keep 4 screws from standoff. Note: The spacers will fall out when you remove the screws. 3. Replace Circuit Board. 4. To reassemble, reverse steps. 12241 54261P92 Backup Contactor 1. Safety Check: Verify Voltage Check at Terminal Strip (1and 2) on the DCRGS assembly. The check should be between TS1, S2 and TS1 or TS2 to ground. Verify no voltage at 3 Phase Input Terminals to PDU on Isolation Transformer Fuse Panel. 2. Remove 3 wires from Backup Contactor Input Terminals L1L3. 3. Remove 3 wires from Backup Contactor Output Terminals T1T3. 4. Remove and keep 3 screws and washers that mount Backup Contactor to DCRGS Main Panel. 5. Remove and Replace Backup Contactor. 6. To reassemble, reverse steps.
12131
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 12242 46229598P3 Blue Switch, PDU
No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 12243 53214P33 Capacitor 1. Safety Check: Verify Voltage Check at Terminal Strip (1and 2) on the DCRGS assembly. The check should be between TS1,TS2 and TS1 or TS2 to ground. Verify no voltage at 3 Phase Input Terminals to PDU on Isolation Transformer Fuse Panel. 2. Remove 4 screws and washers on right side of DCRGS Panel that allow Main Panel to swing out. 3. Safety Step:Verify no Voltage on Capacitors C1and C2. 4. Remove leads from terminals of Capacitor to be replaced. 5. Loosen Capacitor Bracket. 6. Replace Capacitor. Note: Insure correct polarity of capacitor. 7. To reassemble, reverse steps. 12244 46296409P1 Capacitor 6100 microF 350V electrolytic
WARNING
AFTER POWER IS OFF, ALLOW 45 SECONDS FOR THE CAPACITOR TO PARTIALLY DISCHARGE. 1. Remove and set aside Cover by removing 2 screws. 2. With Safety Glasses short terminals with screwdriver. 3. Remove 2 wires from terminals. 4. Loosen screw in mounting clamp. 5. Remove Capacitor. 6. To reassemble, reverse steps.
12245
46296206G1 Ckt Bkr Assm (West AMP) No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 46296206G1 Circuit Breaker Assm (West AMP) No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 46327109G1 Ckt Bkr Assm (Allen Bradley) 1. Remove connectors J1, J2 and J3 from the Axial Interface PWB. 2. Remove (4) nuts attaching Axial Interface PWB cover to Servo Assm. 3. Remove cover. 4. Remove (4) position options connectors from Logic Control PWB.
12246
12247
12132
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 5. Remove (3) screws fastening Logic Control PWB cover to Servo Panel. 6. Loosen (3) screws fastening Logic Control PWB cover to Servo Amplifier. 7. Lift and remove cover. 8. Remove connectors from TB1 and TB2 on left side of Logic Control PWB. 9. Remove and keep 7 leads from terminal strips on right side of Servo Amplifier. 10. Remove nut attaching ground lead to ground stud, located at the lower right corner of the Servo Amplifier. 11. Remove ground lead from stud. 12. Remove 3 nuts mounting Servo Amplifier to Servo Panel. 13. Remove Servo Amplifier. 14. Replace by reversing the above steps.
12248
46170021P29 Ckt Bkr Assm, F1F3 1. Remove and set aside cover and 4 sets of hardware. 2. Pry out fuse. 3. Replace.
12249
46297069P1 Ckt Bkr Assm, F4F6 1. Remove Circuit Breaker Cover and 4 sets of attaching hardware. 2. Gently pry fuse out of holder. 3. To reassemble, reverse steps.
12250
46221905P2 Ckt Breaker: 15 Amp 1 P CB16, 18, 20, 21, 22 1. Remove and keep four (4) screws from Cover. 2. Lift off cover and set aside. 3. Remove wires from Ckt Breaker. 4. Lift up one end of breaker at wire terminal and remove Breaker. 5. To reassemble, reverse steps.
12251
46221905P21 Ckt Breaker: 15 Amp 2 P, CB14 1. Remove wires from Ckt Breaker. 2. Lift up one end of breaker at wire terminal and remove Breaker. 3. To reassemble, reverse steps.
12252
46221905P3 Ckt Breaker: 20 Amp 1P CB19 1. Remove and keep four (4) screws from Cover. 2. Lift off cover and set aside.
12133
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 3. Remove wires from Ckt Breaker. 4. Lift up one end of breaker at wire terminal and remove Breaker. 5. To reassemble, reverse steps.
12253
46221905P32 Ckt Breaker: 25 Amp 3P CB1,6,11 1. Remove and keep 4 screws from Cover. 2. Lift off cover and set aside. 3. Remove wires from Ckt Breaker. 4. Lift up one end of breaker at wire terminal and remove Breaker. 5. To reassemble, reverse steps.
12254
46221905P32 Ckt Breaker: 25 Amp 3P CB1,6,11,23 (Allen Bradley Modification ) 1. Remove and keep 4 screws from Cover. 2. Lift off cover and set aside. 3. Remove wires from Ckt Breaker. 4. Lift up one end of breaker at wire terminal and remove Breaker. 5. To reassemble, reverse steps.
12255
46221905P35 Ckt Breaker: 40 Amp 3P CB23 1. Remove and keep 4 screws from Cover. 2. Lift off cover and set aside. 3. Remove wires from Ckt Breaker. 4. Lift up one end of breaker at wire terminal and remove Breaker. 5. To reassemble, reverse steps.
12256
46296138P1 Contactor, PDU 1. Remove and set aside cover and 4 sets of hardware. 2. Loosen wire retaining screws. 3. Remove wires from terminals 1,3,5,13,14, A 1 and A 2. 4. Loosen screws at terminals 2,4, and 6. 5. Remove and set aside Contactor mounting hardware and Contactor. 6. To reassemble, reverse steps.
12257
46297456P1 FRU 1, PDU No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices.
12134
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 6 12258 45433455 DC Inductor
1. Safety Check: Verify Voltage Check at Terminal Strip (1and 2) on the DCRGS assembly. The check should be between TS1, TS2 and TS1 or TS2 to ground. Verify no voltage at 3 Phase Input Terminals to PDU on Isolation Transformer Fuse Panel. 2. Remove wire from DCRGS assembly. TS13. 3. Remove wire from DCRGS assembly. TS23. 4. Remove wires from SCR Bridge TS2 plus and TS2 minus. 5. Unplug connector J3 from DCRGS Regulator Control Board. 6. Remove 4 screws and washers that mount DC Inductor to DCRGS Main Panel. 7. Replace DC Inductor. 8. To reassemble, reverse steps. 12259 45433770 DCRGS Do not touch Circuit Boards unless you are wearing Ground Strap. Static Sensitive Devices 1. Proceed with Safety Check. Verify Voltage Check at Terminal. Strip 1 and 2 (TS 1& 2). The Check between TS1 and TS2 with TS1 or TS 2 to Ground. Verify there is no voltage at 3 Phase Input Terminals at PDU on Isolation Transformer Fuse Panel. Three wires from Back up Contactor on DCRGS ASM Three wires from F1, F2 and F3 Two wires to Back up Contactor coil (A2 & A1) Two wires to auxiliary contact of Back up Contactor (13 & 14) Disconnect three input wires from 480 Volt (VAC) fuses on DCRGS ASM Disconnect 550 Volt (HVDC) Output Wire from TS11. Disconnect 550 Volt (HVDC) Return Wire from TS21. Disconnect 550 Volt (HVDC) Cable Shield from DCRGS ASM Ground Stud Disconnect 120 Volt (AC) Terminal from SCR Bridge (Gate Firing Bd.) DCRGS STC Interface Cable from DCRGS Regulator Control Bd. (J4).
2. Disconnect Wires
3. Loosen 8 screws that mount DCRGS assembly to PDU Cabinet. 4. Replace DCRGS. 5. Set 50/60 Hz jumper at J10 of the Enerpro SCR Bridge (Gate Firing Board) in the proper position.
12135
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12260 45433754 DCRGS Control Bd
1. Safety Check: Verify Voltage Check at Terminal Strip (1and 2) on the DCRGS assembly. The check should be between TS1, TS2 and TS1 or TS2 to ground. Verify no voltage at 3 Phase Input Terminals to PDU on Isolation Transformer Fuse Panel. 2. Remove 480 Volt Safety Cover from DCRGS Regulator Control Board. 3. Unplug connectors from DCRGS Regulator Control BoardJ1, J2, J3, J4, J5, J6, and J7. 4. Remove 4 screws and washers holding DCRGS Control Board to SCR Bridge. 5. Remove and replace Board. 6. To reassemble, reverse steps. 12261 46296407G1 Display Assm No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 12262 46297803P1 Fan Assm, PDU 1. Detach Connector from Fan Assembly. 2. Remove 4 screws from the top of the PDU that hold Fan assembly to PDU while holding Fan assembly with one hand. 3. Using a 7/64 hex driver place screwdriver through unused mounting hole to remove screw that holds fan to grill. 4. Repeat for remaining 3 screws and set aside fan. 5. To replace, reverse the above procedure. 12263 46203134P5 Filter, PDU No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 12264 54367P40 Fuse, DCRGS 1. Safety Check: Verify Voltage Check at Terminal Strip (1and 2) on the DCRGS assembly The check should be between TS1,TS2 and TS1 or TS2 to ground. Verify no voltage at 3 Phase Input Terminals to PDU on Isolation Transformer Fuse Panel. 2. Remove and Replace Fuse. 12265 46229598P1 Green Switch, PDU No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices.
12136
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 12266 46297479G1 Guard Assm
No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 12267 46297039G1 Harness, Ckt Breaker Assm, External Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good service practices. 12268 46297041G1 Harness, Ckt Breaker Assm, Internal Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good service practices. 12269 46296127P1 Indicator, Elapsed Time 1. Remove screw at top and bottom of panel. Indicator is attached to panel. 2. Unplug Harness from back of Panel. Separate panel and Indicator assembly from PDU. 3. Unplug wires at back of Indicator. 4. Remove and keep 3 screws and nuts holding Indicator to panel. 5. Remove Indicator. 6. To reassemble, reverse steps. 12270 46327154P1 Inductor, Servo Output 1. Remove and keep 4 screws. 2. Remove hardware at terminals and push aside wire end. 3. Replace Inductor. 4. To reassemble, reverse steps. 12271 46229342P2 Lamp Assm, 125V, Green, DS1DS6 1. Remove Spade Terminals from Lamp assembly 2. Pry off retaining ring from back of Lamp. 3. Reverse to reassemble.
12137
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12272 46229342P2 Lamp Panel Assm, DS1DS4
1. Disconnect wires from back of Lamp. 2. Discard ring and lamp. 3. Replace lamp. 4. To reassemble, reverse steps. 12273 46297594G1 Loopback Connector No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 12274 46222200P1 O/L Relay Element 1. Remove (2) screws which fasten the heater element to the K1 relay. 2. Remove the heater element. 3. Install new heater element. 4. Replace (2) screws which fasten heater element to K1. 5. Fully depress reset button on K1 relay to enable. 12275 45433456 Output Current Transformer 1. Safety Check: Verify Voltage Check at Terminal Strip (1and 2) on the DCRGS Asm. The check should be between TS1, TS2 and TS1 or TS2 to ground. Verify no voltage at 3 Phase Input Terminals to PDU on Isolation Transformer Fuse Panel. 2. Unplug connector J7 from the DCRGS Control Board. 3. Remove the wire from DCRGS TS12 and remove wire from current Transformer (T1). 4. Loosen 2 screws and washers that mount current Transformer (T1) to DCRGS Main Panel. 5. Replace Transformer. 6. To reassemble, reverse the above steps. 12276 46264888G1 PWA Relay Ctrl PRECONDITION: Check Label and follow safety instructions. 1. Wait for at least 1 minute after power off for capacitors to discharge. 2. Remove and set aside Front Cover and 4 sets of mounting hardware. 3. Detach all connectors. 4. Remove and set aside Loopback Connector. 5. Unplug all cables. 6. Remove 4 spacers and 7 screws that hold the Relay Control Bd. to panel and set board and hardware aside. 7. To replace, reverse above using new board.
12138
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 12277 46278446P1 Receptacle, 15A, 125VAC
Remove old receptacle: 1. At the back of the AP, unplug cords going into J1 and J2. 2. Remove corner screws holding the rear plate to the AP and remove rear plate. 3. Pull the receptacle assembly out. 4. Disconnect wires going to the receptacle. 5. Remove 3 screws from the outside. 6. Pull out the receptacle. Install new receptacle: 1. Insert new receptacle. 2. Reconnect wires to the receptacle. 3. Reconnect 3 screws on the outside. 4. Reinstall back plate. 5. Reattach 4 corner screws. 6. Reconnect cables to J1 and J2. 12278 46186852P2 Relay Contactor, Axial Drive 1. Remove leads from 6 contact terminals. 2. Remove 2 leads from relay coil. 3. Remove 2 leads from auxiliary contact. 4. Remove and keep mounting screws from contactor base. 5. Remove and keep 2 screws mounting auxiliary contact to main contactor body. 6. Replace Relay. 7. To reassemble, reverse steps. 12279 46327087P1 Relay, Axial Drive Current Sensing No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 12280 46194361P17 Rem Box Light No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices.
12139
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 12281 53396P01 Resistor
1. Safety Check: Verify Voltage Check at Terminal Strip (1and 2) on the DCRGS assembly. The check should be between TS1,TS2 and TS1 or TS2 to ground. Verify no voltage at 3 Phase Input Terminals to PDU on Isolation Transformer Fuse Panel. 2. Remove 4 screws and washers on right side of DCRGS Panel that allow Main Panel to swing out. 3. Safety Step: Verify no Voltage on Capacitors, C1 and C 4. Remove leads from ends of resistors. 5. Remove and replace Resistor. 6. To reassemble, reverse steps. 12282 46221454P77 Resistor, 25 Ohm, 50W, 1%, Wirewound 1. Unsolder 2 leads of Resistor. 2. Remove and keep 2 screws. 3. Replace Resistor. 4. 4.To reassemble, reverse steps. 12283 46296415P2 Resistor, 3 Ohm, 300W, 10%, Ribwound 1. Remove screws, nuts and washers holding wires to the resistor terminals. 2. Remove nut from long resistor mounting bolt. One mounting bracket at right edge of resistor. 3. Remove bolt from resistor bracket. Slide Resistor out. 4. Slide resistor, centering washers and insulating washers to the side to remove. Note the placement of the washers. 5. Replace Resistor. 6. To reassemble, reverse steps. 12284 45433454 SCR Bridge 1. Safety Check: Verify Voltage Check at Terminal Strip (1and 2) on the DCRGS assembly. The check should be between TS1,TS2 and TS1 or TS2 to ground. Verify no voltage at 3 Phase Input Terminals to PDU on Isolation Transformer Fuse Panel. 2. Remove wires from terminals TS1L1, L2, L3, and TS2 (plus) and (minus). 3. Unplug connector J4 from SCR Bridge Gate Firing Board. 4. Remove 12 screws and washers holding SCR Bridge to DCRGS Main Panel. 5. Remove and replace SCR Bridge. 6. To reassemble, reverse steps.
12140
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 12285 46297574G1 Servo Assm
No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 12286 46170021P74 Servo Assm, 10A 1. Turn fuseholder cap a quarter turn. 2. Lift fuseholder cap off and pull out fuse. 3. Replace fuse. 12287 46170021P94 Servo Assm, 3A 1. Turn fuseholder cap a quarter turn. 2. Lift fuseholder cap off and pull out fuse. 3. Replace fuse. 12288 46170021P14 Filter PWB F1F2 1. Remove Circuit Breaker Cover and 4 sets of attaching hardware. 2. Gently pry fuse out of holder. 3. To reassemble, reverse steps. SRU 12289 46313053G1 24V Resistor Assm No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 46241971P72 5V PS (STCTC AP) 1. Remove all cables attached to the power supply. 2. Remove screws attaching the power supply to the AP. 3. Slide power supply out of the AP. 4. Insert new power supply. 5. Verify +5VDC 5% at AP backplane bus bars. 6. Reattach cables removed in step 1. 7. Reinstall screws removed in step 2. 12291 46241971P26 5V PS (STCT AP), 150A 1. Remove all cables attached to the power supply. 2. Remove screws attaching the power supply to the AP. 3. Slide power supply out of the AP. 4. Insert new power supply. 5. Verify +5VDC 5% at AP backplane bus bars. 6. Reattach cables removed in step 1. 7. Reinstall screws removed in step
12290
12141
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12292 46241971P68 AP Fan
Remove old fan: 1. At the back of the AP, remove 4 of the 6 screws on the top of the AP that attach the fan to the face plate. 2. At the front of the AP, remove the 2 remaining screws on the top of the AP. 3. Remove 2 screws on either the left or right side of the face plate, then slide the face plate off. 4. Remove power and ground cables from the fan. 5. Slide the fan out. 6. Remove the 4 screws holding the fan to the plate. 7. Replace the fan. Install new fan: 1. Set new fan on plate and attach with 4 screws removed previously. 2. Slide fan assembly back into AP. 3. Reconnect power and ground cables to the fan. 4. Slide face plate on and fasten 2 screws on either the left or right side of the face plate. 5. Tighten the 6 screws on top of AP attaching fan to face plate. 12293 46296817P1 BNC 50Ohm Terminator No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 12294 46296816P2 BNC TConnector, SRU Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good service practices. 12295 46297711G1 Cable, 3/60 Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good service practices.
12142
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12296 46296451G3 Cable, 3/60 SCSI to Wren
Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good service practices. 12297 46296454G5 Cable, 60 Coaxial BNC Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good service practices. 12298 46296862G1 Cable, Backplane to PS Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good service practices. 12299 46237686G2 Cable, DASIOP to Gantry Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good service practices.
12300
46297096G1 Cable, PS to 098 Harness Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good service practices.
12143
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 12301 46313027G1 Fan Assm for Scan Chassis
No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 12302 46296532P1 Front Panel Maxi No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 12303 46313030G1 High Speed Disk Drive Remove Scan Chassis Power: 1. Shutdown Applications Software and Halt Unix on the SBC. 2. Turn off power to the Scan Chassis. 3. Put on your ground wrist strap and attach to chassis. Remove high speed disk drive: 1. Remove the 2 screws that attach the tray to the scan chassis. 2. Remove cable cover. 3. Remove cable strain relief. 4. Disconnect all cables. 5. Pull the tray assembly out and set aside. 6. Remove the 4 screws attaching the HSD to the tray. 7. Insert new disk drive assembly. Insert new high speed disk drive: (See page 12148 for additional information) 1. Attach 4 screws removed earlier to the new HSD. 2. Check high speed disk jumper settings on the new HSD. 3. Slide the tray back in the scan chassis. 4. Reconnect all cables. 5. Reattach cable strain relief. 6. Reattach cable cover. 7. Tighten 2 screws that attach the tray assembly to the scan chassis. 8. Run the HiSpeed Advantage High Speed Disk (HSD) Preparation and Media Defect Management software. 9. If you must format the disk, run disk_util from usr/g/bin. The disk utility procedure, and related information, immediately follows this procedure. (See page 12145, HiSpeed Advantage High Speed Disk Procedure.)
10. Check system operation: a. Recreate the original failing scenario to verify the replacement Disk corrects the problem. b. Make sure the replacement Disk hasnt introduced any new problems.
12144
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 HiSpeed Advantage High Speed Disk Procedures (for 46313030G1) The HiSpeed Advantage High Speed Disk procedures describe how to: 1. Load Diskutil 2. Save the Defect List to SCSI Drive File 3. Replace the High Speed Disk 4. Add New Bad Blocks 5. Check Disk/Controller Parameters 6. Reset the Scan File Database Load DiskUtil The CT Advanced Service Tape contains the proprietary High Speed Disk Utilities (diskutil). Access diskutil through a menu option within the SRU Diagnostics Main Menu. To Load: 1. Select |Utilities| 2. Select |1|, |2|, |3| 3. Select |AddATool| 4. Install Proprietary CT Advanced Service Tape 5. Is the Tape Ready? Select |YES| when ready. 6. The SRU Diagnostics load, and an |SRU Diags| button appears. To Execute: 7. Select |SRU Diag Button| to open a shell window.
Note:
Wait until the AP shuts down 8. Select Option 4 from the following menu selections: 1=Maxisys 2=MaxiBld 3=SRUExer 4=DiskUtil 5=Quit Hint: You must run Applications in order to load the CT Advanced Service Tape. Once you load the SRU Diagnostics on the SBC SCSI Disk, you can access them through the Applications Utilities (Step 7.), or by logging into the SBC and manually changing directories into: SBC0@,SuiteID>:/usr/g/service/tools/added_tools/SRUDiag Use this procedure to access the HSD Disk Utility whenever HSD problems prevent Applications from starting. Recommended: load SRU Diags during installation and leave them on the disk.
12145
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 Save Defect List 1. Use one of the previously described methods to enter proprietary Utilities. 2. The MaxiHIB functions use the AP Driver, so the AP must be downloaded. 3. Choose Option 4 on the Main Menu to Initialize the AP. The Initialize command opens the AP Driver, then reads the Xylogics Controller and HSD parameters.
MAIN MENU 1 Quit 2 Menu 3 Help 4 Initialize 5 Configure 6 Test 7 Format 8 Process Defects MAIN>>>4 Open ap passed Read drive parameters passed Read controller parameters passed Read format parameters passed Xylogics 754 Controller Finished setting structures Finished reading remapped sector list >
GENERAL ELECTRIC/XYLOGICS DISK UTILITY REV. x.xx
4. Upon completion of the disk initialization, the Main Menu appears. 5. Select Option 8 to go to the Process Defects Menu.
PROCESS DEFECTS MENU 1 Quit 2 Menu 3 Help 4 Initialize a Defect List 5 Display a Defect List 6 Process Defects on Partition 7 Add Defect to Remapped Sector List 8 Show Remapped Sector Info 9 Zero out Remapped Sector Info
12146
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 6. From the Process Defects Menu, Select Option 4 to Initialize a Defect List The Initialize Defects List menu contains several functions used to create or manipulate a defect list. The defect list Reads/Writes to/from the working memory area of DiskUtil.
1 Quit 2 Menu 3 Help 4 Read Defect List from a File. 5 Read Defect List from Disk (Xylogics Format) 6 Read Manufacturers Defect List 7 Enter Defect List Manually 8 Display Defect List 9 Clear Defect List 10 Add Defect to List 11 Remove Defect from List 12 Write Defect List to a File 13 Write Defect List to Disk (Xylogics Format)
INITIALIZE DEFECT LIST MENU
7. Select Option 5 to append the disk list to the working memory list. This list of the Cylinder and Head locations of each defect can be fairly long on some drives. The program pauses after each defect page, and prompts you to quit or continue the defect display. You should not see any unprocessed defects at this point. Compare this list to the Mfg. list supplied with every drive. The defect list from disk must contain the same defects that appear on the Mfg list, plus defect growth (if any).
MAIN>>>5 Do you want to append onto the current Defect List? (y/n) >>>y Cylinder Value? >>> 1633 Head Value? >>> 0 CYLINDER HEAD SECTOR STATUS 10 14 15 . . . 1631 10 0 0 . . . 14 18 17 17 . . . 1 . . . SLIPPED (ON TRACK) SLIPPED (ON TRACK) SLIPPED (ON TRACK) SLIPPED (ON TRACK)
12147
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 8. Save the merged list from working memory to a Unix File stored in usr/g/bin directory on the SBC. Select Option 12 on the Initialize Defects Menu, then: a. Create a Text File on the SBC. b. Give the file a special SBC Text File name. c. This creates a special hex format file on on the SBC Drive Type/enter the name of the SBC file you plan to save in Xylogics format. (example: xylforfinaldefects_yr_mo_day)
MAIN>>>12 Do you want a printable fiel of the list? (y/n) >>> y Enter the name of the file to write to>>>finaldefects_yr_mo_da Defect List written to: finaldefects_yr_mo_da Do you want a XYLOGICSformat file of the list? (y/n) >>> y Enter name of a XYLOGICSformat file to write to>>>xylfordefects Defect list written to xylfordefects_yr_mo_day
9. Quit out of DiskUtil. Save to DAT Tape (Optional) 1. Open a shell and log into the SBC. 2. Change directories to access the files you plan to move. 3. Move the files to the OC, so you can archive them to tape. 4. Exit from the SBC. 5. Go to the new directory location on the OC. Verify the files moved to the new directory. 6. Load a tape into the OC tape drive and copy the files to DAT tape. Example session:
<suiteID>ocO:rlogin <suiteID>sbco [ENTER] <suiteID>_sbc0: cd/usr/g/bin [ENTER] <suiteID>_sbc0: cp *finaldefects*<<suiteID>oc0:tmp [ENTER] <ctrl>d <suiteID>oc0: cd /tmp <suiteID>_oc0: 1s 1a <suiteID>oc):tar cvf/dev/nrst8 *
7. Remove the Tape. Label the DAT, and save the it with the rest of the system state tapes.
Replace the High Speed Disk Note: This procedure describes the software reconfiguration process that occurs after the physical disk replacement. 1. Turn ON the Scan Chassis power. 2. Do NOT start Applications.
12148
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 3. The replacement High Speed Disk should arrive already formatted and labeled for CT use. You should not have to format and label the disk. Recommended: Read the disk label and verify its parameters. 4. Enter DiskUtil 5. Select |SRU Diag| to open a shell window. Wait until the AP shuts down. Choose Option 4 to initialize the AP, and display the output. The Initialize command opens the AP Driver, and the reads the Xylogics Controller and HSD parameters. 6. When the Disk Utility main menu appears, initialize the disk.
7. When the initialization completes, display the Format Menu. 8. Select Option 7 from the Format Menu to READ the Disk Label. Read the parameters, and verify the replacement drive was correctly formatted and labeled for CT use.
7 Process Defects MAIN >>> 7 Input Diskname>>> singlesabre New Settings: Label: <<singlesabre> Alt Secs per cyl: 0 Gap1: 0xffff Gap2: 0xffff Interleave: 1 Data Cylinders: 1633 Alt. Cylinders: 2 Heads: 15 Sectors per Track: Revs. per minute: Alt. Partition: Alt. Head: Checksum: 0 0 0xbe64 Blocks: 0 Blocks: 0 Blocks: 0 Blocks: 0 Blocks: 0 Blocks: 0 Blocks: 0 Blocks: 0 20 3600
Magic Number: 0xdabe Partition: a Starting Cylinder 0 Partition: b Starting Cylinder 0 Partition: c Starting Cylinder 0 Partition: d Starting Cylinder 0 Partition: e Starting Cylinder 0 Partition: f Starting Cylinder 0 Partition: g Starting Cylinder 0 Partition: h Starting Cylinder 0
9. Display the disk defect list, and compare it to the list sent with the drive. See page 12147 for details. 10. Reset the Scan File DataBase. See page 12158 for details. 11. Reload the system calibration database from the save system state tape.
12149
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 12. Verify system scanning functions. Use Applications to acquire several scans, and verify that you corrected the problem.
Add New Bad Blocks 1. From applications, save Calibration Data, and any scan files, if necessary. Note: If the Calibration Data or scan files reside on the bad sector, the defect may have corrupted the data, and you may have lost the corresponding calibration and/or scan file. Check to see which scan file and cal vector were in use when the error occurred. You may only have to acquire a single cal vector and/or test scan to correct the problem. The following are errors that might indicate that a bad sector may be affecting a scan or calibration file on the High Speed Disk.
ApError (076 00064 00061) IOPB Error Hard Data ECC Error MXLOG VMEbus Error Hard Data ECC error cylinder = 349 Track = 14 Sector = 0
2. Enter DiskUtil 3. Select |SRU Diag| to open a Shell window. Wait until the AP shuts down. 4. Start DiskUtil, Option 4. Note: If this is a New Disk Drive, then verify that all controller and disk Parameters are correctly configured before continuing. If the System is in a Known state, and has been running successfully for some time, and a bad defect growth occurred, then continue to the next step. 5. Select Option 8, to open the Process Defects menu. 6. Initialize the Defect List, option 4
Process Defects Menu 1 Quit 2 Menu 3 Help 4 Initialize a Defect List 5 Display a Defect List 6 Process Defects on Partition 7 Add Defect to Remapped Sector List 8 Show Remapped Sector Info 9 Zero out Remapped Sector Info
Use the Initialize Defect List menu functions to create or manipulate a defect list. This software uses the defect list to Read to/Write from the working memory area of DiskUtil.
12150
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 7. Select Option 5 to append the disk list to working memory list, and writes the cylinder and head where the defect is stored. Some drives have fairly long lists. The program pauses after each defect page, and prompts you to quit or continue the defect display. By this point you should not have any unprocessed defects.
1 Quit 2 Menu 3 Help 4 Read Defect List from a File. 5 Read Defect List from Disk (Xylogics Format) 6 Read Manufacturers Defect List 7 Enter Defect List Manually 8 Display Defect List 9 Clear Defect List 10 Add Defect to List 11 Remove Defect from List 12 Write Defect List to a File 13 Write Defect List to Disk (Xylogics Format) MAIN>>>5 Do you want to append onto the current Defect List? (y/n) >>>y Cylinder Value? >>> 1633 Head Value? >>> 0 10 14 15 . . . 1631 10 0 0 . . . 14 18 17 17 . . . 1 . . . SLIPPED (ON TRACK) (for example) (for example) SLIPPED (ON TRACK) SLIPPED (ON TRACK) SLIPPED (ON TRACK)
CYLINDER HEAD SECTOR STATUS
12151
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 8. Select Option 10 to add a defect to the list. Obtain the Cylinder, Head and Sector numbers from the MXLOG.
1 Quit 2 Menu 3 Help 4 Read Defect List from a File 5 Read Defect List from a Disk (Xylogics Format) 6 Read Manufacturers Defect List 7 Enter Defect List Manually 8 Display Defect List 9 Clear Defect List 10 Add Defect to List 11 Remove Defect from List 12 Write Defect List to a file 13 Write Defect List to Disk (Xylogics Format) INIT >>> 10 *** Enter in Cylinder Value >>> 349 *** Enter in Head Value >>> 14 *** ENter in Sector Value >>> 0
9. Type/enter 1 to Quit Out of the Init. Defect Menu

INIT>>> 1
Process Merged Defects Notes have been entered into this display. Please review it in its entirety prior to attempting this procedure. 1. Select option 6, Process Defects on Partition
PROCESS DEFECT MENU 1 Quit 2 Menu 3 Help 4 Initialize a Defect List 5 Display a Defect List 6 Process Defects on Partition 7 Add Defect to remapped sector 8 Show Remapped Sector Info 9 Zero out Remapped Sector Info DEFECT>>> 6 (This is to process merged defects)
12152

PROCESS DEFECTS will slip defective sectors for each track using all available spares at the end of the track. Any remaining defective sectors will be remapped to alternate cylinders. An attempt is made to preserve all data sectors. Do you want to continue? (y/n) >>> y Starting Cylinder: 0 Blocks: 490500 Do you wish to preserve the data sectors (y/n) >>>n (DO NOT USE THIS OPTION) Track Slipping Cylinder xx Head xx Sector xx (New Bad Sector Slipping in process) *** Warning: Cylinder xx, Head xx, Sector xx has status Sector mapped. Do you want to process this defect? (y/n) >>> y (Last chance to abort defect processing.) SECTOR SLIP ON ENTIRE PARTITION
Example output: Note: Any sector remaps to a spare cylinder that occur with more than 3 bad sectors on a given track will also be indicated.
PHYSICAL CYLINDER 10 14 15 1631 HEAD SECTOR STATUS 10 0 0 14 18 17 17 1 SLIPPED (ON TRACK) SLIPPED (ON TRACK) SLIPPED (ON TRACK) SLIPPED (ON TRACK)
SECTOR SLIPPING on Partition complete Do you want to see the Defect List? (y/n) >>> n DEFECT >>> 4
2. Select Option 4 to display the Initialize Defect List Menu. 3. Select option 13 to Write the Defect List to Disk
INITIALIZE DEFECT LIST MENU 1 Quit 2 Menu 3 Help 4 Read Defect List from a File 5 Read Defect List from Disk (Xylogics Format) 6 Read Manufacturers Defect List 7 Enter Defect List Manually 8 Display Defect List 9 Clear Defect List 10 Add Defect to List 11 Remove Defect from List 12 Write Defect List to a File 13 Write Defect List to Disk (Xylogics Format)
12153

INIT >>> 13 Cylinder Value? >>> 1633 Head Value? >>> 0
Defect List written to Cylinder: 1633 Head: 0 Sector: 0 INIT:
Save Defect List Save the defect list to a file on the SCSI Disk. (See page 12146.) To Check Disk and Controller Parameters 1. Initialize the AP, using diskutil, Main Menu, Option 4. 2. Select Option 5 to display the Configure Menu.
CONFIGURE MENU 1 Quit 2 Menu 3 Help 4 Read Controller Information 5 Read Controller Parameters 6 Read Drive Parameters 7 Read Partition Tables 8 Read Format Parameters 9 Read Configuration Information 10 Read Diagnostics 11 Write Controller Parameters 12 Write Drive Parameters 13 Write Partition Table 14 Write Format Parameters
3. Check all the READ parameters and information in options 4 through 9 of the Configure Menu. Compare those values with the examples below. They must match for proper HSD Operation. 4. Verify that all Controller Information, Option 4, appears as follows:
CONFIG >>> 4 Read controller parameters passed. Controller Type: 754 Flag Byte: 0x5 Uses DEC std 144 bad sector forwarding: YES Controller does track mapping: NO Controller formats only full track at a time: YES Controller formats only full volume at a time: NO Controller Base Address: 0xee40
12154
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 5. Verify that all Controller Parameters, Option 5, appear as follows:
CONFIG >>> 5 Parameter Byte 0x08: 0x44 Responds to Address Modifiers: 0x2d and 0x29 Enable DMA Timeout Checksum Generation Disable ACFAIL 32bit Transfer Mode AutoUpdate Bus Release On Request: 0 us Throttle Dead Time Parameter Byte 0x0a: 0x96 ECC Mode 2 Retry Before Correction ENABLED Auto Seek Retry Firmware Delay Overlap Seeks Throttle Byte : 0x00 EPROM Release: 2.3.2 ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED 256 Byte Throttle Value DISABLED ENABLED Parameter Byte 0x09: 0x18 Read Ahead ENABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED
Command Optimization DISABLED
EPROM Part Number 0x2297
6. Verify that all Drive Parameters, Option 6, appear as shown:

CONFIG >>> 6 Read drive parameters passed. Data Cylinders: Heads: Data Sectors: Spare Sectors: Total Sectors: 1633 15 20 3 23 Alternate Cylinders: 2
Revolutions per Min: 3600
7. Verify that the Drive Partition Table, Option 7, appear as shown:

CONFIG >>> 7 Partition a Starting Cylinder: Partition b Starting Cylinder: Partition c Starting Cylinder: Partition d Starting Cylinder: Partition e Starting Cylinder: Partition f Starting Cylinder: Partition g Starting Cylinder: Partition h Starting Cylinder: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Sectors: Sectors: Sectors: Sectors: Sectors: Sectors: Sectors: Sectors: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 490500
12155
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 8. Verify that all Format Parameters, Option 8, appear as shown:
CONFIG >>> 8 Field1: 0x01 Field2: 0x0a Field3: 0x1b Field4: 0x14 Sector Size: 2048 Field6: 0x0a Field7: 0x03 Alt. Sector Size: 512
9. Verify that all Configuration Parameters, Option9, appear as shown:

CONFIG >>> 9 Controller: xlc0 Drive: x10 Slave Number: 0 Drive Status: 0x3 ONLINE ATTACHED Controller Type: 754 Interrupt Priority: 0x04 Interrupt Vector: 0x45 Bus Type: 0x1000
Controller Base Address: 0xee40
After you confirm and verify the Controller and Drive Parameters, you may Label the Disk. 10. Write Label, Option 8
FORMAT MENU 1 Quit 2 Menu 3 Help 4 Format Disk 5 Format Track 6 Surface Analysis 7 Read Label 8 Write Label 9 Process Defects 10 Configure FORMAT >>> 8 (Write Label)
12156

Input Diskname>>>singlesabre (Use this name as shown) New Settings Label: <<singlesabre> (All parameters must be as shown) Alt Secs per cyl: 0 Gap1: 0xffff Gap2: 0xffff Interleave: Alt. Cylinders: Heads: 15 Sectors per track: Revs. per Minute: Alt. Partition: Alt. Head Magic Number: Checksum: 0 0 0xdabe 0xbe64 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Sectors: Sectors: Sectors: Sectors: Sectors: Sectors: Sectors: Sectors: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 490500 20 3600 1 2 Data Cylinders: 1633
Partition a Starting Cylinder: Partition b Starting Cylinder: Partition c Starting Cylinder: Partition d Starting Cylinder: Partition e Starting Cylinder: Partition f Starting Cylinder: Partition g Starting Cylinder: Partition h Starting Cylinder: Primary label written to disk: Backup label to block 490481 Backup label to block 490483 Backup label to block 490485 Backup label to block 490487 Backup label to block 490489
Do you want to continue? (y/n) >>> y (Last change to abort writing disk label.) (Primary Label)
12157
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 Reset Scan File DataBase
After you replace the HSD, run reconfig on both the OC and SBC. 1. Start Reconfig on the OC 2. Select Reset Database option. 3. |Accept| the reconfig 4. When the OC finishes, run reconfig on the SBC Procedure: 1. Shutdown System applications: a. If the system applications are currently running, type/enter sdservice at the genesis prompt on the system console to shutdown the system. b. Press <L1>B to toggle plasma to boot terminal c. login: genesis (Skip this step if you already see the genesis@<SUITE>OC0 prompt.)
d. password: XXXXXX e. genesis@<SUITE>_OC0: sdservice (Shutdown applications to UNIX level.) 2. Start reconfiguration on the OC. 3. In order to run reconfig, the User must be root. a. genesis<SUITE>_OC0> su (Become superuser) b. password: XXXXXX c. root@<SUITE>_OC0> reconfig (Start reconfiguration)
d. The System Parameters Screen appears on the Plasma Screen. e. Select |YES| to Regen Database. WHEN YOU SELECT YES TO REGEN DATABASE YOU DESTROY ALL CALIBRATION AND IMAGE DATA ON THE SYSTEM. 4. When Regen Database completes, select |Continue| to display the next screen. 5. Select |Accept| to update your changes.
TAONINC
12158
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 6. Upon completion of the OC reconfig, start the SBC reconfiguration. In order to run reconfig, the User must be in root: a. root@<SUITE>_OC0> rlogin <SUITE_SBC> b. password: XXXXXX c. root@<SUITE_SBC> reconfig (This starts reconfig on the SBC without operator intervention)
d. When reconfig finishes, exit from the SBC and from superuser mode. 7. Start Applications a. genesis@<SUITE_OC0>: cd /w [ENTER] b. genesis@<SUITE_OC0>: st [ENTER] Diskutil Release Notes ====================================== Release notice for DiskUtil:0 ZB5.0 (diskutil rev 1.20) DiskUtil Release Notes 1.1 10/14/92 14:36:02 ====================================== These changes reflect diskutil that announces itself on startup as REV 1.20. Changes 1. When slipping a sector, diskutil checks for a corrupted header and corrects it if necessary. 2. When Add sector to remap list is exercised, the sector is permanently placed in the defect list with status SECTOR MAPPED. 3. When Process Defects on partition is chosen, there are two new question prompts: Hint: During defect processing, when correcting a bogus header diskutil prints messages that say Incorrect Header ... Header Corrected to cyl n head n trk n THESE ARE INFORMATIONAL MESSAGES. THERE IS NO ERROR THAT NEEDS ATTENTION. WHEN YOU SEE THESE, YOU CAN IGNORE THEM. 12304 46296528G1 Maxi Bd Assm w/ 3/60 plus LAN Bd. No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. Skip old (already marked as processed) defects? (y/n)>>> If the user replies y, any defect will be processed without asking for permission to do each one individually. If the reply is n, the question reprocess this defect? will be asked for each previously processed defect, which is the behavior of diskutil 1.10
12159
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12305 46264834P1 MaxiHIB
Remove Scan Chassis Power: 1. Shutdown Applications Software and Halt Unix on the SBC. 2. Turn off power to the Scan Chassis. 3. Put on your ground wrist strap and attach to chassis. Remove Board: 1. Shutdown Applications Software and Unix on the SBC. 2. Turn off power to the Scan Chassis 3. Disconnect the cables to the SBC/MaxiHIB Assembly, as shown here. SCSI Cable: 46296451G3 Serial Port A Cable: 46297711G1 Serial Port B Cable: 46297123G1 Ethernet Cable: 46296454G2 AP Parallel Cable: 46297673G4 Abort Line Cable: 46297565G1
4. Unscrew the 8 retaining screws holding the 3/60 Maxi Board assembly to the Scan Chassis. 5. Using ESD precautions, slowly pull board assembly out of the scan chassis. 6. Lay the board assembly on a flat table, preferably on top of the antistatic bag. 7. Remove the LAN card by removing the 3 nylon screws (46208922P23) and washers (46230523P4) from the top of the LAN card. 8. Lift up on the P1 connector to disconnect it from the maxiHIB. Pull the LAN card away from the face plate. 9. Remove the 3 nylon screws and washers to disassemble the maxiHIB. 10. Remove the 4 AMP screws from the front face plate. 11. Remove the left and right board holders from the maxiHIB by removing 1 screw from each board holder on the solder side of the maxiHIB. This will leave the holder/extractors as part of the front face plate assembly. 12. Remove the thumb releases, making sure not to lose the bushings. 13. Lay the board assembly flat on the table. Lift up on the P4 bus on the center edge of the board to remove it from the 3/60 board and face plate. 14. Place the maxiHIB in an antistatic bag. Install Board: 1. Using ESD precautions, remove the new maxiHIB from the shipping box and place it on the antistatic bag on top of a flat surface. 2. Check MaxiHIB jumper settings. 3. Carefully connect the maxiHIB to the P4 adapter on the 3/60 SBC while sliding the board in the front face plate. 4. Install the 4 AMP screws through the face plate to the maxiHIB connectors. 5. Install the 2 screws in the center of the front face plate to the center board holders on the maxiHIB.
12160
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 6. Install the left and right board holders onto the maxiHIB using the 1 screw used in disassembly. 7. Install the LAN card onto the maxiHIB. Secure with 3 nylon screws and washers. 8. Slide the 3/60 maxi assembly back into the scan chassis. Apply enough pressure to ensure the assembly is properly seated in the backplane. Tighten eight (8) assembly front panel screws. 9. Reconnect the cables previously removed.
12306
46264890G1 MaxiHIB Adapter Bd Remove Board: 1. Shutdown Applications Software and Halt Unix on the SBC. 2. Turn off power to the Scan Chassis 3. Put on your ground wrist strap and attach to chassis. 4. Disconnect the cables to the SBC/MaxiHIB Assembly, as shown at the right. 5. Unscrew the 8 retaining screws holding the 3/60 Maxi Board assembly to the Scan Chassis. 6. Using ESD precautions, slowly pull board assembly out of the scan chassis. 7. Lay the board assembly on a flat table, preferably on top of the antistatic bag. 8. Remove the LAN card by removing the 3 nylon screws (46208922P23) and washers (46230523P4) from the top of the LAN card. 9. Lift up on the P1 connector to disconnect it from the maxiHIB. Pull the LAN card away from the face plate. 10. Remove the 3 nylon screws and washers to disassemble the maxiHIB. 11. Remove the 4 AMP screws from the front face plate. 12. Remove the left and right board holders from the maxiHIB by removing 1 screw from each board holder on the solder side of the maxiHIB. This will leave the holder/extractors as part of the front face plate assembly. 13. Remove the thumb releases, making sure not to lose the bushings. 14. Lay the board assembly flat on the table. Lift up on the P4 bus on the center edge of the board to remove it from the 3/60 board and face plate. 15. Place the maxiHIB in an antistatic bag. Install Board: 1. Using ESD precautions, remove the new maxiHIB from the shipping box and place it on the antistatic bag on top of a flat surface. 2. Check jumper settings on the maxiHIB. 3. Carefully connect the maxiHIB to the P4 adapter on the 3/60 SBC while sliding the board in the front face plate. 4. Install the 4 AMP screws through the face plate to the maxiHIB connectors. 5. Install the 2 screws in the center of the front face plate to the center board holders on the maxiHIB. 6. Install the left and right board holders onto the maxiHIB using the 1 screw used in disassembly.
12161
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 7. Install the LAN card onto the maxiHIB. Secure with 3 nylon screws and washers. 8. Slide the 3/60 maxi assembly back into the scan chassis. Apply enough pressure to ensure the assembly is properly seated in the backplane. Tighten eight (8) assembly front panel screws. 9. Reconnect the cables previously removed.
12307
46297673G4 MaxiHIB to HCHIOP Cable Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good service practices.
12308
46278722G1 Power CableSRU Cabinet Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good service practices.
12309
46296841G1 Power Distribution CableScan Chassis Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good service practices.
12310
46296840G1 PS to Backplane Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good service practices.
12311
46297098G1 Sabre Interconnect to 096 and 097 harnesses Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good service practices.
12162
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12312 46297097G1 Sabre Interconnect to 098 Harness
Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good service practices. 12313 46297043G2 Sabre to Xylogics Cable, 26pin Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good service practices. 12314 46297043G1 Sabre to Xylogics Cable, 60pin Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good service practices. 12315 46264832P1 SCALAN Bd, SBC Remove Scan Chassis Power 1. Shutdown Applications Software and Halt Unix on the SBC. 2. Turn off power to the Scan Chassis. 3. Put on your ground wrist strap and attach to chassis. Remove Board: 1. Disconnect the following cables to the SBC/maxiHIB assembly: SCSI Cable: 46296451G3 Serial Port A Cable: 46297711G1 Serial Port B Cable: 46297123G1 Ethernet Cable: 46296454G2 AP Parallel Cable: 46297673G4 Abort Line Cable: 46297565G1
2. Unscrew the 8 retaining screws holding the 3/60 maxi board assembly to the scan chassis. 3. Using ESD precautions, slowly pull board assembly out of the scan chassis. 4. Lay the board assembly on a flat table, preferably on top of the antistatic bag.
12163
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 5. Remove the 3 nylon screws (46208922P23) and washers (46230523P4) from the top of the LAN card. 6. Carefully pull up the LAN card, thus disconnecting it from the maxiHIB connector and pulling the BNC connector through the front face plate. Install Board: 1. Using ESD precautions, remove the new LAN card from the shipping box and place it on the antistatic bag on top of a flat surface. 2. Install the LAN card by placing it over the maxiHIB, sliding the BNC connector through the front face plate, and connecting P1 on the LAN to P5 on the maxiHIB. Push down on the LAN at P5 until the card clicks into place. 3. Install the 3 nylon screws and washers, attaching it to the maxiHIB. 4. Install the 3/60 maxiHIB assembly into the scan chassis. Apply enough pressure to ensure the assembly is properly seated in the backplane. Tighten 8 assembly front panel screws. 5. Reconnect the cables previously removed.
12316
46296183P1 Scan Chassis +5, 12, +24V PS Remove Scan Chassis Power: 1. Shutdown Applications Software and Halt Unix on the SBC. 2. Turn off power to the Scan Chassis. 3. Put on your ground wrist strap and attach to chassis. Remove power supply: 1. From the back of the scan chassis, remove +5V cable assembly (46296840G1). 2. Remove cable 46297096G1 3. Remove 12V cables. 4. At the front of the scan chassis, remove the metal plate by loosening the 2 screws at the top. 5. Remove incoming line power. 6. Slide the tray assembly out of the scan chassis and lay on a flat surface. 7. Remove the 4 screws attaching the power supply to the tray. Install new power supply: 1. Attach new power supply to tray, using 4 screws removed earlier. 2. Slide the tray assembly into the scan chassis. 3. Reattach cables 46296840G1, 46297096G1, and 12V. 4. Reconnect incoming line power. 5. Verify power supply voltage. 6. Attach metal plate using the 2 screws removed earlier.
12164
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 12317 46296186P1 Scan Chassis 5V PS
Remove Scan Chassis Power: 1. Shutdown Applications Software and Halt Unix on the SBC. 2. Turn off power to the Scan Chassis. 3. Put on your ground wrist strap and attach to chassis. Remove power supply: 1. At the back of the scan chassis, remove the 4 screws attaching the fan plate to the scan chassis. This allows access to the back of the 5V power supply. 2. Remove all cables to the power supply. Take note of where the cables are connected to ensure you reattach them properly. 3. Remove the cable strain relief. 4. Remove the cable to the system disk drive. 5. At the front of the scan chassis, remove the 2 screws attaching the tray assembly to the scan chassis. 6. Slide the tray assembly out and place it on a flat surface. 7. Remove the 4 screws attaching the power supply to the tray. Install new power supply: 1. Attach new power supply to tray, using the 4 screws removed earlier. 2. Slide the tray assembly back into the scan chassis. 3. Reattach the 2 screws holding the tray assembly to the scan chassis. 4. At the back of the scan chassis, reattach all the cables removed earlier, including the cable to the system disk drive. 5. Reattach the cable strain relief. 6. Verify power supply voltage. 12318 46296799G1 Scan Chassis Assm No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 12319 46297244G1 Scan Chassis Assembly, complete No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 12320 46264830G1 Scan Chassis Backplane Remove Scan Chassis Power: 1. Shutdown Applications Software and Halt Unix on the SBC. 2. Turn off power to the Scan Chassis. 3. Put on your ground wrist strap and attach to chassis.
12165
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 Remove Board: 1. Disconnect the following cables to the SBC/MaxiHIB Assembly: SCSI Cable: 46296451G3 Serial Port A Cable: 46297711G1 Serial Port B Cable: 46297123G1 Ethernet Cable: 46296454G2 AP Parallel Cable: 46297673G4 Abort Line Cable: 46297565G1
2. Unscrew 8 retaining screws holding the board assembly to the scan chassis. 3. Using ESD precautions, slowly pull 3/60 maxi board assembly out of the scan chassis and set aside. 4. Remove the screws at the top and bottom of the xylogics controller board. 5. Press the thumb release buttons and slide the board out as far as the cables will allow. 6. Disconnect the cables from the high speed disk, slide the xylogics controller board the rest of the way out, and set it aside. The back of the scan chassis: 7. Disconnect power on the scan chassis at J4 and J6. 8. Remove the nut and washer attaching +5V and ground power supply cables at J12 and J13. 9. Carefully remove the 10 screws attaching the backplane to the scan chassis. Install new board: 1. Check backplane jumper settings on the new scan chassis backplane. 2. Install new board on alignment pegs. 3. Reattach the board and the 10 screws that you removed earlier. 4. Reconnect cables: white to J12 (+5V), black to J13 (ground). 5. Reconnect J4 power cable. 6. Reconnect J6 power cable. 7. Slide board assembly back into scan chassis. 8. Reconnect cables and return power to the system. 12321 46229909P1 Scan Chassis Boxer Fan Remove Fan: 1. Remove screw attaching tray assembly to the scan chassis. 2. Remove power cables to the fans. 3. Slide tray assembly out of scan chassis. 4. Remove 4 screws attaching each fan to the tray. 5. Replace fan(s).
12166
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 Replace Fan: 1. Fasten new fan(s) to tray using 4 screws removed earlier. 2. Slide tray assembly back into scan chassis. 3. Attach power cables to fans. 4. Tighten screw attaching tray assembly to scan chassis.
12322
46221328P13 Scan Chassis Pwr Switch/Ckt Bkr 1. Check jumper settings on the new scan chassis backplane. 2. Install new board on alignment pegs. 3. Reattach the board and the 10 screws that you removed earlier. 4. Reconnect cables: white to J12 (+5V), black to J13 (ground). 5. Reconnect J4 power cable. 6. Reconnect J6 power cable. 7. Slide board assembly back into scan chassis. 8. Reconnect cables and return power to the system.
12323
46297857G1 ST 1480 Disk Drive Remove Scan Chassis Power: 1. Shutdown Applications Software and Halt Unix on the SBC. 2. Turn off power to the Scan Chassis. 3. Put on your ground wrist strap and attach to chassis. Remove disk drive: 1. Disconnect ribbon cable strain relief. 2. Remove 2 screws holding the tray assembly to the scan chassis. 3. Slide the assembly out halfway. 4. Disconnect the ground, power and ribbon cables from the drive. 5. Remove 4 screws holding the drive to the tray. Install new disk drive: 1. Check 1480 disk jumper settings on the new system disk drive. 2. Place new disk drive on the tray and attach with 4 screws on the bottom of the tray. 3. Slide the tray assembly into the scan chassis. 4. Reconnect the ribbon, power, and ground cables. 5. Reattach the ribbon cable strain relief. 6. Fasten the 2 screws holding the tray assembly to the scan chassis.
12167
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12324 46237328P67 STCT 4MB Main Memory
1. Remove 3 screws on front cover of the AP and remove the cover. 2. Lift up on thumb release tabs at top and bottom of board and slide board out. 3. Immediately place board in antistatic bag. 4. Insert new board. 5. Replace cover and attach with 3 screws removed earlier. 12325 46237328P69 STCT 512kB Public Memory 1. Remove 3 screws on front cover of the AP and remove the cover. 2. Lift up on thumb release tabs at top and bottom of board and slide board out. 3. Immediately place board in antistatic bag. 4. Insert new board. 5. Replace cover and attach with 3 screws removed earlier. 12326 46241971P12 STCT BPC 1. Remove 3 screws on front cover of the AP and remove the cover. 2. Lift up on thumb release tabs at top and bottom of board and slide board out. 3. Immediately place board in antistatic bag. 4. Insert new board. 5. Replace cover and attach with 3 screws removed earlier. 12327 46241971P10 STCT Cache 1. Remove 3 screws on front cover of the AP and remove the cover. 2. Lift up on thumb release tabs at top and bottom of board and slide board out. 3. Immediately place board in antistatic bag. 4. Insert new board. 5. Replace cover and attach with 3 screws removed earlier. 12328 46241971P21 STCT Chassis with boards No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 12329 46237328P54 STCT Master 1. Remove 3 screws on front cover of the AP and remove the cover. 2. Lift up on thumb release tabs at top and bottom of board and slide board out. 3. Immediately place board in antistatic bag. 4. Insert new board. 5. Replace cover and attach with 3 screws removed earlier.
12168
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12330 46241971P14 STCT MMC
1. Remove 3 screws on front cover of the AP and remove the cover. 2. Lift up on thumb release tabs at top and bottom of board and slide board out. 3. Immediately place board in antistatic bag. 4. Insert new board. 5. Replace cover and attach with 3 screws removed earlier. 12331 46237328P53 STCT Slave 1. Remove 3 screws on front cover of the AP and remove the cover. 2. Lift up on thumb release tabs at top and bottom of board and slide board out. 3. Immediately place board in antistatic bag. 4. Insert new board. 5. Replace cover and attach with 3 screws removed earlier. 12332 46241971P11 STCT SMP MUX 1. Remove 3 screws on front cover of the AP and remove the cover. 2. Lift up on thumb release tabs at top and bottom of board and slide board out. 3. Immediately place board in antistatic bag. 4. Insert new board. 5. Replace cover and attach with 3 screws removed earlier. 12333 46237328P57 STCT/STCTC ACP 1. Remove 3 screws on front cover of the AP and remove the cover. 2. Lift up on thumb release tabs at top and bottom of board and slide board out. 3. Immediately place board in antistatic bag. 4. Check jumper settings on new board. 5. Insert new board. 6. Replace cover and attach with 3 screws removed earlier. 12334 46237328P58 STCT/STCTC ACU 1. Remove 3 screws on front cover of the AP and remove the cover. 2. Lift up on thumb release tabs at top and bottom of board and slide board out. 3. Immediately place board in antistatic bag. 4. Check jumper settings on new board. 5. Insert new board. 6. Replace cover and attach with 3 screws removed earlier.
12169
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12335 46237328P62 STCT/STCTC BP
1. Remove 3 screws on front cover of the AP and remove the cover. 2. Lift up on thumb release tabs at top and bottom of board and slide board out. 3. Immediately place board in antistatic bag. 4. Check jumper settings on new board. 5. Insert new board. 6. Replace cover and attach with 3 screws removed earlier. 12336 46278330P11 STCT/STCTC DASIOP 1. Remove 3 screws on front cover of the AP and remove the cover. 2. Lift up on thumb release tabs at top and bottom of board and slide board out. 3. Immediately place board in antistatic bag. 4. Check DASIOP jumper settings on new board. 5. Insert new board. 6. Replace cover and attach with 3 screws removed earlier. 12337 46278330P9 STCT/STCTC HCHIOP 1. Remove 3 screws on front cover of the AP and remove the cover. 2. Lift up on thumb release tabs at top and bottom of board and slide board out. 3. Immediately place board in antistatic bag. 4. Check HCHIOP jumper settings on new board. 5. Insert new board. 6. Replace cover and attach with 3 screws removed earlier. 12338 46237328P55 STCT/STCTC IOC 1. Remove 3 screws on front cover of the AP and remove the cover. 2. Lift up on thumb release tabs at top and bottom of board and slide board out. 3. Immediately place board in antistatic bag. 4. Check IOC jumper settings on new board. 5. Insert new board. 6. Replace cover and attach with 3 screws removed earlier. 12339 46278330P4 STCTC 4MB Main Memory 1. Remove 3 screws on front cover of the AP and remove the cover. 2. Lift up on thumb release tabs at top and bottom of board and slide board out. 3. Immediately place board in antistatic bag. 4. Insert new board. 5. Replace cover and attach with 3 screws removed earlier.
12170
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12340 46278330P7 STCTC BPCIM
1. Remove 3 screws on front cover of the AP and remove the cover. 2. Lift up on thumb release tabs at top and bottom of board and slide board out. 3. Immediately place board in antistatic bag. 4. Insert new board. 5. Replace cover and attach with 3 screws removed earlier. 12341 46278330P2 STCTC MSP 1. Remove 3 screws on front cover of the AP and remove the cover. 2. Lift up on thumb release tabs at top and bottom of board and slide board out. 3. Immediately place board in antistatic bag. 4. Insert new board. 5. Replace cover and attach with 3 screws removed earlier. 12342 46278330P6 STCTC Scache 1. Remove 3 screws on front cover of the AP and remove the cover. 2. Lift up on thumb release tabs at top and bottom of board and slide board out. 3. Immediately place board in antistatic bag. 4. Insert new board. 5. Replace cover and attach with 3 screws removed earlier. 12343 46297123G1 STCT to 3/60 Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good service practices. 12344 46266700P3 Wren IV Disk Drive Remove Scan Chassis Power: 1. Shutdown Applications Software and Halt Unix on the SBC. 2. Turn off power to the Scan Chassis. 3. Put on your ground wrist strap and attach to chassis.
12171
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 Remove disk drive: 1. Disconnect ribbon cable strain relief. 2. Remove 2 screws holding the tray assembly to the scan chassis. 3. Slide the assembly out halfway. 4. Disconnect the ground, power and ribbon cables from the drive. 5. Remove 4 screws holding the drive to the tray. Install new disk drive: 1. Check jumper settings on the new system disk drive. 2. Place new disk drive on the tray and attach with 4 screws on the bottom of the tray. 3. Slide the tray assembly into the scan chassis. 4. Reconnect the ribbon, power, and ground cables. 5. Reattach the ribbon cable strain relief. 6. Fasten the 2 screws holding the tray assembly to the scan chassis.
12345
46297694G1 Xylogics Controller Remove Scan Chassis Power: 1. Shutdown Applications Software and Halt Unix on the SBC. 2. Turn off power to the Scan Chassis. 3. Put on your ground wrist strap and attach to chassis. Remove Board: 1. Remove the screws at the top and bottom of the board. 2. Press the thumb release buttons; slide the board out as far as the cables allow. 3. Disconnect the cables from the high speed disk and slide the xylogics controller board the rest of the way out. 4. Place the board on the antistatic bag on a flat surface. 5. Remove the plastic cover by removing the screws. 6. Remove the 3 screws attaching the xylogics controller to the frame kit. 7. Disconnect cables from the xylogics board. 8. Replace the xylogics controller board. Install Board: 1. Check xylogics jumper settings on the new xylogics controller board. 2. Reattach cables to the new xylogics controller board. 3. Reattach the plastic cover. 4. Slide the xylogics controller into the card guides in the scan chassis, until you feel it lock into place against the backplane. 5. Reattach the cables from the high speed disk. 6. Insert and tighten the screws at the top and bottom of the plate.
12172
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 Table 12346 46208718P1 1 1/4 dia. Clamp Note:
This clamp, marked as TA713D20, holds the large, main harness bundle to the right side of the base frame. 1. Note the orientation of the clamp before removal. 2. Remove the clamp by removing the attaching screw. 3. Position the clamp in the proper orientation, then install with the screw.
12347
46208718P12 1 dia. Clamp Note: This clamp, marked as TA713D16, is the second clamp holding the main harness to the backside of the ETC PWA chassis. 1. Note the orientation of the clamp before removal. 2. Remove the clamp by removing the attaching screw. 3. Position the clamp in the proper orientation, then install with the screw.
12348
46208718P5 1/2 dia. Clamp Note: This clamp, marked as TA713D8, is used in various places to hold harness branches to both zchannels. 1. Note the orientation of the clamp before removal. 2. Remove the clamp by removing the attaching screw. 3. Position the clamp in the proper orientation, then install with the screw.
12349
46208718P8 11/16 dia. Clamp Note: This clamp, marked as TA713D11, holds the harness branch next to and under the right control panel. 1. Note the orientation of the clamp before removal. 2. Remove the clamp by removing the attaching screw. 3. Position the clamp in the proper orientation, then install with the screw.
12350
46208718P9 3/4 dia. Clamp Note: This clamp, marked as TA713D12, is used in various places to hold harness branches to the base frame, front leg, ETC PWA chassis, and the underside of the right zchannel. 1. Note the orientation of the clamp before removal. 2. Remove the clamp by removing the attaching screw. 3. Position the clamp in the proper orientation, then install with the screw.
12173
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12351 46208718P2 5/16 dia. Clamp Note:
This clamp, marked as TA713D5, is used in various places to hold harness branches to the base frame, front leg, and both zchannels. 1. Note the orientation of the clamp before removal. 2. Remove the clamp by removing the attaching screw. 3. Position the clamp in the proper orientation, then install with the screw.
12352
46208718P11 7/8 dia. Clamp Note: This clamp, marked as TA713D14, holds the small, main harness bundle to the floor of the base frame. 1. Note the orientation of the clamp before removal. 2. Remove the clamp by removing the attaching screw. 3. Position the clamp in the proper orientation, then install with the screw.
12353
46297093P1 AC/DC Power Switch 1. For the best access, fully elevate the table. 2. Remove the left Base Covers. 3. On the Power Assm., remove the screws attaching the outlet cover and move the cover aside to gain access to the power switches. 4. Loosen the nut holding the power switch and remove the switch from the hole. 5. Note the positions of the wires, then loosen the screw terminals to remove the wires. 6. To install the Power Switch, reverse above steps; note the positions of the wires. 7. Refit the Base Covers.
12354
46296592P1 Actuator Cover 1. Fully elevate the table. 2. Remove the Base Covers, the right Table Side Covers and right Side Panels. 3. Remove both of the clips securing the spring pin to the actuator cover, and slide the pin out to release the spring. 4. Remove the two screws attaching the cover hinge to the Ubracket, and remove the cover from the table.
12174
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 5. To install the actuator cover, reverse the above steps. Make sure to center the cover in the rear leg opening before tightening the hinge screws, and place the spring in the notch on the spring pin. 6. Refit the Side Panels, Side Cover and Base Covers.
12355
46296561P10 Actuator Limit Switch 1. For the best access, fully elevate the table. 2. Remove the Base Covers. 3. If servicing the Upper Limit Switch, also remove the Actuator Cover. 4. Remove the wires from the switch. 5. If removing the Upper Limit Switch, loosen the screw and slide the switch up along the actuator until free. If removing the Lower Limit Switch, remove its screw and two washers; the nut plate is trapped, but may slide down the actuator. 6. To install either limit switch, reverse the above steps, making sure to connect the wires to the W and C terminals. Do not tighten the screw before adjusting the switch position. 7. To adjust the Upper Limit Switch, on the right side of the base frame, loosen the two screws holding the cal. plate, move the plate fully outward in its slots, and retighten the screws. Elevate the table so that the distance between the bottom of the cal. plate, at the UPPER LIMIT SWITCH position, and the center mark on the upper, rear leg pivot pin is 36.63 0.03. 8. Attach a continuity device to the W and C terminals. Loosen the clamping screw on the switch, and slide the switch upward until at least 1 of the magnet tube is below the switch. Slowly slide the switch downward until the switch opens, and then tighten the screw. 9. To adjust the Lower Limit Switch, on the right, rear corner of the base frame, remove the cal. bar from its storage position. Using the same hole, position the bar so that it is parallel to the rear surface of the base frame, and tighten the screw. Elevate the table so that the distance between the bottom outer edge of the cal. bar and the center mark on the upper, rear leg pivot pin is 14.51 0.03. 10. Attach a continuity device to the W and C terminals. Loosen the clamping screw on the switch, and slide the switch downward as far as possible. Slowly slide the switch upward until the switch opens, and then tighten the screw. 11. Return the cal. plate and bar to their storage positions. Refit the Actuator Cover (if removed) and the Base Covers.
12356
46296561P11 Actuator Magnet Rod 1. For the best access, fully elevate the table. 2. Remove the Base Covers, the right Side Panels and the Actuator Cover. 3. Loosen and remove the two nuts securing the Magnet Rod to its plate at the upper end of the actuator. 4. Slide the Magnet Rod out of the actuator.
12175
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 5. To install the Magnet Rod, reverse the above steps. Since the strength of the magnets vary, both Actuator Limit Switches must be adjusted per their procedure. 6. Refit the Actuator Cover, Side Panels and the Base Covers.
12357
2100671 Actuator Magnet Rod 1. For the best access, fully elevate the table. 2. Remove the Base Covers, the right Side Panels and the Actuator Cover. 3. Loosen and remove the two nuts securing the Magnet Rod to its plate at the upper end of the actuator. 4. Slide the Magnet Rod out of the actuator. 5. To install the Magnet Rod, reverse the above steps. Since the strength of the magnets vary, both Actuator Limit Switches must be adjusted per their procedure. 6. Refit the Actuator Cover, Side Panels and the Base Covers.
12358
46296561P1 Actuator, Table Elevation 1. Fully elevate the table; THERE SHOULD BE NO WEIGHT ON THE CRADLE. 2. Remove the Base Covers, the right Side Panels and the Actuator Cover. 3. Remove the Actuator Cover Ubracket by removing four screws. 4. Disconnect the motor wires and ground strap. Cut the tywraps and remove the clamp holding the limit switch wires to the Actuator. 5. When the table is fully elevated, the Actuator is in tension due to the force produced by the gas springs. The table must be elevated further with a power supply, or mechanically with the hex drive on the end of the motor. Raise the table until the Actuator is unloaded, which occurs when gas springs are fully extended, but the lower gas spring mounting pin is still at the back of the slot in the lower mounting block. 6. Loosen and remove the locknut from the upper Actuator mounting pin. The pin should now be easy to remove; if it is not, the Actuator is still under load. BOTH ACTUATOR MOUNTING PINS MUST BE LOOSE BEFORE BEING REMOVED. Turn the motor hex drive by hand until the upper pin is loose and can be easily removed. Note the positions of the two bumper washers and spacer, and remove them. 7. Retract the Actuator with the power supply or the hex drive, but do not allow Actuator to fall when the rod end clears the upper mounting block. Do not over shorten the Actuator.
CAUTION
8. Remove and keep the Ering from the lower mounting pin and slide the pin out. 9. Lift and remove the Actuator from the table.
12176
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 10. To install the Actuator, reverse the above steps. Make sure that the lower pin is coated with Molykote grease and that the Ering is correctly installed. When installing the Upper Mounting Pin, make sure there is one bumper washer on either side of the rod end. On the right side, the bumper washer fits over the shoulder on the hexside of the pin; on the left side, the spacer fits inside the bumper washer, and spaces the rod end away from the mounting clevis. Torque the locknut to 40 ftlbs. 11. Reconnect the motor wires, noting the polarity. Ty wrap the limit switch harness in place, making sure to connect the wires to the W and C terminals of each switch. 12. Adjust both Actuator Limit Switches per their procedure. 13. Refit the Actuator Cover, make sure to center the cover in the rear leg opening before tightening the hinge screws, and place the spring in the notch on the spring pin. Refit the Side Panels, Side Cover and Base Covers.
12359
2103043 Actuator, Table Elevation 1. Fully elevate the table; THERE SHOULD BE NO WEIGHT ON THE CRADLE. 2. Remove the Base Covers, the right Side Panels and the Actuator Cover. 3. Remove the Actuator Cover Ubracket by removing four screws. 4. Disconnect the motor wires and ground strap. Cut the tywraps and remove the clamp holding the limit switch wires to the Actuator. 5. When the table is fully elevated, the Actuator is in tension due to the force produced by the gas springs. The table must be elevated further with a power supply, or mechanically with the hex drive on the end of the motor. Raise the table until the Actuator is unloaded, which occurs when gas springs are fully extended, but the lower gas spring mounting pin is still at the back of the slot in the lower mounting block. 6. Loosen and remove the locknut from the upper Actuator mounting pin. The pin should now be easy to remove; if it is not, the Actuator is still under load. BOTH ACTUATOR MOUNTING PINS MUST BE LOOSE BEFORE BEING REMOVED. Turn the motor hex drive by hand until the upper pin is loose and can be easily removed. Note the positions of the two bumper washers and spacer, and remove them. 7. Retract the Actuator with the power supply or the hex drive, but do not allow Actuator to fall when the rod end clears the upper mounting block. Do not over shorten the Actuator.
CAUTION
8. Remove and keep the Ering from the lower mounting pin and slide the pin out. 9. Lift and remove the Actuator from the table. 10. To install the Actuator, reverse the above steps. Make sure that the lower pin is coated with Molykote grease and that the Ering is correctly installed. When installing the Upper Mounting Pin, make sure there is one bumper washer on either side of the rod end. On the right side, the bumper washer fits over the shoulder on the hexside of the pin; on the left side, the spacer fits inside the bumper washer, and spaces the rod end away from the mounting clevis. Torque the locknut to 40 ftlbs.
12177
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 11. Reconnect the motor wires, noting the polarity. Tywrap the limit switch harness in place, making sure to connect the wires to the W and C terminals of each switch. 12. Adjust both Actuator Limit Switches per their procedure. 13. Refit the Actuator Cover, make sure to center the cover in the rear leg opening before tightening the hinge screws, and place the spring in the notch on the spring pin. Refit the Side Panels, Side Cover and Base Covers.
12360
46221532P18 Belt, Cradle Drive 1. For best access, fully elevate the table. 2. Remove the Cradle Drive Assm. per its procedure, and set it on a work surface. 3. To remove the belt from the pulleys, loosen the four screws holding the motor, and slide it toward the drive roller. 4. To install the belt, reverse the above steps. Adjust the position of the motor so that the belt deflects .050/.060 5. With 46 oz applied at the midspan of the belt; tighten the four screws. 6. Refit the Cradle Drive Assm.
12361
46170047P7 Belt, Elevation Encoder 1. For best access, fully elevate the table. 2. Remove the Base Covers and left Side Panels. 3. To remove the belt from the sprockets, loosen the two screws attaching the Elevation Encoder Assembly to the base, and slide toward the large sprocket. 4. To install the belt, reverse the above steps, making sure the splice is at the mark on the large sprocket. Adjust the position of Elevation Encoder Assm. so that the belt deflects .250 with 3235 oz. applied at the midspan of the belt; tighten both screws. 5. Loosen the coupler screw, and adjust the Encoder Table Elevation for the Cpulse per its procedure. 6. Loosen the switch cam, and adjust the cam per the Int. Matrix Switch Table procedure. 7. Refit the Side Panels and Base Covers.
12362
46297332P1 BNC, TConnector, 50 Ohm, Table Note: This connector is located on the SCALAN PWB on the table ETC PWB. 1. The BNC TConnector is removed and installed by rotating the knurled ring. Note that the rightangle BNC connectors must be positioned by the plastic support.
12178
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12363 46297350P1 Bumper Disk, Upper Pin Actuator
The two Bumper Disks are located at the front leg attachment point for the Actuator. Refer to the Actuator Table Elevation procedure. 12364 46221597P2 Bumper, Cradle No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 12365 46297253P1 Cable Support, ETC The Cable Support is located on the ETC PWA, and positions the BNCTEE connector. Refer to the SCALAN Bd ETC procedure. 12366 46297576P1 Cal Pin, Table The Cal. Pin is used in various procedures to position the cradle/carriage at specific locations, and is stored in the bottom of the right zchannel, under the Cradle Drive Cover. Refer to the following procedures: Home Int. Switch Table, Home Latch Assm Table., Long. Encoder Assm Table., Long. Limit Switch Table, Pot Assm Long. Encoder. Long. Encoder Assm Table. 12367 46208580P18 Cam Follower, Large, Carriage No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 12368 46208580P19 Cam Follower, Small, Carriage No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 12369 46296232G1 Carriage Assm, Table No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 12370 46297338P1 Clamp, Large ushape Note: This clamp, marked as TA06306SZ20CR, is the first clamp holding the main harness to the backside of the ETC PWA chassis. 1. Remove the clamp by removing the two attaching screws. 2. 2. Position the clamp, then install the screws. 12371 46297648P1 Clamp, Small ushape Note: This clamp, marked as TA06101SZ12CR, holds the upper main harness branch to the side of the right zchannel. 1. Remove the clamp by removing the two attaching screws. 2. Position the clamp, then install the screws.
12179
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12372 46297722P1 Connector, Tape Switch, Female
No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 12373 46297721P1 Connector, Tape Switch, Male No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 12374 46297420G1 Cradle Assm 1. For the best access, fully elevated the table. 2. Verify that the Cradle/carriage is at the home position and latched before removing the Cradle; if the Cradle/carriage is free to move when the Cradle is removed, the carriage could quickly move toward the gantry, and damage the longitudinal encoder assembly. 3. Remove and keep the six plug buttons covering the bolt holes in the Cradle. 4. Loosen and remove the six screws. 5. Lift the Cradle upward to remove from the table. 6. To install the Cradle, position the rear end of the Cradle over the carriage and align the screw holes. 7. Start, but do not tighten all six screws. 8. Looking through the gantry bore at the end of table, position the Cradle laterally on the drive rollers so that the same gap exists between the sloped sides of the Cradle and the guide rollers. 9. Tighten the six screws to 13 ftlbs and replace the plug buttons. 10. Make sure that the cradle/carriage is not resting against the latch. 12375 46264370G1 Cradle Drive Amp 1. For the best access, fully elevate the table. 2. Remove the left Base Covers. 3. Remove the servo amp cover by loosening the captive screws, or removing the four screws. 4. The Cradle Drive Amplifier is located toward the outside of the table. Detach all of the wire connectors. Remove the seven screws attaching the Amp to its mounting bracket. 5. To install the Cradle Drive Amp., reverse the above steps. 6. Refit the Base Cover. 12376 46296235G1 Cradle Drive Assm 1. For best access, fully elevate the table. 2. Remove the Cradle Assm per its procedure, making sure the carriage is latched. 3. Remove the Cradle Drive Cover by loosening the two captive screws. Also remove the right Table Side Covers.
12180
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 4. Disconnect the ground strap from the ZChannel, and unplug the wire connectors: J21 on left side, J18 on right side. 5. In order to not dislodge the longitudinal encoder cable from its spool, the carriage must be moved toward the gantry. Grasp the carriage, manually unlatch the carriage and slowly move it fully toward the gantry until it is against the bumper stop.
Note:
Do NOT allow the carriage to move unimpeded or you will damage the encoder assembly when the carriage hits the stops. 6. Tilt the front roller of the Cradle Drive downward, and lift the entire assembly upward, then backward, and then downward, removing it from the bottom. Be careful not to disturb the Longitudinal Encoder cable. 7. To install the Cradle Drive, reverse the above steps. 8. Refit the Side Cover, Cradle Drive Cover and Cradle, making sure to center the Cradle between the guide rollers, and torque the six screws to 13 ftlbs.
12377
46296594P1 Cradle Drive Cover 1. For best access, fully elevate the table. 2. Loosen the two captive screws at the rear of the cover, and slide the cover forward off the two mounting pins. 3. To install the Cradle Drive Cover, reverse the above steps.
12378
46288226G1 Cradle Release Switch No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices.
12379
46220277P11 ERing, Lower Pin Actuator This ERing secures the lower Actuator mounting pin at the clevis block in the base frame. Refer to the Actuator Table Elevation procedure.
12380
46220277P15 ERing, Table Gas Spring Pin This ERing is used to secure both Gas Spring mounting pins. Refer to the Gas Spring Table procedure.
12381
46297432P1 EStop Button, Table No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices.
12382
46288410G1 EStop Switch, Table No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices.
12181
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12383 46278446P1 Electrical Outlet, Table
1. For the best access, fully elevate the table. 2. Remove the left Base Covers. 3. On the Power Assm., remove the screws attaching the Outlet cover and pull it outward to gain access to the wire connections. 4. Note the positions of the wires, then loosen the screw terminals to remove the wires. 5. To install the Outlet, reverse the above steps, noting the positions of the wires. Note that the white wires connect to silver screws, the black wires connect to the brass screws, and the green/yellow wire goes to the green ground screw at the corner of the outlet. 6. Refit the Base Cover. 12384 46296633G1 Elevation Encoder Assm 1. For the best access, fully elevate the table. 2. Remove the Base Covers, and the left Side Panels. 3. Disconnect the Encoder cable from the table harness at the J15 connector on the backside of the ETC mounting panel, and cut the tywraps. 4. Loosen and remove the two screws attaching the Elevation Encoder Assembly to the table base. Slide the Assembly toward the large sprocket, so that the belt can be removed. 5. Remove the Encoder Assembly from the table. 6. To install the Elevation Encoder Assembly, reverse the above steps. 7. Adjust the position of Elevation Encoder Assembly so that the belt deflects .250 with 3235 oz. applied at the midspan of the belt; tighten both screws. 8. Adjust the encoder CPulse position per the Encoder Table Elevation procedure. 9. Adjust the Int. Matrix Switch Table per their procedure. 10. The elevation axis must now be characterized. 11. Refit the Side Panels and the Base Covers. 12385 46288170G1 Elevation/Tilt Amp. 1. For the best access, fully elevate the table. 2. Remove the left Base Covers. 3. Remove the servo amp cover by loosening the captive screws, or removing the four screws. 4. The Elevation/Tilt Amplifier is located toward the inside of the table. Detach all of the wire connectors. Remove the seven screws attaching the Amp to its mounting bracket. 5. To install the Elevation/Tilt Amp., reverse the above steps. 6. Refit the Base Cover.
12182
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12386 46296854P1 Encoder, Table Elevation
1. For the best access, fully elevate the table. 2. Remove the Base Covers, and the left Side Panels. 3. Disconnect the Encoder cable from the table harness at the J15 connector on the backside of the ETC mounting panel, and cut the tywraps. 4. On the Elevation Encoder Assembly, loosen the screw on the encoderside of the flexible coupling; if equipped, loosen the two set screws holding the thumb wheel (if equipped) to the encoder shaft. 5. Disengage the three servo clamps holding the Encoder to the mounting block by turning each clamp 1/2 turn ccw. Pull the Encoder away from the block, allowing the thumb wheel and the spacer to slide off shaft. 6. Remove the Encoder from the table. 7. To install the Encoder, reverse the above steps. 8. Place the spacer on the Encoder shaft and insert the shaft through the block and the thumb wheel. 9. With the Encoder cable pointing within 45 degrees of downward, tighten the three servo clamps, making sure the Encoder is fully seated in the block. 10. Push the thumbwheel against the spacer and the Encoder, tighten the two set screws in the thumbwheel. 11. On the right side of the base frame, loosen the two screws holding the cal. plate, move the plate fully outward in its slots, and retighten the screws. Elevate the table so that the distance between the bottom of the cal. plate, at the CPULSE position, and the center mark on the upper, rear leg pivot pin is 30.44 0.01. 12. Rotate the encoder shaft by turning the thumbwheel until the CPulse is found, as indicated by the specific LED. on the ETC PWB. Tighten the flexible coupler screw that clamps the Encoder shaft, and verify that the LED is still lit. 13. Return the cal. plate to its storage position. Refit the Side Panels and the Base Covers. 12387 46264368G1 ETC Bd 1. Turn facility circuit breaker OFF, lock, tag. 2. Remove and keep 12 screws. 3. Detach all connectors. 4. Detach ETC Board from the CPU Board. 5. Replace ETC Board. 6. Connect ETC Board to CPU Board. 7. Attach all connectors. 8. To reassemble, reverse steps. Note: Install 12 screws kept in step 1.
12183
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 12388 46296788G1 ETC Chassis Assm
No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 12389 46229455P1 Fan, Table ETC 1. For the best access, fully elevate the table. 2. Remove the Base Covers. 3. Unplug the Fan connector. 4. Note the position of the Fan connector (lower left corner) and the direction of air flow (toward the CPU PWA). 5. Remove the three screws attaching the Fan to the power assembly bracket. 6. Remove the two screws attaching the guard to the Fan. 7. To install the Fan, reverse the above steps, noting the Fan connector position and the direction of air flow. 8. Refit the Base Covers. 12390 46297664P1 Filler Cover Spring, Table No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 12391 46297896G1 Fixed Dzus Fastener Kit The Fixed Dzus Fasteners are used to secure the table base covers, four per cover. The kit includes the short stud, a fixed receptacle, two retainers and two flathead rivets. 12392 46297895G1 Floating Dzus Fastener Kit The Floating Dzus Fasteners are used to secure the side table covers, two per cover. The kit includes the long stud, a floating receptacle with two shouldered spacers, one retainer and two flathead rivets. 12393 46296129G1 Footswitch Assm No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 12394 46296821P1 Front End Cover, Table No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 12395 46170021P15 Fuse, Servo Amps 1. For the best access, fully elevate the table. 2. Remove the left Base Covers. 3. Remove the servo amp cover by loosening the captive screws, or removing the four screws. 4. If equipped, remove the plastic Fuse cover. 5. Remove the fuse from its holder.
12184
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 6. To install the fuse, reverse the above steps. 7. Refit the Base Covers.
12396
46296891P1 Gas Spring, Table 1. Fully elevate the table; THERE SHOULD BE NO WEIGHT ON THE CRADLE. 2. Remove the Base Covers, the right Side Panels. 3. When the table is fully elevated, the Actuator is in tension due to the force produced by the Gas Springs. The table must be elevated further with a power supply, or mechanically with the hex drive on the end of the motor. Raise the table until the Gas Springs are fully extended, which occurs when the lower Gas Spring mounting pin is loose in its slot. BOTH GAS SPRING MOUNTING PINS MUST BE LOOSE BEFORE BEING REMOVED. 4. Remove the ERings from the top and bottom Gas Spring mounting pins and remove the pins from their mounting blocks. Remove both Gas Springs. MOST LIKELY ONE OF THE GAS SPRINGS WILL REMAIN PRESSURIZED. BOTH ARE TO BE RETURNED TO ***** GEMS Recycling Center Ace Warehouse Attn: Paul Neumiller 2200 E. College Ave. BLDG. 11 Cudahy, WI, 53110 If a pressurized spring is thrown out and accidently compacted, it may result in an explosion. 5. To install the replacement Gas Springs, reverse the above steps, making sure that the Gas Spring pressure chambers are UP, or closest to the front table leg, and that the ERings are correctly installed. 6. Refit the Side Panels and Base Covers.
WARNING
12397
46297155G2 Ground Strap, Long This Ground Strap is only used between the table base frame and the Power Assm. ground bar.
12398
46297155G1 Ground Strap, Short This Ground Strap is used at ten locations: the Cradle Drive to the left zchannel, both zchannels to the front leg, the front leg to the base frame, the rear leg to the base frame, each Side Panel to its zchannel, and the Actuator to the base frame.
12399
46218193P1 Guide Wheel, Carriage No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices.
12185
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12400 46297448P1 Handle Extension, Cradle
No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 12401 46297088G1 Harness, Power Assm, Table Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good service practices. 12402 46296377P1 Heurikon Bd, ETC 1. For the best access, fully elevate the table. 2. Remove the Base Covers. 3. Loosen the captive screw on the ETC chassis assm. holding the chassis to the center of the table base. Pivot the chassis panel so that the Heurikon PWA is horizontal. 4. Loosen and remove the one screw attaching the Heurikon PWA to the chassis assm. Slide the Heurikon PWA away from the ETC PWA slightly to disconnect it, and then out of the card guide. 5. To install the Heurikon PWA, reverse the above steps. 6. Refit the Base Covers. 12403 46297678P1 Hinge, Actuator Cover No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 12404 46136334P23 Home Int. Switch, Table 1. For best access, fully elevate the table. 2. Remove the right Table Side Covers, and the Cradle Drive Cover to access the cal. pin. 3. Disconnect the wires going to the switch, and remove the switch from its bracket by removing one nut. 4. To install the switch, reverse the above steps, making sure to connect wires to the COM and N.O. terminals. 5. Adjust the position of the switch in the bracket with the two nuts, so that it actuates when the carriage equals 0.50 0.03 out of the Home Position, as determined by the calibration pin. 6. Return the cal. pin to its storage position. Refit the Side Cover and Cradle Drive Cover.
12186
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 12405 46296233G1 Home Latch Assm, Table
1. For best access, fully elevate the table. 2. Remove the right Table Side Covers, and the Cradle Drive Cover to access the cal. pin. 3. Install and tighten the cal. pin in the home position to hold carriage in place. 4. Remove the Cradle Assm and the right side Rail Cover. 5. Disconnect the harness at the terminal strip. 6. Remove the four screws attaching the Latch Assembly to the zchannel. 7. To install the Latch Assembly, reverse the above step, but do not tighten the four attaching screws. 8. Adjust the position of the entire Latch Assembly in its slots, so that the distance between the carriage latch block and the forward edge of the latch bar opening is .050 9. **** 0.005. Tighten the four screws. 10. Adjust the set screw in the latch clevis block, so that the outer edge of the latch bar overlaps the outer edge of the carriage latch block by .050 +/.00Tighten the jam nut. 11. Adjust the position of the solenoid bracket, so that the clearance between the outer edge of the latch bar and the outer edge of the carriage latch block is .050 0.005, when the solenoid plunger is fully bottomed. Tighten the two screws. 12. Adjust the position of the spring bracket, so that the spring has .125 13. Preload, when the latch bar is against the set screw. Tighten the two screws. 14. Install the Cradle, and then return the cal. pin to its storage position. Refit the Rail Cover, the Cradle Drive Cover and the Side Cover. 12406 46136334P57 Int. Matrix Switch, Table 1. For best access, fully elevate the table. 2. Remove the left Base Covers. 3. Remove the Servo Amp Assm. 4. Remove the two screws attaching the switches to the bracket. 5. Detach the wires connected to switches. 6. To install the switches, reverse the above steps, making sure to connect the wires correctly. 7. Adjust the switchtocam clearance before tightening mounting screws as follows: Position the switches so that a .035/.045 gap exists between the roller and the outside cam surface when the roller lever is contacting the switch housing. Tighten the two screws. 8. To adjust the actuation point, on the right side of the base frame, loosen the two screws holding the cal. plate, move the plate fully outward in its slots, and retighten the screws. Elevate the table so that the distance between the bottom of the cal. plate, at the INT. MTX SWITCH S2 position, and the center mark on the upper, rear leg pivot pin is 29.14 0.03.
12187
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 9. Loosen the cam clamping screw and rotate the cam so that switch S2 (closest to center of the table) is riding on the outside surface of the cam. Now turn the cam CW (as seen from the left side of the table) until S2 actuates, and then tighten the cam clamping screw. Verify the setting. 10. Refit the Servo Amp Assm and base covers.
12407
46297687P1 Intercom Speaker, Table 1. For best access, fully elevate the table. 2. Remove the right Side Panels. 3. Remove the two nuts attaching the speaker cover. 4. Remove the two nuts attaching the Speaker and grill. 5. To install the speaker, reverse the above steps. 6. 6. Refit the Side Panels.
12408
46297805G1 Jumper Plug, Tape Switch These two Jumper Plugs are used to simulate the presence of each Side Cover Tape Switch, when the cover is removed from the table. Refer to the Table Side Covers procedures.
12409
46297431G1 Jumper, Table Rear Cover Assm Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good service practices.
12410
46221914P3 Lamp Assm, Table PS No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices.
12411
46327096G2 Left Base Cover, Table 1. For best access, fully elevate the table. 2. Turn each of four Dzus fasteners onequarter turn CCW to release the cover. Note that the fasteners are captive. 3. To install the Left Base Cover, reverse the above steps, noting that the screwdriver slot in the fastener will be horizontal when the fastener is properly engaged.
12188
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12412 46296909G1 Left Control Panel
1. For best access, fully elevate the table. 2. Remove the Table Side Covers. 3. Disconnect the ribbon cable(s) and connector J1. 4. Remove the four screws, washers, spacers, and the two fishpaper spacers. 5. To install the Control Panel, reverse the above steps, making sure the panel is free to float after the screws have been tightened. 6. Refit the Side Cover. 12413 46296827P1 Left Filler Cover, Table No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 12414 46297698P1 Leg Tape Switch 1. For best access, fully elevate the table. 2. Remove the right Side Panels. 3. Disconnect the Tape Switch from the harness. 4. Remove the Tape Switch, and the adhesive from the rear leg. 5. To install the Tape Switch, reverse the above steps, making sure to thoroughly clean the mounting surface with alcohol. 6. Remove the protective strip from the adhesive and press the switch firmly in place. 7. Refit the Side Panels. Test the Tape Switch for proper operation. 12415 46170012P67 Locknut, Upper Pin Actuator This Locknut secures the upper Actuator mounting pin. Refer to the Actuator Table Elevation procedure. 12416 46170012P81 Locknut, Upper Pin Actuator This Locknut secures the upper Actuator mounting pin. Refer to the Actuator Table Elevation procedure. 12417 46296234G1 Longitudinal Encoder Assm, Table 1. For best access, fully elevate table. 2. Remove the right Table Side Covers, and the Cradle Drive Cover to access the cal. pin. 3. Remove the Cradle Assm and the right side Rail Cover. 4. Remove the Long. Encoder Assm Cover, by removing the two locknuts. 5. Remove the Front End Cover by removing the two screws.
12189
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 6. Grasp the carriage, manually unlatch the carriage and slowly move it fully toward the gantry until it is against the bumper stop.
Note:
Do NOT allow the carriage to move unimpeded or you will damage the encoder assembly when the carriage hits the stops. 7. Loosen the clamp holding the pot sprocket to the pot shaft. 8. While firmly holding onto the eyelet, detach the stranded steel cable from the carriage by removing the shoulder screw and spacer from the carriage.
Note:
The cable is under about 2 pounds of tension. Releasing it and allowing the cable spool to unwind freely will damage the encoder assembly. 9. Remove one turn of cable preload, by bringing the eyelet from its position on the carriage to along side of the Long. Encoder Assm, and then anchor the eyelet to the first hex spacer on the encoder assembly with a tyrap, thereby maintaining the initial three turns of preload on the spool. 10. Disconnect the encoder from the table harness at the J16 connector on the right zchannel. Also unplug the pot connection at J17. 11. Remove the Long. Encoder Assm. from the table by removing the two attaching screws. 12. To install the Long. Encoder Assm, reverse the above steps, making sure that the cable is properly preloaded. Factory replacement assemblies will have the initial three turns of preload already applied and the eyelet anchored to the hex spacer. Also, make sure that the pot. sprocket clamp is loose. 13. After installing the encoder assembly, making the electrical connections, and attaching the cable to the carriage with the shoulder screw and spacer, slowly move the carriage to the home position and install and tighten the cal. pin. 14. Attach a DVM to terminals # 2 and # 1 (GND) of the pot., and turn the pot shaft with a small screwdriver until 0.80 0.01 VDC is measured. Tighten the pot clamp and then verify the setting. 15. Loosen the clamp holding the cable spool to the encoder shaft. Turn the encoder thumbwheel until the Cpulse is found, as indicated by the specific LED on the ETC PWA. Tighten the clamp, and then verify that the LED is still lit. 16. Remove the calibration pin. While holding the carriage, manually release the latch and slowly move the carriage toward the gantry, making sure that the voltage on the pot increases. NOTE: The pot will be damaged if it is mechanically turned past the zero VDC position. 17. The longitudinal axis must now be characterized. 18. Refit the Front End Cover, the Cradle, the Side Cover and the Base Covers.
12190
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12418 46136334P23 Longitudinal Limit Switch, Table
1. For best access, fully elevate the table. 2. Remove the Cradle Drive Cover. 3. Disconnect the wires going to the switch, and remove the switch from its bracket by removing one nut. 4. To install the switch, reverse above steps, making sure to connect wires to the COM and N.C. terminals. 5. Adjust the position of the switch in the bracket with the two nuts, so that it actuates when the cradle/carriage is at its maximum travel position, as determined by the cal. pin. 6. Return the cal. pin to its storage position. Refit the Side Cover and Cradle Drive Cover. 12419 46278310P1 Lower Pin, Actuator This Pin secures the lower end of the Actuator. Refer to the Actuator Table Elevation procedure. 12420 46296991G1 Main Harness, Table Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good service practices. 12421 46278575P1 Motor, Cradle Drive 1. For best access, fully elevate the table. 2. Remove the Cradle Drive Assm. per its procedure, and set it on a work surface. 3. Disconnect the motor wires from the terminal strips. 4. Remove the four screws and washers attaching the motor to the cradle drive frame. 5. Loosen the two set screws securing the pulley to the motor shaft, and remove the pulley. 6. To install the Motor, reverse the above steps, making sure that the motor pulley is aligned with the drive roller pulley, and that one of the set screws is positioned over the shaft flat. 7. Adjust the position of the motor so that the belt deflects .050/.060 with 46 oz applied at the midspan of the belt; tighten the four screws. 8. Refit the Cradle Drive Assm.
12191
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 12422 46297436P1 Pin, Table Gas Spring
These two Pins are used to mount each end of the Gas Spring pair. Refer to the Gas Spring Table procedure. 12423 46297552P1 Pivot Tube, Table Side Panel These eight Pivot Tubes are used at each Side Panels pivot point. Refer to the Side Panels procedures. 12424 46297036G2 Pot Assm, Long. Encoder 1. For best access, fully elevate table. 2. Remove the Cradle Drive Cover. 3. Install the cal. pin at the home position, and then remove the Cradle Assm. 4. Remove the Long. Encoder Assm Cover, by removing the two locknuts. 5. Remove the Front End Cover by removing the two screws. 6. Loosen the clamp holding the pot sprocket to the pot shaft. 7. Disconnect the Pot Assembly from the table harness at J17. 8. Loosen the two servo clamps, and slide the Pot Assm. downward off the sprocket, making sure not to lose the plastic spacer on the pot shaft. 9. To install the Pot Assm., reverse the above steps, making sure that the sprocket is contacting the plastic spacer. 10. Attach a DVM to terminals # 2 and # 1 (GND) of the pot., and turn the pot shaft with a small screwdriver until 0.80 0.01 VDC is measured. Tighten the pot clamp and then verify the setting. 11. Refit the Front End Cover and the Cradle. Return the cal. pin to its storage position, and refit the Cradle Drive Cover. 12425 46296791G1 Power Assm No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 12426 46297117G1 Power Harness, Cradle Drive Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good service practices. 12427 46296433G1 Power Harness, Table 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good service practices.
12192
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12428 46296317P1 Quad Output PS, Table
1. For best access, fully elevate the table. 2. Remove the Table Drive PS. 3. The Quad Output PS is the lower power supply. Disconnect the wires from both ends of the lower power supply. 4. Remove the lower two attaching screws from the right side of the Power Assm main bracket for the Quad Output PS, and slide the power supply out. 5. To install the Quad Output PS, reverse above steps, making sure to connect the wires correctly. 6. Refit the Table Drive PS. 7. Refit the Base Covers. 12429 46297430G1 Rear Cover Assm, Table No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 12430 46170053P11 Relay, Elevation & Cradle Amps 1. For the best access, fully elevate the table. 2. Remove the left Base Covers. 3. Remove the servo amp cover by loosening the captive screws, or removing the four screws. 4. Slide the wire retainer to the side and pull out the specific Relay from its socket. 5. To install the Relay, reverse the above steps. 6. Refit the Base Cover. 12431 46170053P13 Relay, Tape Switches No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 12432 46327096G1 Right Base Cover, Table 1. For best access, fully elevate the table. 2. Turn each of four Dzus fasteners onequarter turn CCW to release the cover. Note that the fasteners are captive. 3. To install the Right Base Cover, reverse the above steps, noting that the screwdriver slot in the fastener will be horizontal when the fastener is properly engaged. 12433 46296909G2 Right Control Panel 1. For best access, fully elevate the table. 2. Remove the Table Side Covers. 3. Disconnect the ribbon cable(s) and connector J1. 4. Remove the four screws, washers, spacers, and the two fishpaper spacers.
12193
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 5. To install the Control Panel, reverse the above steps, making sure the panel is free to float after the screws have been tightened. 6. Refit the Side Cover.
12434
46296827P2 Right Filler Cover, Table No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices.
12435
46297894G1 Roller Kit, Actuator cover The Roller is used to move the Actuator Cover, and is attached to the rear leg. The kit is an assembly of the roller, its mount and two roll pins.
12436
46264832P1 SCALAN Bd, ETC 1. For the best access, fully elevate the table. 2. Remove the Base Covers. 3. Loosen the captive screw on the ETC chassis assm. holding the chassis to the center of the table base. Pivot the chassis panel so that the chassis is horizontal. 4. Disconnect the BNCTEE connector from the SCALAN Board. 5. Loosen and remove the 3 screws attaching the SCALAN Board to the ETC Board.. Lift the PWA straight away from the ETC Board, to unplug the connector. 6. To install the SCALAN Board, reverse the above steps. 7. Refit the Base Covers.
12437
46297059G1 Servo Amp Assm 1. For the best access, fully elevate the table. 2. Remove the left Base Covers. 3. Remove the servo amp cover by loosening the captive screws, or removing the four screws. 4. Detach all the connectors from both servo amps. 5. Loosen the four screws attaching the servo amp bracket to the base frame, and slide the entire assembly out and up, to remove it from the table. 6. To install the Servo Amp Assm., reverse the above steps, making sure to reconnect all the servo amp connectors. 7. Refit the Base Covers.
12438
46170024P4 Shoulder Screw, Encdr. Cable This Shoulder Screw is used to attach the eyelet of the Long. Encoder Assm. cable to the carriage. Refer to the Long. Encoder Assm Table procedure.
12194
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12439 46296584P1 Side Panel, LF, Table
1. For best access, fully elevate the table. 2. Remove the appropriate Base Covers and Table Side Covers. 3. Remove the ground strap connection from the zchannel, noting the horizontal terminal orientation. 4. Remove two flathead screws for each panel, that secure the Pivot Tube to its bracket. 5. To install the Side Panel, reverse the above steps. If needed, loosen the two screws securing the upper mounting bracket, and slide the bracket in its slots until the side panel pivot points are free to move. 6. Refit the Side Cover and Base Cover. 12440 46296578P1 Side Panel, LR, Table 1. For best access, fully elevate the table. 2. Remove the appropriate Base Covers and Table Side Covers. 3. Remove the ground strap connection from the zchannel, noting the horizontal terminal orientation. 4. Remove two flathead screws for each panel, that secure the Pivot Tube to its bracket. 5. To install the Side Panel, reverse the above steps. If needed, loosen the two screws securing the upper mounting bracket, and slide the bracket in its slots until the side panel pivot points are free to move. 6. Refit the Side Cover and Base Cover. 12441 46296583P1 Side Panel, RF, Table 1. For best access, fully elevate the table. 2. Remove the appropriate Base Covers and Table Side Covers. 3. Remove the ground strap connection from the zchannel, noting the horizontal terminal orientation. 4. Remove two flathead screws for each panel, that secure the Pivot Tube to its bracket. 5. To install the Side Panel, reverse the above steps. If needed, loosen the two screws securing the upper mounting bracket, and slide the bracket in its slots until the side panel pivot points are free to move. 6. Refit the Side Cover and Base Cover.
12195
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12442 46296577P1 Side Panel, RR, Table
1. For best access, fully elevate the table. 2. Remove the appropriate Base Covers and Table Side Covers. 3. Remove the ground strap connection from the zchannel, noting the horizontal terminal orientation. 4. Remove two flathead screws for each panel, that secure the Pivot Tube to its bracket. 5. To install the Side Panel, reverse the above steps. If needed, loosen the two screws securing the upper mounting bracket, and slide the bracket in its slots until the side panel pivot points are free to move. 6. Refit the Side Cover and Base Cover. 12443 46297118G1 Signal Harness, Cradle Drive Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good service practices. 12444 46296972G1 Solenoid Assm, Table No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 12445 46296946P1 Spacer, Table Encoder Cable This Spacer is used to space the eyelet of the Long. Encoder Assm. cable away from the carriage. Refer to the Long. Encoder Assm Table. procedure. 12446 46296771P1 Spacer, Upper Pin Actuator This Spacer is used to space the upper Actuator mounting joint away from the left side of the clevis in the front leg. Refer to the Actuator Table Elevation procedure. 12447 46170490P20 Spring, Actuator Cover This Spring is used to hold the Actuator Cover against the Roller. Refer to the Actuator Cover procedure. 12448 46170490P54 Spring, Home Latch Assm, Table This Spring is used to hold the Home Latch bar engaged in the carriage latch block. Refer to the Home Latch Assm Table procedure.
12196
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 12449 46327097G2 Table Cover, Left Side
1. For best access, fully elevate the table. 2. Turn each of two Dzus fasteners onequarter turn CCW, and remove, to release the cover. 3. Tip the bottom of the cover outward slightly, and then lift the cover upward to clear the four pins engaged in the zchannel. 4. If any of the table drives will be used, remove the Tape Switch Jumper Plug from its storage position, and plug into the harness connector. 5. To install the Side Cover, reverse the above steps, making sure to return the jumper plug to its storage position. Also, note that the screwdriver slot in the fastener will be in line with the Side Cover when the fastener is properly engaged. 6. Test the Side Cover Tape Switch for proper operation. 12450 46327097G1 Table Cover, Right Side 1. For best access, fully elevate the table. 2. Turn each of two Dzus fasteners onequarter turn CCW, and remove, to release the cover. 3. Tip the bottom of the cover outward slightly, and then lift the cover upward to clear the four pins engaged in the zchannel. 4. If any of the table drives will be used, remove the Tape Switch Jumper Plug from its storage position, and plug into the harness connector. 5. To install the Side Cover, reverse the above steps, making sure to return the jumper plug to its storage position. Also, note that the screwdriver slot in the fastener will be in line with the Side Cover when the fastener is properly engaged. 6. Test the Side Cover Tape Switch for proper operation. 12451 46296316P1 Table Drive PS 1. For best access, fully elevate the table. 2. Remove the Base Covers. 3. Remove the power supply hold down bracket. 4. Remove the screws attaching the outlet cover and move the cover aside to gain access to the power supplies. 5. The Table Drive PS is the upper power supply. Disconnect the wires from both ends of the power supply. 6. Remove the upper two attaching screws from the right side of the Power Assm main bracket attaching the Table Drive PS, and slide the power supply out. 7. To install the Table Drive PS, reverse above steps, making sure to connect the wires correctly. 8. Refit the Base Covers.
12197
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12452 46297698P2 Tape Switch, Table Side Cover
1. For best access, fully elevate the table. 2. Remove the Table Side Covers. 3. Remove the connector from the bracket in the Side Cover, by removing the two shoulder screws. 4. Remove the terminals from the connector. 5. Cut the tyraps attaching the Tape Switch wire from the four brackets. 6. Remove the Tape Switch from the cover by peeling away from adhesive, and pulling the wires through holes in the cover. Remove all the adhesive from the cover. 7. To install the Tape Switch, reverse the above steps, making sure to thoroughly clean the mounting surface with alcohol. 8. Route the wires through the holes in the cover with the shorter wires toward the connector bracket. 9. Remove the protective strip from the adhesive and press the switch firmly in place. 10. Refit the Side Cover. Test the Tape Switch for proper operation. 12453 46296770P1 Upper Pin, Actuator This Pin secures the upper end of the Actuator. Refer to the Actuator Table Elevation procedure. 12454 SCU 12455 46297907P14 High Speed Disk Remove Disk: Do not move or bump the RP cabinets when they are running as you may cause damage/failures to the LSD and/or the HSD. Be extremely careful when installing front covers and closing cabinet doors. Do not roll the cabinet when power is applied (and the drives are spinning). The drives can absorb up to 75gs with power off, but only 2gs when spinning. 1. If possible, depending on fault, Save System State to save system files. 2. Shutdown Applications software 3. Halt Unix on the SBC or verify Unix is not running. Attach the antistatic wrist strap to your wrist and to the chassis before handling any circuit boards. Permanent damage to the static sensitive circuit boards may occur if the wrist strap is not used. 4. Remove front cover to the RP chassis. 46183027P92 No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices.
CAUTION
12198
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 5. Power off the RP chassis by Red power switch. 6. Wait approximately 30 seconds for the disk to spin down. 7. Unfasten the 2 Disk tray thumb screws. 8. Carefully and slowly pullout the tray making sure the cables do not get caught on anything. The cables are long enough so that the tray can be pulled out and hung vertically on the extended screws. 9. Remove the Data cable and Terminator from the back of the disk. 10. Remove the Disk Power cable and Ground wire. 11. Remove the Disk drive from the vertical position and remove the 4 screws from the bottom side of the tray holding the Disk drive to the tray. 12. Put the drive into a antistatic bag. Disk Drive Installation: 1. Check the new Disk Drives switch and/or jumper settings. 2. Mount the Disk Drive to the tray. Be sure to use the same screws as removed from the old drive. (Longer screws can penetrate the drive and damage it.) 3. Hook up the Data cable, Terminator, Power connector, and Ground wire. 4. Carefully slide the Disk Drive Tray back into position making sure the cables do not get pinched. 5. Screw the Disk Drive Tray in place. 6. Turn the power on to the RP chassis. 7. Disk should be preformatted and Surface analyzed. 8. Run the HiSpeed Advantage High Speed Disk (HSD) Preparation and Media Defect Management software. 9. Run Reconfig on the OC and select Regen Database. This builds the 450 scan files on the HSD. 10. Run Reconfig on the SBC. This runs ctzload, which is linked to ZuesCALS. ZuesCALS runs sconfig, which in turn starts the script CopyFileToHSD. CopyFileToHSD copies the two golden scanfiles onto the HSD. 11. If you must format the disk, login as root and run format* from the OC or SBC. 12. Check system operation: a. Recreate the original failing scenario to verify the replacement Disk corrects the problem. b. Make sure the replacement Disk hasnt introduced any new problems.
12199
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 12456 46297907P13 HSDC Board
Remove Board: 1. Shutdown Applications software 2. Halt Unix on the SBC or verify Unix is not running. Attach the antistatic wrist strap to your wrist and to the chassis before handling any circuit boards. Permanent damage to the static sensitive circuit boards may occur if the wrist strap is not used. 3. Remove front cover to the RP chassis. 4. Power off the RP chassis by Red power switch. 5. Disconnect the Data cable from the front of the board. 6. Unscrew the 2 board retaining screws and lift up on the thumb release levers. 7. Slide the board out and place in a antistatic bag.
12200
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 Install Board: 1. Check the new boards switch and/or jumper settings. 2. Install the new board by aligning the board edges to the card slides and slowly push the board in until it reaches the Backplane. Then, using your hand, exert enough pressure on the front board faceplate to ensure the board is firmly seated into the Backplane connector. 3. Tighten the 2 board retaining screws. 4. Reconnect the Data cable to the SDDC board. 5. Turn the power on to the RP chassis. 6. Check system operation: a. Recreate the original failing scenario to verify the replacement board corrects the problem. b. Make sure the replacement board hasnt introduced any new problems.
12457
46269587P1 Local System Disk (LSD) Drive
CAUTION
Do not move or bump the RP cabinets when they are running as you may cause damage/failures to the LSD and/or the HSD. Be extremely careful when installing front covers and closing cabinet doors. Do not roll the cabinet when power is applied (and the drives are spinning). The drives can absorb up to 75gs with power off, but only 2gs when spinning. Remove Disk: 1. If possible, depending on fault, Save System State to save system files. 2. Shutdown Applications software 3. Halt Unix on the SBC or verify Unix is not running. Attach the antistatic wrist strap to your wrist and to the chassis before handling any circuit boards. Permanent damage to the static sensitive circuit boards may occur if the wrist strap is not used. 4. Remove front cover to the RP chassis. 5. Power off the RP chassis by Red power switch. 6. Wait approximately 30 seconds for the disk to spin down. 7. Unfasten the 2 Disk tray thumb screws. 8. Carefully and slowly pullout the tray making sure the cables do not get caught on anything. The cables are long enough so that the tray can be pulled out and hung vertically on the extended screws. 9. Remove the SCSI Ribbon cable from the back of the disk. 10. Remove the Disk Power cable and Ground wire. 11. Remove the Disk drive from the vertical position and remove the 4 screws from the bottom side of the tray holding the Disk drive to the tray. 12. Put the drive into a antistatic bag.
12201
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 Install Disk Drive: 1. Check the new Disk Drives switch and/or jumper settings. 2. Mount the Disk Drive to the tray. Be sure to use the same screws as removed from the old drive. (Longer screws can penetrate the drive and damage it.) 3. Hook up the SCSI Ribbon cable, Power connector, and Ground wire. 4. Carefully slide the Disk Drive Tray back into position making sure the cables do not get pinched. 5. Screw the Disk Drive Tray in place. 6. Turn the power on to the RP chassis. 7. Disk should be preformatted and Surface analyzed. 8. Start the SBC S/W load at Disk partition and label. 9. Load System State back on. 10. Verify the Disk functions correctly.
12458
46297907P16 RP VME Power Supply (5 VDC and 12 VDC) Remove Power Supply: 1. Shutdown Applications software 2. Halt Unix on the SBC or verify Unix is not running. Attach the antistatic wrist strap to your wrist and to the chassis before handling any circuit boards. Permanent damage to the static sensitive circuit boards may occur if the wrist strap is not used. 3. Remove front cover to the RP chassis. 4. Power off the RP Power Supply by Red power switch. SAFETY 5. Remove incoming 208VAC to the chassis by unplugging the power cord at the rear of the RP Chassis. 6. Disconnect the AC Input wires to the supply at Terminal TB2. 3 wires; TB2 is labeled L, N, & Gnd., however in this configuration, both the Line and Neutral are Line Input. 7. Disconnect the 5VDC sense lead at J1. 8. Disconnect the 5VDC output leads at terminals V1 and V2. 9. Disconnect the wires going to Terminal TB1. Verify the wires are correctly labeled to match the Terminal strip labeling. 10. Remove the Power supply tray from the RP Chassis. 11. Remove the supply from the tray by the 4 mounting screws on the bottom of the tray.
12202
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 Install Power Supply: 1. Check the voltage select switch and set for the 208VAC position. 2. Install the Power Supply to the Tray. 3. Install the Tray into the RP Chassis. 4. Reconnect the 5VDC sense lead at J1. 5. Reconnect the wires going to Terminal strip TB1. 6. Reconnect the 5VDC output leads at terminals V1 and V2. SAFETY 7. Verify all leads are properly connected and are not shorted together! 8. Plug in the 208VAC line cord at the rear of the RP Chassis. 9. Turn on the RP Chassis via the power switch. 10. Check power supply output voltages. 11. Boot the SBC and verify the Disk functions correctly.
12459
46297907P12 AP120 Board Remove Board: 1. Shutdown Applications software 2. Halt Unix on the SBC or verify Unix is not running. Attach the antistatic wrist strap to your wrist and to the chassis before handling any circuit boards. Permanent damage to the static sensitive circuit boards may occur if the wrist strap is not used. 3. Remove front cover to the RP chassis. 4. Power off the RP chassis by Red power switch. 5. Unscrew the 2 board retaining screws and lift up on the thumb release levers. 6. Slide the board out and place in a antistatic bag. Install Board: 1. Check the new boards switch and/or jumper settings. 2. Install the new board by aligning the board edges to the card slides and slowly push the board in until it reaches the Backplane. Then, using your hand, exert enough pressure on the front board faceplate to ensure the board is firmly seated into the Backplane connector. 3. Tighten the 2 board retaining screws. 4. Turn the power on to the RP chassis. 5. Check system operation: a. Recreate the original failing scenario to verify the replacement board corrects the problem. b. Make sure the replacement board hasnt introduced any new problems.
12203
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 12460 46327036G1 FEP Board
Remove Board: 1. Shutdown Applications software 2. Halt Unix on the SBC or verify Unix is not running. Attach the antistatic wrist strap to your wrist and to the chassis before handling any circuit boards. Permanent damage to the static sensitive circuit boards may occur if the wrist strap is not used. 3. Remove front cover to the RP chassis. 4. Power off the RP chassis by Red power switch. 5. Unscrew the 2 board retaining screws and lift up on the thumb release levers. 6. Slide the board out and place in a antistatic bag. Install Board: 1. Check the new boards switch and/or jumper settings. 2. Install the new board by aligning the board edges to the card slides and slowly push the board in until it reaches the Backplane. Then, using your hand, exert enough pressure on the front board faceplate to ensure the board is firmly seated into the Backplane connector. 3. Tighten the 2 board retaining screws. 4. Turn the power on to the RP chassis. 5. Check system operation: a. Recreate the original failing scenario to verify the replacement board corrects the problem. b. Make sure the replacement board hasnt introduced any new problems. Power Supply Requirements: The FEP PWA uses the following supply voltages: 1. +5V. This voltage supplies the digital logic on the FEP and is obtained from the P1, P2, and P3 VME connectors. Recommended DC operating voltage under which the FEP will function normal for this supply is 4.75V to 5.25V. The absolute maximum voltage which, if exceeded, will cause damage to the FEP is 0.5V to 7.0V, relative to LGND. Under normal operating conditions, the FEP will draw no more than 8 Amps. The maximum current the FEP will draw, above which the board can be considered faulty is 13 Amps. 2. +12V This voltage supplies the FLASH RAMs during reprogramming and is obtained from the P1 VME connector. Normal operating voltage is 11.4V to 12.6V. The absolute maximum voltage range is 2.0V to 13.5V, relative to LGND. Under normal operating conditions, the FEP will draw no more than 16 milliamps. The maximum current the FEP will draw is 36 milliamps. 3. 12V This voltage supplies the DC/DC converter for conversion to 5V and is obtained from the P1 VME connector. Normal operating voltage is 11.4V to 12.6V. The absolute maximum voltage range is 13.5V to 2.0V, relative to LGND. Under normal operating conditions, the FEP will draw no more than 80 milliamps. The maximum current the FEP will draw is 115 milliamps.
12204
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8 12461 46297907P11 BPP Board
Remove Board: 1. Shutdown Applications software 2. Halt Unix on the SBC or verify Unix is not running. Attach the antistatic wrist strap to your wrist and to the chassis before handling any circuit boards. Permanent damage to the static sensitive circuit boards may occur if the wrist strap is not used. 3. Remove front cover to the RP chassis. 4. Power off the RP chassis by Red power switch. 5. Unscrew the 2 board retaining screws and lift up on the thumb release levers. 6. Slide the board out and place in a antistatic bag. Install Board: 1. Check the new boards switch and/or jumper settings. 2. Install the new board by aligning the board edges to the card slides and slowly push the board in until it reaches the Backplane. Then, using your hand, exert enough pressure on the front board faceplate to ensure the board is firmly seated into the Backplane connector. 3. Tighten the 2 board retaining screws. 4. Turn the power on to the RP chassis. 5. Check system operation: a. Recreate the original failing scenario to verify the replacement board corrects the problem. b. Make sure the replacement board hasnt introduced any new problems. 12462 46297907P19 SBC Board Remove Board: 1. Shutdown Applications software 2. Halt Unix on the SBC or verify Unix is not running. Attach the antistatic wrist strap to your wrist and to the chassis before handling any circuit boards. Permanent damage to the static sensitive circuit boards may occur if the wrist strap is not used. 3. Remove front cover to the RP chassis. 4. Power off the RP chassis by Red power switch. 5. Either disconnect the SDDC Data cable and LAN cable form their respective boards, or carefully move them aside to be able to remove the SBC. 6. Unscrew the 2 board retaining screws and lift up on the thumb release levers. 7. Slide the board out and place in a antistatic bag.
12205
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 Install Board: 1. Check the new boards switch and/or jumper settings. 2. Install the new board by aligning the board edges to the card slides and slowly push the board in until it reaches the Backplane. Then, using your hand, exert enough pressure on the front board faceplate to ensure the board is firmly seated into the Backplane connector. 3. Tighten the 2 board retaining screws. 4. Reconnect the SDDC Data cable and LAN cable if previously removed. 5. Turn the power on to the RP chassis. 6. Tip into the SBC and record the new Ethernet number. 7. Reconfig the S/W for the new Ethernet number. 8. Verify the board functions correctly.
12463
46327135P1 CLA Board Remove Board: 1. Shutdown Applications software 2. Halt Unix on the SBC or verify Unix is not running. Attach the antistatic wrist strap to your wrist and to the chassis before handling any circuit boards. Permanent damage to the static sensitive circuit boards may occur if the wrist strap is not used. 3. Remove front cover to the RP chassis. 4. Power off the RP chassis by Red power switch. 5. Disconnect the LAN cable from the front of the board. 6. Unscrew the 2 board retaining screws and lift up on the thumb release levers. 7. Slide the board out and place in a antistatic bag. Install Board: 1. Check the new boards switch and/or jumper settings. 2. Install the new board by aligning the board edges to the card slides and slowly push the board in until it reaches the Backplane. Then, using your hand, exert enough pressure on the front board faceplate to ensure the board is firmly seated into the Backplane connector. 3. Tighten the 2 board retaining screws. 4. Reconnect the LAN cable to the CLA board. 5. Turn the power on to the RP chassis. 6. Check system operation: a. Recreate the original failing scenario to verify the replacement board corrects the problem. b. Make sure the replacement board hasnt introduced any new problems.
12206
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12464 46297907P17 Fans
Remove Fan: 1. Remove the front cover to expose the chassis. 2. Place the power switch in the off (0) position. 3. Unplug the MateNLock connector from the bottom of the fan tray. 4. Loosen the thumb screws on the front of the chassis and slide out fan assembly. 5. Turn the fan tray over so the bottom of the tray is facing up and remove the four Phillips head screws from the finger guard for the defective fan. 6. Carefully turn the fan tray over so the top of the tray is facing up and using pliers disconnect the two power wires from the fan. Replace Fan: 1. Be sure that the power switch is in the off (0) position. 2. Position the fan tray so the top of the tray is facing up (finger guards down), and using pliers connect the two power wires to the fan. The yellow wire connects to + and the black wire connects to negative. 3. Making sure that the air flow indicator arrow on the side of the fan points up, position the fan over the four empty mounting holes. 4. Holding the fan in this position, turn the fan tray over so the bottom of the tray is facing up. Insert the four Phillips head screws through the mounting holes on the finger guard, through the tray, and into the mounting holes on the fan. Tighten with a Phillips screwdriver. 5. Insert the fan tray into the fan tray enclosure and tighten the thumb screws on the front of the chassis. 6. Plug in the MateNLock connector on the fan tray. 7. Place the power switch to the on (1) position. 8. Verify that all the fans are working and all exhausting in the same direction. 9. Replace the chassis front cover. 12465 46297907P29 RP Chassis Backplane No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 12466 46287532P2 ETHERNET Transceiver Replacement instructions for Transceiver Unit 46287532P2 1. Disable power to SCU cabinet 2. Remove cable clamp and cables on defective transceiver unit. 3. Remove (3) screws securing transceiver bracket to cabinet. 4. Remove (2) screws holding transceiver unit to transceiver bracket. 5. Remove defective transceiver unit. 6. Check Transceiver switch and/or jumper settings.
12207
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 7. Remove coaxial terminator cap from defective transceiver unit and mount to new transceiver unit in same position. 8. Reassemble new transceiver unit to transceiver bracket and bracket to cabinet in reverse order. 9. Reconnect (2) cables and secure cable to transceiver bracket using same cable clamp.
12467
46296861G8 Cable, RPJ5 to XCVR#2 Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good service practices.
12468
46296861G9 Cable, RPJ6 to XCVR#1 Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good service practices.
12469
46296454G10 Cable, XCVR#2 to XCVR#3 Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good service practices.
12470
46327070G1 Cable, Serial RP J3 to OC GAI Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good service practices.
12471
46297907P27 Cable, Xylogics to HSD Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good service practices.
12208
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12472 46327100G1 Cable, ETHERNET Board to Bulkhead
Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good service practices. 12473 46297748G4 Cable, 75 Ohm, Gantry Bulkhead to RP Bulkhead, 80 Feet Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good service practices. 12474 46296861G11 Cable, OC to XCVR#2, 7.5 Feet, 50 Ohm Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good service practices. 12475 46296454G12 Cable, RP to ETC, 80 Feet, 50 Ohm Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good service practices. 12476 46297907P23 Cable, SCSI cable CPU to LSD Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good service practices.
12209
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12477 46297907P26 Cable, HSD Power Cable
Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good service practices. 12478 46297907P25 Cable, VME Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good service practices. 12479 46296817P1 50 Ohm Terminator With Chain Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good service practices. 12480 46313020P1 50 Ohm Terminator With Ground Lead Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good service practices. 12481 46297907P30 Cable, RP Chassis Power Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good service practices.
12210
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 12482 46327071G1 Cable, Exposure Interlock RP to PDU
Generic Cable Replacement Procedure 1. Make sure all safety precautions are taken. 2. Turn OFF power to the connected units. 3. Use good ESD procedures. 4. Use good service practices. 12483 46297907P24 LSD Power Cable Remove Cable: 1. Disconnect the AC power cable from the chassis power receptacle. 2. Be sure that the power switch is in the off (0) position. 3. Remove the front cover to expose the chassis. 4. Loosen the thumb screws on the disk drive mounting plate, and slide the mounting plate out until you feel the nuts on the bottom catching on the chassis. Then lift the mounting plate slightly so that you can pull the mounting plate all the way out. 5. Hang the mounting plate on the bolts provided on the front of the chassis. 6. Disconnect the 4wire DC power plug from connector J3 of the drive. 7. To provide space to work on the HSD, carefully slide the LSD mounting plate back into the chassis, but do not tighten the two thumb screws yet. 8. Loosen the thumb screws connecting the disk drive assembly to the front of the chassis, and carefully slide the disk drive plate all the way out. 9. Hang the plate on the bolts provided on the front of the chassis. 10. Disconnect the 40pin Molex connector on the DC power cable from the DC power connector on the drive. 11. To provide space to work in the power supply enclosure, carefully slide the HSD drive back into the chassis, but do not tighten the two thumb screws yet. UNSWITCHED LINE VOLTAGE IS PRESENT AT THE BACK OF THE ON/OFF SWITCH. USE EXTREME CAUTION IN THIS AREA.
WARNING
12. At the power supply, remove the two bundled DC power lines marked V1+ and V1 from the DC output terminals (labeled V1 and V1 RTN) using two 7/16inch socket wrenches. 13. Remove the V2+ and V2 lugs from V2 and V2 on TB1. 14. Cut the tie wraps securing the power cable harness to the inside wall of the chassis. 15. Remove the power cable harness.
12211
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 Replace Cable:
WARNING
UNSWITCHED LINE VOLTAGE IS PRESENT AT THE BACK OF THE ON/OFF SWITCH. USE EXTREME CAUTION IN THIS AREA.
1. Disconnect the AC power cable from the chassis power receptacle. Be sure that the power switch is in the off (0) position. 2. Insert a 7/16inch bolt through the two power lugs on the red bundled DC power lines. Insert the bolt through the terminal marked V1. Holding these in place, place the disk drive power harness lug (marked V1+) over the 7/16inch bolt from the bottom. Put a lock washer nut on the bottom of the 7/16inch bolt. Tighten the connection using two hex wrenches. 3. Insert a 7/16inch bolt through the two power lugs on the red bundled DC power lines. Insert the bolt through the terminal marked V1 RTN. Holding these in place, place the disk drive power harness lug (marked V1) over the 7/16inch bolt from the bottom. Put a lock washer nut on the bottom of the 7/16inch bolt. Tighten the connection using two hex wrenches. 4. Locate the two lugs connected to the yellow wires marked +V2, and insert a Phillips head screw and tighten the lugs onto V2 on TB. Note: Try to maintain clearance around the voltage adjustment potentiometer marked V2. 5. Locate the two lugs connected to the yellow wires marked V2, and insert a Phillips head screw and tighten the lugs onto V2 on TB1. NOTE: Try to maintain clearance around the voltage adjustment potentiometer marked V3. WARNING: Do not confuse these wires with the black wires marked V3+. 6. Route the other end of the power cable harness up and to the back of the disk drive assemblies. 7. Carefully slide the HSD drive plate out all the way out. 8. Hang the disk drive plate on the bolts provided on the front of the chassis. 9. Using pliers, connect the two DC power lugs to the fan. The yellow wire (marked F6+) connects to the + connector. The black wire (marked F6) connects to the connector. 10. Connect the 4pin Molex connector to the DC power connector J15 on the HSD drive. 11. To provide space to work on the LSD, carefully slide the HSD disk drive plate back into the chassis, but do not tighten the thumb screws yet. 12. Carefully slide the LSD mounting plate out all the way out. 13. Hang the mounting plate on the bolts provided. 14. Connect the 4wire Molex connector to the drive. 15. Beginning at the split in the power cable harness, pull all slack in the cables toward the front of the chassis so that there is enough slack for the HSD drive plate to fit correctly in the chassis. 16. Install tie wraps attaching the power cable harness to the inner surface of the outside chassis wall.
12212
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 17. Slide the HSD drive plate assembly back into the chassis. 18. Tighten the thumb screws on both the HSD drive plate and LSD mounting plate assemblies. 19. Secure the power cable harness with tie wraps to the inside chassis wall in the power supply compartment. 20. Place the power switch in the on (1) position. 21. Replace the front cover.
12484
46297907P10 Empty Scan Chassis (Includes the VME backplane) No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices.
12485
46297907P18 Scan Chassis Power Switch No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices.
HPDAS & Power Supplies THE CIRCUIT BOARDS ARE VERY STATIC SENSITIVE!! Static sensitive components may be damaged if not handled in a static free environment. Take appropriate precautions (e.g. wear properly grounded wrist strap) when handling all boards.
12486
2119740 & 2107544 Hpdas Assembly (w/wo Rating Plate) No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices.
12487
2102234 Converter Board No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices.
12488
21075442 Digital Controller Board No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices.
12489
21075443 Analog Controller Board No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices.
12490
21075444 Left Backplane No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices.
12491
21075445 Right Backplane No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices.
12213
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 12492 21075446 Interchassis Cable
No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 12493 21075447 Filter Box No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 12494 21075448 Dog House Cable #1 No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 12495 21075449 Dog House Cable #2 No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 12496 210754410 Center Cover No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 12497 2108473 Left Cover No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 12498 2108472 Right Cover No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 12499 46251198P41 6v Power Supply No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 12500 46251198P42 5v/ 15v Power Supply No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 12501 2126738 AC Power Harness No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices. 12502 2119747 DC Power Harness No specific procedure at this time. Please use good service practices
12214
APPENDIX A1 INSTALLATION
Position Subsystems A11 A111 Position and Mount Subsystems Introduction This section contains information on mounting, positioning and leveling of all HiSpeed Advantage RP Subsystems. Note: Before continuing with installations make sure site is prepared in accordance with the direction 2126732100, Preinstallation HiSpeed Advantage 2.x.
A12
Table/Gantry Installation Without Floor Plates Floor And Room Preparation Support areas of the main table, and gantry must rest on solid concrete or other basic flooring, not on resilient tile or carpeting which may slowly yield over a period of time and disturb alignment of table to gantry. No part of the floor surface within the table, gantry or the two interface areas between table and gantry should be higher than the support areas for the table and gantry. Floor structure must be capable of withstanding both the occupied weight of table and Gantry as well as the individual contact area loading of these components Method and placement of anchoring, or through bolts, must not reduce structural strength of floor. Note: If gantry covers must be removed to allow maneuvering of the gantry into the scan room, refer to section 1110.
A121
Overview The following procedure will provide detailed instructions on how to position, level and anchor the gantry and table in RP/HSA CT systems with a floor mounting system that does not utilize baseplates. Instead, the gantry and table are supported by adjustable leveling pads, four for the gantry and five for the table. A roomlayout template is first used to determine the position of the gantry and table. The gantry is positioned, and then the table is positioned relative to the gantry with three alignment bars. The system is then leveled and anchored. Beside there being no baseplates, the template is no longer used to locate and drill the anchor holes; the system itself locates the holes, which are drilled with the gantry and table in place. Review Illustrations A1 and A2 to familiarize yourself with this procedure. The items listed below will be required to install an HSA system per this procedure. Please read and follow this procedure.
A1
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 A122 PreInstallation Template
The roomlayout paper template, P/N 2106475 (in two pieces), is available for site planning. It shows the location of the gantry and table along with the required operating and service clearances. Although the template shows the locations of the anchor holes (both primary and redundant) for floor structure considerations, the templates are NOT to be used to locate and drill the anchor holes, except for the first gantry hole. A123 Installation Tool Kit The installation tool kit, P/N 2110953, must be obtained by the installing personnel, and contains the following special tools (see Illustrations A1 and A2): D D D D D D D A124 Guide Pin Bolt, P/N 2106495; used to position the gantry over its first anchor hole. Long Alignment Bar #3 (in two pieces), P/N 2106369; used to position the table relative to the gantry. Two Short Alignment Bars, #1 & #2 P/N 2106368; used to position the table relative to the gantry. Adjuster Tool, P/N 2107863; used to turn the adjusters when leveling the system. Drill Bushing, P/N 2106205; used to center and guide the bit when drilling the anchor holes. Vacuum Attachment (funnel), P/N 2110944; used to vacuum debris out of the anchor holes. Spanner Wrench, P/N 2110003; used to turn the adjusters after the anchors are in place, if necessary.
Required Common Tools and Supplies D D D D D D D D D Masking tape Extension cord Shop Vacuum Cleaner Hammer Drill 1/ or 13mm masonry bit, min. 8 2 Hammer Large straight blade screwdriver 4 foot level 1/ Allen wrench 8 D D D D D D D D D 9 torpedo level 2 drive socket wrench 1/ drive 3 long extension 2 1/ drive 6 long extension 2 9/ socket 16 3/ deep well socket 4 11/8 socket 11/2 socket 1/ drive torque wrench: 2 0100 Nm (0100 ftlbs)
1/
A2
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 A13 A131 Detailed Procedure Establish the Room Layout:
1. When establishing the room layout, insure that all operating and service clearances shown on the templates are available. Note the locations of the anchor holes in regard to any structural particularities in the floor. 2. Clean the area, remove carpet/tile flooring as shown on the templates, and remove any old baseplates. The mounting surface must be free of material which may interfere with the positioning and leveling of the system. 3. Layout the two paper templates. Put Gantry template down first, aligning it with any existing cable trough, if necessary. Tape the template to the floor. Now place the table template over top, align the scan and table centerlines, and tape it to the floor. A132 Drill the First Gantry Anchor Hole: 1. The next step fixes the front left corner of the gantry. If this anchor hole can not be used due to interference from reinforcement rods in the concrete or other interference, move the Gantry (and templates) to another location. 2. Drill one 13mm (1/2) diameter, 110 mm (4 3/8) deep, hole at the location shown on the gantry template. It is crucial to the performance of the anchor that this hole be drilled perpendicular to the floor. With one person drilling the hole, a second person can visually insure perpendicularity throughout the drilling operation. Clear the hole of debris several times while drilling to prevent the drill bit from binding. 3. Vacuum all debris from the inside of the hole by placing the funnel tip inside the hole and the vacuum hose in the funnel. Also vacuum the debris from the surrounding area when finished. This hole will be the left front anchor hole for the gantry, or location #1. A133 Position the Gantry: 1. Remove all the transportation packaging from the gantry except for the dollies. 2. At the left front corner of the gantry base, remove the adjuster shipping bolt. Replace it with the guide pin bolt, which also threads into the leveling pad. 3. Wheel the Gantry into position as shown on the template with the guide pin over the hole. Before lowering the gantry into place, make sure the leveling pads are present and positioned against the base, as shown in Illustration A6. With the dollies, lower the gantry evenly until the guide pin extends into the hole, but stop when the leveling pads are approximately 3 mm above the floor. If necessary, use the guide pin and hole as a pivot and carefully rotate the gantry into its correct position as established by the templates. 4. Remove the paper templates from the floor and discard. 5. Lower the gantry down onto the floor and remove the dollies. 6. Remove the guide pin bolt from the left front adjuster, and the three other adjuster shipping bolts.
A3
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 A134 Level the Gantry:
1. Before leveling operations begin, check the accuracy of the levels. Place the level on a flat surface. Take note of the bubbles specific location within the glass cylinder. Now rotate the level end for end (maintaining the same mounting surface on the level) and place it in the same position. If the bubble comes to rest in the same location within the glass cylinder, the level is acceptable for use. If not, the level is unacceptable for use and must be adjusted (if possible) or replaced. 2. Loosen all the adjuster lock rings. To loosen, place the screwdriver at an angle in the slot of the lock ring and strike the screwdriver with the hammer in the direction to loosen the lock ring. 3. Level the gantry by systematically rotating through the three gantry leveling locations, A, B, & C (see Illustration A3). The gantry is properly leveled when all three readings show the bubble to be centered between the lines of the glass cylinder at the same time. 4. Also note: D Each of the four adjusters must carry a portion of the gantry weight; there must be NO unloaded or floating adjusters that would allow the gantry to rock, or permit the base frame to twist when the anchors are tightened. Since the leveling pads are already against the bottom of the base, and therefore the gantry is at its lowest possible height, all leveling will require that the gantry be raised. Also note that if the gantry is positioned in a valley on the floor, then it may have to be raised an initial amount so that the table, which may not be in the valley, can be raised during its leveling procedure. Gantry leveling location A needs to be leveled with a 9 torpedo level. Gantry leveling locations B and C are to be leveled with a 4 level, and for each location, there are two machined extensions welded to the base. The 4 level will bridge these two extensions. Remember to wipe the leveling surfaces clean prior to leveling. Also be sure that the level sits flat on the machined portion of the extensions and does not ride up onto the neighboring fillets or welds. The adjusters are used to level the gantry. Use the adjuster tool, 11/8 socket and the 1/2 drive socket wrench to turn each adjuster as required below. The indicating mark on top of the adjuster is used to aid in incrementing the adjusters rotation. When leveling at location A, use only adjusters #1 and #2. When leveling at location B, use only adjusters #3 and #4. When leveling at location C, use adjuster pairs #1 & #2 and #3 & #4 on each side of the gantry, and only adjust 1 turn at a time, maximum.
D D D
A4
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 A135 Position the Table:
1. Remove all the transportation packaging from the table except for the dollies. 2. Wheel the table into its approximate position relative to the gantry. Before lowering the table into place, make sure the leveling pads are present and positioned against the base (see Illustration A6). Lower the table until the leveling pads are approximately 3 mm above the floor. 3. Remove the table left and right upper side covers, and the four side panels; disconnect the ground straps at the zchannel. Also, remove the table base cover center support bar. 4. Assemble two halves of the long alignment bar, #3, by inserting the pin and rotating the handle. Note that the halves are matched sets, and the serial number on each half of the bar must be the same. Make sure the joint is tight after the handle has been rotated. If the joint is loose, the tip of the expanding pin can be tightened, thereby causing the pin to expand to a larger diameter. 5. The short alignment bars, #1 and #2, are identical and therefore interchangeable. 6. Adjust the position of the table as needed until the three alignment bars can be fit into the 3/4 alignment holes in the gantry base and the 1/2 alignment holes in the table base as shown in Illustration A2. It is recommended that the short alignment bars be installed first. The far end of the table can then be pivoted until the long alignment bar will fit. Make sure all the bars are fully seated on their mating surfaces. 7. Once the alignment bars are in place, lower the table to the floor and remove the transportation dollies. Alignment bar #1 must be removed temporarily so that the front dolly can be rolled out. After the dolly is removed replace the alignment bar. 8. Remove the five adjuster shipping bolts, and loosen the lock rings. Extreme care must be taken to prevent damage to the ETC and CPU PWAs.
A5
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 A136 Level the Table:
1. Level the table to the gantry by systematically rotating through the three table leveling locations, D, E, & F (see Illustration A3). The table is properly leveled when all three readings show the bubble to be centered between the lines of the glass cylinder at the same time. 2. Also note: D D Only locations #7, #8 and #9 are used to level the table. Make sure the adjusters at locations #5 and #6 are loose and unloaded. Since the leveling pads are already against the bottom of the base, and therefore the table is at its lowest possible height, all leveling will require that the table be raised. The 4 level is used at all the table leveling locations. The level is placed on the machined surfaces of the alignment bars. Make sure these surfaces are clean and that the level is not resting on the radiused surface on alignment bar #3. The adjusters and adjuster tool are used in the same manner as they were on the gantry. Make initial measurements at the three locations, and map out the adjustments necessary to get these three locations level. When leveling at location D, use adjuster #9. When leveling at location E, use adjuster #8. When leveling at location F, use adjuster #7.
D D D D D A137 Tighten the Lock Rings:
1. Recheck all the leveling locations, A through F. Location G can also be used to verify the table levelness. Note that there must be no unloaded adjusters at locations #1 through #4. 2. At table locations #5 and #6, screw each adjuster downward until it is tight against its leveling pad. Each adjuster should be a little more than hand tight, but be sure not to unload any of the other table adjusters. 3. Tighten the lock rings at all locations #1 through #7 with the hammer and screwdriver.
A6
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 A138 Drill the Remaining Anchor Holes:
1. Remove the gantry scan window and prop open the top cover. Open both front and rear gantry covers. 2. The remaining six anchor holes, at locations #2 through #7, can now be drilled with the system in place, using the 13mm (1/2) bit. Place the drill bushing inside each adjuster to keep the hole vertical, and centered within the adjuster. This is most important for the three table anchor holes, locations #5, #6 and #7, since it will allow the maximum amount of horizontal alignment capacity when centering the cradle on isocenter later during system testing. 3. Also note: D D D D Mark the drill bit 195 mm (711/16) from the tip of the drill bit with tape to indicate hole depth. Drill each hole until the mark on the drill bit is even with the top of the drill bushing. Clear each hole several times while drilling to prevent the drill bit from binding. Vacuum all debris from the inside of each hole by placing the funnel tip inside the hole and the vacuum hose in the funnel. Also vacuum the debris from the surrounding area when finished. Care must be taken not to injure yourself on the gantry cover brackets. Care must also be taken when drilling at location #7 to avoid hitting the actuator motor lead. Remove lead if necessary. Also, place a piece of cardboard over the ETC and CPU PWAs to prevent damage and dust contamination. No anchor holes are drilled at locations #8 and #9. These locations provide compressive support for the table, but are not anchored.
D D
A139
Redundant Anchor Hole Locations: D If an anchor hole within an adjuster can not be used due to interference from reinforcement bars in the concrete or other interference, then use its redundant anchor location, as shown in Illustration A4. Follow the same procedure, outlined above, but mark the drill with tape at 170 mm (611/16). Note that the minimum gantry anchoring requirement is to have four anchors, one in each corner. The minimum table anchoring requirement is to have three anchors, one each at locations #5, #6 and #7.
A7
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 A1310 Install the Anchors:
1. The only anchors acceptable for use are Hilti KwikBolt II, 1/2 diameter by 8 long, per P/N 2106573. 2. Remove the three alignment bars, and repack the install kit. 3. Before installing the anchors, assemble the anchors by adding the 1/4 thick washer under the regular anchor washer, and positioning the nut as indicated in Illustration A5. 4. Place an anchor in each hole and hammer the anchor downward until the anchor is fully inserted as shown in Illustration A5. 5. Tighten all the anchors at locations #1 through #7 and torque to 75 +/6 Nm (55 5 ftlbs). 6. Reinstall all the table parts that were removed during the install, including covers, ground straps and the center support bar. Close all Gantry covers and reinstall the scan window. 7. Remove gantry shipping bolts and brackets per Illustration.
A8

ILLUSTRATION A1 LEVELING PAD AND ANCHORING DETAIL
A9

ILLUSTRATION A2 INSTALL AND LEVEL OF TABLE AND GANTRY
A10

ILLUSTRATION A3 GANTRY AND TABLE LEVEL LOCATIONS
A11

ILLUSTRATION A4 GANTRY AND TABLE ANCHOR LOCATIONS
A12

ILLUSTRATION A5 ANCHOR BOLT, TYPICAL
ILLUSTRATION A6 LEVELING PAD STARTING POSITION
A13
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 A14 Assemble and Install Gantry Display
Refer to display installation drawing, 46297720 , for reference, this drawing is provided with every system: 1. Install two bearings, item 6, on pin, item 2, and install on the support arm, item 4, as shown on drawing. Complete this assembly procedure on both support arms. 2. Attach two cable clamps, item 12 to the left support arm as shown on drawing. 3. Mount the support arms, item 4, and the standoffs, item 3, to the gantry with 4 1/4 x 20 x 3.25 machine screws, item 9, as shown on drawing. 4. Mount the cover plate, item 10, to the support arms, item 4, with two nylon 8/32 x .500 machine screws, item 11, as shown on drawing. 5. Route and connect the display cable as shown on drawing and attach the gantry display to the support arms making sure the display is seated properly. 6. Attach the Gantry module, item 5, to the display assembly with four 1/4 x20 x .75 machine screws, item 8 as shown on drawing. The gantry display installation is now complete. A15 Install Gantry Mounted Table Controls Note: New gantries shipped with systems come with a left and right control panel that will be mounted to the gantry. Mounting instructions: 1. Remove side covers. 2. Locate right side control assembly. 3. Position control assembly on right side of gantry cover over round cutout. Refer to illustration A7. 4. Locate and install (4) M6 x 25 screws and (4) M6 lock washers from the back of the gantry cover into the control assembly and tighten. 5. Connect the cable 2118210 to J1 on the back of the control assembly. 6. Locate the left side control assembly. 7. Install on the left side of the gantry per steps 3 and 4. 8. Connect the 2 cable ends of 2118210 to J1 and J2 on the back of the control assembly. Note: J1 and J2 positions are interchangeable.
A14

ILLUSTRATION A7 GANTRY MOUNTED CONTROLS INSTALLATION
A16
Install Table Footswitch
ILLUSTRATION A8 TABLE FOOTSWITCH ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
Install Table Footswitch Assembly as shown in Illustration A8

There are two plates attached to the table, 46297427P1, the braided grounds from the gantry are installed under these plates, not to the ground bus on the footswitch assembly.
Table
Install Table Footswitch assembly mounting hardware 1032 black oxide screws s/c 61221 (2)
__ 29 14 _ + 16 (757.2 mm 760.4 mm)
1 __ 16
Table Footswitch assembly
Gantry
A15
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 6 A17 Power Distribution Unit Note:
Your site installation has either the CT Compact PDU, part number 2133533, or PDU part number 2113764)
A171
Position the CT Compact HVDC Power Distribution Unit (2133533) 1. Roll the PDU into position on its permanently mounted casters. 2. Leave at least 15.5cm (6) between the PDU and back wall, to allow cooling air to circulate. 3. Run the main input power conductors and ground through flexible metal conduit (attached between the PDU chassis and room ductwork) so you can move the PDU away from the wall during service. Unit is very heavy. Take care when maneuvering the unit; it tends to be top heavy if tilted from front to rear.
CAUTION
A172
Position the Power Distribution Unit (2113764) 1. Use the dollies to move the PDU into position. 2. Remove dollies. Install the 8 plugs, included in the bag that contains the PDU keys, in the nowempty dolly bolt holes in the PDU. 3. Securely anchor unit to wall and floor. The PDU has 6 anchor points, 2 at top rear, and 4 at the bottom of the unit.
4. Establish cable access, and remove panel as appropriate. 5. Return dollies.
A16
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 6 A18 Scan Control Unit
Position the Scan Control Unit to provide proper access to rear of the unit.
ILLUSTRATION A9 SCU FRONT AND REAR VIEWS
Reconstruction Processor CC2 A1
Backplane CC2 A1 A1 Transceiver 1 CC2 A3 A1 Transceiver 2 CC2 A3 A2 Transceiver 3 CC2 A3 A3
Sun Host Computer CC1
Power Panel CC2 A2
A17
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 A19 Install Operator Console
Position the console at its intended position to ensure correct access to console and good visibility of the patient on the table. If the console is installed free standing, support feet must be secured to both pedestals as shown in Illustration A10. If console height is raised 4 inches, console must be installed on risers, Illustration A11.
ILLUSTRATION A10 CONSOLE SUPPORT INSTALLATION
PLUG BUTTON SCREW
SUPPORT LEG LEVELING SCREW
SUPPORT LEG SCREW LEVELING SCREW PLUG BUTTON

M287997A
A18

ILLUSTRATION A11 4 INCH CONSOLE RISERS
PCN 189081 is shown, this PCN allows for the optional mounting of the legs to the high rise kit. This PCN is scheduled for implementation 3Qtr94.
A110 Install Phantom Holder Installation A1101 Mount and Level Phantom Holder 1. Check the guide slot in the cradle end to be sure that it is clean. Place cradle in the unextended position. 2. Mount the phantom holder to the cradle by inserting the tab on the phantom holder into the slot on the end of the cradle. Clamp the holder in position with the draw catch located at the bottom of the holder. 3. Verify the holder is mounted solidly against the end of the cradle. Using the mechanics level with the supplied bracket, mount it per Illustration A12, then check the verticalness of the phantom mounting surface. This must be vertical within + 1_, 0_ to be acceptable. D If the angle is greater than 91_, first check to be sure that there are no washers on the mounting block. If washers are present, remove them and recheck the angle. If there are no washers present, check the phantom holder for any interference between the holder and the cradle. If the angle is less than 90_, adjust the angle of the mounting block using the adjustment on the back of the phantom holder.
4. Reinstall the phantom holder; verify that the angle meets the specified range.
A19
HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358100 5. Note that the specified tolerance on the vertical angle is only valid when the cradle is unextended and there are no phantoms mounted to the holder. These two external factors can substantially affect cradle deflection and may result in an out of tolerance condition on the phantom holder angle. It is advisable to quickly recheck the phantom holder angle whenever remounting the phantom holder to the cradle.
Note:
Mounting the phantom on the Phantom holder may move it out of spec. Because each phantom is different, you may have to turn the Z axis mounting block angle adjustment knob to vertically align the phantom. (See Illustration A12.)
ILLUSTRATION A12 PHANTOM HOLDER
SHIM BETWEEN THIS SURFACE WHEN REQUIRED
0 90 +1, 0
PHANTOM REF.
PHANTOM MTG. BLOCK ANGLE ADJUST
PHANTOM MTG. BLOCK
ct2714
DRAW CATCH
R2714A
A20
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 A111 Gantry Base Covers
Before running any cables to the gantry, install the raceway pan,46297624P1, (lower portion of the rear raceway assembly, 46297628G1,) to the rear of the gantry base at the midway point with four screws, 46170015P2, and four washers, 12277. Discard the cover plate, 46297627P1, which attaches to the raceway pan if floor troughs are used. A112 Gantry Strip Down For Restricted Access
Gantry cover removal for access through a 39 inch door. 1. Remove gantry shipping dollies if fitted. 2. Lift top cover and support with bracket. 3. Open front cover as follows.. a. Release front cover top right strut. b. Remove front right side lock bolt c. WARNING: Carefully open front cover.
COVER WEIGHT IS APPROXIMATELY 150 LBS. IT REQUIRES A MINIMUM OF 3 PEOPLE TO HANDLE COVER SAFELY AND WITHOUT DAMAGE. 4. Loosen the set screw on the upper and lower hinge pin. ( See illustrations A13 and A14) 5. Remove the two hinge pins,(lightly tap from the bottom) one at the top and one at the bottom. (see Illustration A14). 6. Remove the front cover.
ILLUSTRATION A13 GANTRY FRONT COVER HINGE
Detail A
Gantry Front Shroud Hinge
A21

ILLUSTRATION A14 GANTRY COVER HINGE DETAIL
Detail A
Hinge Pin
Set Screw 7. Lift the cover clear of the Gantry. Carefully lay cover face down on a protected flat surface. Remove Gantry Rear Shroud: 1. Open rear cover: a. Remove the gantry top cover. b. Disconnect the power cable from the top cover. c. Unscrew the center top cover hinge from the rear shroud.
d. Slide the top cover to the left to remove the cover. 2. Unbolt the rear shroud from the gantry base by removing the four mounting bolts 3. Push the rear shroud back. 4. Remove the retaining rings from the hinge pins on the upper right and left sides of the shroud. (see Illustration A15). WARNING: COVER WEIGHT IS APPROXIMATELY 120 LBS. IT REQUIRES A MINIMUM OF 3 PEOPLE TO HANDLE COVER SAFELY AND WITHOUT DAMAGE 5. Lift the rear shroud up to remove from the gantry
ILLUSTRATION A15 GANTRY REAR SHROUD
Hinge Pin
Retaining Ring
A22
HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM DIRECTION 2106358100 6. Remove two (2) shipping brackets between Gantry base plate and pivot structure (Illustration A16). 7. The Gantry is shipped in the zero tilt position. To check that the Gantrys plane of scan is perpendicular, check the alignment of the 0 degree tilt characterization plate and the tilt indicator bracket. Adjust gantry tilt (if necessary) to align the 0 degree mark with the indicator.
ILLUSTRATION A16 SHIPPING BRACKETS
Shipping Brackets
Install Table/Gantry raceway as shown in Illustration A8.
A23
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 Power, Ground, Interconnect Cable Installation
The sequence of system cabling will in part be dictated by the individual component layout and whether the installation uses conduit, floor duct, wall duct, or a raised computer floor. Contractor supplied wiring should be completed in so far as possible before system cabling is started. System ground cabling, must be done along with system cabling. In addition, where raceway is used, some raceway work such as cutting and fitting covers at equipment locations must be done after cabling is complete and when equipment is placed. The system furnished cables are shipped with the system. A113 Cable Identification All system cables (except groundwire) are identified using the system component designators as listed below. Each end of a system cable has a label and color near the connector. This indicates the component and the jack identifier of the component. CC2 CT2 CT1 PM MC OC WL DS MT Scan Control Unit (SCU) contains CCI cabinet Gantry Patient Table Power Distribution Unit Multiformat Camera (Lasercam) Operators Console XRay on Warning Light Scan Room Door Interlock Switch Magnetic Tape
A24
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 A114 Cable Color Identifiers
The ends of the cables are marked with a color, either red,orange,blue,green or brown, to help with the cable installation. Table A1 indicates which color is associated with which subcomponent.
TABLE A1 Cable Color Code
Subcomponent Gantry Table PDU Console SCU Computer
Color Blue Yellow Red Green Orange Brown
A25
A115 OC Console and Computer Power and Ground Connections Illustration A17 shows the power interconnections between the OC and the PM.
ILLUSTRATION A17 OC POWER & GROUND
GND to CT1 Table Raceway Ground Bus Connection #10
OC Power to PM
12
CONSOLE (REAR VIEW) INDICATES CABLE NUMBER
A26
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 A116 OC Computer Power Connections
Illustration A18 shows the cable interconnections internal to the console Power Module.
ILLUSTRATION A18 CONSOLE POWER CONNECTIONS
CT3229A
SEE DETAIL A
7 6 5 4 12 Console Power TS1 1,2,3,4,W4

INDICATES CABLE NUMBER
3 2 1
DETAIL A
A27
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 A117 OC Console I/O Panel and Cable Connections
Illustrations A18 and A19 show the cable interconnections to the console I/O panel.
ILLUSTRATION A19 CONSOLE I/O PANEL LOCATION
PANEL A10
R2986
A28

ILLUSTRATION A20 CONSOLE I/O PANEL CONSOLE SWING PANEL (A11)
CONSOLE ONOFF SWITCH (S1) IMAGE MONITOR REMOTE BOARD (A11A1) CONSOLE POWER SUPPLY (A11A3) (BACK OF SWING PANEL) SECURITY BOARD (A11A2) VIDEO RELAY (A10A1) J12
1
CONSOLE POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE (A12) (FRONT) MONITOR EXTRACTION TOOL (BACK OF SWING PANEL) MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER (A13CB1) AUXILIARY CIRCUIT BREAKERS (A13CB2=CB5)
J13 J14 J15
J13
CONSOLE I/F MODULE (A10)
4
J10
J1
J3
J4 J8 J9
INDICATES CABLE NUMBER
R2987
A29
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 A118 OC Computer Panel and Cable Connections
Illustrations A21 and A22 show the cable interconnections to the computer panel. The GENESIS computer chassis CCI is located in the SCU cabinet CC2.
ILLUSTRATION A21 GENESIS COMPUTER PANEL CC1A2
J11
J8
J1
2 3
J2 SECURITY LOCK J1 MUX PORT
R2988
INDICATES INTERCONNECT CABLE NUMBER
A30

ILLUSTRATION A22 GENESIS COMPUTER BOARD CONNECTIONS
GENESIS FRAME BUFFER
MOTOROLA MVME167 CPU
EMPTY
EMPTY
EMPTY
EMPTY
HAWK ETHERNET (OPTION)
1/2 INCH 9 TRACK TAPE CONTROLLER (OPTION)
GENESIS APPLICATIONS INTERFACE
GENESIS INTERPOLATOR PROCESSOR
EMPTY
EMPTY
EMPTY
BULK MEMORY
SERIAL PORT A
SERIAL PORT B
PLASMA
4
GAI SERIAL
ETHERNET
46307082G1
MONITOR VIDEO SCSI
INDICATES INTERCONNECT CABLE NUMBERS
10
11
12
13
14
15
R2989
A31
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 A119 SCU Cable Connections
Illustrations A23 shows the cable interconnections to the SCU rear panel.
ILLUSTRATION A23 SCU CHASSIS REAR INTERCONNECTIONS
Indicates cable number
9 CC2 A1J2 EXP INTERLOCK 7 CC2 A1A1A3 DAS DATA FEED THRU TO FEP FRONT PANEL
1 CC2 A3A1 D LAN
R2962
A32
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 A120 Gantry Cable Connections
Illustrations A24 and A25 show the cable interconnections to gantry.

ILLUSTRATION A24 GANTRY CABLE CONNECTIONS (DETAIL A)
A1 A5 panel Detail A
A1 TS 1 Detail B
Gantry Indicates Cable Number 8 CONSOLEGANTRYSIGNAL CT2 A1A5 J1 1
D LAN CT2 A1A5 J3
J1
PDUGANTRY SIGNAL 14
J3 J5
7 DAS DATA (FIBER) CT2 A1A5 J5
J2 J4 J6
A1A5 Panel EXP INTERLOCK 9 CT2 A1A5 J4
Detail A
A33
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 As shown in Illustration A25, install TS1 terminal strip connections.
ILLUSTRATION A25 GANTRY CABLE CONNECTIONS (DETAIL B)
Indicates cable number
Detail B
12
11
10
17 15
Axial Motor Power from PM 550V DC from PM 120V AC from PM
16
A1 TS 1
A1201 Verify DCRGS Jumper Location on CTVRC board 1. Turn OFF the Axial Drive Enable switch in the Gantry display box. 2. Remove the OBC cover 3. Locate Jumper JP1, on the edge of the CTVRC board. (2nd from top in OBC) D D 2113764 PDU with DCRGS board: Move JP1 to the position A DCRGS position 2133533 PDU without DCRGS board: Move JP1 to the position B NO DCRGS position
4. Replace OBC cover. 5. Turn ON the Axial Drive Enable switch.
A34
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 A121 Table and A7 Panel Connections
Illustrations A26 shows the cable interconnections to table.
ILLUSTRATION A26 TABLE CONNECTIONS A2A7 PANEL
A2A7 PANEL (DETAIL A)
HiSpeed Advantage Table
DETAIL A
13
TILT CONTROL
TILT MOTOR
J1
FTSW
J2 J3 J5
FTSW
TABLE POWER 10
J6
18
J8
J7
TABLE SYNCGANTRY DISPLAYTABLE CONTROLS, DLAN A2A7 Panel Indicates cable number
A35
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 6 A122 PDU Connections
Illustrations A27 shows the PDU area designators.

ILLUSTRATION A27 2113764 PDU AREA DESIGNATORS
PDU
DCRGS Detail A A2 Panel A6 Panel Servo Amplifier Assy. Detail B A1 Panel Fuses A5 Panel
Control Bd
Power Distribution
Power Input Detail D A3 Panel
A4 Panel I/O Detail C

DCRGS= Direct Current ReGulated Supply.
A36
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 Illustrations A28 shows the PDU A2 panel connections.
ILLUSTRATION A28 2113764 PDU A2 PANEL
DCRGS
TS11 (red)
DCRGS Control Board
GND
550V DC
TS21 (Black)
A2 Panel
550VDC POWER
17
Indicates Cable Number
Detail A
A37
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 Illustrations A29 shows the PDU Servo Amp connections.
ILLUSTRATION A29 2113764 PDU A1 SERVO AMP ASSY CONNECTIONS
TS33 (Black)
TS13 (White)
90V DC at 1 sec scan speed
TS23 (Red)
A1 Panel Axial Motor Power 15 Indicates Cable Number
Detail B
A38
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 Illustrations A30 shows the PDU power input connections.
ILLUSTRATION A30 2113764 PDU I/O A4 CONNECTIONS
PDUGANTRYSIGNAL 14 Future Option
J1
J2 J6
OC Power 12
Table Power 10
J3
J5
CC2 Power 11
J4
Gantry 120VAC 16
Indicates Cable Number
DETAIL C A4 Panel
A39
HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100 Illustrations A31 shows the PDU power input connections.
ILLUSTRATION A31 2113764 PDU POWER INPUT CONNECTIONS
A3 F1
A3 F2
A3 F3
TS1
Vault Ground from A1 Disconnect NEUT SPARE
L1 L3 L2
A3 J2
A3J6 Door Interlock Switch 1/0 Ground to Table Junction Raceway

Note: All power and ground cables should exit the rear of the PDU
Room Warning Light
DETAIL D
A40

ILLUSTRATION A32 CT COMPACT PDU 2133533 PDU AREA LOCATIONS
SERVO AMPLIFIER ASSEMBLY A1 PANEL
PDU CONTROL BOARD A6 PANEL
TRANSFORMER ASSEMBLY (in back) A5 PANEL

AC POWER DISTRIBUTION A3 PANEL HVDC SUPPLY A2 PANEL
INPUT POWER A3 PANEL OUTPUT CONNECTORS BULKHEAD A4 PANEL
A41

ILLUSTRATION A33 CT COMPACT PDU 2133533 HVDC SUPPLY OUTPUT CONNECTIONS
TS11 (Red)
Ground
TS21 (Black)
PDU 2133533 A2 Panel HVDC SUPPLY OUTPUT CONNECTIONS
PDU 2133533
46297080G1 (for Non EMC Gantry)
13
2118143 (for EMC Gantry) Install Shield Clamp tightly around exposed Cable Shield at lower left of PDU. (EMC Gantry only)
Indicates Cable Run Number
NOTE: EMC gantry has 4position TS1 NonEMC gantry has 12position TS1 (TS1 stands for Terminal Strip 1).
A42
ILLUSTRATION A34 CT COMPACT PDU 2133533 AXIAL SERVO AMP PANEL OUTPUT CONNECTIONS
TS11 (Black) TS12 (Red)
TS13 (Shield)
PDU 2133533 A1 Panel Axial Servo Amp Panel
PDU 2133533
46327155G1 (for Non EMC Gantry)
14
2118145 (for EMC Gantry)
Install Shield Clamp Tightly Around Exposed Cable Shield at Lower Left of PDU. (EMC Gantry only)
NOTE: EMC gantry has 4position TS1 NonEMC gantry has 12position TS1 (TS1 stands for Terminal Strip 1).
A43

ILLUSTRATION A35 CT COMPACT PDU 2133533 A3 PANEL
CB1
Table 24 hr Console Relay control PWB Tilt/elevation drive Cradle GPDU service outlet Table service outlet SCU Gantry DCRGS 120vac
CB2 CB3 CB4 CB5
PDU 2133533
A3 Panel
A44

ILLUSTRATION A36 CT COMPACT PDU 2133533 INPUT POWER PANEL CONNECTIONS
INPUT POWER PANEL
Parking position for Neutral wire, if present
Ground (To wall ground)

L1 L2 L3
PDU 2133533 TB1
L1 = Phase A from wall L2 = Phase B from wall L3 = Phase C from wall
A3 Panel
A45
ILLUSTRATION A37 CT COMPACT PDU 2133533 A4 PANEL CONNECTOR BULKHEAD (BOTTOM VIEW)
A4 PANEL CONNECTOR BULKHEAD
J3
NOT USED J4 J2
17
2118141 X J6 N.C.
HVDC Keyswitch
16
J5
2119603 Non EMC 2118142 EMC
15
2118146
12
2118139
PDU 2133533 1 2 1 2
XRay Warning Light Door Interlock Ground from Footswitch Ground Bar
See next page for details of how to install Xray Warning Light and Door Interlock.
A4 Panel Door Interlock & Xray Warning Light
A46
ILLUSTRATION A38 CT COMPACT PDU 2133533 XRAY WARNING LIGHT AND DOOR INTERLOCK CIRCUIT
PDU A4 PANEL
External Power source for Warning Light
Room XRay Warning Light
External Low Voltage (<30v) Power Source for Xray Warning Light Relay Coil
Ground Neutral
XRay Warning Light Connections
Hot
Door Interlock
1 2 1 2 3 4 OUT IN Neutral Hot
External Relay
Neutral Hot
XRay Warning Light Circuit
XRay Warning Light
Door Interlock
PDU A4 PANEL
1 2 3 4
1 2
Normally Open Switch
Door Interlock Circuit

Note: Connect a door interlock to the system, to prevent XRay: remove the jumper from the door interlock connections on the PDU A4 panel, and connect a normally open switch across them. The Interlock circuit prevents XRay when you open the scan room door.
A47
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 A123 System Ground Connections
Refer to Illustration A39. At this point, you MUST physically inspect the System Ground wire run between A1 and VAULT Ground. The wire used must be at minimum, #1/0 gauge stranded copper. Be certain that power is OFF at A1, then disconnect the incoming Ground wire (located at the top of the isolated ground block) in A1. Ask the electrician to show you the Ground VAULT connection, and disconnect the wire from that point. Using a Beckman 3030 or equivalent, measure the resistance between the open wire and the VAULT ground bar using the High ohm range. If there is ANY continuity, the wire is tied to conduit or other buss bar in an intermediate panel or panels. This will cause excessive ground currents and can NOT be tolerated. The CT system ground MUST be totally isolated between A1 and the VAULT ground. If you have any questions, contact your District CT engineer for assistance. Arrange for electrical code inspection.
A48

ILLUSTRATION A39 SYSTEM GROUND TO POWER VAULT GROUND
A1 Power Disconnect
GANTRY (CT2) ROTATING ASSEMBLY FRAME TILT MECH FRAME
#1/0 POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT (PM)
G #1/0
TABLE/GANTRY JUNCTION RACEWAY #2 T Part of Gantry
#2 TABLE (CT1)
#2
#2
SCU (CC2) + (CC1) #10 TO PM #10
POWER GND #10 POWER GND
TO SCU (OPTION) TO OC SLAVE MONITOR (SM) (OPTION)
NOTES: SHIELD/SIGNAL GROUNDS ARE NOT SHOWN. = GND WIRE IN SUPPLIED CABLE. DISK UNITS ARE LOCATED IN CC1 AND SCU.

2 Ground Braids (Part of Gantry) OPERATORS CONSOLE (OC1) #10 TO PM LINE PRINTER (LP) (OPTION) TO CONSOLE (OC) VCR TO CONSOLE (OC) TO CONSOLE (OC)
A49
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 A124 System Cable Checklist
This section lists the system cables that need to be installed. The list contains all system cables and cables for the three most common options. The tables are laid out so that they can be used as a checkoff for each component during cabling. Keep signal and control cables away from power cables and power wiring. When laying cables in a raceway, locate the signal cables in a separate section of the raceway. Some components have sufficient room for storage of excess cable lengths. In a few instances, it may be necessary to provide a separate means of storing excess cable if a computer floor is not used. All contractor wiring should be complete to the point of equipment placement. Ensure that all connections are tight. Use suitable tools and judgment. Include all visible connections, especially ground connections. Check for reasonable cable routing, taking into consideration necessary takeup distances for equipment maintenance, etc. Try to obtain as neat a job as possible.
A50
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 4 CONTRACTOR /CUSTOMER SUPPLIED WIRING Ring out all wires before connecting.
RUN REF.# REF #
CONNECTION OR WALL BOX
AWG #
CONNECTION
CONNECTION TO 1 Power Source * * * * #1/0 2 A1 #1 #1 #1 #1/0 4A 4B 4C NEUTRAL GND 4A 4B 4C GND
CONNECTION A1 L1 A1 L2 A1 L3 A1 NEU A1 GND PM A3 TB1 L1 PM A3 TB1 L2 PM A3 TB1 L3 PM A3 Power Input GROUND LUG A1 Motor Starter Circuit A1 Motor Starter Circuit A1 Ground PM A3 J2 1,2
CHECKED AND INSTALLED Date & Initial
SEO
#14 (2) #14 (2) #14 (2)
Power Power Ground Warning Light Low Voltage Control Circuit (see Illustration A40) Scan Room Door Interlock Switch (see Illustration A41)
10
WL
#14 (2)
11
DS (Scan Room Door Interlock)
#14 (2)
PM A3 J6 1,2
* Note: Wire Sized according to Direction, XXXXXXX, Preinstallation, Power Requirements Section, Recommended Power Distribution System
A51

ILLUSTRATION A40 TYPICAL CUSTOMER SUPPLIED SCAN ROOM WARNING LIGHT AND CONNECTION TO PM
AC Line Voltage AC Line Voltage

A3 J2 1,2 A3 K3
Fuse
24 Volt Secondary
Room Warning Lamp Customer Supplied
ILLUSTRATION A41 TYPICAL CUSTOMER SUPPLIED SCAN ROOM DOOR INTERLOCK AND CONNECTION TO PM
A3 J6 1,2 To Relay Control Circuit Board J3 46,50
N.O. Switch
Customer Supplied
A52
SYSTEM CABLES FOR System Catalog B7998J or B7998M (Gantry 2119732) Software Version 2.0 Forward Production
Cable # 1 2 P/N 2118150 46297746G3
or
From CC2 A3 A1 DLAN CC1 A2 J2 Security Lock
Installed CT2 A1A5J3 OC A10 J10
To
Installed
46278687G24
or
46278687G30 3 46297746G6
or
CC1 A2 J1 Mux Port
OC A10 J1
46278687G25
or
46278687G31 4 46297747G3
or
Label CC1 A1A9 CC1 GAIBOARDPLASMA
OC A10 J12
46296675G7
or
46296675G9 5 46297748G3
or
46296674G9
or
Label CC1 A1A10 CC1 FRAMEBUFFERMON VIDEO
OC A10 J13
46296674G7 6 46297746G9
or
46278687G26
or
Label CC1 A1A1 CC1 CPUBDSERIALA Imaging Computer Boot Link
OC A10 J3
46278687G32 7 8 21178482 2118149 CC2 A1 J7 OC A10 J4 ConsoleGantry Signal OC A10 J8 OC A10 J9 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 2118148 2118141 2118139 2118140 2118220 2118146 46327155G1 2119603 46297080G1 2115811 CC2 AIA1 Exposure Interlock CT1 A2A7 J10 Table/PM AC Power CC2 Computer Cabinet Power OC A12 P1 Operator Console Power CT1 A2 A7 J2 Tilt Control CT2 A1A5 J2 PDUGantry Signal CT2 A1 TS1: 9, 10, 11 Axial Motor Power CT2 A1 TS1:1, 2, 3 Gantry 24 Hour Power CT2 A1 TS1:5, 6, 8 550VDC Power CT1 A2 A7 J5, J1 Table Sync, Gantry Display, Gantry Table Controls, DLAN ETCSTC CT2 A1 A5 J4 PM A4 J3 PM A4 J5 PM A4 J6 Connection part of Gantry PM A4 J2 PM A1 TS1:3, TS2:3, TS3:3 PM A4 J4 PM A2 TS1:1, TS2:1, GND CT2 A1 A5 J3 CT2 A1A5 J1
A53
SYSTEM CABLES FOR System Catalog B7999EM (Gantry 2113719) Software Version 2.0 Forward Production EMC Compliant Systems
Cable # 1 2 P/N 2118150 46297746G3
or
From CC2 A3 A1 DLAN CC1 A2 J2 Security Lock
Installed CT2 A1A5J3 OC A10 J10
To
Installed
46278687G24
or
46278687G30 3 46297746G6
or
CC1 A2 J1 Mux Port
OC A10 J1
46278687G25
or
46278687G31 4 46297747G3
or
Label CC1 A1A9 CC1 GAIBOARDPLASMA
OC A10 J12
46296675G7
or
46296675G9 5 46297748G3
or
46296674G9
or
Label CC1 A1A10 CC1 FRAMEBUFFERMON VIDEO
OC A10 J13
46296674G7 6 46297746G9
or
46278687G26
or
Label CC1 A1A1 CC1 CPUBDSERIALA Imaging Computer Boot Link
OC A10 J3
46278687G32 7 8 21178482 2118149 CC2 A1 J7 DAS Data (Fiber) OC A10 J4 ConsoleGantry Signal OC A10 J8 OC A10 J9 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 2118148 2118141 2118139 2118140 2118220 2118146 2118145 2118142 2118143 2115811 CC2 AIA1 Exposure Interlock CT1 A2A7 J10 Table/PM AC Power CC2 Computer Cabinet Power OC A12 P1 Operator Console Power CT1 A2 A7 J2 Tilt Control CT2 A1A5 J2 PDUGantry Signal CT2 A1 TS1: 9, 10, 11 Axial Motor Power CT2 A1 TS1:1, 2, 3 Gantry 24 Hour Power CT2 A1 TS1:5, 6, 8 550VDC Power CT1 A2 A7 J5, J1 Table Sync, Gantry Display, Gantry Table Controls, DLAN ETCSTC CT2 A1 A5 J4 PM A4 J3 PM A4 J5 PM A4 J6 Connection part of Gantry Harness PM A4 J2 PM A1 TS1:3, TS2:3, TS3:3 PM A4 J4 PM A2 TS1:1, TS2:1, GND Connection Part of Gantry Harness CT2 A1 A5 J3 CT2 A1A5 J1
A54
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 System Grounds Note:
To minimize electrical noise on the system grounds, all ground cable connections between subsystems should be made according to the following table and illustrations.
AWG#
CONNECTION Connection To
P.M. Connection To A1 DISCONNECT GROUND PM A3 GROUND LUG Refer to Illustration A40 CT1 RACEWAY GROUND BUS POSITION #8 CT1 RACEWAY GROUND BUS POSITION #9 CT1 RACEWAY GROUND BUS POSITION #10 CT1 RACEWAY GROUND BUS POSITION #11 CT1 RACEWAY GROUND BUS POSITION #12 CT2 BASE FRAME CT2 BASE FRAME
CHECKED AND INSTALLED
1/0 #1/0
BUILDING VAULT GROUND A1 DISCONNECT GROUND Refer to Illustration A40 CT1 GROUND BUS (PART OF TABLE) CT2 BASE GROUND STUD (PART OF GANTRY) OC GROUND STUD
#2
#2
#2
#1/0
PM A3 GROUND BUS TAB Refer to Illustration A40 CC2
#2
GROUND BRAID GROUND BRAID
CT1 BASE FRAME CT1 BASE FRAME
ILLUSTRATION A42 CT1 (TABLE) RACEWAY GROUND BUS
Gantry Side
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Table Side
A55
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 5 A125 Option Keys

Key DentaScan Option Part#/CAT# 46218316G1 B7992D Effectivity HLA Z.x Series 1.x Series 2.x Series FSPGR Option 2102281 B7999KJ Helical Option 46328315G1 B7996C B7998RH HSA VX to HSA 46297878G1 B7998JR Z.x Series Enables 1000mm scout, 48kW, 1sec ISD, 60 sec Helicals with Helical Key. Enables 1000mm scout, 48kW, 1sec ISD, 100kv. Enables Faster Reconstruction Time. Prerequisite for Smart Key Z.x Series=30 sec 1.x Series=60 sec 1.x Series Enables Smart Options, RP FAST Option is Prerequisite Enables Cine and Helical Options Function Enables DentaScan
Test Output OP_CT_DENT
Restrictions Site Specific
OP_CT_SMART OP_MR_SPGR OP_CT_HELI OP_MR_CINE
Site Specific
Site Specific
OP_CT_LITE
Site Specific
Power Option for RP
46297878G1 B7998KJ
1.x Series 2.x Series 1.x Series 2.x Series
OP_CT_LITE
Site Specific
RP Fast Cycle Option
46297878G2 B7998RF
OP_CT_FAST
Site Specific
A1251 Install Option Keys Option keys contain a staticsensitive chip. Treat them as you would any electronic chip or circuit board, and avoid exposing keys to magnetic fields. To install an option key, follow these steps: 1. Locate the key slots on the pedestal under the operators console, by opening the OC pedestal panel. 2. To bring applications down, press Shutdown at the Utilities menu. 3. Insert option keys in any position in any row except the top one, which is reserved for security keys. Use caution when inserting keys to avoid bending the pins in the key. 4. To bring applications back up, type st at the Genesis level prompt. Then press Enter. A1252 Verify Installed Options Bring up applications and check the screens to see which features are enabled: D D D If theres no Smart Tools key, there wont be a SmartPrep button on the home screen. If theres no Cine/Helical key, then the system will permit Cine or Helical scans of up to 40 seconds. With the key, the limit is 60 seconds. If theres no Power key, then the system will permit only 700mm scouts (not 1000mm), 2 Sec. ISDs (not 1 second), and 32 kW (not 48 kW). Also, the 100 kV button is not visible. If theres no DentaScan key, then the DentaScan button on the Image Analysis screen appears as a dashed box and is unavailable. Note:
A56
Rev 6
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
A126 System Interconnect

ILLUSTRATION A43 HISPEED ADVANTAGE INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM
PM CC2 A1 J1
SCU Power
1 1 RUN # 6 OC A12 TS1 1,2,3,4,W4 CONSOLE
PM A4 J5
COMPUTER CC2 (CC1) CC1 A2 J2 CC1 A2 J1 CC1 A1 A9 PLASMA CC1 A1 A10 MON VIDEO CC1 A1 A1 SERIAL A
Console Power
12 GANTRY CT2 A1 TS15,6,8 TS11,2,3 (FILTER L1,L2,GND) TS19,10,11 CT2A1A5 J2 RUN # 4
PM A4 J6
RUN # 5
Security Lock MUX Port Plasma Video Monitor Video Image Computer Boot Link
RUN # 8
2 3
OC A10 J10 J1
500VDC (HVDC) Power 120VAC Axial Motor Power PDUGantrySignal

TABLE CT1 A2A7 J2 CT1 A2A7 J5
17 16 15 14
PM A2 TS1:1, TS2:1, GND PM A4 J4 PM A1 TS1:3,TS2:3, TS3:3 PM A4 J2
SEO
4 J12 5 J13 6 J3 OC A10 J4 J8 RUN # 7 J9
RUN # 9
*
* = ARRIVES AS PART OF ASSEMBLY
= CABLE NUMBER
= GROUND BRAID, PART OF GANTRY
RUN # 9 RUN # 7
A57
ConsoleGantry 8 Signal
CT2 A1A5 J1
* *
Tilt Control
13
RUN # 3
Table Sync 18 Gantry Display Table Controls
CC2 A1A2 J2 CC2 A1A1A3 DAS DATA CC2 A3A1
Exp Interlock DAS Data D LAN
9 7 1 (OPTICAL OR COAXIAL)
CT2 A1A5 J4 J5 J3
D LAN
CT1 A2A7 J1 10 CT1 A2A7 J10
RUN # 1 PM A3 TS1A TS1B TS1C A1 L1 L2 L3 L1
Table Power
PM A4 J3
HISPEED ADVANTAGE SYSTEM
L2 L3 NEUT
* *
TABLE FRAME
DIRECTION 2106358100
TABLE JUNCTION RACEWAY
PM A3 GND LUG PM A3 GND TAB RUN # 4
GROUND BUS POSITIONS 9 10 12 11 8
RUN # 2
Notes:
A58
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION 2106358-100, REVISION 13
HSA-RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL
Appendix B Torque
Section 1.0 Recommended Torque Wrench Practices
1.) 2.) Never use a torque wrench to loosen a tightened fastener. Permanent damage of the internal mechanism can occur due to excessive strain. Always approach the specified torque slowly. This is not a speed wrench. a.) b.) Hand location is important. Position one hand at the axis of rotation and one hand on the tool handle. This give the user stability and accurate torque repeatability. Always approach the desired torque evenly and slowly. If the desired torque is 66 N-m on 4 bolts, then tighten each bolt 50 to 70% of desired value. Then set the wrench to the required torque and tighten slowly until the wrench Just Clicks.
3.) 4.)
Always release the tension on the torque wrench to prevent spring set on adjustable or clicker type torque wrenches. This will ensure correct torque settings throughout the range of the tool. Always allow the tool to reach room temperature. Spring tension is the basis of Clicker type torque wrenches. A springs tension changes with temperature.
5.) 6.) 7.) 8.) 9.)
Calibrate the tool on a regular schedule. Follow established local calibration processes. Do not drop or shock the tool. Internal damage can occur. Calibration should be performed to ensure accuracy. Do not attempt to straighten a bent Beam or non adjustable wrench. Replace it. Never use a Universal Joint with a torque wrench. The angle of the universal joint can change the torque value by more than 50%. Always use the torque wrench with a 90 degree angle whenever possible. a.) b.) c.) Figure B-3 illustrates the effects not being perpendicular. The 25 degree tilt is the physical limit of a Bondhus Ball End Hex key. Use the specified torque value for the HV tank mounting fasteners. Do not attempt to calculate the sin angle correction. There is less than 2% error for up to 10 degrees of tilt from the desired angle. d.) Minimize the angle as much as possible.
10.) Always clean fastener threads to reduce friction. Fasteners should thread easily using finger pressure. a.) b.) Replace fasteners or clean threads using a tap or die, compressed air, brass brush. Never use a tap to clean thread inserts. It will damage them requiring replacement.
11.) Never lubricate a fastener unless specifically instructed. Loctite is considered in the design. It must be used when specified. 12.) Replace Nylon nuts if they are finger loose. 13.) ALL FASTENERS HAVE A TORQUE REQUIREMENT. DEFAULT TABLES SHOULD BE USED ONLY IF THE SERVICE DOCUMENTATION DOES NOT SPECIFY A TORQUE VALUE. Appendix B Torque B-1
Section 2.0 General Torque Cross Reference

Table B-1 and Table B-2 are provided as default references only. Use the appropriate replacement procedure to verify the correct torque requirement for each specific fastener. Note: The Illustrated Parts List contains Engineering drawings that should also be used as a reference. These drawings call out specific instructions as notations, where needed. Use Table B-1 and Table B-2 only as a last resort. If the Service documentation does not contain specific torque values, the default values can then be assumed to apply. All Fasteners use either flat and lock washers or loctite. These items must be used as specified.
NOTICE
FASTENER SIZE
M3 M4 M6 M8 M10 M12 M16
TOOL SIZE HEX KEY

2.5 mm 3 mm 5 mm 6 mm 8 mm 10 mm 14 mm
TOOL SIZE SOCKET

5.5 mm 7 mm 10 mm 13 mm 16 mm 18 mm 24 mm
TORQUE IN N-M
1 2.3 7.9 19 38.4 66.4 160
TORQUE IN LBF-FT
1.7 5.8 14 28.3 48.9 117.8
TORQUE IN LBF-IN
8.9 20.4 70 168 -
Table B-1 Default Torque Values as Specified by GEMS CT for Lightspeed Plus and Forward
FASTENER SIZE
3/8 - 16 1/4 - 20 8 - 32
TORQUE IN STEEL
25 +/- 2 Lbf-Ft 33.9 +/- 2.7 N-m 8 +/- 1 Lbf- Ft 10.85 +/- 1.36 N-m 20 +/- 2 Lbf-In 2.26 +/- 0.23 N-m
TORQUE IN ALUMINUM
20 +/- 2 Lbf-Ft 27.1 +/- 2.7 N-m 5 +/- 0.5 Lbf-Ft 6.8 +/- 0.7 N-m 15 +/- 2 Lbf-In 1.7 +/- 0.23 N-m
TOOL SIZE HEX KEY

5/16 3/16 9/64
TOOL SIZE SOCKET

9/16 7/16 5/16
Table B-2 Default Torque Values as Specified by GEMS CT for Lightspeed QXI and Previous Many service operations on this CT scanner require a torque wrench. The use of a torque wrench may appear complicated because there are several standards and metrics. Using conversion factors and the conversion chart below can simplify that task. First, only use a calibrated torque wrench. Use a torque wrench that is on a Calibration schedule and is approved by GEMS-AM Service. The kit that can be used that is on a regular Calibration schedule is kit number 46-268445G1. This torque wrench kit has wrenches that measure inch pounds and foot pounds.
B-2
Section 2.0 - General Torque Cross Reference
Second, make any necessary conversions for the torque wrench you are using.The units of measure are typically marked on most torque wrenches. To make conversions to Kgcm and Newton meters, use the following conversion table, or calculate using conversion factors. Kilogram Centimeter (Kgcm) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 200 300 400 Inch lbs (in-lbs) 0.868 1.74 2.6 3.5 4.3 5.2 6.1 6.9 7.8 8.7 17.4 26.0 34.7 43.4 52.0 60.8 69.4 78.1 86.8 173.6 260.4 347.2 Foot lbs (Ft-lbs) 1.4 2.2 2.9 3.6 4.3 5 5.8 6.5 7.2 14.5 21.7 28.9 Newton Meters (Nm) 0.98 1.96 2.94 3.92 4.90 5.88 6.86 7.85 8.83 9.81 19.61 29.42 39.23
Table B-3 Torque Conversion Cross Reference
TORQUE CONVERSION FACTORS

To convert Kgcm to foot-lbs, multiply Kgcm by 0.07233 To convert Kgcm to inch-lbs, multiply Kgcm by 0.8679 To convert Kgcm to N-m, multiply Kgcm by 0.0981 To convert N-m to inch-lbs, multiply N-m by 8.8508 To convert N-m to foot-lbs, multiply N-m by 0.73756 To convert foot-lbs to N-m, multiply lbf-ft by 1.3558 To convert inch-lbs to N-m, multiply lbf-in by 0.11298
Appendix B Torque
B-3
Section 3.0 Torque Formula

T = R x F x sin (angle) Where: T = Torque in N-m R = Distance from axis of rotation F = Force Applied Sin(90) = 1 From this formula we can see that it is necessary to apply the force at a 90 degree angle to the axis of rotation to achieve accurate fastener torque. This same principle can be applied when using accessories with the torque wrench. See Figure B-1 and Figure B-2. Note: The length of a standard square drive extension has no effect on torque since it is along the axis of rotation. See Figure B-3.
B A Conversion Formula DR = Torque Wrench Length X Torque Desired Torque Wrench Length + Accessory Length Torque Wrench Length = A Accessory Length = B = 25 mm =1 inch Desired Torque = T = 66 N-m = 49 ft-lb Dial Reading = DR = AxT A+B
Square Drive Center Accessory Center Handle Center
Figure B-1 Formula to adjust for Straight Line Accessory
Torque 2 When the Wrench and Accessory are at Right Angles Torque 1 = Torque 2 Set Dial Reading for exact desired Torque. 90 degrees
Torque 1
Figure B-2 Formula for 90 Degree Accessory Usage B-4 Section 3.0 - Torque Formula

Desired Angle 25 degrees Maximum Actual Angle
Using Ball End Hex Bit Torque is reduce by a factor of 0.90 @ 25 degree offset. sin (90 - 25 degrees) = sin (65 degrees) = 0.906 66 N-m x 0.90 = 59.4 N-m What the bolt feels. 66 N-m / 0.90 = 73.33 N-m The dial setting to achieve 66 N-m at the bolt.
Extension length has no effect on torque value since it is the axis of rotation.
Figure B-3 Formula when not at 90 Degree to Axis of Rotation
Appendix B Torque
B-5
Section 4.0 Torque Wrench Accuracy

It needs to be clearly understood that torque is an indirect measure of tension or preload force. The components of a bolted joint can be defined as, Preload force (Fp), bolt stretch. Tension force (Ft), resistance of bolted materials. Clamping force (Fc), difference of preload and tension forces. Shear force (Fs), sideways or sliding force of bolted materials.
Therefore, Fc = Fp - Ft With shear force, a properly designed and tightened joint, the friction between the bolted materials absorbs the stress and the bolt itself feels little to no load. There are other factors that need to be considered as well. Fastener material has a large effect on torque versus preload force. Lubricants can also significantly change the effects of torque versus preload force. Anti-seize compounds can reduce the needed torque up to 20%. In short, torque measurement is an economical method of achieving a properly tensioned joint. Other methods are available, but training needs and tool expense increase. CT Engineering has taken into account the variability of using torque wrenches. The design standard applied is a safety factor of 8 on all fasteners, after the G Force load is calculated for each component. This is to ensure clamping force is maintained without exceeding the strength of the fastener. Various studies have been performed on the effectiveness of torque wrench accuracy. The following conclusions have been made.
PRELOAD MEASURING METHOD

Feeling Torque Wrench Angle Torquing Indicating Washer Fastener Elongation Strain Gauge Table B-4 Torque Method Accuracy
ACTUAL PRELOAD FORCE ERROR

> 35% +/- 25% +/- 15% +/- 10% +/- 5% +/- 1%
As demonstrated in Table B-4, not using a torque wrench is the worst case event. The Feeling method also changes with the tool. A drive feels different than a drive.
B-6
Section 4.0 - Torque Wrench Accuracy
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
CT SERVICE ENGINEERING, NB918 P.O. BOX 414 MILWAUKEE WISCONSIN 532010414 U.S.A. Fax: (414) 7855874

2106358

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2106358

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GE Medical Systems

HiSpeed Advantage RP - 1.X and 2.X General System Service Manual

GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS Rev. 8

HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL Direction 2106358100

ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTNCIA TCNICA S SE ENCONTRA DISPONVEL EM INGLS.

IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE DISPONIBILE SOLTANTO IN INGLESE.

GENERAL ELECTRIC MEDICAL SYSTEMS Rev. 8

HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL Direction 2106358100

IMPORTANT! . . . X-RAY PROTECTION

CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT

OMISSIONS & ERRORS

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8

HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100

IEC 60112 EMI/EMC Statement:

(CT HiSpeed Advantage System B7999EM)

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8

HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 13

HSA-RP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 13

HSA-RP GENERAL SYSTEM SER VICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358-100

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8

HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100

CHAPTER 2 CT Diagnostics and Tools Menu Descriptions

CHAPTER 3 CT Diagnostics And Tools Procedures

CHAPTER 4 Table/Gantry Maintenance

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8

HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100

CHAPTER 5 HV Subsystem Maintenance

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 9

HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100

CHAPTER 7 DAS Maintenance

CHAPTER 8 System Alignments

CHAPTER 9 Software Load From Cold

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 9

HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 9

HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100

CHAPTER 10 Image Performance

CHAPTER 11 Switches, LEDs, and Jumper Settings

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 9

HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8

HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 9

HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 9

HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 9

HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100

CHAPTER 12 Replacement Procedures

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8

HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8

HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8

HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8

HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8

HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REV 8

HSARP GENERAL SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL DIRECTION 2106358100